Daven Kross Webinars

Category: Webinars Collection

  • Code a Minecraft Clone with JavaScript, React, Three js – Tutorial

    In this course, Daniel Bark will teach you how to code a fully functional Minecraft clone using React, JavaScript, and 3JS. Daniel is a senior software engineer from Sweden. You will create a game that supports five Minecraft block types. It will include moving, jumping, switching and placing blocks, saving, and more. You will learn about many React concepts such as use state, use effect, use ref, and custom hooks for state management. and you’ll be able to apply the principles to create other 3D games in JavaScript. All right, so let’s get on with the tutorial. And to begin with, let’s have an overview of the steps we’re going to take in this tutorial to build a Minecraft clone. So, first we’ll look through the code that we’re starting out with and the packages that we’re going to use. Then we’ll add our first 3D element, which is a skybox that will wrap the entire world. We need some images that will be used as textures on the ground and on the cubes. Uh next up, we’ll use a plane as the ground and our player is going to interact with that ground. Um so the player is going to get a firsterson view. We’ll mount a camera to a sphere and that will feel like a firsterson game. Then we need to have some gravity. We need to make sure that the player cannot fall through the ground and when you jump you should fall back to the ground and so on. We need some movement to go back and forward and to the sides. And then we need some state management because we need to keep track of all the cubes in the world. So you need to be able to add and remove cubes in a global state. So we need to keep track of that. And then we also need to keep track of what type of cube the player want to add to the world. So we also need some type of UI that indicates what cube texture is active. It would also be nice if we can save our world so we don’t have to start from scratch every time we come to the app. So we’ll implement a button to store the world in the local storage and also to u reset the world if we want to start over. We’ll have a reset button for that. And in the end we should build ourselves something fun like a house or we’ll see what we come up with. All right. So let’s look through the code that we’re starting with. So we have a package JSON. So we have react 3 fiber the the main package and then we’re going to use some nice functions from canon and dry we have react we have three we have a way to generate ids and we have the state manager sustand now let’s jump to the components folder is empty right now but we’ll we’ll populate it inside images we have small images like this we have dirt glass grass logs and wood. And I already created a JavaScript file that just imports these images and then exports them in an object like this. Let’s go to the index. So here, not much is going on. Quite standard. We have an index.css file with not much in it. I just added some helper classes and we’ll probably add some more later on. And inside the app here we have just a div that says outside canvas and then we have canvas from reactory fiber and we have nothing inside the canvas right now. So we see a text here that is outside the canvas and the rest of the screen is covered by the canvas. All right. So we are done with looking through the boiler plate. So onwards towards the sky. So the sky we will import from let’s see if we get some help here. Sky from React 3 dry and let’s see if something happened. Yes, we got a sky. So for now we can remove this div that says outside canvas. What I wanted to show with that is that you can add normal HTML as long as it’s outside of the canvas. Because if I move this into the canvas, we get some errors because React 3 fiber doesn’t know what to do with the div. It has all kinds of other primitives. It can render like meshes and geometries and so on, but it cannot handle divs. But we can place them outside and then we can mix the 3D stuff and the normal HTML stuff. So I’ll remove outside canvas for now. So we get a full view of the 3D content here. For on the sky we can set sun position and that takes uh an array of XY Z. So I’ll do 100 and 20 or something. It doesn’t matter too much. But now we see that the sky got a bit brighter and I cannot really look at the any other part of the sky because the camera is now static. Um, so we can adjust the sun position later if we’re not happy with it. But at least now we have a sky in the day and not an evening sky like it was before. So I think we’ll leave the sky like this for now and jump onwards to the next step. All right. So let’s prepare our images and turn them into 3JS textures. So first I’m going to change actually this images file so that we can destructure them when we import them directly. So I will clean it up like this. Let’s create a new file

    and call it textures.

    So then we can import from images. So what we need to do here is create textures. So let’s start with the dirt texture. So we need to import from 3JS

    the texture loader.

    So we say new texture loader and we give it the dirt image. So we just repeat this. There we go. And we create a separate texture also for the ground. Uh even though we’re going to use the same image.

    So we’ll call that ground texture and uses the grass image. So now we want to export these.

    There we go. So now we have a file that exports the textures. So I think we can cross off textures and images. So our next step in the list is to work with the ground. So let’s before we create the ground, let’s add a few things in here. Let’s add an ambient light. So that is a light that will uh light up every 3D surface. Uh, and that one takes a prop intensity. So, let’s do one 0.5. And before we include the ground, uh, we need to add a physics container because we’re going to use a hook from Canon to create our plane that will be the ground. And that needs to be within a physics boundary. So, we’ll do physics from cannon. And inside here is where we can create the ground. So let’s create that component now.

    Ground.

    Okay. So here to create our ground plane, we’re going to use a hook from Canon called use plane.

    So this plane will give us an array where the reference comes first and that is a reference that we will place on the mesh that we let Canon control. So use plane. So it takes a callback function that returns an object. So here we can set some properties of this plane like rotation and position and so on. So we’ll do rotation and here we have an array of three and position also an array of three.

    So now we’re going to return some elements here. So we will take a mesh. We first we will reference this mesh. So we’ll set ref is ref. And then we have the geometry. So we’ll have u a plane buffer geometry and we’ll attach

    this as a geometry. And here we can set the size of the plane with the orgs prop. So since it since it is a plane, it has two dimensions. So we’ll set it 100 by 100. And we also need to add a material here. So we’ll do a mesh standard material.

    And this should attach as a material. And here is where we want to add a texture. But first, we can just set a color. Let’s do hot pink. All right. So, if we look at the browser now, we have something hot pink that is covering the entire uh screen. So, we don’t want to have color hot pink here. We want to attach the ground texture. So let’s import the ground texture. So we just say map is ground texture. Okay. So we got an error uh because we forgot one step in the texture loader. We need to call it and then call the load function.

    Okay, so we instantiate a texture loader and on that we call the load function for each image. That’s important to remember.

    So now we can continue debugging this.

    Okay, so now we have a new texture here. So we as we can see it doesn’t really look like uh the the grass image which has these small pixels on it. So what I suspect is happening now is that the image is being stretched out. So we want this texture to be repeating. We want this small image to repeat over and over. So we can do ground texture dot wrap s and we’ll do repeat wrapping and import that from three. And the same for T. And then we’ll do repeat dot set. And we’ll set this to the same as our size 100 100.

    There we go. So now we have it repeating. But as we can see the it looks very blurry and that has to do with how the texture is being stretched and how essentially how the rendering engine figures out how to display these colors. So with this setting it’s like smearing them. And we can change that if we do ground texture dot mag filter

    nearest filter instead. So let’s see what happens now. That looks much better. Now it looks pixelated as it should. So our next step would be to flatten or lay down the ground because right now the ground is standing up. So we can play with this rotation here. So I will rotate the xaxis and we want to rotate it 90° but in radians. So 2 pi would be 360° which means that one pi is 180° and half of a pi is 90°. So I will do math dot pi / 2 to rotate it 90°.

    And it might be that we’re seeing it from behind now. So I will flip it n 180°.

    So it folded over maybe so that we can no longer see it with the camera. So let’s do it a little bit less. Okay, there we go. So now we can see that it lays down but not completely 90°. But for now, we can keep it like this for a while. We can see that it’s almost correct. Uh because once we can move the camera around, it’s going to be easier for us to to flip it back then because then we will add gravity and we will fall down onto the ground. But let’s keep it like this just that we at least can see that we have the ground there. All right. So, we have the ground. Let’s start to work on the player.

    So our player needs to have a camera. So we can destructure camera from a hook

    called use three. So that hook is from Reactory Fiber. So we also need some type of geometry to represent the player the geometry that can collide with other geometries and so on. So for that we can use a a sphere. So this will be similar to what we did to the plane for the ground. So we’ll do use sphere

    and we call we call use sphere and it takes a function that returns back an object.

    So here we can set mass. We’ll set that to one. We’ll set type to be dynamic and we’ll return a mesh

    and attach the ref.

    And then let’s add our player.

    All right.

    So we we should have a player now. So the next thing, so we won’t see that anything change yet. So we need somewhere to store the position of our player.

    So let’s create a variable called position and we’ll do a reference

    and it has XY Z coordinates. So we’ll do 0 0 0 to begin with. Now we will call the use frame hook. So this hook will run on every frame. So what we want to do now is attach the camera to this position that we’re going to connect to our player.

    So what we can do is that we can take the camera which is from use three and we take the position and we copy

    and we pass in a new vector three

    and this vector we give position current

    and we give it the X. And then we do the same for Y and Z. position dot current dot one which is Y and position.curren

    two.

    So now we should have a camera that follows this reference to a position here. Okay, we can set the console log here just to see that our frame is running. Okay, so we see that we no longer see the ground and we have frame console login here. So we can see that it runs on every frame. So let’s remove this. So we did something to the camera at least that is good. So if we uncomment this line, we should see the ground again. And we do. So that’s good. So we were able to move the camera. We copy it to this position every frame. So our next step is to have this position follow the position of this sphere because this sphere will be affected by physics and gravity. So we can do a use effect

    and this use effect will need to rerun every time the sphere changes position. So we can take out element number two here from usphere which is the API an API towards the sphere. So we’ll say that rerun this effect every time the sphere API position changes. And what do we want to do when the position changes? We want API.positionscribe position dots subscribe and subscribe takes a call back where we get call it P and we’ll say position dot current is equal to P.

    So P is a triplet. So it will look like this. So now we have a sphere that is connected to this reference or let’s say this reference follows the sphere and we can get the camera to follow this reference. So our goal is to get this camera to follow the sphere.

    Okay. So now I added back the camera so we can see that something happens. We get ejected. I don’t know if we may be colliding with the ground and then to handle that collision we just get ejected. If I change the set value here. So if I do 10 and I reload, I land on the ground. But because remember what what technical depth we had from the ground, we didn’t flatten it to 90° properly. So now would be a good time to fix that. So like I said to to rotate 90° that is half of a pie. So now we flatten the ground out.

    So we fly up and then we land on the ground. We have taken the camera. We glue the camera to our position reference and then we subscribe to API position changes of the sphere. So we have a riff that tracks the sphere and then we glue the camera to our reference. Hopefully that makes sense. So we need to do similar things to the velocity. So let’s copy this position code here and we’ll call it call this val and here we track API velocity

    API velocity.

    So here we get V and we’ll set val.curren to V. So now we have a reference of the velocity that subscribes to the velocity of the sphere. Okay. So let’s fix this catapult effect thing. So what I suspect happens is that when the sphere is inside of the ground plane they that state cannot exist. So we just get flung out so that there’s no collision anymore. So we need to lift up the sphere a bit. So let’s try five.

    So now we start from above the plane and then we fall down to it. So let’s see how close we can get.

    So if we put one, we seem to be standing on the ground as we start. So that’s great. Let’s see if we can actually trigger some movement on the sphere. So we have the API. So we can do API dot velocity dot set. So here we can give it the X Y and Z velocities. So we can do 0 1 0. Then we should be constantly lifted upwards. So we’ll do something similar to this when we implement jumping because then we want to set velocity upwards but just for a short while so it so you fall back down so it’s a normal jump. All right. So I think before we can move before we can move forward, pun intended, uh with the player, uh we should make a hook for the keyboard inputs so that we can register different key presses uh that we’re going to use to control this sphere that is the player. So let’s add this to our to-do list. Keyboard input.

    So the player is not yet done. We’ll move to the keyboard inputs first.

    So the keyboard input is actually a hook. So let’s do a hooks folder and we’ll call it use keyboard. Export con use use keyboard. So we’ll need to have some state here to keep track of what keys are pressed. So we’ll do we’ll call it movement

    set movement

    use state. So let’s set up this initial state. All right. So we need to map out all the keys and call them things that we understand. Uh so one action is move forward, move backward. We also have move left and move right. We have jump and then we have texture one, two, three, four, five. I think that should be all the now that we have textures, we should maybe call it actions. So now we need to have a use effect and inside here we do document dot add event listener listen for key down.

    Then

    we need to create some functions to handle this key up. And since we’re adding event listeners, we also need to return a function that removes them. Otherwise, we will add endless event listeners. Handle key down. We wrap this in the use call back. So inside here we get the key down event. So let’s create some helper function to determine what key maps to what. So we’ll do function action by key. So here we get a key key map key action map. So here we say key here we need to type it as they as they are called in the key event. So key W like this. We’ll call it move forward and we have space for jump. And then we have digit one. And now we can say what texture it corresponds to. We’ll say it’s dirt and grass.

    And the last one is log. So now we mapped out what keys belongs to what actions and then we just return key action map with key. Of course we need to check uh so that only we only react to the keys that we are listening for.

    action by key e docode.

    So now we can do set movement and of course we need to preserve the previous state.

    So we we we spread the previous state and then we set

    We can do action equals action by key.

    Now we can just say

    if action

    action is true and this is now called set action actions. Okay. So it will be very similar for a handle key up

    just that we set this to false. So here we need to do handle key down and handle key up and then we just return the actions.

    Let’s try this hook from the player component. I’ll do like this. So we’ll just see those that are true

    key and value and we return those that have true. All right. So now we should be able to see in the console log when we press these different keys that we are looking for. Okay. So we have no actions when we start. That’s good. So now I press W. Okay. So I’m not getting anything. So let’s debug. Let’s see if we are here.

    Yes, we get the keyboard event action by key. Action by key is a function, not a map. So, this should fix that. And same thing here.

    So I’m pressing W S A D jump spacebar and the digits one 2 3 4 5. Okay, so we have everything working. So now we can react to these actions and control the movement of the sphere by looking at what key presses we’re doing. So we can cross off the keyboard inputs. All right. So, let’s control the player using the keyboard inputs. And I think an easy one to start with is the jumping because this requires some vector math. So, it will be a little bit tricky, but I think we’ll manage it. So first we can look at

    if actions do jump.

    That means that we are jumping. Uh we can reuse this code

    here. We can for the x we’ll just keep the value and for zed we’ll just keep the value

    and here this is a constant that we’ll use for the jumping. So let’s store it jump

    force. Let’s try 10

    jump force.

    Okay, let’s try it out. Spacebar. All right, so we achieved the jump. It felt a little bit too high. And also we can jump indefinitely, which is wrong. Uh, so first let’s fix the jump height. Let’s try three.

    Yeah, that’s better. We’ll try four for now. Uh so we need to do another if check here if we can jump again. And one easy way of uh eliminating all these extra jumps is that we make sure that our y velocity is zero. Make sure that we’re not moving up and down because whenever we are moving up and down it means that we are falling through the sky or already jumped and we’re on our way up. So we need to make sure that the velocity in the y direction is really close to zero. So let’s do since we we care about positive and negative we can do absolute value and we have it on velocity dot

    current.

    It’s val right.

    Current one should be smaller than 0.

    Let’s do 0.05 maybe. Okay. So, let’s try. Good. We can still jump. I’m pressing it continuously, but we we’re only allowed to jump once we’ve landed. Oh, there’s one bug that we should fix and that is that we can we can jump if we hit right in the moment when we’re actually slowing down from going up to going down again. So, it’s um the the velocity there becomes almost zero at a certain frame. So, if I can time that frame, you can see that I can jump two times in a row. But we’ll leave it like that for now. So we can start to think about how we move in a direction. And the tricky part about it is that later on we will be able to turn around. So W will always take us in the camera direction. So we need one vector to represent what direction we are facing, another vector for the forwards and backwards speed and the other one for the side speed. So let’s create those vectors. one direction vector

    vector 3

    and uh we’ll call it front vector

    also a vector 3 and a side vector. So the front vector it’s this Z axis here that will determine uh us going forwards and backwards. So both the move forward and move backwards should affect this force here. So one way of doing it is we check actions domove backwards and we set it to one if we’re moving backwards or zero. And then we subtract the same thing but we’re moving forward.

    So if we press them at the same time they cancel out. We could actually destructure here. Move forward, backwards, move forwards, move right, move left, jump. Then we can clean this up.

    Like this. And like this. All right. So, we have this one one or zero. And this one one or zero. And if they are both one they cancel out which is a good thing because if you go forward and then you start to hold backwards also then uh you should stop right that’s what we see in games. So then we’ve taken care of the front vector. So let’s do something similar for the side vector. So we’ll copy these. So now we’re not moving in the Z direction anymore. I think this should be the X direction.

    And here it’s move left and here it’s move right. So we get the same behavior there. If you’re holding both at the same time, you should go nowhere.

    There we go. So now we’re going to do some calculations and we’ll we will originate from the direction vector. So we’ll do direction dot subtubract vectors uh and those vectors are the front vector and the side vector. And then we’ll chain on some more operations. We normalize and then we multiply scalar. And here we need to determine how fast we want to go. So let’s also make a variable for that or a constant. We’ll try four for speed as well. So we’ll multiply the speed and then finally we apply uler

    and this is where we get the correct facing direction from the camera. So we have a reference to the camera and its rotation. So this is where we make sure that the front and side vectors are correct in relation to the camera. So now we can take this direction vector and apply it to the sphere. So API dot velocity

    dot set and then we do the direction.x X direction doy and direction dot zed. But that’s not completely true because the yaxis is not controlled by these front and side vectors. This is just for moving backwards and forwards and to the sides. So the y should actually stay the same. So we’ll do well. one. So that should be enough. In the best of worlds, we would be able to move at this point.

    See if we need to refresh.

    All right. I think we’re missing the new keyword here for the vectors. There we go. All right. So, we have a typo here. Okay. So, let’s try. I’m pressing forward. All right. So, forward is working. Backward is working. Now, we’ll try backwards and forwards at the same time. And it stops. That’s great. Let’s try left and right at the same time. And I let go of left. All right. So, that seems to be working. So, we cannot yet test that it will be still correct when we turn the camera. That we will do once we once we build out the the pointer lock controls uh where we can control the camera with the mouse. All right. So, I think we are done with the player for now. Let’s move forwards with the firsterson view. So we’ll create a component FPV

    and this one is actually quite simple because we get a lot of help from uh react fiber here. Okay. So we need of course to connect this to the camera. So we need use three

    where we can get the camera.

    Okay. So we return

    pointer lock controls

    args is camera destruction GL here passing that as GL dom element FPV from FPV

    and just render it.

    All right. So, uh when I click here now, it should lock the camera to how I move the mouse. So, now I can look around. So, now we can see that if I’m facing left, I can move straight ahead. And if I turn a bit, I can still move straight ahead. So, our player movement seemed to work fine. and the pointer lock controls seem to work as well. There’s one thing we should do with the firsterson view is that we should add a small cursor to uh the middle of the screen. So outside of the canvas, let’s add a div class name cursor and let’s put just a plus there. and let’s position it absolute. And we’re going to center this on the screen. So let’s make a class called centered. So this is positioned absolute. So we do top 50%, left 50%. We need to add a transform translate

    minus 50% and minus 50%. So that is just because if we if we center it 5050% without doing this transform translate then it will not actually be in the middle because I think I can show you this background hot pink. If we make this bigger we see that it is in fact centered. But if we don’t have this translate, this is what will happen. The top left corner of the square will be in the center. So what we’re adjusting for with 50% is 50% of the width and height of the square. So then it will move to the middle. But this one doesn’t need to be big at all. So we’ll remove these two. That looks good. And then remove the background.

    So move the the color styling to cursor.

    There we go. Now we have a marker to indicate the center of where we are watching. Great. I think we are done with uh the player for now. So we will cross out firsterson view. We’re also done with gravity and we are done with the movement. Our next item on the agenda is to add a state manager. We can add a hook called use store that keeps track of the game state. So let’s create our hook. Use store. So we’ll need create from sustand use store.

    We can wrap this in create and we get a setter method here as an input parameter. So we will return an object. So we call create. We pass it a function that returns an object. So in this object we can declare our state. So, we need to keep track of a texture. And we can default the texture to dirt. We need to keep track of the cubes that the player is going to be able to place. So, we can just default that to an array. And now, we’re going to declare our methods that you can use to interact with the state. So, we’ll of course have add cube, remove cube. You need to be able to set the texture and for later we want to be able to save the world. Reset world. These are all the operations that we need to support in our store. So when we add a cube, all we need to know is where to place it because the texture we already know since we are in the store. So when when someone calls add cube we need to call set and in set we pass it a callback function and we get back the previous state. So here we can return an object. So here we just want to affect the cubes which is an array. So we spread in the previous cubes

    and then at the end we add our new cube. And every cube needs to have a key and then we can use nano ID for that.

    We have a position that we get from XY Z that’s being passed in. And then we have the texture which we can get from pre.

    So that should be all it takes for us to add a cube. But before we do that, we need a way to render cubes. So I suggest that we leave the store like this for now with just a method of adding cubes and then we create the component to render a cube and then we can start to render them out. We can actually initialize the state with one cube just for debugging. Let’s do 111. So now we always have one cube initially that we can quickly see if when we start to rendering the cubes if they come out. So I s I suggest that we leave the store like this before we finish the rest of the store functions and then start to working on rendering our first cube. So let’s add a new component. Before we create the cube, we should have a a component that is taking care of rendering all the cubes essentially consuming the store and mapping out the cubes. So we’ll make a component called cubes. So we need definitely to have used the use store

    from hooks.

    So our use store hook we can we get the state back and then we can return an array where we can place different things from the state in whatever order we want. So we want state cubes.

    So then the first element here will be the cubes. So if we do console log cubes, we can return nothing here. Let’s add cubes. Cubes.

    So since the player needs to be able to stand on the cubes, the cubes needs to be within the physics.

    So add it like that. Okay. So we consoled out the cubes and this is our debugging cube that we added a dirt cube on position 111. So now we can start working on mapping out those cubes. So we return.

    Here we’re going to use the cube component. So let’s create that one first.

    Since we’re doing a mapping, we need to use the key which is something that we have on the cube already. We have key, we have XY Z texture. So here we can use the key. This is actually position.

    So we receive position and texture. So to create the cube, we’re going to use the the canon use box hook.

    So we’ll set type is static and we have the position from the incoming prop.

    So here we return a mesh and to the mesh we connect the ref. Here we need a box buffer geometry and we also need a mesh standard material

    attach as geometry

    color is hot pink. Do we have a cube anywhere? Okay. So I see we called it position in the store and here we’re destructuring position.

    So we need to call it push here.

    Oh, okay. So, the reason I couldn’t find the cube was because I was standing on it. I feel very stupid now.

    That’s good. So, let’s play around with these values. See if we can get get it up in the air.

    All right. So, there we have our first cube. All

    right. So, we have the cube standing on the ground. So now let’s fix the texture of the cube.

    So let’s pass in the texture.

    In the store we just call it dirt and in textures we call it dirt texture. So let’s do texture plus texture. So we import all the textures as textures and then we map it by the texture in the store plus texture and then we get our active texture. Then we can do map active texture

    and remove the color. There we go. We get the dirt texture on the cube. Let’s move it a bit closer to us.

    So, as we can see, it doesn’t look so good. So, we need to do the same treatment we did to the grass to every cube texture. So, we’ll test it with dirt. dirt texture

    mag filter

    nearest filter. Let’s see if that helped. Yeah, now it looks good and pixelated and not smooshed.

    Let’s do it to ground texture in here as well since we are already here. And then we don’t have to do it in here. Let’s move these out as well. There we go. So now we fixed it for all the textures inside of the texture file instead to keep our components more clean. I was thinking to maybe keep this in ground because it correlates to the size of it. So, we’ll keep it here. So, now we should be able to add a second cube with another texture.

    And we’ll pick another position texture

    wood.

    All right. So now we can render cubes with different textures. And this one looks nice as well since it’s been fixed. All right. So now we have a way of rendering cubes once they are added to the store. All right. So we have the basics of the state management and we have the cubes basics as well.

    Something that is missing in this list is adding cubes. So one way of adding a cube is to click the ground. So let’s open the ground. So we need to get the add cube method from use store.

    add cube

    and we return an array with state add cube. All right. So we had have the add cube method. Uh but we need to figure out the x y and z coordinates to uh to pass to this function. So let’s add an on click to this mesh.

    Let’s do E do. Stop propagation so that the click cannot be passed through the ground. So on the event we have something called E.point.

    So we want to get X Y and Z. So we can do object dot values from E dot point. So let’s stop here to check out what happens when we click the ground. So we have E.

    Let’s look at point.

    So we have a vector three. So we just want to get the values of this vector. We don’t want to pass the whole object. So if we do object valvalues, we just get these three values and we structure them out here. So if we hover the x, y, and zed, we see that we do in fact get the values here. As you saw, there are a lot of decimals here. We want the cubes to end up on fixed location according to this grid that we can see here in full numbers. So we need to round this. So we need to do a mapping of these values and return math seal of the value and then we should be able to call add cube with x y and zed. Right? So let’s try this out. Let’s reload. And we click the ground and we do get a cube.

    So as we can see the seal function made it round up. So let’s try with floor instead. So, as we can see, I think we should try moving the ground down by half a unit and see if that will make the cubes lay flat on the ground. So, let’s try that. So, now that we fixed the ground, we can go back to seal here.

    Math seal. And when I click the ground, we actually get cubes added. Pretty cool. So now let’s lower these default cubes or we can actually remove these default cubes cubes now that we have a way of adding cubes for real. Okay, so we handle the case where you click the ground and you want to add a cube. But what about when you click the surface of a cube to add a cube next to it? Okay. So let’s handle the clicking of cubes. So we can copy this state call here because we want to do the same inside of cube.

    But we also want to have remove cube later on. So let’s add that straight away.

    So my plan is that if you hold in a modifier key and click then you can remove cubes as well.

    So let’s add an on click.

    We stop propagation. So here we need to handle a few things. A cube has six sides and the side that you actually click needs to get another cube next to it. So we’ll create a variable clicked face.

    And a face of a cube actually has two triangular shapes that covers the face. So it’s not a full square, it’s two triangles that together cover the square face. So instead of six faces, it has 12 faces. But that is pretty easy to fix. So we can just take take e dophase index and divide this by two and then we will be in the range between zero and five instead of zero and 11 and we of course need to math do floor it because there’s no 0.5 face index. So now clicked face should be between zero and five. So let’s console log face clicked face. So let’s add a cube here. Phase four, face one, face five, face zero, top is phase two, and the bottom should be phase three then. So now we just need to write if statement to cover all these clicked faces. So if it’s zero add cube. So we have a ref to the box that has a position. So we can do xyz from ref current position. So we can pass in xy z. And then we need to on one of them maybe subtract one to the x. And for another face, we need to do x + one. But it’s a little bit of guesswork to figure out what phase is what direction, if you understand what I mean. 1 2 3 4 5 6.

    So something like that. This will most likely be wrong. All right. So we add a cube. We click one face. So here we see that it was the opposite.

    All right. So now we have logging as well. So if I click this face, we see that it was four and the cube was added on the other side. So clicked face four just needs to flip. And then let’s flip this one. If I click this face, that was face one and that was also flipped. So this should probably minus one and maybe plus one here. Let’s try the top.

    So phase two, nothing happened. So I’m suspecting that there’s a cube underneath. So this should probably be + one and this should be minus one. So let’s try again to click the top. Yeah, now that was correct.

    So I think we might have it. Nice. Now we can click a cube to add another cube next to it. So now now it starts to become fun. So we can return if we are done with the operation.

    So now we can handle the removal of cubes. If E. Altkey key remove cube X Y Z and return. And of course we haven’t implemented the remove cube function yet.

    So what we can do just to try it quickly is to just console log here

    xyz

    xyz

    remove. All right. So I’m holding down the alt key and I’m clicking it and we get a call to remove cube with xyz. So that’s great. So now we can implement the remove cube function.

    So we can borrow some code from add cube. We will still call set but instead of adding to this array we can take pre dot cubes dot filter cube or we keep all the cubes where x y and z are not equal to the xy z being passed in. So we destructure

    x, y and z from the cube. Then we return x not equal to x,

    y not equal to y, and z not equal to set. So let’s see if we can filter out the cube that we’re clicking on. Let’s add a few.

    So here we need to say cube cube. Pulse. All right, let’s try again. So add a few cubes and then alt key and they were all removed. I think the issue is that this should be or because if any coordinate is not correct, it’s not the the right box to filter out. So let’s try again.

    There we go. One cube being removed at a time. Great. Now we can remove cubes. Great progress. All right. So we are done with adding cubes and removing cubes. So let’s continue with the cube type selector. So we should create some UI that indicates what selections there are and what is currently active. So let’s create a component texture selector.

    And this one will not be a three component. This will just be HTML. And this one should just be visible when we’re actually changing the texture. So we need some state here.

    So determine if it’s visible right now or not. We’ll default it to false. We need to get the texture from u from the store. active texture

    state and we get an array back where we take state dot. We just call it texture

    texture.

    So, let’s call create a use effect that runs whenever the active texture changes.

    Active texture. So, if the active texture changes, we want to have this texture selector visible for like 2 seconds and then we want it to disappear. So we need a visibility timeout that is set timeout

    for 2 seconds. So after 2 seconds we want to set visible false and immediately we want to set visible true and then we need to clear the timeout.

    Clear timeout visibility

    like this.

    So we only want to show something is if visible is true.

    So let’s do class name absolute and centered. So now we we also need to handle so that the texture is actually changed when we press the digits actions from use keyboard.

    So in the store we have a set texture method. So let’s finish that. We take a texture called set.

    We don’t care about the previous. We just want to set texture based on the incoming texture. So let’s look at use keyboard. We have texture one to five. This is what we want to dig out here.

    So let’s do a use effect again that will run for texture one texture two

    if texture one. So now we need the set texture from the store.

    Set texture dirt. Okay, we’ll call this dirt,

    grass,

    glass, wood, and log. So, the actions will now contain props that are the actual names of the textures.

    So we’ll call it pressed texture.

    So if any of these textures are true then that texture will be the pressed texture and then we can do if pressed texture set texture to pressed texture. Let’s see. Pressed pressed texture. So, let’s see if it works.

    If I press one. All right, let’s debug.

    So, if I press one, there to be true. So, that’s great. So, it works correctly in use keyboard and in the texture selector. Let’s console log dirt. Let’s see if we can get dirt to be one. So, one thing what we’ve must do is add the texture selector to our app before we start to looking for console logs in it. So, let’s add it here. Texture.

    All right. So, we get dirt false. We saw it there. And as I press one, we got dirt true and texture selector appears for two seconds and then gets removed. So it looks very promising active texture. All right. So here we have our textures as booleans. So let’s create a mapping that will set the prop which is the name of the texture that will map from the name to the booleans. So then we can do object entries

    find

    key value. So we want to find a texture where the value is true. If we have such a pressed texture, we’ll take the value from that. All right. So we get five booleans here and we put them in a mapping. So we’ll get dirt falls, grass falls, maybe glass true and if glass is true we will find the true texture store that in press texture. So if we found a press texture, we get the key of that by taking the first uh element in that tupil. So let’s see if it actually worked. Grass, pressed dirt, pressed wood, and pressed log. So now I pressed glass. So this is the glass cube. Pressing dirt and I get a dirt cube. So cool. We have a way of selecting different textures just using the keyboard. I don’t know what happened with this cube. But let’s continue building the UI to show the actual selections.

    So we already have a list of images with these. So let’s import those images.

    Okay. So let’s create a mapping here images.

    So we keep the name that they are called in the store to the actual image. That’s

    so we need to loop these in a map here. Images and we’ll do object dot entries images. So here we get key and source image. So we can return an image image tag source is source key is K

    and now we need to check which one is the active one and that we can do by adding a class name. So here we can do K equals active texture. If that is true, if that is true, we add active. Otherwise, nothing. And let’s have an alt prop the uh the name of the texture. All right. So let’s see if anything happened. So when I change the texture now, here we have an error. This should be an array. So now let’s see what Oh, we we got it. So when I change texture, the texture selector appears. So we should just make it bigger.

    Let’s add a class

    texture select.

    So we can do transform scale 10. It should be select.

    There we go. That’s bigger.

    Let’s do maybe five. And then let’s handle the active also. So if we have an imageactive there, let’s do a border. of two pixel solid red. So let’s see if we can see which one is active. Yes, we can.

    Okay, so we between the four and the five we have the wrong digits. So that is probably because I typed them in the wrong order here.

    All right, now they work correctly. All right, let’s see all our cubes. We have wood or log, we have wood, we have glass, we have grass, and we have dirt. Really nice. Let’s remove this console log. All right, so our cube type selector is done. The next thing on the agenda would be to save the world in local storage. So that is something that we can do inside of our store. So let’s create some helper functions to talk to the local storage. So what we want to store in the local storage is an array. So we need to do JSON parse and JSON stringify to talk to the local storage. So let’s call create a helper function get local storage.

    So we we take in a key and we return JSON.par

    window local storage get item of key. So all we’re doing is JSON parsing what we get from local storage. And let’s do a similar function with set local storage. We take in a key and of course the value that we want to set. And then we do JSON stringify

    set item and then we set we pass the key. Actually this JSON string if I should be just wrapping the value

    value right now we have our helper functions. So when we first create the state we want to do get local storage and we can just make up a key here. We’ll call it cubes. So we’ll either get something or it will be empty. So we’ll fall back to the empty array. So now we can implement these two functions. Let’s start with just resetting the world. That would just be set

    and then we just set the cubes to be empty array like that. That should reset the world. And then we have say world. So we call set just to get the current state. And inside here we just call set local storage. The key was cubes. And we store prev. cubes. So we don’t need a load world function because that happens when we just reload the page. But we we also need to create some buttons on the UI for this. Let’s create a component called menu.

    So we want to access save world and reset world from use store.

    So state

    reset world. All right.

    So, let’s create some UI

    class name of menu and absolute.

    We need save and we need reset

    on click.

    Save world.

    Reset world. All right, let’s import menu.

    So, let’s see where we have our menu. We have it, but it’s down there. So, we need to style it so it becomes in the top.

    So, we’ll do top 10 pixels, left 10 pixels. There we have them.

    All right. So, let’s try them out. We’ll place a few cubes of different types.

    All right. We have a nice line here. Let’s save it. So now it should be in local storage. We can verify that application local storage. We have cubes and there we have the cubes. So now when I reload the page, do we have any cubes? Oh, here they are. Really cool. So now we can persist it. Of course, we can also reset, but they are still in local storage. So if I just reload the cubes will be there. All right, we are done with saving the world in local storage. But we have one more thing that would be nice to have hover state on cubes. I think it would be nice if when the cursor hovers a cube that they become a bit darker so that you indicate what cube you’re actually hovering on. All right, let’s keep track if a uh cube is hovered.

    Set is hovered. Use state from react false. Now we can add some pointer events here on pointer move

    and we take the event stop propagation set is hovered true.

    And then we just do the same for

    on pointer out.

    And now we need to adjust the appearance based on the hover. So let’s add color here is hovered.

    Let’s make it gray. If they’re hovered, we make them gray. Otherwise, we keep them white.

    But one thing that would be nice is if the glass cube would actually be a bit transparent. So we add transparent true to all the cubes. And then we do opacity active texture equals glass. Then we do 0.5

    otherwise we do one and this should be just texture.

    All right. So there we have transparent glass. And maybe it’s a bit too transparent. Let’s do 0.6.

    Really nice. Very cool.

    Right. So, we’re getting close to being able to build that house. And of course, transparent glass is a must for building houses

    so you can watch outside.

    All right, I will quickly finish this house just to check it off the list.

    should probably have a door.

    All right, we’re inside the house.

    I think we can check it off the list. All right, we can say actually right now that we have fixed everything on our to-do list and even some more things that we had to add as we went on. For those of you that got this far, kudos to you. It’s quite a long project. If you want to submit pull requests to this uh project, feel free. I will look at them and probably pull in many of them. So, thank you so much everyone that watched. I hope you learned a thing or two about uh building 3D things on the web and I hope you got inspired to try out to build something on your own. So please keep watching free code camp, continue to learn and also you can check out uh my channel if you should want to. Bye now. Thanks a lot for watching.

  • Code a 2D Game Using JavaScript, HTML, and CSS w⧸ Free Game Assets – Tutorial

    Frank Dvorak teaches this JavaScript game development crash course. You will learn how to create a 2D game using JavaScript, HTML, CSS, and object-oriented programming. And Frank provides a lot of free sprites and game art assets so you can follow along. Frank is a popular teacher who creates super creative courses. What a strange planet. It’s completely covered in a thick layer of smoke. Initial scans indicate there are no organic life forms present, but I register a lot of movement. Coders, hope you like making games. Let’s make a 2D steampunk game completely from scratch with HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. No frameworks, and no libraries. I will give you a lot of premium art assets for characters, environments, and props, and you can do whatever you want with them. You can use them in your projects, and you can modify them. I will show you how to create gameplay variety by giving different enemy types different mechanics that the player can interact with or has to deal with. For example, if you destroy a hive well, a bunch of small drones will come after you. Let me show you how to give your games beautiful visuals and how to apply many special features I came up with specifically for this class. Let’s go. These creatures have very similar physiology to the Earth’s seahorses. Body shape like this can cut easily through the thick atmosphere of this planet. They can move very fast. Seahorse hive is being attacked by something. This one has been damaged. I wonder if we can hack this creature’s central computer to control it for a while. It is surprisingly easy to override its circuits. Seems like these machines are not used to our technology. I’m getting a lot of new data. Okay, explorers. We are getting a stream of data about multiple different species. We will convert their source code into HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. Let’s analyze it line by line and see how it works. We have a lot to learn. I will answer all your questions as we discover more about their movement, special abilities, and how they interact with their planet’s environment. Let’s look under the hood of this alien ecosystem. The atmosphere is thick enough to allow heavy siliconbased life forms to float, but smoke is blocking most of the sunlight. Many creatures developed artificial lights and glowing appendages to see through the heavy clouds. Seahorse Sentinel has a basic attack that’s powerful against weak enemies. But if it absorbs energy from one of the overcharged creatures, it gets additional firepower for a short period of time, and it instantly replenishes its ammo. Ammo also automatically recharges over time. It seems we just need to help it to get through these aggressive swarms in time so it can join its hive. If this is your first time discovering JavaScript, you should try some beginner classes first. Today’s coding will be beginner friendly, but I expect some basic knowledge of JavaScript. when you get more comfortable with objects, arrays and for loops, come join me in this class.

    So after a simple basic setup inside index html and style CSS, we move into script.js. All JavaScript logic for this game will be written here inside this file. I create an event listener for load event. Notice that we call it on built-in JavaScript window object which represents the browser’s window. load event fires when the whole page has been loaded, including all dependent resources such as stylesheets and images. We need to do this because we will use a lot of graphics in this project and they can take some time to load. If you’re trying to draw an image with JavaScript, remember that you always have to wait for that image to be fully loaded before you run the JavaScript code that depends on that image. I usually like to do HTML canvas setup like this. Custom variable I call, for example, canvas will store the reference to canvas element. I point it towards that element using get element by ID. I give it an ID of canvas one. Now I need so-called drawing context. It is a built-in object that contains all methods and properties that allow us to draw and animate colors, shapes, and other graphics on HTML canvas. To create it, we need to call a special built-in get context method on a variable that holds a reference to canvas element. So I say canvas dot get context. And then I need to pass it identifier. Sometimes we call this argument a context type. We can pass it 2D or WebGL here. WebGL represents three-dimensional rendering context. Today we will work with 2D. Now I access width property on canvas from line 3 and I set it to 500 pixels. Height will be 500 as well. As you can see 500 pixels is wider than my current browser size. For that reason, I also like to declare max width property and I set it to 100%. That way, the element will scale down until it’s fully visible in the available browser area. I also declare max height in case the restricted factor is the height of browser window. Doing this will make sure we can always see the entire canvas element even when the browser window is too small. I will zoom out a bit to adjust my workplace. For this tutorial, I set canvas width to a larger value and keep my browser window small. Canvas element will scale down to make sure it’s fully visible.

    To build our game today, we will use object-oriented programming, which means we will wrap variables and functions in objects. JavaScript is a prototype-based object-oriented language, which means it doesn’t have classes. It has prototypes. But we can use modern JavaScript syntax that introduced classes as so-called syntactical sugar simplified clean syntax that mimics classes from other programming languages. Still under the hood, it’s just working with prototype based inheritance. One of the four main principles of object-oriented programming is encapsulation. Encapsulation is the bundling of data and the methods that act on that data in objects. Access to that data can be restricted from outside the bundle. In this project, I will encapsulate our data into multiple classes. Each class will have its special purpose. The challenge for beginners will be to keep track of how these classes communicate with each other. I will explain everything step by step as we write the code to help you understand. We need to declare our classes in a specific order. Class declarations are hoisted in JavaScript, but they stay uninitialized when hoisted. That means while JavaScript will be able to find the reference for a class name we create, it cannot use the class before it is defined in the code. This means that I need to declare input handler class first because I will need to use it inside player class and so on. Input handle class will keep track of specified user inputs. For example, arrow keys. Projectile class will handle player lasers. Particle class will deal with falling screws, [ __ ] and bolts that come from damaged enemies. Player class will control the main character. It will animate player sprite sheet and so on. Enemy class will be the main blueprint handling many different enemy types. Layer class will handle individual background layers in our parallax seamlessly scrolling multi-layered background. And background class will pull all layer objects together to animate the entire game world. UI class will draw score, timer, and other information that needs to be displayed for the user. and the main game class will come last. Inside this game class, all logic will come together. This will be the brain of our project. I hope this gives you a map of what we need to do to complete our game. Let’s write JavaScript logic inside individual classes and connect them together. I will explain everything step by step as we go along.

    Constructor is a special method on JavaScript class. When I call this JavaScript class later using the new keyword constructor will create one new blank JavaScript object and it will assign it properties and values based on the blueprint inside. Player will need access to game width and height and other properties that will be stored on the main game object. So I will pass it the main game object as an argument like this. I convert that game object into class property on player class like this. I’m saying take this game object that was passed as an argument to the class constructor and turn it into class property called this.game. Keep in mind that by doing this I’m not creating a copy of the main game object and placing it on player. Objects in JavaScript are so-called reference data types which means that unlike primitive data types, objects are dynamic in nature. I am just creating a reference that is pointing to the place in memory that stores the main game object. So when the values and properties on the main game object get updated, those changes will be immediately visible from this.ame reference inside this player class. I made the size of player spreadsheet the same size as we will draw them in game. It’s a good practice. I know that the width of a single frame in my spreadsheet is 120 pixels and height is 190. If you are a beginner, it’s best if you use the same sprites and images I’m using. It will make the debugging easier in case you run into problems. You can always check my code to find the problem. All art assets I’m using are linked below. You can download them from the project section. Start in horizontal X coordinate on the player will be 20 pixels and vertical Y position is 100. Player will also need an update method to move it around and draw method that will draw graphics representing the player. For now, let’s start by increasing vertical Y position on the player by speed Y. I need to declare that property here. It will be zero at first, so no vertical movement. Draw method will take context as an argument. This will specify which canvas element we want to draw on. In case our game has multiple layers with multiple canvas elements, it’s also a good practice to use context argument like this rather than pulling ctx variable from the outside directly into our objects. At first, I will just draw a simple black rectangle representing the player. So, built-in canvas fill rectangle method and I want to draw the rectangle at player’s current X and Y position and it will have players width and height. So, we have our player object. How do we include it inside game logic and draw it on canvas? As I said, the main game class from line 45 will be the brain of our entire project. All the logic will somehow go through it. Again, I will give it a constructor. Constructor will need width and height of canvas as arguments and inside we convert them into class properties. This will make sure that the width and height of the game matches the size of canvas element. Constructor on JavaScript class is a special type of method that will run once when we instantiate the class using the new keyword. It will create one new blank object and it will give it values and properties as defined inside the blueprint. Here I can take an advantage of the fact that all the code inside the constructor gets automatically executed like this and any code I put inside the constructor on game class will automatically run when I instantiate my game in a minute. So when I instantiate game class I want it to automatically create an instance of player class and I want that instance to become class property on game class called this dot player. So this player is equal to new player like this. The new keyword is a special command in JavaScript. It will look for class with this name in this case player and it will run its constructor method to create one instance of it based on the blueprint inside. So by calling new player on line 49, JavaScript will find player class up here on line 17 and it will run all the code inside its constructor. I can see that constructor method on player class needs game as an argument. Down here we are inside that game class. So I pass it this keyword. This keyword used inside this class refers to this entire game object. Our game will also need update and draw methods. Update method will take this player property from line 49 which holds an instance of player object and it will call its update method we defined on line 26. Inside draw method we will render the player on canvas by calling draw method from line 29. I can see that it expects context as an argument. So I pass it context like this and that value will be passed along here. Now I create an instance of this new game class we just wrote and I save it in a variable I call for example game. It’s equal to new game like this. Again new keyword will look for class with that name. It will find it on line 45 and it will run its constructor method to create one new blank JavaScript object and assign it values and properties based on the blueprint. Here on line 46, I can see that game class constructor expects width and height as arguments. So I pass it canvas width from line five and canvas height from line six.

    So the new keyword triggers a class constructor. As the constructor gets executed, we hit this line which will automatically create an instance of player class from line 17. So this is how by creating the main game object, we also automatically create player object and now it sits as a property on the game class on line 49. Perfect.

    We will also need animation loop that will run update and draw methods over and over 60 times per second. updating positions and redrawing our game. I create a custom function I call for example animate. Inside I take the instance of game class from line 59 and I call its associated update method we declared on line 51. I will also call draw method from line 54 like this. I can see it expects context as an argument to specify which canvas element we are drawing on. So I pass it ctx from line 4. This means that this ctx variable will be passed here and it will get passed along to draw method on player object here. Now the player knows where we want to draw it. After we called update and draw, we want to trigger the next animation frame. So I call built-in request animation frame. Request animation frame method sits on the window object. But we can also call it just like this. It tells the browser that we wish to perform an animation and it requests that the browser calls a specified function to update an animation before the next repaint. So we need to pass it one argument and it will be the method we want to call before the repaint before browser window gets updated and redrawn on screen. I pass it animate the name of its parent function to create an endless animation loop. Request animation frame has two special features. It adjusts the user’s screen refresh rate. For most of us, it will be 60 frames per second. It also autogenerates a timestamp argument and passes that as an argument to its callback function. A little bit later, I will show you how to use this feature to create periodic events in our project. Events that repeat in a certain interval. I get an error because I misspelled the word constructor. Here, I’m using VS Code editor. It highlights syntax in different colors which makes it easier to notice typos like this. We have our main game logic and we are drawing this black rectangle representing our player. It looks static but it’s actually animating. We can test that by giving player some value here in speedy property. The reason the rectangle gets longer now is because we can see old paint. We can see old black rectangles that were drawn in the previous animation loops. I can fix that by deleting all canvas drawings between each animation frame. Between every animation loop, I call built-in clear rectangle method. And I want to clear canvas from coordinates 000 to canvas with canvas height like this. Now you can see that because player speed Y property is set to + one, the player moves by one pixel per frame in positive direction on vertical Y-axis. If speed Y is minus one, player will move upwards. If speed Y is zero, the player will not move at all. It’s all because for every animation frame, we are adding speed Y property to player’s vertical Y-coordinate here on line 27. We know that everything is working well. It’s good to test your code as you go step by step to discover potential problems. I want the player to be controlled by keyboard. When I press up arrow, we set speed Y to minus one and player will move up. When I press down arrow, we set speed Y to plus one and player will move down.

    We will handle all player input up here inside input handler class. Constructor will take a game as an argument. Same as we did with the player. I convert it into this.ame class property. As we said before, when we create an instance of a class, all the code inside class constructor gets executed. We can take advantage of that. And I can even apply event listeners from here. I simply just apply event listener like this. We will listen for key down event. Callback function on event listener has a special autogenerated argument that contains all kinds of additional details about the event that just happened. If I want more details about the key down event, I just need to pick a variable name and I pass it as an argument to the call back. Usually we use letter E or the word event, but you can also type ABC. Whatever you put here will become a custom variable name containing a special object with additional information about the key down event that just happened. I will save it in a variable I call E and I will console log it. If you just console lock E, you will get the full event object with many properties. I’ve done this before. So I know I want a specific property called key. So I console lock E.Key. This will contain a string with the name of the key that was pressed. Let me show you. I need to create an instance of input handle class. So as we did with the player, I want my input class to be instantiated automatically as I create my main game class. So here inside the game class constructor, I create a property. I call for example this.input. I set it to new input handler and I know its constructor expects game as an argument. So same as we did with the player, I pass it this referring to this entire game class. So now as I create game object down here, it automatically creates player object on line 54 and input object on line 55. As we call the new keyword on line 55, JavaScript will jump to line 9 and it will run input handler class constructor which will among other things apply this key down event listener that’s console login the current key that is pressed. I open browser console. I click on canvas element so it starts registering events. And now when I press keys on my keyboard, you can see we are console login the key property

    inside key down event listener I say if e.key is arrow up take keys array on the game object.

    We will create that array in a second and push that key into the array.

    I create that array here on line 59 inside game class constructor. Its job will be to keep track of all keys that are currently active that are currently being pressed down. I will console log this.game.keys from here to check if arrow up key is being correctly added. I get a console error that is saying that the variable name I’m calling keys from is undefined. By the time this callback function is executed, JavaScript forgot what this.game game stands for which object it points towards. We want JavaScript to remember that this code initially sits inside this object so that it can see and remember this.game property even when we call it later as we play our game. If you are a beginner, don’t worry about fully understanding this yet. All you need to know here is that if JavaScript forgets what this keyword stands for, we need to bind that code to the surrounding codes context. We can use built-in JavaScript bind method or even simpler, we can use ES6 arrow function syntax here. A special feature of arrow function is that this keyword inside arrow function always represents the object in which the arrow function is defined. Arrow function will never forget that it was originally defined inside constructor on input handle class and it will always see this reference for this.game from line 10. Therefore, it will be able to access this.game.keys keys and push keys inside. Now everything is working. When I press up arrow key, it gets added into this.game.keys. And if I press it multiple times, it keeps adding more and more. So I create another event listener.

    This time for key up event. When we release the key, I want to remove it from the array. I do that by checking if the array contains that key. So built-in index of array method. The index of method returns the first index at which a given element can be found in the array or it returns minus one if the element is not present. So if this.game keys index of is more than minus one meaning if keys array contains the key that is currently being released in this key up event take this.game.keys array and remove that element from the array using splice method. The splice method changes the contents of an array by removing or replacing existing elements. Splice method needs at least two arguments. The first argument is the index at which we want to start changing the array. So it will be the index of that key we want to remove like this. And the second argument is delete count an integer indicating the number of elements in the array we want to remove from that starting index. So I call splice. I want to remove elements starting from this index and I want to remove only one element at that index. I put the same console lock inside key up event. You can see that it works well. When I press up arrow, it gets added. When I release it, it gets removed. Added removed. Nice. The problem is when I hold up arrow key down for too long. Key down event will start firing over and over but key up event doesn’t fire. So we are not removing those keys. We are adding multiple keys. we are adding the same key over and over increasing the size of the array. This can also be fixed easily. I only want to add that key into this keys array if it’s not already present in there. So additional condition here if this keys index of the key that was just pressed is minus one. Now when I press and hold the key gets added only once. When I release the button the key gets removed. Perfect. On key down event, I check if key that was pressed is arrow up. And at the same time, I check if arrow up is not yet in the array. Only then I push arrow up into this. Keys array. On key up event, I check if the key that we are releasing is present in the array. If it is, I remove it using splice method. We have the main logic now. And adding more keys is easy. Just be careful about brackets here. It’s easy to miss something and get an error. I wrap this part in another set of brackets and I check if key that is pressed is arrow up or arrow down like this.

    Now keys array on the main object can contain nothing and can be empty or it can contain up arrow key or arrow down key and it can even contain multiple keys at the same time. In our case both arrow up and arrow down. So now keys property on the main game object is an array that always keeps track of presses and releases of up and down arrow keys. I store this array on the main game object on line 67. So the information of what keys are currently pressed is available all over our code base. It’s also available inside our player class because player has this.game property here on line 35 pointing towards the main game object. I can simply check if this.game.keys keys includes a specific key and I can change player behavior from here. I check if this.game.keys includes arrow up. Notice that before I use index of method to check if element can be found in the array. I can also alternatively use built-in JavaScript includes method to do the same thing. The includes method determines whether an array includes a certain value among its entries returning true or false as appropriate. If this line returns true, we want player to move up. So we set speed Y from line 40 to minus one. Else if keys array includes arrow down, we set speed Y to + one. I save changes and click canvas. And now I can move player up and down by pressing up and down arrow keys. The only problem is that player will never stop moving. We need to add one more small condition. So else meaning this.game.keys keys array doesn’t include arrow up or arrow down. We set speed Y to zero. Instead of hard coding minus one and plus one here, maybe player speed is dynamic and player can speed up during a power up. For that purpose, it’s better to save max speed in a variable like this. So, we have current player speed on line 40 and maximum player speed on line 41. Let’s try two pixels per frame. And I replace hard-coded values with variables on lines 44 and 45. If we press arrow up, speed Y is minus max speed. If we press arrow down, speed Y is plus max speed like this. Now we can change player movement speed if we need to by changing max speed value on line 41. And this is one of the techniques I like to use to handle keyboard inputs in my games. If you have any questions or any suggestions how to improve this code, let me know by leaving a comment.

    player will be shooting lasers at enemies. We will create them by using a class I call projectile. Constructor will need three arguments. The main game object so that this class has access to game properties when it needs them and start in X and Y coordinates. Those need to be dynamic passed as arguments from here because starting coordinates of each projectile will depend on player’s current position. As usual, I convert the arguments passed to class constructor into class properties. Width will be 10 pixels.

    Height will be 3 pixels.

    Speed will be 3 pixels per frame. Update method will also increase horizontal xcoordinate from line 30 by speed from line 34. I will also need marked for deletion property which will be initially set to false. And if horizontal xcoordinate of this projectile object is more than width of the game meaning it has moved across the game area this object can be deleted. I will actually set it to 80% of the game area. uccessful projectiles will be coming from player here to somewhere around here because I don’t want enemies to be hit and destroyed off screen. Let’s say that the lasers have limited range. So if horizontal coordinate of the projectile is more than 80% of width of the main game area, set their marked for deletion property from line 35 to true. This will flag that projectile as ready to be deleted and removed from the game. We will remove them in a moment. Before we do that, we will also have a simple draw method that will take context as an argument and I call built-in fill rectangle method that will represent the projectile. I want to draw that rectangle at coordinates this do.x this doy and I pass it this dowidth this dot height from lines 32 and 33. We will use images and animations for everything soon. But first, let’s set fill style to yellow and draw yellow rectangles for our lasers.

    I will also have to define fill style here on the player otherwise that yellow color will apply on it as well. I can set it to green or black like this. So we have our projectile class ready. How do we add them into our game? One way to do it is by creating a special custom method on player class. Player will have two different attack modes. So I will call the basic one shoot top. In this mode, the lasers will be coming out from the mouth of our mechanical seahorse. When shoot top method is triggered, I take this projectiles array I will create in a minute and I will push new projectile inside using the class we just defined on line 27. I create this projectiles array on player class. This will hold all currently active projectile objects. Up here I can see that class constructor expects game X and Y as arguments. So I pass it this.game game from line 51 and the current player coordinates. So this dox from line 54 and this doy from line 55. I want player to shoot when we press a key. So I go up to input handler class. And here I will make it very simple. I go inside key down event and I say else if key is spacebar. So just space like this. You can also use enter or any other key if you want. When we press spacebar, use this.ame reference from line 10 and navigate to its player property and from there call shoot top method we just defined. Since I’m holding all projectiles here on line 60 on player class, I will handle projectiles here inside update method. I take this projectiles array and for each element in that array, I call update method we defined on line 39.

    Inside that method, I have this check. If the projectile moves across the screen, we set its marked for deletion property to true. I want to remove those elements from projectiles array. I will do it using JavaScript filter method like this. The filter method creates a new array with all elements that pass the test implemented by the provided function. So here I’m taking projectiles array. I call filter on it and the test is that I want all elements to have marked for deletion properties set to false. So exclamation mark here. This will filter out and remove all elements with marked for deletion properties set to true. And since we just said that filter creates a new array, we want to override the original array with the new one that was filtered here. With this line of code in place, every time we set marked for deletion property to true on any projectile object, it will get removed from projectiles array. I will check if it works by console login this. projectiles from inside shoot top method. I will also call for each on all projectiles from inside draw method and I trigger draw method from line 43 on each one. I remember that I need to pass it context. So I pass it along the value from here like this. I save changes and run my code. And I can see we have an error on line 45. I go up to line 45 and I forgot to call fill rectangle from context. So JavaScript doesn’t know what to do with it. I fix it like this. Now I click on canvas and I can move up and down using keyboard arrow keys and I can shoot using spacebar. In browser console I can see that projectile objects are being correctly added and removed from projectiles array. Perfect. Let’s remove these two console locks to clean up our code. Now the console is cleaner and it’s easier to see how projectile array adds and removes objects. Nice. Right now we can shoot without limits. I want the player to have limited ammo that slowly recharges over time. It will also get completely refilled when we collect a special power up fish. Down here I say if this.gamemo, game.mmo which we will create in a minute is more than zero only. Then create new projectile object.

    I go down here to line 104 and I create this new ammo property. Initially we will start with 20 ammo for example.

    Every time we create a new projectile we decrease that value by one. Now I can do it 20 times and then it stops. Even if I keep pressing spacebar, we run out of ammo. Here on line 80, I can change which coordinates the projectiles start from in relation to the current player position. We will match it even better when we apply player sprite sheet a bit later to make sure it comes out from the mouth of our steampunk seahorse. We will get back to this. I can offset it here or I can also do it inside projectile class itself.

    When we use all 20 projectiles, we completely run out of ammo. I want it to slowly recharge over time. To do that, I want to run a periodic event in our codebase. And I want to be able to measure time in milliseconds and say, for example, every 500 milliseconds, every half second, automatically recharge one ammo. To do that is easy. If you know this technique with timestamps and delta time, let me quickly explain how it works. Here on line 116, I create a variable. I call for example last time. Its job will be to store a value of time stamp from the previous animation loop so that we can compare it against the value of time stamp from this animation loop. This difference will give us delta time, the difference in milliseconds between the time stamp from this loop and the time stamp from the previous loop. Like this. Where does this time stamp value come from? Request animation frame method has a special feature. It automatically passes a timestamp as an argument to the function it calls. In our case, animate. I can use it simply by giving it a variable name here. You can call it whatever you want as long as you keep referring to that value using the same variable name. I will call it timestamp spelled like this. And I will use it to calculate delta time here on line 119. After we used last time to calculate delta time for this animation loop, we reassign last time to the time stamp from the current loop so that it can be used to calculate delta time in the next loop. So request animation frame autogenerates a timestamp value which is a number in milliseconds since this loop started. We access it here in animate. Assign it a variable name for example time stamp like this. We calculate the delta time which is the difference in milliseconds between the time stamp from this animation loop and the time stamp from the previous animation loop. And then we set last time to time stamp from this loop so that it can be used to calculate delta time in the next loop. Don’t worry if this is a bit complicated to understand at first. It’s a very common technique and it will become more intuitive as you use it in multiple projects.

    I can console log delta time to check if it’s working. My delta time is around 16.6 milliseconds. 1,000 milliseconds 1 second divided by 16.6 is around 60. So I can see that my game is animating at 60 frames per second. Let me know if you get the same value or something else. If you had an old computer, delta time value might be higher because it takes your computer more milliseconds to render animation frame. If you have high refresh gaming screen, delta time value could be lower for you. I wonder if we have any coders here who use that type of screen. Remember to remove your console locks when you don’t need them, especially this one that runs 60 times per second. It could affect the performance of our game if I just leave it here. So, we calculated delta time. We know how many milliseconds it takes for our computer to render one animation frame to run one animation loop. I will pass it to update method here. And we can use that value to run periodic events in our game or to measure game time. The advantage of this technique is that it doesn’t matter if you have strong supercomput or a very old slow one. Delta time measures actual milliseconds in real time. So periodic events will happen roughly at the same time on slow and fast machines regardless of their ability to animate our game slow or fast. To trigger periodic events in our game, I need two helper variables. one will be timer that will go between zero and some kind of predefined limit. Each time it reaches that limit, it will trigger some kind of event and it will reset back to zero to count again for the next loop. The second helper variable will be that limit that interval value that timer needs to reach. So I want to replenish some ammo every half second 500 milliseconds. I will also introduce some hard limit. I want the ammo to automatically replenish only up to this value not endlessly. So starting ammo will be 20. Maximum ammo will be 50. For example, inside update method on game class, I will use ammo timer and ammo interval helper variables and also delta time to trigger this periodic event that replenishes ammo every 500 milliseconds. I say if ammo timer from line 107 is more than ammo interval, so 500 milliseconds. Inside I will also check if ammo is less than max ammo like this

    only. Then I will increase ammo by one. Then I reset ammo timer back to zero so that it can count again. Else keep increasing ammo timer by delta time.

    I am calculating delta time on line 128 and I’m passing it to update method on game class on line 131. I make sure update method expects that value here on line 110 and that delta time value will get passed along here.

    Our ammo is already recharging but it’s not easy to check and see. I can console log these values but it would be nice to have some visual representation of our available projectiles as part of our game screen. I have user interface class here on line 95. I will use it to draw messages and game statuses that player needs to be aware of. This class will be very simple. A constructor will take a game as an argument. So we convert it to a class property as usual. We will define font size and font family. We will need it later to draw some score and game timers.

    I will also define color and I set it to white for example. It doesn’t need update method. It just needs a draw method. It will expect context as an argument and here I will draw a small bar for each available projectile. I create a for loop. It will run as many times depending on the amount of ammo we currently have.

    I will set fill style to this dot color.

    This should actually be outside the for loop like this. For each available projectile, I will draw a small rectangle. So, fill rectangle method. Add coordinates 2050. Width 3 pixels and height 20 pixels. Let’s draw what we have so far and then we can finish it once we can see what we are doing. Same as we did with player and input handle classes, I create an instance of user interface class here on line 116 inside game class constructor. It expects game as an argument. So I pass it this keyword. Now I use this UI property and I call its associated draw method we defined on line 102 and I pass it context. Nice. Right now we are drawing all 20 available projectiles on top of each other here. To make them align next to each other, I just multiply them by the index from the for loop like this. 20 pixels spacing is too much. How about a spacing of 5 pixels

    plus 20 pixels left margin like this. That’s better. Now we can see how our ammo is slowly recharging.

    I can change the color here on line 100. I can test it and it’s working really well.

    It will keep recharging until it reaches max ammo value of 50 and then it should stop.

    Yes, we will apply better visuals to our game in a moment. I just want to have a complete functional game skeleton first.

    We are missing one last important element in our main game loop, enemies. And some enemies will also work as powerups in this game. We will have multiple enemy types in our game with different visuals and behaviors. Let’s take it step by step to make sure we understand how everything works and how the player projectiles, enemies, and power-ups interact with each other. Enemy class will just contain the main blueprint, the properties and methods shared between all enemy types. We will then extend this class into multiple small subclasses. Each enemy type will have a separate child class that inherits from this main enemy parent class. All enemies will need access to the main game object. So I do this as usual. All enemies will also have the same starting horizontal X coordinate. They will go from right to left starting just behind the right edge of game area. So this gamewith horizontal speed of each enemy will be a random number between minus0.5 and minus2 pixels because I want them to move in minus direction to the left on horizontal xaxis. Marked for deletion will be set to false initially.

    Update method will adjust horizontal x coordinate by the amount of speed x value for each animation frame moving enemies from right to left. I check if enemy moved completely off screen all the way behind the left edge of game area. So if xcoordinate of the enemy plus its width is less than zero, we will set its marked for deletion property to true. Draw method will take context as an argument. At first I will just draw red rectangles representing enemies. So fill style red and fill rectangle at enemies x and y coordinates and its width and height like this.

    We will have multiple enemy types. Let’s start with the basic simple enemy angler fish. I call that class for example angler one and it extends enemy class from line 86. In this scenario we have a parent enemy class also called a superass and we have child angular class also called a subclass. This is a good example of the second principle of object-oriented programming called inheritance. Angler is a child of parent enemy class and it has access to its methods such as this update and draw as well as these properties. If I call a property or a method on angle class and JavaScript can’t find it on angular, it will automatically travel to the parent enemy class and it will look for it there. Inheritance is used to reduce code repetition. Instead of redeclaring the same methods and properties on each class, I can just declare them once on parent class and all child classes will inherit them automatically. We can also do other things here using a special super keyword. I will show you as we write the code. Angle class will have its own constructor because some properties will be specific only to anglerfish enemies in our game. If I don’t declare constructor on angler class at all, it will automatically use constructor from enemy class from line 87. In this case, I want the code from parent class constructor on line 87 to run. And I want to add some additional properties here. If I just declare constructor on angular, it will completely override parent class constructor. And this code would be ignored. So I have to use a special syntax to kind of merge them. I want first this code to run and I want to add little bit of it here. I do it by calling super which refers to superass parent class constructor. This line of code will make sure that the constructor on the parent gets executed. Now I can add some more properties that will be specific only for angular. Remember that if you want to combine constructors like this, you have to call super first before you use this keyword. Doing it the other way around will give you an error. I have specific sprite sheets ready for our project. So I know that width of a single frame in our angular sprite sheet is 228 pixels and height is 169 pixels. I want vertical y position to start from here and go 90% from the top because we will have some ground graphics in our game environment layer. These are flying fish machines. They need to be above ground. Rectangles and images on canvas are drawn from the top left corner. So, I want the starting vertical position on each enemy to be between zero here and 90% of game height here. But I need to offset it by the actual height of the enemy. Otherwise, they will be drawn too low down here. That’s why I define x coordinate on the parent enemy class on line 89. But I had to wait declaring vertical y-coordinate until I had height of that specific enemy type. It will all work together well. Now you’ll see inside update method on the main game class I will cycle through all enemies and for each enemy object inside enemies array I will call their update method. I also need to define this enene array here. It will hold all currently active enemy objects. I will again use filter method to filter out all enemy objects that have marked for deletion property set to true. The same thing we did with projectiles.

    And I will cycle through all enemy objects here. Call their draw method and pass it context. So we have enemy class. We are updating, drawing, and removing old ones. We need to figure out how to add new enemies into our game. I will have a special method on the game class called add enemy. Every time this method is called, it will push one new enemy object inside this enemies array. Notice that I’m not calling the parent enemy class. I’m calling the child angler one class here on line 103. I can see it expects game as an argument. So I pass it this keyword because we are inside that game class.

    Now I want to call add enemy in a specific interval. We will use the same technique we used to periodically recharge ammo and it will be much easier because we are already calculating delta time. I will need two helper variables. Enemy timer that will count between zero and enemy interval. I want to add new enemy into our game every 1 second every thousand milliseconds.

    Same as we did with recharging projectiles. I say if this enemy timer which starts from zero is more than enemy interval. H let’s go up here and also declare game over property and initially set it to false.

    Back here on line 162 I say and at the same time this game over is false because I don’t want to be adding new enemies when the game ended. And we call add enemy method from here. We will also reset enemy timer back to zero so that it can count again. Else meaning enemy timer is less than enemy interval. We will keep increasing enemy timer by delta time which is already being passed to update method here. Nice. We are adding big red enemies to our game. I go up to line 105 and I make the width and also height smaller just for now before we start animating sprites. I will make the entire game wider when we get to later stages. For now, we are just building the main logic loop. We have player that can move and shoot projectiles. We have recharging ammo and there are swarms of enemies coming at us. Nice work if you are following along. As usual, I want to check if enemies are being correctly added and removed from the array. So, I console log this enemies array here. I want to make sure that filter method on line 161 does its job and we don’t have endlessly growing array. It works well. Enemies that moved off screen to the left are being removed. Perfect.

    It’s time to add some interactions. I need to check if enemies collide with player and also if projectiles collide with enemies. To save ourselves code repetition, I will create a reusable collision detection method on the main game object. I call for example check collisions. This method will take two arguments, two objects. I will call them rectangle one and rectangle two. And it will return true if they collide and false if they don’t. It will be a reusable function. So we can use it later and pass it player and enemy as rectangle one and two. And we can also pass it enemy and projectile to check if they collide. Let me show you exactly how to do that right now. When checking if two rectangles collide, we compare their X Y width and height in a specific way. So all objects we are comparing need to have X Y width and height properties for this to work. I will return a statement in brackets like this. So if the code in brackets evaluates true or false, it will immediately be returned by this function. Quick and easy to check if two rectangles collide. We need to run four checks. We need to check if horizontal x position of rectangle one is less than horizontal position of rectangle 2 plus its width. If this side is to the left of this side, I will comment out line 196 just for a moment so the movement doesn’t distract us. At the same time, we need to check if horizontal position of rectangle one plus the width of rectangle one is more than horizontal position of rectangle 2. If this side is to the right of this side, if both of these statements are true, we know they’re in the same space on horizontal x-axis, but it still doesn’t mean they collide. They can be far away vertically. Because of that, we need two more checks. We need to check if vertical position of rectangle one is less than vertical position of rectangle two plus the height of rectangle two if this side is above this side. And finally we check if the height of rectangle one plus its y position is more than vertical y position of rectangle two if this side is below this side. If all four of these checks are true, this entire statement will evaluate to true and check collision function will return true. If at least one of these is false, the entire statement will be false. And we know these two rectangles don’t collide. We stay inside the main game class and go to its update method. In this for each call, we cycle through every object inside enemies array from line 141 and we call their update method. As we go through that array one enemy object at a time, we will check collision between player object from line 137

    and that particular enemy rectangle. I do this by calling our custom check collision method we just wrote and I pass it player as rectangle one and enemy as rectangle two. If this message returns true, we know we are colliding and I will set marked for deletion on that animator true. I go down to line 200 and I unccomment request animation frame again so that we can test it.

    I can see that whenever player collides with an enemy that enemy gets deleted. Perfect. We have some interactions in the same for each method. I will also check each enemy against all currently active projectiles. They are stored inside this. Player.p projectiles and I call for each on that array as well like this. For each enemy inside enemies array, we check against every single projectile in projectiles array. I say if this check collision between projectile from this iteration of this for each and enemy from this iteration from this for each if check collision is true decrease enemy lives by one at the same time set marked for deletion on that projectile that collided to true so it gets deleted then I check if enemy lives are less or equal to zero

    And if they are set marked for deletion on that enemy to true as well. And lastly, I will increase score by plus one. Actually, I want each enemy to give different amount of score points when defeated. So, we will increase game score by score property on that enemy. Now, I used three properties that don’t exist yet. I go up to parent enemy class and I declare them here. I set lives to five and score that this enemy rewards will be equal to the number of its lives like this. I will also draw that number on top of each enemy for debugging purposes by calling fill text. Here I pass it this lives from line 92 and X and Y coordinates of that enemy. It’s very small. So I will set fill style to black and font property will be set to 20 pixels Helvetica for now.

    I need to define score on the main game class here on line 154. And I will also define winning score. Let’s set it to 10 points for now so it’s easy to test. Every time we increase score here, we check if the current score is more than winning score. And if it is, game over from line 153 is true. I go up to line 130 inside draw method on UI class. In this area, I will write code to display the current score to the user. I call built-in fill text method again and I pass it the text I want to draw. So this.game.score score and I want to draw it at coordinates 2040. I set font property to this do font size from line 126 plus pixels space plus this do font family from line 127. I put a string that says score colon space here plus we will concatenate this.game.score. Let’s see if everything works. All seems to be fine except for the text colors jumping around. I will move this fill style declaration up here and I set this dot color to white.

    I can also do other adjustments to the text. For example, shadows. If I want the shadows to apply only to the text and not all the shapes on canvas, I will put it between built-in save and restore canvas methods. Save method of canvas 2D API saves the entire state of canvas at that point in time. That includes settings like stroke style, fill style, line width, global alpha, all shadow settings we will use in a minute as well as other things like cliin region or the current transformation matrix. So whatever we do with scale, translate and rotate canvas methods. Then we can change the state of canvas however we want and we call restore. Canvas restore method restores the most recently saved canvas state. If there is no saved state, this method does nothing. So save and restore only work when used together. I will start applying canvas shadows. If I did that outside save and restore, shadows would get applied to everything including player and enemies. But in our case, these shadows will only affect shapes and text we draw in this area between this safe and this restore. Shadow offset X defines the distance that shadow will be offset horizontally. It can be positive or negative depending on if you want the shadow to be to the left or to the right from the source element. Shadow offset Y defines vertical distance of the shadow. I set shadow color to black. I could also set shadow blur, but I don’t need it at this time. So by wrapping code in save and restore, I make sure that canvas shadows and this fill style property affect only this drawing code and not other shapes and graphics we are drawing on the same canvas element. This is a pretty solid code base. You can use this as a base boiler plate for many different games. Maybe some of you want to make a copy of this project at this state and save it in a different folder so you can experiment with it later and use it as a starting point of a different game project.

    Win and lose condition in our game will depend on how many score points can the player get in a specific time window. We are going to handle those game over messages here before we call restore. So if game over property on the main game object is true, we set text align to center. We are going to display message one in larger letters and under that there will be message two and smaller font. What these two messages say will depend on how many score points we manage to get in a specified game time. I check if game score is more than winning score. Message one will say you win

    and message two will say well done. So that’s our winning message. Else we display the losing message. So message one is you lost.

    Message two is try again next time. Now we actually need to draw these messages on canvas. So font for the first message will be 50 pixels space plus font family. Then I call fill text and we draw message one in the center of the screen. So x coordinate will be game width time 0.5. Vertical y-coordinate will be game height time 0.5.

    I copy these two lines of code and I change some things to draw message 2 in smaller letters. 25 pixels here and message two here.

    I try to play the game and win. Nice. We get a winning message. I need to create some space between the lines. So, first message will be minus 40 pixels vertically and the second message plus 40 pixels vertically. Let’s see.

    Yeah, this is fine for now.

    We need a time limit for our game. On the main game object, I create two helper variables. I call them, for example, game time, which will start at 0 milliseconds, and time limit. For testing purposes, time limit will be 5,000 milliseconds, 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the game will end. And depending on how many score points we manage to get, we will display winning or losing message. In update method, I say if game over is false, take game time from line 181 and increase it by delta time. Delta time is the difference in milliseconds between time stamp from this animation loop and the time stamp from the previous loop. So, it’s the amount of milliseconds between frames. By adding delta time to game time every time we draw a new frame, we are keeping track of how many milliseconds passed since the game started. Game time variable is simply just accumulating milliseconds since the game started. If game time is more than time limit from line 182. So when the game has been running for 5,000 milliseconds, we set game over to true. The final game will run longer. I just use 5 seconds time limit here so it’s easy to test. Up inside UI class, we want to draw game timer on screen. Let’s do it in this area on line 143. I call fill text and the text will say timer colon plus this.game time add coordinates 20 100. Actually the variable we just created was called game time like this. And I need to add space here.

    Nice. So we can see game timer. I want to format that value so it looks a bit cleaner. I create a temporary helper variable called formatted time. I want to move the decimal point to show seconds. So this game.game times 0.001.

    That works. I also want to display only one digit after the decimal point. So I use built-in two fixed method and I pass it one. Two fixed method formats a number using fixed point notation. We can use it to define the number of digits we want to appear after the decimal point. Perfect. We have game time functionality. I’m getting a back when I get a losing message and then I defeat a couple of remaining enemies and that message switches to the winning message. I want to make sure that after game over message appears, we are no longer able to gain more score points. Down here inside update method on game class, I only want to increase score if game over is false.

    I get an error. It’s supposed to be this.ame game over like this. This will fix the bug. We have the base game. We have player, enemies, and projectiles. We have recharging ammo, score, timer, and win and lose condition. You can save this code in a separate folder and use it as a base skeleton for many different games if you want. From this point, I will start adding graphics and features that will be specific to our steampunk alien game. This will be the fun part. Let’s go.

    We will be using large detailed images and graphics today. I will put all of them here inside index html. And because all the code in script js is inside event listener for load event, JavaScript will only run after all our images have been fully loaded. This will prevent errors. I will separate our assets in this project into three different categories. Characters, which will include player and enemies. props, which will include things like mechanical parts that fall from enemies when we damage them, and game environment. Let’s start by creating the game world. First, img element with an ID of layer 1, and source will point towards that.png file. You can download all project images in the description. I will put all my images into a project folder I call assets. Our game world will be made out of four separate layers for parallax scrolling effect. layer one, two, three, and four like this. I don’t really want to draw these images on the web page like this. I only want to draw them on canvas with the JavaScript. So, inside style CSS, I set all of them to display none.

    In script JS on line 116, we have a custom class I called layer. Its job will be to set up each individual layer object. constructor will expect three arguments coming from the outside game, image and speed modifier. I convert those arguments into class properties like this.

    The width of the images we are using is 1,768 pixels and the height is 500 pixels. horizontal x coordinate will start at zero and y will also be zero.

    We will need update method to move the background layers from right to left as the game scrolls. If horizontal xcoordinate is less or equal to minus width from line 121, meaning the background image has moved across the screen and is now fully hidden behind the left edge of canvas. We set x back to zero so that it can scroll again. else decrease X by game speed times speed modifier. Each layer object will have different speed modifier to create parallax but all will depend on the main game speed variable so that all four layers can be controlled from one place. Game speed variable doesn’t exist yet. So I create it on the main game class here. Initially I set it to one. Layer class will also need a draw method. It will take context as an argument. I call built-in draw image method. This method needs at least three arguments. Image we want to draw. So this do image from line 119. And where on canvas we want to draw it. So I want to draw it at this.x this.y from lines 123 and 124. So we have our layer class which will handle individual background layers. We will also need background class that will put all four layer objects together to create the game world. Constructor will take the main game object as an argument. I convert it into a class property like this. Here we will grab all four images for each layer with JavaScript. So this image one will be document getelement by id and I pass it layer 1. The ID I give it in index html. This layer 1 property will be an object that holds an instance of layer class from line 116. So new layer like this. On line 117 I can see that layer class constructor expects game. image and speed modifier arguments. So I pass it this game from line 137. This do image one from line 138 and speed modifier will be one for now. Update method will move all layer objects

    and draw method will draw all of them. We will hold all layer objects inside this dot layers property. It will be an array. Let’s start with just layer one.

    Inside update method, I take this layers and I call for each method. For each layer object call their associated update method we declared on line 126. Draw method will expect context as an argument to specify which canvas we want to draw on. Inside we will do the same thing. call for each on layers array and for each layer object trigger its draw method and pass it that context value because we know that the draw method on line 130 expects that argument. So background will handle all layers to create the game world. Layer class will handle logic for each individual background layer object separately. Now to animate the background I just need to create an instance of background class inside game class constructor. Same as we did before with player and input handler classes. Background class expects game as an argument. So I pass it this keyword because I’m inside that game class. Right now inside update method on game class, I take this new background property and I call its update method. Inside the draw method on game class, I call draw method on the background object and I pass it context along here. Notice that I am drawing background first, then the player. This will make sure that the background is behind the player and doesn’t cover it. I’m getting an error. I go back to my background class and I want to put this layer 1 object into the array. So, I have to use this keyword.

    Nice. We are animating layer one of our background. I can change scrolling speed by changing the value I pass as a speed modifier. If I pass it five, the game speed is one because I’m multiplying game speed times speed modifier. 1 * 5 is five. So background will scroll at the speed of five pixels per frame. I will bring all other layers into the project. I bring their images first. Then for each one, I create an instance of layer class

    and I put all of them inside this dot layers array.

    Okay, now we see all four layers. I give each layer a different speed modifier. These values are passed as speed modifier and they will be multiplied by the current game speed. You can control scrolling speed of each layer individually like this. For now, I will set speed modifier to one on all four layers. You can see that because of line 128, as soon as the layer images slide completely off screen, they reset back to X position of zero so that they can slide again. We are getting this gap. To get a seamless scrolling background effect, we can use a simple trick. We can place a second identical image next to the first one. So at the point where the first image doesn’t fill the entire game area, the second image comes in to fill the gap. The second image will never be fully visible. It will be filling in just for that short period of time before the first image can reset to its starting position again. Reset to the original position happens in one frame. So it’s not visible by naked eye. It will create an illusion that we have one endless seamless background. How do I apply that in code? I simply draw a second identical image. But I need to make sure it is next to the first one. The second image will start where the first image ends. So its horizontal x position will be this. X plus this dowith like this. And that’s it. We have endless parallax background implemented in our game. I can change its scrolling speed by adjusting speed property on the main game object. Or I can change speed modifier values I pass as arguments when I create individual layer objects. I’m getting a small stutter when the background images reset back to position zero. I fix that by removing this else statement here.

    Now the reset should be smooth and not noticeable. I can also use small values as speed modifiers. I want the back layer to scroll very slowly. If I use speed modifier 0.2 and base game speed is one, that layer will scroll by 0.2 pixels per frame because we are multiplying game speed by speed modifier. I will try 0.2 0.4 four one because layer three is this ground image so that it should scroll the same speed as the rest of the main game objects and layer four are these items in the foreground so I will make them scroll at 1.5 base game speed the issue we have right now is at layer four these foreground objects should be in front of the player but right now they are behind because in the main animation loop I’m drawing all four background layers before I draw the player there are multiple ways to solve this I’ll use the simplest possible ible solution. I will draw only layer 1, two, and three here as part of the background class and remove layer four to draw it separately later. Because I removed layer 4 from the array, I need to call its update method first. From inside update method on the main game class here on line 226, I’m calling background.update which updates layers 1, 2, and three. And I will also call update on layer four like this. Inside draw method, we are redrawing all elements that make up our game for every animation frame. First, we draw the background which now contains only layer one, two, and three. Then, we draw the player on top of that. Then, we draw UI, then enemies, and on top of everything, we will draw background layer four to make it appear in front of all other game objects. The thing to understand is that since we are drawing everything on the same canvas element, what is drawn first will be drawn behind the thing that is drawn after. Background will be behind the player.

    Time to draw the player. We start by bringing player image into the project here in index html. I created this seahorse sprite sheet that you can download and use. We will have basic swimming animation and we will have power up animation row because when the player collects a special overcharged fish, it will absorb its energy. The player’s eyes and chest will light up and player will shoot two lasers instead of one. In script js, I go to line 59 inside player class constructor and I bring the image into the project using get element by ID. Same as we did with background images. In style CSS, I give player image display none.

    We are bringing the image into JavaScript project here on line 59. inside the draw method. Currently, we are drawing a black rectangle representing the player. To draw the sprite sheet, I will use built-in canvas draw image method. I pass it the image I want to draw. So, this image from line 59 and X and Y coordinates where I want to draw it. I want to draw it at player’s current X and Y position from lines 54 and 55. You can see we are drawing the entire sprite sheet with all its frames and rows. Draw image method can accept three arguments like this. We can also give it five arguments by adding width and height. In case of a spreadsheet like this, it will just squeeze all frames into an area of one frame. We don’t really want that. What we need is the longest version of draw image method that expects nine arguments and it gives us the most control over the image we want to draw on canvas. Those nine arguments are image we want to draw, source X, source Y, source width, and source height of the area we want to crop out from the source image, and destination X, destination Y, destination width, and destination height to specify where we want to draw that cropped out piece of image on destination canvas. We will need some helper variables as well. Frame X will cycle through the sprite sheet horizontally. Frame Y will determine row of the sprite sheet. In this case, row zero or row one. I need to crop out just one frame from the source spreadsheet image. So source X will be frame X times width of a single frame, which in our case is the width of player. Because I like to size my images to the same size we will draw them in game. When frame X is zero, we display this frame. When frame X is one, 1 * width of 120 pixels is 120. So we will draw this frame. Frame x2 will be 2 * 120, so 240 pixels, this frame, and so on. It will work the same with frame Y vertically. Frame Y times height of the player, which is identical to the height of the sprite sheet frame. Source width is width of a single frame. Source height is height of a single frame. Now we are cropping out just one frame. Perfect. I will animate the sprite sheet by cycling between frames horizontally from zero to max frame. In the case of player sprite sheet, max frame is 37, we count from zero. I will handle sprite animation logic down here. It’s simple. If frame X from line 56 is less than max frame from line 58, increase frame X by one. Else reset frame X back to zero. If you prepare your sprite sheets well in graphics editor, the way I prepared the seahorse for you, you only need very little code to get the animation. If I set frame Y to one, we will see the second row in the sprite sheet. We will use that for power up state. For now, I set it back to zero.

    At this point, I no longer need the black rectangle that represents the player. But it is still useful to keep track of that area because it will be player’s hitbox used for collision detection. I replace fill rectangle with stroke rectangle. I remove this fill style declaration. Stroke style will be black by default unless we set it to a different color. I want to have a debug mode in my game. When I press letter D, the game will show hitboxes and maybe other things like enemy hit points. player hitbox is this black rectangle we are outlining. So I only want to draw that if gamedebug is true.

    I need to create that property. So down here inside game class constructor I say this debug is true. The last thing I need is to create a switch that will allow the user to toggle debug mode on and off by pressing letter D. To create a toggle with JavaScript is simple. I go up inside our input handler class. And inside key down event listener, I create an else if statement and I check if the key that was pressed is letter D. If it is, I set the new debug property we just created on the game object to its opposite value. So if it’s true, I set it to false. If it’s false, I set it to true. Now when I play my game, I can toggle debug mode on and off by pressing the letter D. At this point, debug mode only shows and hides player hitbox. But we will attach more functionality to it a bit later.

    Nice. We are making a lot of progress. Let’s add more characters to the game. The base game loop will have three enemy types. I created multiple animations for each enemy type to give our game more variety, and I will show you how easy it is to swap between them. You can download all art assets in the project files in the section below. I made these character spreadsheets for you, so feel free to keep them for your personal projects. You can modify them and do whatever you want with them. You can credit me if you use it for your personal projects, but only if you want. Also, if you want the base Photoshop files or separate pieces in PNG format for all these characters so that you can animate them and turn them into spreadsheets yourself, let me know. The best free software to create custom sprite animations is Dragon Bones. If you want more advanced features, there is also a paid software called Spine. You don’t need any of that because I’m already giving you complete readytouse sprite sheets. This is just for those of you who want to learn more and create custom animations or different animations than the ones I created for you. So, I’m bringing three new images into the project. Angler one will be the most basic anglerfish enemy type. The sprite sheet has multiple different animations for the same character model, and we will use all of them in a minute. The second character is a different type of angler fish with more gears and chimney. These are steampunk machines that come to life. I gave them a lot of mechanical parts. These two anglerfish enemies will be just a simple basic enemy type that comes at the player trying to eat it. They are not very resistant and they are easy to deal with using our seahorse sentinel lasers. The only advantage they have is that they can come in big numbers sometimes. To deal with that, we have to be smart and use our slowly recharging ammo wisely. We can use the third enemy type to help us. I call this third enemy type lucky fish because it will be an enemy but also a power up at the same time. It will have two different models, different skins that we will use randomly when we create a new one. And the way we use this enemy type to make gameplay more interesting is that the player can do two things when this enemy appears. We can shoot it for a lot of score points or we can collide with it to collect it as a power up. It doesn’t have many lives. So players also have to be careful not to destroy it accidentally before they can collect it and activate the power up. The story is that this is an overcharged fish and when the sentinel seahorse collides with it, it absorbs its light and power to activate its ultimate offensive mode for a short period of time. It will all be represented by graphics to make it clear to the user what’s happening. So here is the parent enemy class and here we have a child angle one class that extends it and inherits from it. I will add this image property and I point it towards the spreadsheet we just included in index. HTML like this. We have three different animations that loop and when we create a new angular fish, we will assign it one of these three randomly by setting this frame Y property to a random number between zero or one or two. So math at random times three wrapped in math floor

    like this. Right now we have these small red rectangles representing each anglerfish enemy. Same as I did with player, I replace fill rectangle with stroke rectangle and I remove this fill style declaration.

    And also this one to draw enemy sprite sheet. Same as we did with player sprite sheet. I use built-in canvas draw image method. I pass it image I want to draw. So this dot image from line 124. If I just pass it X and Y coordinates, it will draw the entire big spreadsheet with all frames and all rows. I declare frame X that will help us to navigate in the spreadsheet horizontally. Frame Y will navigate vertically.

    Max frame will be the maximum horizontal frame which is 37 for this particular sprite sheet. I only want to draw enemy hitboxes when debug mode is active. So this line will run only if this.game.debug is true. I want to draw them at the original full size. So I remove this temporary size modifier we created earlier. If I pass a draw image method additional width and height, we will squeeze all frames into an area of one frame. So I will add four more to define an area I want to crop out. Same as we did with the player. So source X, source Y, source width, and source height. So image I want to draw, four arguments for the area I want to crop out from the source image and four arguments for where to place that cropped out image on destination canvas. Source X will handle horizontal cycling through the sprite sheet and it will be frame X from line 106 times width from line 124. We keep width property on a subclass because it will be different for each enemy type. Source Y will be frame Y from line 107 times height from line 125. Source width will be this dowidth. Source height is this doheight. I’m giving you spreadsheets that are already sized exactly as they will be drawn in the game. So, we don’t have to do any scaling with code here. It’s simpler and it’s more performance efficient to do it this way. The sprite animation itself will be simply going between frame x0 and max frame over and over. We will handle it here inside update method. If frame x from line 106 is less than max frame from line 108, increase frame x by one. else reset frame X back to zero and we are animating our first enemy type. The final game will be wider. I just keep the game area smaller so that I can show you everything on one screen. In style CSS, I hide images with ID angler one, angler two and lucky. I can set the game width to 700 pixels so that the large enemies fit better. You can see that each enemy fish has been randomly assigned one of the three possible animations I prepared for you. It gives our game a nice variety. I needs to account for game scrolling speed when calculating enemy positions. So down here inside update method on enemy class, I say this.x plus equals this. Speedx minus this.game.speed. This way we can have dynamic events that change game speed and enemies will always be correctly positioned in relation to our scrolling game world.

    Let’s add the second type of angler fish I created for you. I copy this child class that extends the parent enemy class and I call it angr 2. Width of a single frame is 213 pixels and height is 165 pixels.

    For this anime model, I created two different animations. So frame Y can be row zero or row one. So now we have two different enemy types. I want to have a simple functionality where I say something like when you create a new enemy in the game in 50% of cases make that enemy angler one. Otherwise make it anglr 2. We will handle that logic inside add enemy method. We will do it by rolling dice once every time we create a new enemy. So helper variable I call randomize is math.random. math.random declared like this will generate a random number between zero and one. If that random number is less than 0.5, create angler one enemy type.

    Else create angler 2.

    Up here on line 249, I increase game limit to 15 seconds. So we have some more time to test everything before game over is triggered. Immediately I can see the new angler 2 enemy type and I can see we are playing both animations. Perfect. Giving graphics like this for your game will go a long way to help you create unique stories and adventures for your players. If you are interested how to take drawings of static characters and turn them into animated sprite sheets with free dragon bones software like I did with this seahorse and angler for this class, let me know and I might make a course on that. On enemy class, I have this lives and this score properties. I want each enemy to have different values here. So, I cut it here and I paste it on each enemy type individually. Angler one will have two lives and when we defeat it, we will get two score points. Angler 2 will have three lives and it will give three score points. Quick test to see if everything works. I can see enemy lives and it gives the correct amount of score points. Don’t worry about the color of the numbers right now. We will fix that later.

    Let’s create a third enemy type. I copy this code block and I will call this subclass lucky fish for example.

    Width will be 99 pixels and height 95.

    This fish will have three lives and if destroyed it will award 15 score points. I will give it a property I call type and I will set it to lucky. We will use this to check which enemy type player collided with. Down on line 314 inside add enemy method. I add another else if statement like this. If random number is less than 0.3, we create angular one. Else if it’s less than 0.6, we create angler 2. When the random value is between 0.6 and 1, we create lucky fish using the new class we just wrote. There’s something strange happening with the animation. I go up to lucky fish class to see what’s wrong. I can see that on line 153 I need to point this image property to the correct sprite sheet. And we are animating our special lucky fish power up. There are two models because the sprite sheet has two rows and we are randomizing vertical coordinate with frame Y here on line 154.

    When the player collides with one of these special overcharged fish, it enters a power up mode. Let’s write that code now. We start by declaring this. Power up property on the player up here on line 65. Initially, I set it to false. Power up will last for a while and then the player will go back to the normal state. So, we will need another timer. We can use delta time for it. We will have two helper variables called power up timer and power up limit. Power up timer will be counted milliseconds. When it reaches power up limit of 10,000 milliseconds, 10 seconds power up state will end. We will handle that logic here in update method on player class. I say if this power up from line 65 is true, we enter this code block. Inside we check if power up timer is more than power up limit

    and if it is we set power up timer back to zero and power up to false. We will also set player sprite sheet to frame Y0. So normal default animation else mean and power up is true and power up timer is not yet higher than power up limit. The player is in power up mode and power up timer is counting milliseconds by adding delta time. We calculated delta time before inside the main animation loop. It’s the difference in milliseconds between time stamp from previous and the current loop. We need to make sure update method expects delta time as an argument on line 69.

    And we pass it to this method inside update method on the main game class here on line 286.

    So we are counting timer and frame Y is on the second row. So value is one. We count from zero. That will give us a special animation with light coming from chest and eyes. And also tail will animate differently because while in this state we will shoot two lasers, one from the nose and one from the tail at the same time. Two lasers for the price of one ammo. At the same time, we will be recharging ammo by 0.1 per frame. And this will be on top of the regular recharging speed. So ammo will be recharging very fast while in power up mode. So when power up is set to true, we enter this code block. Power up timer is increasing by delta time, counting how many milliseconds we are in power up mode. Frame Y is animating special overcharged animation and ammo is recharging fast. As soon as power up timer increases over the value in power up limit which will happen after 10 seconds 10,000 milliseconds we set power up timer back to zero. We set power up to false and we set animation row back to normal regular floating animation.

    Inside update method on game class in this area where we check for collision between player and enemies. We check if type property on that enemy is set to lucky.

    If it is, we call a special method on the player object called enter power up. We will write it in a minute. Else if we collided with another enemy that is not lucky fish, we decrease score by one as a penalty to the player. This will encourage player to collide with power up fish and avoid regular enemies to get maximum possible score.

    I go up to player class here on line 111. I create that method. So enter power up. Its job will be to set everything up when player enters power up state. I could have used state design pattern, but we don’t have that many player states. So, we can do it simply like this. When we enter power up, we set power up timer back to zero in case we collided with power up fish while we are already in power up state. This will make sure the timer resets and we get full 10 seconds from that second collision. Reset power up property on player object to true. We will also recharge ammo to its maximum possible value.

    I test it. I collide with our special overcharged fish and player gets overcharged. We are in power up mode and ammo is instantly refilled and it’s recharging very fast. Perfect. After 10 seconds, power up ends. Ammo stops recharging because we are well over max ammo value and player sprite sheet switched to the basic floating animation. Great. So when we are in power up mode, our sentinel seahorse will shoot defensive lasers from mouth and tail at the same time. It’s overflowing with energy and it can shoot extra free projectiles from tail every time it shoots one from the mouth. We can handle that functionality with JavaScript very easily by declaring additional method I call shoot bottom. In shoot top we handle shooting from the mouth. In shoot bottom we will handle logic for tail lasers. So inside I check if ammo is more than zero and we just push new projectile into projectiles array.

    I adjust its horizontal and vertical starting position because I want it to be coming out from the tail. I will call this method from inside shoot top like this. While we are running the code in shoot top, we check if we are in power up mode. And if we are, we execute shoot bottom method as well to add that extra free projectile. I tested lasers are just coming out from Seahorse’s mouth in basic floating state. If we collect the power up fish, we enter power up mode and both shoot top and shoot bottom methods are running. We are shooting two projectiles, but it costs only one ammo. Getting overcharged makes the player very powerful. Maybe we need some bigger bulkier enemies so we get more challenge. I made two types of mechanical whales for player to defeat. Probably you will need these powerups to do so. I want the projectiles to come from behind the player. We are drawing projectiles inside the draw method on player class. If I want them to be drawn behind, I need to make sure we draw projectiles first and the player second. Like this. I want to make it even more visually clear when powerup mode is active. For example, I can make this ammo display up here different color while in power up. We draw all these UI elements in our custom UI class on line 243. Before I draw all these small rectangles representing ammo, I check if power up property on player class is true. If it is, I set fill style to a different color. I want that color to be similar to the glow effect we have on our spreadsheets. So maybe this

    it works. The problem is that it also recolors the timer text because we define fill style here. We draw ammo and then we draw the timer. I can keep drawing ammo at the same coordinates in our game and I can move this entire code block further down.

    That way this white fill style will apply to timer and the other color will apply only to ammo like this.

    Instead of drawing a rectangle representing a laser projectile, we can also use an image. I bring it into the project here in props section in index html. You can download it in the video description or you can use your own image. I give it an ID of projectile. I bring it into the project here on line 38 inside projectile class constructor. This do image equals to document.getelement by ID and I use the ID I just gave it. So right now we are drawing yellow rectangles representing our projectiles. I delete that and instead I will use draw image method. This time it’s simple because the image is already the right size. I just give it three arguments. The image I want to draw and X and Y coordinates where to draw it on canvas.

    Nice. We are drawing images. These projectiles can also be animated either using a special sprite sheet or all different kinds of particle effects. We will use spreadsheet to animate projectiles in a bonus section of this course.

    Let’s add a web font to make the text look better. Adding a font to a canvas game is very simple. I go to Google fonts and I search for bangers. I like this comic book style. When you have your font, you click select your style here. You can select multiple different fonts like this if you want. Then we go up here to view selected families. If you choose more than one, this code will be adjusted to contain all of them as part of a single declaration. All we need to do to bring the font to our project is to copy these link tags and paste them up here in index html, ideally above the main CSS stylesheet to make sure the fonts are available from there as the code gets executed line by line from top to bottom. I go back to Google fonts website and here it also gives us a readym made CSS font family declaration. I copy it and I put it inside our style CSS file here on canvas element. Now my font is available. So I go to script js. Inside UI class I set this custom font family property we wrote before to bangers. And now all the text drawn by UI class. So score timer and game over messages will use the new font. Let’s adjust the winning text to something less boring. I want to keep the Victorian steampunk explorer theme going for this game. So, winning message will say most wondrous in big letters and with an exclamation mark. Secondary smaller message, we’ll say well done explorer. For the losing message, let’s use another old phrase. I will say blazes with an exclamation mark. It’s a word for when something goes wrong in old English.

    Secondary small message will say hm get my repair kit and try again for example. You can come up with your own messages here if you want. Now I have my messages in a new font so I can adjust the sizing and spacing. I want the main message one to be much bigger. I try 150 pixels. Well, that’s way too big. We could also adjust the text size to match the width of canvas, but let’s keep it simple for now and set it to 100 pixels.

    H I think I will go with 70 pixels.

    I want the messages to be closer together. So instead of 40 pixels offset, I tried 20 for both of them.

    I’m happy with the spacing and font size for now.

    I can see that we still have the projectile image visible in the top left corner of the browser window. So in style CSS I set it to display none. We can also see the spacing of the loin message. Now looks good. I would also like the little numbers above each enemy that represent their lives to be only visible when debug mode is active. To do that, I go up to enemy class and inside draw method, I only want to call that fill text method if debug mode is active. If debug property on the main game object is true.

    Let’s test it.

    Yes, I can only see hitboxes and enemy lives when in debug mode. Perfect.

    I want to make sure that player cannot leave the screen. Right now, if you press up or down arrow for long enough, player will move completely off screen. Inside update method on player class, we will handle vertical boundaries. Let’s start with the bottom boundary. If this doy vertical position of the player is more than the height of the game minus the height of the player, meaning that the bottom edge of the player is touching the bottom edge of the game area. Make sure we cannot move past this point like this. I actually want the player to disappear halfway so that it can avoid very big dangerous enemies we will add soon. I will do that by multiplying player height times 0.5 here and here. Now we can move half the seahorse’s body outside the screen and then we hit the boundary we just defined. I will do the same thing for the top boundary. Else, if player’s current vertical y-coordinate is less than minus player height time 0.5, meaning that the top half of the seahorse is offcreen, make sure it cannot move any further up like this. I test it. Top boundary works. Bottom boundary works. Perfect.

    Up on line 48, we have a particle class. I will use it to create broken parts fallen from enemies every time we hit them and for a big spray of spare parts when we completely destroy an enemy. We will also make those parts bounce from the floor for a specific number of times before they fall off screen. Particle class constructor will need a reference to the main game object. Start in horizontal x coordinate and start in vertical ycoordinate. I convert those arguments into class properties. As usual, we will use a spreadsheet with nine images in a grid. Each particle object will randomly choose one of these images so that we have some variety. This image is document.getelement by ID and ID will be gears. In index html, I bring it into the project here in the props section. ID is gears and file name is gears.png. You can download it in the project section as usual.

    In style CSS, I hide it by giving it display none.

    Here we are referencing that image with JavaScript. I will need some helper variables to navigate around the sprite sheet. Each particle object, each spare part flying from the enemy will have a random image assigned from these nine available options. Frame X will be a random number between zero and two. So column zero or one or two. Frame Y will be the same. So row zero or one or two. Combination of frame X and frame Y value for each particle object will point to a specific image in the grid. For example, frame X 2, frame Y1 will be here. Sprite size will be the size of individual frame. In this case, frames are squares 50 * 50 pixels. I want each particle to have a different size when drawn on canvas. So we will create size modifier and we will set it to be a random number between 0.5 and one. I will set it to one number after decimal point to reduce artifacts. So particle size will be sprite size multiplied by size modifier to make sure every particle is a different random size when drawn on canvas. I want particles to fall in both directions horizontally from the enemy. So speed x will be a random number between minus3 and + three. If it’s minus, it will move to the left. If it’s plus value, it will move to the right on the positive direction on horizontal x-axis.

    Speed y vertical speed will be a random number between zero and minus15. So particles will always start moving upwards on the negative direction on the vertical y-axis before they start being pulled down towards the ground by gravity. I set gravity to 0.5. Let’s see what kind of curved movement we get. We can adjust it later. Marked for deletion will initially be false. I want the [ __ ] wheels and spare parts to rotate as they fall. So I will have an angle property storing rotation angle for each particle separately starting at zero. And the speed of that rotation will also be randomized in this. VA property velocity of angle. Rotation speed will be a random value between minus0.1 and plus0.1 radians per animation frame.

    In update method, we will increase the rotation angle by VA. Speed Y will increase by gravity which will give it a nice curve. Let’s say the particle will start moving upwards because starting speed Y is -15. As we increase speed Y by gravity from line 6 to1, that minus5 value goes closer to zero. At that point, when it reaches zero, it will stop moving and it will be at its peak height. As speed Y further increases by gravity value into positive numbers, it increases by 0.5 per animation frame. That particle will start falling down faster and faster until it disappears below the bottom edge of canvas. This dox minus equals speed X to move particles horizontally. this do y plus equals speed y to actually apply that speed y value affected by gravity to the vertical coordinate of each particle. If the particle fell off screen vertically, so its y-coordinate is more than game height plus size of the particle. Or if the game scrolled past the particle, so its x position is less than zero minus particle size. Set its mark for deletion property to true.

    Draw method will take context as an argument. We call draw image method. pass it the image we want to draw and XY width and height where to draw it on canvas. Since the particle image is a grid of frames, it’s a sprite sheet. We only want to crop out one individual frame for each particle object. I will also need to specify cropping position. So source X, source Y, source width, and source height. Source X is this frame X from line 54 times this. sprite size from line 56. Source Y is frame Y time sprite size.

    Source width and source height will be this dot sprite size like this. We want to crop out a frame 50 * 50 pixels from the source sprite sheet. Then we multiply that by size modifier and we draw it at that scaled size. We will need an array that holds all active particle objects. I will create it here as this particles property on the main game object.

    For each particle in that array, we call their update method like this. Use an ES6 arrow function syntax to keep the code cleaner.

    After that, I call built-in filter method on that array and I replace that original array with a different one that contains only particles that have marked for deletion property set to false. All the particles with mark for deletion property set to true will be removed.

    Inside the draw method, again we call for each on each particle object. We call its draw method and we pass it context as an argument as it expects up here on line 73.

    We have our particle class ready. We just need to find a good place in our code to add these particles. I go down to update method on game class. And here where we check for collisions between projectiles and enemies, I create a for loop. This for loop will run 10 times.

    And each time it runs it takes this particles array and it will push new particle object inside. I know that particle class constructor expects a reference to the main game object as the first argument. So I pass it this because right now in our code we are inside that game object. Each particle also needs starting X and Y coordinates. So I pass it X and Y of the enemy that just collided with a projectile. I don’t want the particles to come from the top left corner of each enemy. I want them to come from the middle. So, I add enemy width time 0.5 horizontally and enemy height time 0.5 vertically.

    I copy this for loop. I actually want 10 particle spare parts to fall from the enemy when it collides with the player and gets destroyed.

    down here. I remove the for loop and just push one particle. I test it.

    Nice. We have a splash of spare parts coming out of enemy when they are destroyed by colliding with the player. Player in this game is indestructible. We will make that clear by giving it a special animated shield later in the bonus section. I copy this code that adds just one particle. And I actually want to put it here. So that every time projectile collides with enemy, one particle falls out. Nice. So now every time enemy gets hit by a projectile, one particles per part falls. If enemy is destroyed by colliding with the player, 10 particles come out in all directions. I want the particles to bounce off the floor for a specific number of times before they fall off screen. To make this effect even more intense, I go up to our particle class. And here on line 65, I create a helper variable. I call it bounced. And initially I set it to false. I also want to define a margin from the bottom end of canvas from which point the particles will bounce. So I call it for example bottom bounce boundary like this. And I set it to 100 pixels. If particle reaches this point, I want it to bounce. So I will switch its speed Y value to its opposite. If vertical position of the particle is more than game height minus bottom bounce boundary. So somewhere around this point. And at the same time if this dobbounce from line 65 is false. Set bounced to true so that it doesn’t bounce again after this. And set speed Y to its opposite value by multiplying it times 0.5.

    So particle is falling. It reaches this point and its current speed is for example + 5. We switch it to minus 2.5 making it bounce moving upwards again. Still line 70 keeps applying gravity. So eventually we reach zero and go into positive numbers making the particle curve towards the ground again and eventually fall off screen. It bounces once sets bounced to true. So this if statement check will fail for the second bounce and particle will just fall off screen.

    Maybe I don’t want particles to all bounce from the same vertical point on the ground. How about they bounce from a range between this and this point roughly to match our ground level image. So bottom bounce boundary will be a random value between 60 and 160 pixels from the bottom edge of canvas area. What about if we want to specify how many times each spare part bounces from the ground rather than having them bounce just once? On line 65, I set the initial bounced property to zero. In this check on line 74, I check if bounced is less than two. And each time we bounce, I increase bounced by one. Here on line 75, now each particle bounces twice before it falls off screen.

    down here where we create particles. I copy this for loop that creates 10 particles. We create one particle when enemy collides with the projectile. I paste that for loop here to create 10 particles when enemy is destroyed by a projectile. So particles will come out of enemies after three different events. When enemy collides with a player and is destroyed, we get 10 particles. When projectile collides with an enemy, we get one particle. When enemy is destroyed by a projectile, we get 10 particles. So, we know how to create particles when certain events happen in our game. We know how to bounce them off floor and we know how to control how many times they bounce.

    We also have this angle property that is increasing by VA on line 69. If you never done rotation on canvas, this part might be a little bit challenging, but I will try to explain. Each particle has a different angle value that’s increasing by VA value that’s also randomized for each particle object. It means that at any point each particle is at different rotation. Their angles have different values. To make sure that rotation angle only affects one specific particle and doesn’t spill out and affect other objects we draw on canvas, I will wrap the entire drawing code between save and restore. Save method takes note of the current canvas state. When we call restore later that restore will look for its associated save method and it will reset all canvas settings back to that point in time. Anything done between save and restore will just affect the code the drawing code in between. After we call restore, everything will be reset to its original state. To rotate something on canvas, we first have to move a rotation center point, the point that is normally considered coordinates 0 on canvas. So the top left corner, we have to translate that point over the object we are rotating. So translate to the current x and y position of the particle. Calling translate like this moved rotation center point from top left corner to this dox this doycoordinates of this particle. Then we call built-in rotate method that takes angle value in radians. I pass it the angle property that is increasing for every animation frame by va here on line 69. Not sure if you can see but particles are currently making very large circles around their x and y coordinates. It is because we are going to another distance of X and Y from these coordinates because of the fact that we translated 0 0 and rotation center point to these coordinates. For all intents and purposes, this dox and this doy between this save and restore in this area of our code is considered point 0 on canvas. And then I’m drawing this particle at this dox this doy from that translated point further and I’m rotating it making it go in larger circles around that center point. I fix it by changing x and y to zero here because position of that particle is already defined on line 81 in translate call.

    Now the particles are rotating from their top left corner. So I shift them a little bit by half of their width and half of their height to rotate around the center point of each particle.

    I have other classes about rotation. For now, let’s just move on. If you don’t fully understand some things about rotation, don’t worry. It will become more clear as you use these techniques more often in the future. We are getting a lot of particles now. If you are on a very old computer, you can reduce the amounts of particles to get better performance. I don’t have any performance issues on my computer. Let me know if it runs smoothly for you or if you had to decrease the number of particles to get a good frame rate.

    The particles don’t move correctly in relation to the ground artwork. I need to go here and include the game scrolling speed in the horizontal position calculation.

    H. So, this actually has to be plus

    Yes, now it works. Awesome.

    Time for a small cleanup. First of all, I want the debug mode to be disabled by default. We can still press letter D on keyboard to toggle it on and off, but when the game first loads, I want player and enemy hitboxes and enemy lives to be hidden by default. We have a bug in our game. When the player collides with any enemy type, it goes into a power up mode. That would make the game too easy. We only want the player to enter power up when it collides with power up fish. And later in the bonus section, there will be another way to enter power up for skilled and fast players who can shoot fast and big moonfish before it comes too close. To make sure the power up works correctly, I just need to fix this comparison operator on line 357. Like this. Now, our Sentinel Seahorse only enters power up if it collides with Lucky Fish. Another bug is when we enter power up, players ammo gets automatically assigned to max ammo. This is meant to refill the ammo. But if the player saved up and has current ammo higher than maximum ammo, entering power up will actually reduce the total amount of ammo they have. I fix it here on line 159 inside enter power up method on the player class. We only refill ammo to max ammo if the current ammo is less than max ammo.

    Like this.

    That works. I’m using VS Code editor. When I press Ctrl + F, I can look for all console locks. I want to delete them. Let’s keep our code and console clean. Particle spare parts falling from the enemies are not bouncing from the correct area. I want the bounce area range to match the ground artwork a bit closer. Here on line 66 inside particle class constructor, I set bottom bounce boundary to a range between 60 and 140 pixels.

    I want to change the order in which we draw our game elements. Because we are drawing everything on a single canvas element, the order in which we call draw methods will determine what is behind and what’s on top. I go down here inside the main draw method on game class. And I want to draw the background first, then UI elements. So score, ammo, timer, and game over messages. Then we draw player, projectiles, particles, and enemies. On top of that, you can play with the draw order here if you want. If you want UI to be on top of everything, for example, just draw it last. I think it looks better like this because it’s a bit 3D or 2 and 1/2D when it’s slotted between the game world and game characters like this. We can do many other things to make the UI feel like a part of the game world. I have lots of ideas. Maybe in the next class I’ll show you more. Game text can be floating, moving, changing colors. It’s easy to do it if you follow my other coding tutorials and you understand canvas animation well.

    We have a power up mode. So the game currently is very easy. When we are in power up enemies have no chance. Let’s add a massive enemy type that when defeated splits into five smaller enemies. That should give the player some challenge. Hope you like teeth and tentacles. It will also introduce some tactical decisions into the game. Maybe sometimes it’s better to avoid the enemy altogether if we are low on ammo when we know we can’t deal with the little enemies that come out of it when we destroy the big one. I copy lucky fish class that extends the main parent enemy class. And I renamed that copy hive whale. This is a massive mechanical whale that serves the enemy swarm as a hive vessel containing a lot of aggressive and fast drones. Width is 400 pixels and height is 227 pixels. This image will be looking for an ID of hive whale. I need to go to index html to bring that spreadsheet into the project. You can download it in the project files section. I made just one animation rule for this enemy type. It’s a lot of work animating all these tentacles and creating this spreadsheet. And also it’s already a big image file. image with an ID of hive whale and source is assets/hive whalepng. In style CSS, I give that image display none. Frame Y will be zero because this sprite sheet only has one animation row. It will have 15 lives. It can take a lot of damage. When defeated, it will give player 15 score points. Type is hive like this and it will move very slow. So here I will override the default speed X property from the parent enemy class and I set it to a random number between minus0.2 and minus 1.4 pixels per frame. I want the enemies to be spread a bit more down, not all the way to the bottom of the game area, but maybe 95% of the game height. I do it by replacing this vertical position calculation on angler one, angler 2, lucky fish and hive whale with 0.95 position where enemies can spawn in the game can be anywhere between zero and 95% of game height. We need this extra space. There are some large enemies incoming. We add hive whale into the project down here inside add enemy method on the main game class. I copy this line and I say if randomize is between 0.6 and 0.8 add new hive whale enemy type.

    And here they come. I can enable debug mode by pressing letter D to see its massive hitbox and its current lives. We need to hit the whale with 15 projectiles to destroy it. But that’s not all. When destroyed, five smaller, fast, and aggressive drones come out of it, and they will go straight for our Sentinel Seahorse character. Let’s create that enemy type.

    Drones are small, fast, and aggressive creatures. They live inside hive wells where they collect resources and feed on whatever the hive will swallows. Let’s make sure that Sentinel Seahorse is not their next meal. I copy this code block and I will name it drone.

    This enemy type is different. They are ambush predators and they always hide inside the hive whale ready to jump out and attack their prey. They will not be coming at player from the right side of the screen like the other enemy types do. We will only see them when we destroy a hive whale. For that reason, when we create a new drone using this class, we need to pass it game object as usual, but also we need to pass it the current X and Y position. It will be the current position of the hive while we just destroyed. I convert X and Y into class properties as we always do.

    Image will be looking for an element with an ID of a drone.

    I bring it into the project here in index html. ID is a drone, source is assets/ dronepng. I created two different animation rows. Each one will be moving differently so we get some variety. Frame Y will be a random number, either row zero or row one. Each drone will have three lives and will award player with three score points if destroyed. I will give it type drone. I’m not sure if I will use this type property for something, but might as well declare it. We might need it later. This enemy can move very fast if it wants to. It will have a random speed range from a minus0.5 to -4.7 pixels per frame.

    The way I want this to work is when we destroy hive whale with projectiles, it will spawn five drones. In star CSS, I give the drone image display none. If the hive whale gets destroyed by colliding with the player, there will be no drones because the drones would spawn too close to the player and there will be no time to try and aim and target them properly. It would not be a good gameplay experience having enemies spawn so close to the player. If projectile collides with an enemy and if lives of that enemy are less or equal to zero, that enemy is destroyed. We check if the enemy that was just destroyed has type property set to hive. If it is a hive whale, we take enemies array and push one new drone enemy object inside. If you remember drone class expects game and X and Y position were to appear in the game world. I want it to appear under the destroyed hive whale. So I pass it X and Y of that destroyed enemy. Let’s test it. I destroy a hive whale and we have one drone coming out of it. Nice. Let’s put this code into a for loop that runs five times to create five drones.

    We have five drones, but they all appear on top of each other in the top left corner of the hive whale. That’s not ideal. Let’s spread them around a bit. Starting position of the drone will be horizontal X position of the hive whale that was just destroyed plus a random number between zero and the width of the hive whale enemy. Starting vertical position of each drone will be vertical Y position of the hive whale plus a random number between zero and height of the hive whale like this.

    Maybe just height time 0.5.

    Nice. Now the drones are more spread out. Some move very fast, some move slower. This is good. We get too many particles. I don’t want each drone to burst into 10 particles when destroyed. What if we make the number of particles per parts that fall from enemies when destroyed to be equal to the score that enemy gives?

    I also make the same change here on line 383 when enemies get destroyed by colliding with the player. Now, hive whale should burst into 15 particles because when defeated, it gives 15 score points. Each drone will turn into three spare parts. That way, we won’t get a massive flood of 50 [ __ ] and wheels when we destroy five drones.

    I want the game to feel good when we score some points and destroy an enemy. I want that enemy to really pop. So, not only we will turn it into spare parts that bounce around, we will also play a dust or fire explosion from a sprite sheet. I have two special sprite sheets for this purpose. You can take them and use them in your other projects as well if you want. Many games need dust and fire effects like this. All art assets for this episode were custom made by me or artists I hired. So there is no copyright. You can use them however you want. Enjoy. We will have the parent explosion class and we will extend it into two child classes. Dust explosion and fire explosion. Parent explosion class will contain methods and properties shared for all explosion types. It will expect game X and Y as arguments because I want the animation to play over the enemy that was just destroyed. So that X and Y position will be passed from the outside each time we create a new explosion object. Both fire and smoke explosion will be single row sprite sheets. I could also have placed them into a single image. We will cover compact sprite sheet animation in a later class, not today. I will cycle through them from left to right from frame x0 to max frame. Sprite height is the height of a single animation frame in the sprite sheet and it will be the same for both explosion types. I made both sprite sheets the same height of 200 pixels. So that property can be on the parent class. It’s a property shared between all explosion types. Sprite width. The width of a single animation frame in the sprite sheet will be different for each type. Because of that, it will sit on each subclass separately. We will define that in a minute. The sprite sheets have only eight frames, so they will animate very fast. I want us to be able to control FPS, frames per second on this animation. And I want that FPS to be independent of animation speed of the rest of the game. We will do that using delta time again. And we will need two helper variables. Timer that will count from zero adding delta time over and over until it reaches interval value. When we reach it, we will serve the next animation frame in the sprite sheet. Interval will be th00and milliseconds, 1 second divided by 15. So the animation will run at 15 fps. I can also put frames per second in a separate property if I want to. We can control FPS by adjusting that property instead. Marked for deletion will be initially set to false. As usual, we will need update method and it will expect delta time value as an argument. We calculate delta time in the main animation loop. Draw method will expect context as an argument to specify which canvas element we want to draw on. Update method will simply animate the sprite sheet by increasing frame X property from line 302. Draw method will draw currently active animation frame cropped out from the sprite sheet. Let’s start by just giving it image we want to draw and X and Y coordinates where to draw it. So this is the parent explosion class. It contains properties and methods shared between all explosion types. We will have two child classes. Smoke explosion and fire explosion. I say class smoke explosion extends explosion. That extends keyword creates a relationship between these two classes and it sets up prototype based inheritance behind the scenes for us. Smoke explosion subclass now has access to properties and methods that sit on explosion superclass. We will also have fire explosion subclass. Constructor will expect game and x and y coordinates. In index html I bring the sprite sheets into the project here in the props section.

    IDs will be smoke explosion

    and fire explosion.

    In style CSS we give both of them display none.

    I point the subclass towards that image using get element by ID. I’m placing this image property on the subclass because that image is specific only for this subclass. Parent superclass contains only properties and methods that are shared between all subasses. Sprite width. The width of a single frame will be 200 pixels. Both sprite sheets have eight frames. So max frame will be eight. Rectangles on canvas are drawn from the top left corner. I want the explosion animation rectangle to be coming from the exact center of the enemy rectangle. I can do it like this. I’m going to give it width and height property and I set it to be equal to sprite width and sprite height. I take X and Y properties from the parent class and I place them on the child class. Once we have a width property here, I offset X position by half of its width, moving its center point to the middle of the image horizontally. I will also move the vertical Y position into the middle of the image vertically like this. Down here inside game class constructor, I create an array that will hold all currently active explosion objects. Inside update method, same as we do for particles, I will call for each

    and for each explosion object in explosions array. I call its update method. We will also use filter method to remove all explosion objects that have marked for deletion property set to true.

    Inside the draw method, I call for each on each explosion object again and I draw them passing it context. Notice I draw explosions after I draw enemies. So they will be drawn on top of enemies. The order in which we call draw methods here matters. We will have two different explosion types. So same as we did with adding different types of enemies to the game. On the main game class, I define a custom method I call add explosion. We will have a variable that will randomize a number between zero and one like this. If that random number is less than one for now

    take this explosions array and push new smoke explosion inside I pass it game. So this keyword it will also need a position. So we will take it from the enemy we just collided with. We will add a reference pointing to that entire enemy object here as an argument. X and Y of this explosion will be X and Y properties from that enemy object that is passed here. Let’s try to add it into the game and see what we’ve got so far. Up here on line 419, we check if player collided with an enemy. That enemy will be destroyed and we want to animate an explosion at that position. So I will call this add explosion like this. I pass it the enemy player just collided with and destroyed as an argument. I also want the explosion animation to play when we destroy enemy with projectiles. So here we check if projectile collided with an enemy. If that enemy’s lives are less or equal to zero, it will be destroyed. And we animate a splash of spare parts. We set marked for deletion on that enemy to true. And we will add explosion here as well like this. I test it and we are getting no explosion animations. I don’t see any console errors. Let’s debug it by console logining explosions array from inside add explosions method. Every time we add one, we console log the entire array. I can see that add explosion method runs and creates the console lock for us. But the array remains empty. Let’s see what I did wrong. Probably I made a typo somewhere.

    Oh, I see this if statement never runs because there is no this.randomize property. Easy fix. We need to refer to this temporary helper variable like this.

    Now I’m getting a console error which is better because this error will guide us to where the problem is. The error says we must call constructor in derived class before accessing this. Now I know the problem is inside smoke explosion class constructor. This is a so-called derived class. When I create a new smoke explosion object, I want the parent class constructor to run first, creating properties and values shared for all child classes. And then I want to add this little bit of code that’s specific only for smoke explosion class. To do that, I have to call the parent class constructor using a special super keyword. I know that parent class constructor expects game X and Y. So, I pass these arguments along. It’s a good lesson for me to remember on a child class we must always call superclass constructor before using this keyword otherwise we will get a reference error. Now when I create a new smoke explosion we create one new blank object. This constructor will run first creating these properties and then these properties will be added on top of that. Smoke explosion will also have access to update and draw methods because of the inheritance that was set up behind the scenes by the special extent keyword we used. We fixed all the bugs and typos. When I test it, I can see that everything works and we are adding smoke explosion into the explosions array and we are drawing the entire sprite sheet at that position. Perfect. Let’s clean it up and make it into a proper sprite animation. Now this dust cloud is a sprite sheet. We are drawing it using built-in draw image method on line 312. As we already did multiple times in this class, we know that to animate a sprite sheet, we need to crop out individual frames and swap through them one by one. We do it by passing draw image method nine arguments. Image we want to draw source X, source Y, source width, and source height to specify area we want to crop out. We want to crop out one spreadsheet frame at a time and destination X, destination Y, destination width, and destination height to tell JavaScript where we want to draw that cropped out image on destination canvas. We already have the values for destination. We just need to specify the crop area. Source X will be frame X from line 300 times sprite width from line 320. Source Y will always be zero because this sprite sheet has only one row of frames. Width of the cropped area will be sprite width. Height will be sprite height. So now because frame X times sprite width determines horizontal cropping coordinate as we increase frame X inside update method the frames will cycle and animate. Now it works but the animation is coming from the top left corner of each enemy and it plays very fast. Also, we are not removing all the explosion objects that already animated and we have an everinccreasing array. I will check if frame X is more than max frame. And if it is, I know that entire animation played. At that point, it’s safe to set marked for deletion property to true. And that explosion object will be removed by filter method we already defined earlier. In the browser console, I can see that the old explosion objects are being correctly removed. Nice. I want the animation to run at 15 frames per second. I do it by creating a periodic event again. Timer will be counting from zero to the value of milliseconds defined in interval. Whenever it reaches that value, it will trigger next frame in the spreadsheet and resets back to zero so that it can count again. So if this timer from line 303 is more than this interval from line 304, increase frame X by one. else keep increasing timer by delta time accumulate in milliseconds until it reaches the interval.

    This will serve only the first frame. It’s because after timer reaches interval, it needs to be reset back to zero so that it can count again for the next animation frame. It still doesn’t work. I can see that update method expects delta time as an argument to be used to increase timer value on line 313. I have a feeling I’m not passing it that value when I call it. I go down to line 422

    and I pass update method on explosion object delta time. Now we are animating the explosions at 15 frames per second. Structuring your code like this will allow you to set different FPS for different objects in your game. In this case, we did it because player and enemy sprite sheets are optimized for high frame rate, but explosion animation has only eight frames. So, it looks better if we stagger the animation speed. If you want to turn this into a mobile game, you would have to do this for all objects, player and enemies. You would have to delete some frames and stagger their animation because current mobile phones will struggle to serve sprite sheets with so many frames we are using for our characters. If you want lower frame rate spreadsheets for these characters, let me know. so I can easily make them for you. The explosions are animating in the top left corner of each enemy. I want them to be in the middle. So I adjust the initial X coordinate we pass it by half of enemy width

    and the vertical coordinate will be adjusted by a half of enemy height like this. This looks good. I’m noticing that we are not showing the first animation frame of our smoke explosion sprite sheet. It’s because we first call the update method that increases frame X by one and then we draw it. I can fix it by calling draw first and then I call update like this.

    Now we can see the first sprite frame as well and it stays long enough so we can actually notice it. Nice.

    Let’s delete this console lock. We don’t need it anymore. I can change the animation speed of dust clouds by changing the value here in FPS property. When I set it to a very low value, like five frames per second, it becomes obvious that they are not being correctly placed within the game world. They are static, but they should be scrolling along with the game world for the positioning to look right. I fix it by accounting for the current game speed in their horizontal coordinate calculation like this. Now they scroll with the game world and it looks as it should.

    I think a good FPS for this sprite sheet is around 30 frames per second.

    Yes, I’m happy with this for now.

    Let’s create a fire explosion. This time it will be very simple. I copy all the code inside the constructor into the other child class. Image will have ID of fire explosion like this. I actually decided to refactor the fire sprite sheet. And now both smoke and fire sprite sheets have frames 200 * 200 pixels. In that case I can remove sprite wave on child class and I can place it on the parent explosion class because now it’s shared for both explosion types. H in that case I can actually take all these properties and add them on the parent class as well.

    I remove them here since they will be automatically inherited. Nice. That’s cleaner. So only the images are specific for each class. All other properties and methods will be shared and inherited from the parent class.

    Down here inside add explosion method I say if randomize is less than 0.5 create smoke explosion. Else careful about the brackets and syntax here. else create fire explosion.

    Nice work. Now, sometimes we get a fire effect, sometimes we get a smoke effect.

    Inside game class constructor, I adjust time limit to 30 seconds. Winning score will be 100. So, the player needs to get at least 100 score points in 30 seconds to see the winning message. I set ammo interval to 350 milliseconds so that ammo recharges a bit faster. And I set enemy interval to 2 seconds. Let’s test it.

    We have a bug. I got a winning message and there were some leftover enemies and colliding with them reduced my score below 100 and losing message was displayed instead. I need to make sure that after the winning or losing message appears, colliding with enemies doesn’t affect the score.

    I do it here on line 437. Only decrease score when we collide with an enemy if game over is false.

    Let’s tune the game into a more playable and challenging state. I make hive whale less likely to appear in our game and lucky fish more likely like this. I give hive whale 20 lives.

    Lucky fish will have five lives. Angler 2 will have six lives. Angler one will have five lives. For example, I set game width to,000 pixels. This will make the game easier as we can see enemies coming sooner and we can plan and manage our moves and ammo better. I try to play to get a better idea of how much score I can get in 30 seconds. Okay, the game ended because we reached winning score 100 in 25.1 seconds. Let’s set winning score to 80.

    I can strategize now. I can see there is a lucky fish coming that will replenish my ammo. So, I will use as much as my ammo as possible before I get the refill. Now, I get a refill and I can go crazy with my lasers. I will be careful not to hit the lucky fish coming at the bottom so that I can collect it and make my power up state longer.

    Okay, it took 24 seconds to get the score over 80. game has a time limit of 30,000 milliseconds. 30 seconds. If the game runs for that amount of time, it will end. We need to get enough score points in that time period. This is just my choice. You don’t have to do this, but I want the game to always run for 30 seconds. I don’t want it to end as soon as we get over the winning score. So, I will comment out line 456. Game will only end when time limit is over 30 seconds. And based on how much score we manage to get, we will see a winning or losing message. There is an element of luck in the game we designed because it is very dependent on which type of enemy spawns. If we get just lucky fish and hive whales, we will get a lot of score points fast. If we get only anglers, it will be very hard to win the game. I gave you all the tools and techniques you need to understand. You can now adjust the game time, enemy health, and winning score yourself to make the game as easy or as difficult as you want it to be.

    The game runs well on my gaming PC, but if you have a Chromebook or some very old laptop, you might be experiencing performance issues. I focused this class mostly on handling graphics and animation. There is a whole other set of optimizations we can do to make this run even on the oldest machines, but that’s beyond the scope of this class. Notable optimizations would be for example to draw on multiple canvas elements and only clear parts of canvas that actually update it. Object pooling technique would also have a massive positive effect on the performance. It means that we create a pool of particle and projectile objects and we just reuse them over and over rather than creating new ones and discarding them after one use. For this project, the quick changes you can make to improve performance would be to increase enemy interval property to make enemies spawn slower. If your computer is not keeping up, you can also remove all shadow properties inside UI class. Canvas shadows are still not well supported and optimized in some browsers, especially in Firefox. We can reduce the number of particle spare parts that fall from enemies when damaged. And we can also make sure they only bounce off the floor once or that they don’t bounce at all. If you are still getting performance issues, you can also merge all background layers into one image and just animate that one layer. That will increase performance. massively. Same goes for our spreadsheets. I gave you sprite sheets with 37 animation frames, which looks really good and smooth in motion. But if you struggle to get 60 fps, reducing the number of frames and have each animation to be just around 15 frames, let’s say, and staggering animation speed with delta time like we did with animated explosions would make the performance better as well. I will probably release a version of sprite sheets with lower frame rate for each character so you don’t have to do it manually yourself. Bonus extended lesson where I add more enemy types, animated projectiles, shield, and simple sound design is linked in the video description, but feel free to play with the code and add your own features with the techniques we learned today. Let me know if you finish this project by typing I did it in the comments. If you want more vanilla JavaScript game death, come and build this game with me. I will show you how to use state design pattern for more complex player controls and movement and how to split our code into individual modules. Click like, please. I’ll see you there.

  • 06/16/2026 – Grow Botik

    without any other companies, without individuals that helping you out as a soloreneur. So, we’re going to show you how you can do that and how you can maintain it as a soloreneur. And when we say that, we’re the only only company that can say literally as a soloreneur without some third party company has to come along to handle all of the support of your clients. Now, let me just repeat one more time because I’m still seeing people asking the same question. The difference between monthly billing and yearly billing is only two major differences. One is how many growth plans you’re going to get per month. Now, a growth plan is worth a lot of money to you. 20 growth plans can land you deals. 40 can land you multiple deals. The question is, are you thinking big or are you thinking bigger? That is it. That is the difference because on Tuesdays and Wednesdays, we will show you how to crush it and send this out to as many businesses as humanly possible. So that is the major major difference. And the other difference is if you don’t want to speak to anyone ever. Perhaps you’re in the other end of the world. Maybe you never want to speak to a business person. Well, you can hand them over to us. So it’s a completely autonomous business. You never have to speak to a single person. When you join a monthly, you get that as a service for 3 months. We will handle sales for you if you want. If you join yearly, we give that to you for an entire year. So I hope that clarifies matters and make your decision right now. That’s the only question you have to answer right now. Are you going monthly or saving yourself a ton of money and going yearly? Now guys, we are about to now go into a deeper dive into Gobotic. We’re going to show you how you can build a massive business using Grobotic. We’re going to go deep diving into the system. So again, you got the link on the page to join. You can do it right away putting into the chat box as well. Make sure to join as soon as you can and especially if you go at pro, you got a massive discount and ext extra benefits that you will not get in the future. All right, let’s get dive let’s dive right into robotic on a deeper level. You know what? Let’s turn on our videos guys. This is it after years of non-stop 246 work on the robotic system. Here he is. There you go guys. Everyone just thank you. What an amazing job you’ve done. Let’s get started from the very beginning as we said. Okay, guys. So, what I’m Barry, can you see my screen? Yeah. All right. What I’m showing you here is the agency hub. Uh, we’re not going to spend too much time here because we mainly want to see what robotic does. But I am going to show you this section. This section is where you create chat links. So, what we talked about before, you can do your markup, right? Mark up to as much as you want the different prices and the system is using the retail prices here to basically build a growth plan calculate uh what’s going to be the cost for the end client and the kick here is once you create that link you can share via DM via email LinkedIn Facebook you can send it directly to agencies excuse me to uh businesses who will talk about it you can put on your website anybody who clicks this link goes into the chat with the pricing that you set. So now if they go through the chat, the analysis, the growth plan, it’s all built on that pricing structure. So you can decide that you’re going with a specific group with 50%. Yeah. I just want guys, I just want to make sure everyone’s got this. So if you’re, for example, EMAR sending this to plastic surgeons where you can definitely charge more in Hollywood, then you would say to a plumber in I don’t know what in uh in Allentown, Pennsylvania, right? you’re obviously going to be providing different uh profits levels for those different types of businesses in their locations. Is that correct? Yeah. Yeah, you can do that. You can also do, you know, maybe you have already existing clients that you want to upgrade and you want to give them a lower tier. Um maybe it’s in a specific area, maybe it’s a specific niche that wants different pricing. Really up to you. But all you need to do now is share the link and then robotic takes over everything. Okay. Amazing. Amazing. So, what we’re seeing here in the chat um is the first the the first thing is we want to turn the the entire conversation to how much money you want to generate. We’re no longer in the marketing matrix world. We’re in the how much money you want to generate world. We’re in growth. We’re not just in marketing. And the business can put a completely different number here. They don’t have to put, oh, I put $12,000. I wanted to put $125,000. system will reach that pretty fast. Let’s find a business here quickly. Okay, so I think one of the niches we all like is PI attorneys, right? Um let’s look in uh maybe Chicago.

    And I’m just going to choose an attorney here that maybe is Look at these. These are sponsoring right now. They only have uh uh three reviews. I guess they’re new or they’re expanding to this area, right? So, let’s grab these guys. So, I’m going to put this URL here. Now, what the system is doing right now, it’s starting to scrape the website. Okay. And you’ll see those scrapes coming in uh in back into the chat very soon when it’s going to suggest some services. So, what’s the business name? We already know the name, but we want to verify because we want the exact name on the GBP.

    So even though the bit the system knows the name, it’s verifying for the GBP and that is why it does that. Yes. Yes. Because because the system knows in the name because it’s scraping the website, but it take it from the website. Maybe it’s going to call Rodinu uh injury law. And here it’s Matt Rodinu injury law. And the more exact the name is, the better the chance that we can script it and find it afterwards for our business listings. Um so I’m just going to put this here.

    And now it’s going to ask me for the address. So the best thing is to take the address directly from the GBP because that’s the address they’re using on the GBP. But sometimes that address you’ll see will not be in Chicago. And this time it’s in Chicago, but sometimes it might be a suburb of Chicago. So many times people that are searching in LA, but actually the businesses are situated in a suburb in a city that is not Los Angeles. It’s near Los Angeles, but it’s much smaller like San Bernardito. But I just want to make sure this is clear. Charlie’s asking this the business that will be going through this. It was obviously representing the business right now, but it’s the actual business will get this link and we’re actually walk through this entire process. Charlie, I hope you got that correct. And in this example, the system found Chicago, but let’s see if they’re covering other areas. I’m just going to go to contact for a second and see if they’re covering other areas outside Chicago. So, no, it seems like only Chicago, but many times other businesses have uh larger service areas, especially for going into trade businesses like server, like roofers and HVAC companies. you will see four cities and try to focus when you’re talking to clients, when you’re talking to prospects, try to focus them on the major cities. So, I’m going to confirm here. And and by the way, the chat already tells them that, but still, we want to do this. So for this type of company, uh the system decided that the average fee collected for a client initial personal injury case is $30,000 for this specific company and their LTV is 58. Now let’s say I’m the lawyer. I disagree. I know my numbers. I think they’re different. So I write initial average, excuse me, average case. I’m just going to put 20K and LTV is correct. Okay, which is right. I’m trying to free flow the writing. So you see it can react to any type of writing. So uh reasonable estimate. It kept the 53 CLV and it changed the average case to 20K. Now you see all these services. Please choose the service you want to promote that those services coming directly from here. So the system already scraped the website and it’s pulling these services, right? So how cool is that, Barry? And there is something else here that um you don’t see which is critical. And again, this is the difference between working with Chad GPT or Gemini and working with robotics. Some businesses like roofers, like HVAC, like lawyers have a commercial and a consumer side. The system is already consumer biased. So, if it recognizes that a business has commercial and consumer at the same uh on the same website, it says, “Okay, I got that you have both, but I’m going to focus on consumers because I want to create a very neat focused marketing campaign.” Try to get the CP. Go ahead. Carry on. I’m just saying that you can basically they can they can uncclick whatever they don’t want to focus on. Maybe there’s one service they really want to focus on. They have absolutely ability to decide what they’re focusing on in terms of their marketing. Correct. But the more services we have, the more keywords we can generate, the better it is for a PPC or SEO estimates. Yeah. So, don’t take off uh services unless you really don’t want to promote them and you don’t want clients for these services. What percentages of calls do you answer that don’t go to the VM? So, let’s say 100 people call into the office. How many people are getting answered? How many people go to the VM? This includes after hours. So, since it’s a law office, it should be very high. The answering rates, I’m going to go with 80%. And how fast do you get back to missed calls? I’m going to say between 1 to four hours. Um, usually, right, uh, lawyers are not uh as uh as fast. It’s not like a a burst pipe. Um, and here we’re asking how fast you get back to form leaves. 1 to four hours I put as well. and how many of your leads turn into paying clients. This is the conversion rate. Okay, so let’s say I disagree again. These numbers don’t work for me. I’m going to put 25%.

    Final question are a couple things that and you’ll see these these change a little bit between chat to chat, but things that we don’t really we couldn’t find about that business and and we need their validation. So, we want to know if they have a CRM, for example. I’m going to click I have a CRM. And that’s it. That’s the end of the chat. What’s going to happen next is the system is going to provide a full uh summary of everything. Goal, services, economics that we’ve added and changed, right? Uh it was 30, we changed to 20. The response rate, the CRM, the conversion rate that we changed to 25. And I’m going to go with the S build the plan. and we go into the analysis mode. Before we go into analysis, it’s saying that my goal is in reach. It’s give me a few pointers of information about the analysis that I’m going to see. It’s going to take a few minutes. We’re going to stream you the findings. You should watch them and basically baking us to be ready to go through this entire process. I just want to mention something guys that interaction that we just did in 5 minutes. Again, it is there representing the business owner or someone that’s doing the marketing for that business. That interaction would normally take an agency days to set up the meeting and then hours to get this information. And many times the business doesn’t know what’s going on. We’re getting this in minutes. So now, what’s happening now inside the system? What is it showing? It’s basically streaming the analysis. It’s actually doing right. So at this point before going into the marketing plan to actually build a marketing plan the system first needs to understand what’s the holes in the current marketing. So they’re doing ads the system is going to estimate if their ads are good not doing ads the system is going to estimate how what’s the average CPC. Now it’s not estimating it by just asking Gemini. It’s going into top industry grade APIs like DFS and Samrush and getting the correct information. Oh, it’s doing its own scraping or it’s do using ours or our partners’ database that include actual campaign results and data. This is not I think so. This is not you know uh data that uh uh is being hallucinated. This is exact correct focus data especially where it comes to volumes which is critical because we need to understand potential when it comes to costs like CPC when we’re doing advertising and when it comes to the different formulas that we use to for example estimate how fast can we get them ranked once we’re doing SEO right SEO doesn’t happen day one so is it on the six month how much of the value are we’re going to recoup so all these calculations are extremely hard and difficult but they start with analyzing the current business situation. And as you can see, everything is very focused on the business. Everything that we’re writing is business related and personalized and very very easy um excuse me, very easy for the business to relate to. This is just unbelievable guys. I want everyone to understand this. It’s not again there’s nothing generic here. This is about to put up absolute information about that business, the 360 of the market they’re in to understand what they’re doing well, what they could improve in. But it’s not based on anything that you can get anywhere else. We’ve got exclusive data. Remember, Umbrella’s been around for 8 years. So, we have the date of all the campaigns of all the clients, of all of our members. We have access to second party data as well from all of our partners. Again, this is unique data together with an algorithm that’s working behind the scenes to produce absolute results. So, what it’s doing right now is calculating in lifetime going through all the various potential campaigns. What you’re seeing on the screen is not just a uh it’s just a lollipop, some eye candy for people to look for the business to look at. This is real information that it’s computing in real time. This is incredible stuff. So, it’s going to produce an absolute document. Now, it is it finishing? How long does it actually take to conclude uh this this this walk through? So it depends on the business. Uh it can uh take uh usually between 5 to 7 minutes uh during this uh streaming period. When we have you know when when the system is not super loaded then it can take four minutes. When the system is very very loaded it can take seven minutes. uh if they have multiple locations like four or five locations, it could sometimes uh goes into the higher end, right? More more towards that six minute uh mark. And during that time, we obviously stream everything that we’re showing to them. But in any case, we’re emailing them once the analysis is done with a very nice, you know, your report is done, your analysis is done, and jump in and and read all about it. Not only that, you know, the journey that it’s taking uh taking the person through the prospect, it’s a baking journey. They’re going to reach the analysis part that we’re going to show you in a second. They’re going to reach that analysis part already big and so excited about the next part of what they’re going to go through of the growth plan, right? And that’s and that’s and that’s the gap analysis which is coming up right away. You know what? It’s going to take another minute or so, right, for this to complete it tomorrow. So, let’s answer this. Okay, with your permission, can we just answer some initial questions, guys? If you got initial questions, ask them right now because we’re going to be moving into step two in a second, getting into the gap analysis, and that is when the rubber hits the road. All right, so just some clarifications. Okay, John, we’ve answered that question, but I’m going to repeat it. Just to be clear, what we just showed right now, it is the interaction that the business has with robotics. You’re sending a link out. The business goes through this process, can answer the questions, um, and can if it wants can add additional information and robotic does the rest. Is that correct? 100%. That’s what it’s built for. Okay. Now, this you can send out as pretty much as many growth plan plans as you want to as many businesses as you want. But guys, depending on which level that you join is the amount of growth plans you can give away per month. If you if you join again at the basic agency level, you got 20 growth plans. But if you’re thinking massive, you could double that and that’s doubling your money. Well, that is if you go for the full year. It’s just $9.95. You get additional massive discount as well. It’s just $9.95 for the year or $95 a month. So, the difference between the two is whether you get 20 growth plans, which is a lot, or you’re doubling your numbers up to 40. It’s just a numbers game. The more you give away these growth plans, the more deals you’re going to generate, the bigger business you build. Any last questions? I can see that the analysis is done, but I’m just going to just uh see if there’s any quick last minute quest before we continue. I think that’s pretty much it. Itar. So now they’ve had the interaction. The system in a couple of minutes is going through the entire process and now they land on this screen. What’s happening here? Yes, Barry. This is the gap analysis. Uh everything that we went through until now, the journey uh was leading us through the gap analysis. The streaming of the gap analysis is what the prospects saw up until now, which basically means they’re baked and ready to read this section. This section is perfect for mobile viewing as well, which is where most of the people are going to come through, right? They’re going to do this on their mobile. And the analysis that you saw is also uh has a mobile view. So, we took into consideration the chat analysis, marketing plan, everything is going to be mobile first. And here they can go section by section and um and see the suggestion that we have for them and can also go by locations if there are ser ser several locations to review. In this example, the business has one HQ and they’re in one service area which is Chicago. So here in the review section, we see their review and we see a competitor review. And the cool thing about this analysis is we actually took their address. We turned it into geo coordinates. We ran a map search. We took from the top 10 results the competitor with the highest amount of reviews. And we’re basically showing that as the goal for the business to to to achieve from a review perspective. So they can have a liftoff. More people would click on their map than the the current amount of people. they’ll have a a a liftoff in conversion rate and that will generate many more clients. In this example, the gap is very very meaningful and the difference between them and other competition. Not only this one because you know three reviews is very low for any business is very meaningful. So you see a big lift and a big jump. In most businesses it would be smaller but you’ll still see an addition of one, two, three clients in of itself um just on their existing traffic. Just to be clear so that’s just one service which is reviews correct. So what we s just literally if we just take care of their reviews they could have a d that could have a dramatic impact on their results. Is that correct? Correct guys. And what the system has done with the gap analysis is run through all of the various services that Grootic can provide that business. So it’s literally going through that’s in conversion, right? There’s different sections you can see on the page. The top are the conversion aspects which is if you don’t have reviews, you’re going to have lower conversions. You don’t have website accessibility, you’ll get lower conversions. In this regard, their website accessibility is pretty good, 93%. their reviews is 44 out of 100 and their competitors are killing it. So here right now we’re in what section here tomorrow? This is uh this is the website conversions. We won’t go too much into it. I just wanted to show you guys that the actual conversion uh conversion feedback we’re giving them relates to the actual text on their website. So this is hyper personal. Their hero title make more make a difference. That’s a a a real title from their from their uh website is large and clear. Subtitle specifically Chicago based personal injury law firm with decades of experience delivering justice for all clients. USP is explicit. So it’s giving it overall a good uh mark. And here it’s stating that no live chat or booking widget is available but there are multiple CTA buttons and phone numbers for direct contact. So the lower grade that it gave it is basically on the conversion widget. But obviously that part is extremely important for a website converting more traffic. The second bucket that we have here is the traffic bucket. SEO GEO which is AI search near me SEO which is everything that is related to a 3 four mile radius search around the business. PPC ads business listings and Google local service ads. Now PPC ads it could be that they’re advertising. Yes, they’re advertising. And so if they’re currently advertising, we are grabbing their ads and we are giving those ads a mark, a score. This ad got 24 out of 50 and we are projecting how much lift in CTR we can generate for them as part of the campaign we can generate. If they didn’t have Google PPC ads, we’ll be showing them what keywords, what’s the average CPC and what’s the expected volume that we can generate for them in a Google ad campaign. I mean it just this is insane. I can see lots of bunch of people commenting on this guys. That’s absolutely insane. I just if you look at the analysis itar, it’s literally running through the campaign and giving pointers as to what they’re doing well and what they’re not doing well and it’s hypers specific to the campaigns that they’re running, right? And again this is not generic stuff just chat GBT coming up with some feedback right this is based on real real data correct it’s coming from uh Google ads basically it’s coming from Google ads API through a third party so it’s exact information from Google so when we’re talk about their SEO they specifically do not have a good SEO they can see they’re not ranking for uh the keywords but it seems like they’re new in Chicago as we saw so this is not uh something that uh is unique and also GEO. You see they’re not coming up on GEO at all. We see the the law firms that are coming up near me SEO since they knew they don’t have a good review. I’m not expecting them to have a good SEO on near me. No, not at all. Wow. No. And as you can see, yeah. And and the cool thing is the gap analysis is exactly what it is. It’s gaps. So when we say plus 11 and you guys should know that when when businesses will call and talk to you plus 11 or plus 32, it’s the gap between what they can generate today and what we can add for them potentially. So we only show the gap. We’re not showing the total because maybe they’re already doing some work currently like other businesses we might have uh shown you that uh do have good SEO or good near me. So this is it. Uh Barry, I see more questions are coming in. Wow, that’s pretty an amazing section, guys. Would everyone agree that it’s an amazing section? So, a business basically is going to be looking at this gap analysis and finds out every single potential service that we can provide them what holes there are in their marketing. So, this literally shows them and it the big news here um is that what’s happening is that the business is already pre-sold at this point. they realize what I’m not doing SEO or my marketing team even though they are doing PPC they’re making these mistakes oh my goodness I I don’t have website accessibility in literally every single part of their marketing it’s giving absolute analysis and this is literally hard and cold sound advice being thrown at them you are not doing a good job and the most impressive thing I think Roj you got it first is that what it’s showing them is the amount of clients they can expect to get per month additionally if they get this right i.e. work with us. That is what we’re talking about growth. Would you agree with that? 100%. And you know I I we got different feedback when we tested it initially. If we want to take businesses through the gap analysis section as well or just throw them directly into the follow-up page which you’re going to see the CAC page and then the the growth plan. And the decision was to take them through the plan analysis even they can decide to continue to the growth plan. they can click on a button and go because the analysis is a is is what’s baking them. Like Barry said, it’s highlighting things that are not correct. It’s highlighting potential. They’re getting excited about the amount of business we can generate for them. They’re getting educated, which is super important for small businesses as well. Understanding a little bit what’s going on. So when they do click forward to the marketing plan and they see that we can hit their goals, they know it’s backed by something and it’s not just a statement. Yeah, of course I can reach $100,000 a month or I can reach $12,000 a month which we gave in theam in the example now but it’s backed by an analysis that we did and the plan matches the analysis. So we got this gap analysis and now something magic’s happening. Now, we’ve been testing this out. ETR has been testing out AB testing. What is the best experience for businesses? Is it for them to go straight into what the value of an acquisition of a client is going to cost or to see the gap analysis? What we’ve seen is that when they see that gap analysis, they’re bowled over. It’s already presetting them on you. Remember, a client’s going to be worth tens of thousands of dollars potentially for you per year. So, they’re pre-sold at this point. Guys, I want feedback. I want you to imagine businesses you send this to are getting this incredible gap analysis based on data you will not find anywhere else because most of it or a lot of it is coming from our internal data. Secondly on beyond that it’s coming from second party data our partners that no one else got access to together with third-party data APIs and algorithms all working in unison to bring this information and it breaks it down into three stunning sections follow-up traffic conversions. So whatever they’re interested in they can find out where their holes are and they’ve got you can see there a number 48 out of 100 for their PPC ads. Imagine a business that is spending $10,000 a month to find out that our robotic analysis is saying they got a pathetic score of 48% for something they’re spending over 100 grand a year on. Which business is going to look at that and say, “Well, that doesn’t bother me.” Their eyes are going to light up. This is literally an aha moment. If they’re spending money on SEO or Google local service ads and they got less, this company’s got 92%. That’s not bad. But if they’re spending money on something and they’re not getting a good report, they’re going to click on that. See, they’re not necessarily going to click on everything, but they would definitely click on those sections that they’re sensitive about. And that at that point will be game over because the data that they’re getting is absolute. This is not guesswork. This is not some third party guesswork. It is first, second, third, fourth party algorithmic, absolute classic, perfect analysis. And that is a game changer. Wow. It look at the reaction everyone is giving this. This is the wowzer guys. But we’re only halfway through the wowzer moment. Anything you want to add here? Because the next step is so exciting. This is where the business is not just excited by what they’ve seen, but they are literally they understand where they’re holding and the potential for making a ton more money. Something magic happening on the screen right now. EMA, you want to show the the last thing that I wanted to add and that’s true for all areas. I just want to remind you guys that they have the AI chat uh friend here where if they don’t understand what speedita is, if they want to ask why they got a specific score for a Google PPC ad, the AI friendly chat will answer them. What we call the AI guide. So they can ask all these questions and get an additional information beyond what the cards can explain by themselves. And to be clear, the AI is integrated with the page. So it’s not like some generic AI stuff on the side, right? This is deep deeply integrated into what they’re seeing on the pages and what they’ve gone through. Correct. It needs to understand the context. So when you ask it uh why why is my CAC $3,55? They need to understand how that was created and explain in high level of course how we got to that number. Uh and they also need to understand that if uh I’m asking it uh why is my ROI so low for 30 days? It will know if it’s the ROI is really low or not. So yes, it has page context and it’s also using the live data. Meaning this is data that was created specifically for Rudino injury law in this marketing plan. Obviously a different marketing plan will have a different CAC, a different business will have a different CAC being customer acquisition cost. Uh so everything here is live data and the AI guide has live data context. Um so amazing stuff. Amazing stuff. So guys, we’re now on this new page. Each of us already referenced it. CAC customer acquisition cost if anyone doesn’t know exactly what that means I think most people do understand just briefly what is this and why is this another aha moment for the business so like I said at the beginning with the chat we want to change in in the entire marketing industry we want to replace the conversation about matrix and and simple matrix like clicks and views and stuff like that change the conversation about money is what small businesses get how much can I make how much does something cost to So and and the and for them we wanted to encapsulate in one number how much it would cost to acquire a client. Okay. So we we didn’t write CAC obviously because they don’t understand what CAC is. So we wrote how much a client costs and what you get back and we gave them a big number how much client acquisition cost in this case is and also what they’re going to make in the third first 30 days. their what what is called the immediate ROI and what is called lifetime ROI. Okay. Per client. Per client. Exactly. So in both cases the ROI is very nice. And that’s why I like high ticket uh clients because you can spend more in acquiring clients. Even though it’s more expensive to acquire clients, it usually uh gets to a better ROI. I love this page. Yeah. Go on. Carry on. Go. Yeah. Go on. No, I just wanted to say that I love this page because uh because I think it encapsulates exactly what a business wants to hear. How much would it cost me to bring in a client? Here’s a number, right? That that’s what they want. They don’t want to start going into a complete conversation. Yes, once you give them a good number, they want to want to understand how you reach that number. That’s the marketing plan. But they want that number. It’s very important to them. I want to make sure everyone’s got this guys. A business has gone through the interaction with the system. it. We’ve done the gap analysis. They’ve seen where the holes are. And now they’re getting to a crescendo moment. If you invest $3,55, you can expect to get back in 30 days with a single client $26,495 in profit. And that single client over lifetime value will be worth nearly $45,000. So they can see the value of what their investment is going to bring them. It’s literally a visualization of their dream scenario. And our system is actually in the process of building out a plan to reach that. Does everyone understand why this is gold dust? Right? When we said that this system is going to bring clients into your lap, this is why and how it happens. Write in the chat box GD for gold dust. If you think this is absolutely insane. When a business can visualize with its own eyes what it is. I invest three, I get 50 back. Right? This is like going to a casino and knowing if I put some money into your machine, I get 17 times back. Of course, you’re going to throw as much money into that as possible. So, what you’re creating is literally the framework, the preparation for them to say, I want to be part of this, right? And again, if they’ve got any questions, we’ve got the AI system that is going to interact with them and give them answers. They don’t have to reach out to you at this point, but if they want to, they can. That’s a good question coming. I can see Charlie. I love that question. If a business wants to interact right now with you, what happens? How do they interact with you? Right now, they can’t. Uh we kept and we can change it by the way. We’re really looking forward to everybody’s feedback. Right now, we kept it in this area in the marketing plan area. We have a talk to a human. At this point, you can add your phone number, you can add your booking link, you can add your immediate Zoom room and they can click the talk and get on a call with you immediately. Up until this part, we haven’t added the talk to you in button. We can if you guys give us feedback, you think it’s important, we can include this as well. And the idea, guys, just you understand is that our motivation at this point is to get them to the next step cuz that next step is literally when they get to the next step, it’s pretty much game over. So that is our motivation and we don’t want to stop that progress. That’s what we’ve seen. Again, you may have a different scenario. You may have a different feedback. That’s perfectly legitimate legitimate. We can give that flexibility to you as well. But the key here is what we’ve seen in our beta testing that this is the best process because and this is after the CAC after the customer acquisition cost, we get into the marketing plan. So let’s go now to the next step which is that 12-month marketing plan. And this is where suddenly it all comes together. This is where the genius happens. Where everything that the system has learned and has deciphered and has used all the data that it’s got to come up with a plan to I want people to understand. Obviously, you’re not going to go through the whole 12 months, but an overview of this plan. How is the system? What is the nature of the 12-month plan? Starting off with an easy entry point. Just explain what is going on and why this is marketing genius. not just uh if I may say so technical genius that your team, our team has created, but it’s also marketing genius and preparing the argument for a sale. Perhaps you could just talk about the the the framework of the 12-month plan first. So, the framework of the of the 12-month plan is basically giving them a highlight of the top, you know, the topline numbers that they’re going to see like their yearly revenue in this plan, their yearly budget, their immediate ROI, their lifetime value, their lifetime ROI. That’s the first thing, especially when you look at on mobile, right? It’s kind of captures the entire screen. There is also earliest duration to goal 3 months. So we have three types of plans. You haven’t seen that screen. Um we have three types of plans that that can be generated by the client. Fastest to goal, cheapest and in the middle. Okay. So what the plan that you’re seeing now is fastest to go. That’s why it’s also more expensive and the customer acquisition cost can be more expensive than the cheapest plan. but it will get the customer as fast as it can to the customer goal. And here you have the overview section that is capturing most of the screen. Like we said, below that you have a month-to-month breakdown. I’ll take you through it. Every card, every month has uh a dedicated primary focus and a business impact. This is not predetermined data. This is being written by the AI depending on what the marketing plan is. So the primary focus in month one as you guys know this is basically in every marketing plan is usually the setup month right establish immediate lead generation through paid traffic while building a digital safety net to capture every opportunity. It’s talking about tactical objectives and it gives us a tag. It’s a launching phase as you can see here. Some tags are continue, some tags are scaling, changing the tags, and a a written kind of description of what it is that we’re doing for each of these tactical objectives and the business impact. This month’s focuses on building the complete lead infrastructure from acquisition through follow-up. So, every dollar spent on traffic converts at maximum effic efficiency. We’re basically telling them, look, we want to work on conversions before we send traffic so you won’t waste money. The combination of paid visibility and automated response systems ensure immediate ROI while establishing the uh measurement framework for ongoing optimization. I want to take a bit for a second, Barry, if you don’t mind, and let me know if uh we’re we’re we’re speeding out of time, but I think it’s very important for the members to understand this. Guys, you need to think for a second that some of the things that we have here are beyond what you would expect from an autonomous system. Not only because the autonomous system does not know how to create ads or deliver them. Okay, that’s uh let’s that is very very difficult but let’s say it’s it’s seemingly doable. But think about the fact that we’re also tracking all the calls. We’re tracking all the leads. We implement an AI voice agent so they won’t miss any call which automatically is going to capture all their phone calls if they don’t answer within six to seven dials. How do those things happen? They’re offline. How do you do that autonomously? Right? Think about it for a second. It’s not even a digital realm. At the end of the day, you need to implement a tracking pixel on a website. Somebody needs to go into that website and implement a tracking pixel. At the end of the day, the client needs to approve the voice AI and somehow connect their phone number into that voice AI. How do we do all that? That’s the magic of autonomous. Part of the magic of autonomous. And I’m going to take you through it in the to-do section, which is the execution section in a second. But I just want you to imagine when when you’re reading this plan, it’s not just a marketing effort. It’s an extreme operational effort that we’re saving you that you guys don’t you don’t even even need to ask the business for their website credentials anymore so we can do SEO for them or add a widget. The system does it. So you really are freed quote unquote to get involved as much as you see fit and still enjoy the entire not only marketing expertise but the full operational power of the system. I I know I went on a little tangent there Barry but but I think it was important to emphasize it to the members. Look there’s so much that we can share with you guys. You have no idea what’s going. We’re just starting the process. Um, and again, we could spend another five hours on this, but you’re going to learn about it as you join. We’ve got training, by the way, three times a week, most weeks, two or three times a week, most than three times a week that we’re going to be sharing with you. Um, we we’re going out there to crush this. We’re going out there to bring in untold amounts of businesses into the system that could generate a ton of business. Imagine you’re doing this every single month. Businesses have an aha moment. And you just started the process. The first month you saw in this example is a setup that’s totally legitimate in almost every marketing plan. It makes a lot of sense, but then the magic starts to really take off in the future months. Let’s just show how the business can benefit from future months and how this plan plays out for sure. So here we have the setup and here we’re starting to run. Now, the system decided that we won’t be able to generate a client still in the first month. And we see a negative ROI basically of 4,763. It’s just the truth. And here we’re already seeing that we’re able to generate a client. And because this business only has to generate $12,000 a month in revenue, then we don’t really need to generate for them more than one client a month. I made a mistake at the beginning of the chat. You guys saw it. instead of $120,000 I wrote $12,000 and that’s that’s what the system digested and basically it’s taking uh the client now the prospect month by month with what it will continue what it’s launching what is scaling sees that it’s launching SEO performance here in this month and they can see that their ad budget is starting to shrink down and disappearing in month six when SEO performance kicks in more rapidly and they’re still remaining on one client and basically they see this budget all the way through through the 12 months. Can you just explain that one more time? Why why is it one pl one client one client? Can you explain what’s going on there? Because one client is is worth more than 20 more than $12,000 which was the goal that they wanted to reach. They said I want to add every month $12,000. So if client is worth $30,000 so right but if I wrote a $100,000 what would have happened what would have been different it would try it would have tried to generate four clients got it amazing just absolutely amazing so it really depends right what’s the situation how much it it needs to generate what the client wants what’s the potential in the market in this case Chicago no problem getting them four clients if it was a smaller market like Albany right with a lot competition still four clients won’t be an issue but let’s say they wanted uh you know 20 uh might be aggressive for that market or very expensive. Anyways the system is at the end of the day think about the system is a very very good agency. It’s it it’s doing uh the best that it can for the business depending on what the business asks them to do. If they want $12,000 that’s what it will try to get. If they want $120,000, that is what they will try what they will try to get. So, a question here from CLA. Um, it’s a good question. So, imagine they wanted four clients. Is it going to cost four times the budget or it’s most likely to be a lot less because there are just initial investments you have to make even to get one client and to get a second, third, and fourth, it’s not going to be exactly the same amount of uh budget per client. In the first six months, I think we can see that we’ll see that uh a big part of the Google PPC ad budget would be higher. So, instead of uh $6,000, $6,377 includes not only the PPC budget, but also includes our service fee, landing pages, and stuff like that. So, let’s say $4,500 of this is PPC, and you wanted three more clients. You can definitely see a situation where instead of 6,377, this would be around 16 $17,000, $18,000. But again, as you go into month six, 7, especially 9, when PPC really kicks in, when SEO really kicks in, PPC is being dropped. So, the the key here, guys, is we’re not throwing wool over people’s eyes here. We’re not trying to pretend it isn’t it’s something which it isn’t. It’s literally giving real data. This is real data you could take pretty much to the bank, right? And that’s what makes this extraordinary, right? And I think compared to other agencies, eat sometimes you get sold on, you know, a a really hopeful situation and normally a a a business will take that agency with a, you know, with what they have to say to them with a a pinch of salt. Here, Grootic is giving real data. There’s no guessing here. There’s no like trying to sell something that’s a bunch of lies and deceit or trying to sugarcoat something. It’s giving real real data. Guys, imagine this is you. You are literally we are the world’s first agency that can provide this amount of clarity of data and you can pretty much take this to the bank. It is real and that’s the beauty of it. Um and that’s why you’re not only just going to get clients. Someone sold, they’re sold for the 12 months. And this is not We’re not Our goal is not to get a client for a month, get them disappointed, and make a few bucks. The goal is to keep them there for 12 months because they know what they’re going to get and they get what they think they’re going to get. This is huge. This is Everyone understand why you stand out like a sore thumb. Give us a big me in the chat box if you understand the power of what it is that you’ve got, right? You’re like no other agency on earth. Literally none, right? I mean, how many times have we been sold in the last I don’t know what 18 years online tomorrow agencies making all kinds of promises and throwing numbers at us. We knew it was all nonsense. And even when we did actually try things out, it turned out to be 99 times out of 100 complete nonsense. This is real data, guys. This what makes us stand out. That’s why you’ve got the power of robotic that’s beyond anything else that’s out there. Huge stuff. 100%. And 100%. And and this is and and because of this fluctuation in in budget, we also want we also it’s very important to include the yearly budget, right? Because at the end of the day, the business is looking monthly, but they’re also looking yearly and they’re saying, “Okay, plus minus what am I going to spend? Plus minus what am I going to make?” And they’re happy with that plus minus. And just so you know, most businesses don’t are not reaching for 600% ROI or 900% ROI. If we even get them 400% ROI, they’ll be so excited and keep with us for many, many years. So, are we ready for the follow-up section, Barry? Yeah, guys, if you got any questions about the 12month plan, Dorothy, good question asking, is this a unique thing for every single business? Are they going to get the same responses every single time from the system? Uh, like I mentioned, it’s extremely unique. Everything is unique. Uh, the chat is just a unique information of that business. The analysis relates just to that business and the marketing plan is specific to that business. The it’s a planner. You have to understand think about the system from a an architectural perspective that you have different services. Some are agents, some are not agents that are responsible for different things. So you have the chat uh service and you have the analysis service and you have uh in each in in the analysis service you have different services for the different products and then you have what we call the planner. The planner is an agent quote unquote that sees all these things and says, “Okay, that’s the goal the user gave me. Those are the products that are at my disposal, right? The products that we have in the product section from Umbrella that I can use. That’s the pricing of these products that the member you guys have chosen. You know, this is how much SEO is. This is how because you chose a retail price. How do I most effectively get the business what they ask for with all these things into consideration? Obviously it has a lot of uh a lot of uh uh formulas uh a formulated structure that we gave it with the right train it on the right way to go about it and then it crafts the entire marketing plan from zero. Okay. So by the way if for the same business if you take the same business and you forcefed the system with for example that they’re killing with SEO then the system will choose a different marketing plan for that business as well. So it’s not just for businesses per situation right the situ current situation of the business Zelda is asking tomorrow like what percentage of businesses are likely to go through this and reach the very end we don’t know but in the example that uh Barry said it’s you know I think with 30% is a low number right so if you send it if you send it to real businesses that we can help like uh this uh Rondo injury law, um, HVAC companies, roofers, different local service providers, that’s what the system excels in right now. Then I think out of a hundred that you would send, 30 would get to this point. And then how many would start executing? How many would want to talk to you first? I don’t know. But I’m sure several. And out of those, you’re going to have a few sales. with guys and each cell is literally is a could be worth an absolute fortune to you because they can be sold on the year sold on the year with realistic expectations. We’ve set the expectations now at this point cuz a few people asking you did mention it before and I think we should just touch upon this talk to a human. That’s their opportunity if they want to talk to you. So can you just briefly spend 30 seconds on what that conversation is going to be like? What sort of expertise do our members need to have? And how much of the training are they going to be ready to take those phone calls? Because at this point, the business is so baked. They’ve seen the plan. They’re excited about the plan. They love the real the realism of that plan. They want to make $30,000 for a $5,000 investment. They’re willing to give it a go. They like what they see. They’re talking to you. We spoke in the presentation about validation. What does that mean? What sort of level of professionalism do our members need to have? And how much expertise do they need to have? So they don’t need a lot of expertise. Why? They exactly because of what you said, Barry. They’re already baked, right? What is this conversation about? Why are these people calling you, right? Why? Why a prospect that is calling you by talking to a human now? They went through all this and this, right? and the chat at the beginning and the streaming of the information and they read some tickets here and they continue to this page and they read it and now they’re in this page and they read through it and after going through all this they’re saying I want to talk with somebody what do they want to talk with you about they want validation right there isn’t anything that is not thoroughly explained here and anything that is not explained they can ask the chat it’s about having somebody right up until now was me uh Dan from Rondo Injury Law talking to a system working with the system and it’s not enough for me. Maybe maybe I need a human being on the other side that says yes, you can trust these numbers. Yes, you can trust the system or yes, you can trust me, right? It’s it’s a human validation. I think all of us even in this world still feel that we need to have it. And that’s why we created talk to a human especially when you’re going high budget. Even though this plan is monthtomonth and they can start one month, they can quit after the other, they want to talk to somebody. So it’s it’s it’s validation. So going back to the question that you asked Barry, members do not need agencies do not need to know a ton because they the user is already big. Moreover, the conversation is focused on what on this marketing plan when this person is reaching out to you. Back in the day, it was you had to start with a discovery call, right? A prospect reaches out. You’re starting with a discovery call. You know what need what questions you need to ask. You need to act take those questions. Check out their website. Check out their GBP. Check out uh their different sections. Go create a report. See their SEO analysis. Go into Seamrush. See what’s going on there. Maybe go to the Google Ads Planner. See uh or Google Transparency. See if they’re doing ads. So, you had to do all this on the fly as you were talking to somebody to basically get where they at. And then you had to start convincing them of what is the right thing to do. All that. Scratch that. That’s gone. You don’t need to do all that. They’re past it. Right now, you are getting a call that is on this. You’re going through this. They might ask questions about this. You need to know how to answer. We’re going to explain it to you. Okay. Ivon’s got a great question emer.

    How are you guys going to see it? It’s very easy. All these plans are associated with your account. Wow. So in your marketing plan, you see Rondo. You can go into Rondo. You can click view and go through Rondo analysis. You can actually if they start executing, you can go into their business, see everything that they do in the business account section. You can impersonate them. So the think about it as your ongoing lead genen engine the marketing plan you’ll see here every chat that was concluded and somebody started a marketing plan excuse me an analysis you’ll see them here you can follow up if they don’t call you if they don’t execute you can follow up immediately hey I saw you created a 12-mon marketing campaign by the way we have gray label emails following up for you as well just to notify them that they’re we’re sending them an email at the end where a marketing plan is ready we’re sending an email, hey, your marketing plan’s ready. We can reach your goals, blah blah blah, check out your marketing plan just to get them get them in. But you guys can do the same. And then get them on a Zoom call, go together through uh the marketing plan, explain everything, go through the analysis, explain everything. We’ll train you on that. Hold on, hold on. This this this is huge. Just to be clear, someone starts the process. Let’s say they’ve done they got the gap analysis, but they didn’t continue to the next step. the system will automatically reach out to them to tell them they should take a look at their 12-month plan. In any case, even if they reach the 12-mon marketing plan, the system send them a message. We think it’s very important. Your marketing, I forget exactly what we say, but basically your growth plan is ready. We can reach your goals. The system gives them information directly from the marketing plan in the email from the growth plan in the email like how much revenue we can generate for them, how much it’s going to cost, their average CAC in the email itself, enticing them to click and go back to the marketing plan. We think sending that summary is very important regardless if they reach this page or didn’t. It’s good that they have it in their email. Guys, it just this is literally follow-up marketing done for you. And you’re saying this is done automatically by the system. Our members don’t need to load anything up. No, for this email it’s done automatically. Wow. And guys, so you understand this is literally bringing more and more even your prospects that haven’t fulfilled and gone through the entire plan. We get them back into the system to make sure that they do. That’s just going to improve the amount of those business that complete the plan. So before that was a great question in terms of when it was going through the analysis. You mentioned it takes a few minutes to go through that analysis. So maybe a business will jump off, but that’s when the emails will kick in and the communications will kick in to bring them back if someone does drop off, right? That is huge. That is absolutely huge, guys. We will be reading out the first 100 names of people that have joined, but still more to get through. So up to now, AMR, we’ve gone through the process. We got to the 12 month growth road map. Some members were, some clients, businesses will reach out to us physically to us. Some would go through the process. Now we go back before we get to this page one more time. If they want to execute now, let’s if you can see at the bottom of the page, guys, a big blue button at the very bottom, they can execute on the spot. Now, this is absolutely insane. So, if we click on there, they then end up on this page. And some and you some businesses just want to get started. They just want to get started. And what’s going to happen guys is as robotic grows this out, it’s going to become more and more frequent that businesses are just going to jump all over this and that is going to be a massive benefit to all of our members. Itar um this is absolutely insane. Again, they’ll be able to reach out to our members if they want to directly to get the validation, but if they want, they can start the plan immediately. Correct. They can start the plan immediately. What you’re seeing here is uh the design here is editable on your back end in your settings and in your invoice configuration. I have the robotic logo here and I have the company name and some information I have uh surrounding uh surrounding uh tax here but for you second

    where is it too many things open up open excuse me uh you obviously are going to add your brand and you’re not going to use the robotic.com you’re going to use the MPP which is a gray label or do the white label uh with your own domain the cancellation policy. Our cancellation system policy is 30-day uh notice, month-to-month, 30-day notice. But your cancellation policy that you’re going to present to your client, my suggestion is going to be a bit more strict because we all know that it’s very hard to show ROI with less than 90 days effort. Okay? So, I would try to add here some sort of 90-day commitment. Um, and don’t think about it as something that pushes back clients. It’s a very easy explanation to it and it’s 100% true and it’s always repeating and all agencies do it today. There is no way to generate ROI for you in one month, especially the first month, which is the setup month. It would take three months for you to see what we can do. And we don’t want to get into a business with you leaving us after a month. So, let’s start working together within 90 days. You’re going to be amazed after that. If you want to quit, quit. But up until then, give us that grace. And and businesses get that. Businesses get that. So, here we’re just charging them for the first month. Mhm. You wanted to say something there? No, no, no, no. Good. Carry on. Oh, we’re always uh showing them what charge is going to be for the first month. What is the first month business impact? And then they just add their payment information here. I’m just going to add here in the sandbox. I’m going to add a mock card. Going to add an expiration date here.

    This is very exciting as you’re doing this. This is beyond exciting guys. And again, the idea of autonomous is that it can handle absolutely everything, even this, right? So, and it just one question coming in is that it says the integration with stripe, right? So, powered by stripe. How does a member create a create create their own integration so they receive their money? How does that work exactly? So the way that this this works is let me just go through this process and then I’ll explain. Okay. So so we won’t lose lose a beat. They this is a congratulations window that tells them that uh what’s going to happen in the next window. It has a 15-second uh wait time and then let’s go. Okay. And then you fall into the to-do section, which I’m going to explain now. This is a very, very important section.

    Going back to what you asked me just a second ago, um, which is the Stripe. So, when you log into the system for the first time and we have a video that welcomes you, you need to go to the in integration section and click here to integrate your Stripe. If you don’t have a Strap, it will take you through a process of opening a Strap account. This is critical. You might be asking, do we need to have Strap? Why can’t we do it any other way? The reason we’re using Strap is because the system has very, very different fees that are computed together, right? So, let’s say for example, you have business listings, which is just a subscription fee every month. Every month $50. But then you have voice AI which is us usage that is build per minute 20 second per minute and then you have setup fees for different uh services and then you have paper result like SEO which only kicks in once we rank. Now the system takes all those different uh pricing points and charge points and turn them into one invoice for your customer every month that is correlated with the original uh plan, the original marketing plan. There’s no way to do it without programmatic billing and that’s why we’re using Stripe and you guys need to use Stripe. The second advantage which is critical for you is the minute we build them we can remit the payment to you. So there is no waiting time, right? So let’s say in this example I just paid as as the lawyer I just paid $4,500. Immediately the the your margins go to your Stripe account and into your bank account. You don’t need to wait a lag for us to pay you. There is no manual payment. You control the money. It’s also associated with your Stripe with your billing with your taxes with your setup with your name. So that’s how it happens. And uh Stripe makes it all doable. And you can do this from anywhere in the world tomorrow. You can do it from anywhere in the world as long as you you can do it from anywhere in the world but not in any language everywhere. Right? Let’s explain the system the system is in English. The services that are provided are in English currently. We don’t currently provide other services. Um, I will soon we will soon be uh um onboarding some European partners, but it’s too soon to tell you where we’ll start. So, would German be first? Would French be first? And when? But if you you’re doing English, it’s fine. Wow. But you could be in terms of getting the Stripe account though, you could be anywhere in the world. No, Stripe has some country limitations. Um, but if you’re in Western Europe and the United States, then you should have no problem. Australia, um, some countries, I think South Africa does not have Stripe. They have a different solution. Um, so you might need to set up an American LLC and then open a US Stripe or use Stripe Atlas plan for startups from other nations to open a US Stripe and then open an account. In any case, I always suggest open a US stripe no matter where you work from. It’s just the easiest way for the system to intake you. Okay, amazing stuff. Okay, so the client is now on boarded. Now, it can again it could be automatically through automation. They literally themselves autonomously have joined and they’re now part of they’re now your one of your clients or it can go through you get validation then they end up at the same page and then they’ve joined and now they end up over here. Before you go into there’s a lot of stuff on this page. Just give a quick overview of what they see and and how they will be able to interact with the with the system. So, first off, they’ll have a popup that is welcoming them. So, we’re not taking you through that process because we’re not going to spend here on the web watching videos, but there is going to be a popup with a video that is welcoming them. So, they’re not just going to fall into, oh, I don’t know what’s going on here. Second, remember they always have chatty here. they have the the the guide here to help them. So, it’s not we’re not leaving them uh uh by themselves and it’s not like we’re not telling them what’s going to happen. The to-dos is basically a and and most importantly, it all works again on mobile. It’s like mobile perfect. Okay, was all designed specifically to mobile so they can manage their entire marketing with robotic on mobile. The to-do section is basically the system’s way of getting information from the user to provide fulfillment, right? So, for example, we said that uh uh to set up uh SEO performance, right? We need information. What kind of information do we need? So, we need them to oneclick connect their Google business profile. We need access to their website back end. We need to ask a couple of permission questions. Allow invisible changes. Allow uh allow visible changes without preapproval. Maybe deny. Maybe they want to approve every visual change that we make on their website. And then they submit the ticket. Once they submit the ticket, the system has that information. It’s not going to ask for it again. So, as an example, if we need for both SEO, CRM, website accessibility and PPC ads, they all need access to the business website back end in order to uh add tracking, meta tags, excuse me, tagging or implement some sort of process. Once we ask for the website uh access in one of the cards, doesn’t matter which one, it will be removed. that question is going to be automatically removed from other cards. So as they answer the first, second, third question cards, excuse me, many of the other cards are going to be like cards that take 1 minute, 10 seconds. Okay, you can ignore the 10 10 uh 20 minutes here. This is uh this is uh this is going to change. This is actually hardcoded right now. uh it’s not yet live that part when we’re recording this for you right now. Okay, the 10 minute, 10 minute, 20 minute. So the system is not only able to harvest information directly from the client, which is critical, but it lowers the burden on the client instead of different teams and different people asking for the same information again and again. This is usually achieved only in agencies that have a very good dedicated AE and uh and fulfillment process when the main AE is providing the information to the different execution teams. The same way the to-dos is working. Think of a to-dos as an executioner, as a person in charge of fulfilling everything, as the AE that is in charge of tracking fulfillment, asking for the right information, giving it to the different systems that need to operate the different products, SEO, PPC, website content uh updates. It could be that the system decided that the website content is not good enough. It will suggest a website content update in the plan and it will uh request some information here and then we’ll do it. The system also validates everything. Okay. So after um let’s see uh what we have here. Uh these are less relevant for validation. Uh voice agent. Okay. So we need some information like what’s the main sales line? What’s the support line? And we have the routing logic that I told you before. The agent will answer if you don’t pick up within set amount of dials, six, they want to send it to eight, whatever it is. Okay. Uh, do they want a male voice, a women voice? Here, the rest of the information is completely optional. Uh, do they want post call notifications after every call comes in? Do they want a dedicated notification in addition to the ongoing reporting? They can add several emails, get the recordings there, get the notifications there. That’s great. But once uh once they send that and the voice AI bot is being produced before it goes live, the system sends them a validation uh to do to listen to the voice bot and send feedback or approve and then it goes live. So the entire back and forth communication think about how difficult it is from a system level to manage all this autonomously. It’s hey we need this information. Okay. Hey, we created this for you with the information that you gave us. Now, here is a full bot that you can call and have a conversation about your business. Either confirm or send us back feedback. If they send that feedback, we fix it. We send it back again for validation. All happens without you being involved. Very lightweight on the client. Okay, which is got just getting some to-dos and tasks for validation. And then once uh everything is running, they can obviously leads and reporting in the leads and reporting sections. Very.

    Yeah. I mean, one one question coming in is if someone doesn’t fill out one of these to-dos, what happens? How does the system encourage them to come in? Because if they’re missing some of these setup things, the system’s not going to be able to activate. So, what is happening to prevent our members having to work hard to get those things done? It’s a great question. So, we’re badgering them with uh to-do emails. So every day basically the system looks at all the to-dos that the business needs to do and also their urgency. So some uh some information kind of stops everything. Okay. So if we don’t have access to the back end of the website, there are going to be a lot of services that we can’t set up. Some we need to do before others. So there is no real point in doing a CRM automation setup before we actually set up the reviews, right? If they don’t have a review link, there is nothing to automate. So we have a priority list. The system has a priority list and has ETA, has due dates, right? So it says this is the due date, right, for the business. As it’s getting closer and closer to the due date and as the priority of of that specific card is higher, the system creates an urgency list and each day sends an email with the open items and their urgency. If it’s far away and it’s not urgent, the system is not going to include in the email. It’s not going to just badger the user. But if it needs the user to do something, they will get an email and another email, another email. It’s kind of a daily email with everything that is still open that they need to take care of. So again, in terms of prioritizing as well, the system knows what’s urgent, what isn’t. Yes. Yes. The system decides because the system knows the ETA of what’s the due date to provide the the the content the information from the user. The system also knows and this is critical how much time it takes to set up that specific service and if there is any other service that is dependent on that setup. So it has like imagine a full gun view of everything that needs to happen in the near future for everything to be set up and and running. Incredible stuff. Absolutely incredible stuff, guys. It literally it it runs your business for you. There’s no other word to describe it. Um and every detail has been thought through. This isn’t something that, you know, it’s just a few things have been thrown together. This is an entire 360 system that takes care of everything. and everything that’s been thought out. This is absolutely remarkable. Remarkable to answer anything else you like to show because I I don’t think we need to go into micro detail about every to-do but the idea that the system understands what’s priority what isn’t is badgering and doing all the communication on your behalf that is huge. So um it you know let’s just turn off the videos a little bit here because I can see that there’s a lot. There are two more sections. I don’t know if we want to go through them. There is the lead section and there is the reporting section. Yeah, we can certainly go through that. But what I do want to do is uh start answering some more questions, guys. And I want to start reading out the 50 or so first names. So guys, you got the link. Going to take a couple of minutes to answer some basic questions. Um it what I’m shocked about is that I would say 98% of our members that were here several hours ago are still here and there’s a lot of questions that are coming in. So, we’re going to have a dedicated session to that section to that. We still got another two more sections to go through. Um, but I guess it the biggest question I can see a load of people asking how do we get started? It’s such a massive system. How do we get started? Obviously, the first thing you do is join, but once they join, there’s going to be a welcome training. Is that’s correct? Um, and perhaps you can share what is it that our members need to do first as soon as they join. So obviously there is going to be a lot of training like Barry said uh there are going to be a ton of live training uh for you on an ongoing basis. We’ll take you through the system. We’ll explain everything. But when you join, excuse me, you’ll be met with uh insystem videos for each of these sections. This is the first se section you’re going to fall into and you’ll see a video pop up that tells you the main things that you want to do. The main things that you have to do first to even start working with the system is to decide on some sort of name and branding to connect your Stripe to decide if you want to use robotic gray label or white label to do your invoice design and setup. If you want to add additional information that uh terms and conditions critical, we have a term and condition template for you uh that you need to review, add your name. This is critical because you you have to have disclaimers and protections when you do uh marketing for businesses so they won’t complain afterwards that uh you didn’t reach what you promised or whatever it is, right? So we always have these TNC’s and that’s the and obviously if you want to add any team members right that are going to help you with this those are the critical aspects general settings stripe wise label invoice configuration and then you can start working the second phase you go to pricing group you create a pricing chat link and you just start sending it to people that’s it wasn’t a lot right this is not a lot Now, obviously, you can learn more about different sections. We have trainings on the product section and the business account, but they’re not relevant to get started. Get started is setting up what I just said in settings, grabbing a link, start sending it to businesses so they can start chatting, creating analysis, and creating reports. And obviously, we have the referral hub that Barry just described that if you’re coming in as a super agency, you can make a ton of money with uh just by referring businesses to robotic. Absolutely amazing stuff, uh, Eimar. So, let me start reading out the names. If you still got questions, reach out right now because we’re about to close this. These are the members who have joined first. And this is the uh the the time the in terms of order of when they joined. Welcome on board, Mr. Murray, John Smith, Richard Willis, Patricia Oakley, Petric Sharon, Alexander Smith, Katherine Joseph, Michael Van Baroon, Ashley, Victoria, Nicola, Freddy Sio, Hang Chan, Carl Ward, Keith Mila, Klouse, you’re in. Stevie O Poke, Ronald, you’ve done it. Marcy Burning our close friend from the West Coast, you are safe. Jud’s done it. Brian, Frankie, Susan, Mr. W Kers and Bama, John O’Disco, Joshua, James, Slooh, Hang Sandy, Urus, Susan, Donald, Joshua, Donald, Scott, Thomas, Troy, Alexander, Michael, Ken, Roggerio, Peter, Mouser, F, Ismail, Fred, Franks, Thomas, Beritton, Gregory, one, that’s the name of company. I won’t read your name. Nathaniel, you’re on board. Guo, Natalie, Keith, Scott, Aan, Michael, Edgar, you’re all safe. Ronald, Frank, Michael, Jamal D. I’ll read more out in just a couple of minutes. This has gone absolutely berserk, guys. This is it. It there’s just been so many questions flying in. If someone has got a lastm minute question, this is it. Eimar’s back. You got your bigger camera on. I’ll see if I can get my bigger camera on as well in a second. need tomorrow. You don’t need tomorrow. The amazing thing here is that we still got more than half of our members here and we’ve been here for 2 and 1/2 hours. That’s unbelievable. But I want you to see because you’ve had an opportunity since I’ve just jumped in. What do you think are the biggest issues we absolutely need to need to address in the last few minutes? F a ton of questions in the chat and I apologize to everybody. Deb, by the way, I saw your messages. Um when you send us messages, we get sporadic messages. If you write something then you write something else in between what you wrote initially and what you write after we might get like 20 other questions. Uh so I want to resolve everything like now if we can Barry like just go like boom boom boom one by one but there are two main things that I would like to address um structurally. uh first is billing and then we get a lot of questions like how does it actually do the execution? How does it actually run a PPC campaign? How does it actually do SEO? How does it actually do review generation? What is included in the growth plan? So I I just want to touch on on both of these things for a second. Uh Barry, if you don’t mind, paste in. Okay. So let’s start with the let’s start with the billing and Stripe. So you know what? Let’s start with the growth plan and then you’ll understand the billing. The growth plan is basically this is the way the planner works. I’m not going to go into all the algorithms and I’m not going to go into all the formulas. I’m just going to give you the high level so you understand. The planner uses the information from the gap analysis and from the chat with the user with the business to build the marketing plan that is based on the revenue goal they wanted. What is the revenue goal? The revenue goal they put in is the first answer in the chat. That was the first answer. How much monthly revenue do you want to add? And now the plan works like that. Okay. Let’s say that company wants to generate $100,000 a month in addition to what it’s doing now. And then the planner is looking at saying, “Okay, a client is worth an initial client is worth to this business, let’s say $10,000 just for easy math. How do we know?” Because that’s what they answered in the chat, right? Our chat discovery agent suggested their average ticket and suggested their CBS. They might have agreed or they might have changed it, but we now have it. We know how much is an initial ticket worth to them. 5K, 10K, doesn’t matter. So, the sake of the calculation that I’m explaining, let’s say 10K. So, we need to reach 100 and we know which client is worth $10,000. So, the planner knows, okay, I need 10 clients. How do I get 10 clients in the most efficest efficient and excuse me, the most fastest and cheapest way? I know it sounds different, but we have a way to merge those two worlds together. And then it says, okay, um, first let me try to understand how many leads I need to generate. How do I know how many leads I need to generate? So, the client gave me the conversion rates in the chat. We asked the client from people that you talk with, how many would you convert? Let’s say the client said 25%. So if we need to generate 10 clients and the conversion rate is 25%, we need 40 leads. Okay. But then we also have a system that is called speed to lead. Okay. Um and speed to lead is a system. I’m not going to go into it. It’s a lot of formulas and files and and and and data that we accumulated and refined. That system basically tells us that in this niche the business is from, let’s say it’s a roofer, depending on how fast that business can back get back to calls, how many calls it can answer live in an optimized situation. An optimized situation meaning a situation where we already implemented voice AI for that business. So they will never lose a call. every call that they miss goes to the voice AI and the voice AI bakes and they will always go immediately back to leads because we implement inside their CRM. Yes, we implement inside their CRM automation to get back to leads. So we looked at that optimize and the service tells us okay in an optimized situation from every X leads that you generate you’ll succeed in talking with Y amount let’s say 90%. So that means that if we need to talk with 40 leads, we actually need to generate 45 leads. 44 45 leads. If we can talk with 90, let’s say 45 leads up until now. Let’s go stage one. Then the planner says, okay, I have a a bucket of services. Um different services. Some services help with conversion. For example, I can optimize their website. I can add an AI chatbot to the website. I can add voice AI like we talked about just now. I can improve their reviews if they’re not meeting uh if they don’t have enough high reviews because we do a competitive analysis versus their top competitor on the map pack. It’s part of the analysis. I can do those then I can also generate traffic. How how can I generate traffic? I can do near me SEO for them. I can do AI SEO, GEO, right? So people are searching in Gemini or people searching in in Google by getting the AIO the AI overview. I can do regular SEO for them. And then I can also do paid which is mainly PPC for local service businesses but also Facebook for awareness

    and I now need to decide taking all those things into consideration which services do I need for the business when to do them to get to the best result. And then it says, okay, before I send traffic, I’m going to first implement conversion solutions because I want when I send traffic to the to the website or to the landing pages. I want that traffic to convert to as many leads and as many sales as possible. So, I’m not going to start paying for ads or I’m not going to start doing uh send traffic from SEO before I optimize. And then the planner executes. will in a second I’ll talk about what this mean what does it mean executes but it actually let’s say fixes the website content adds better CTS to the website add a chatbot creates a voice AI connects it to the main sales number improves the reviews and then it says okay now let’s see and how does it know that it needs to do that because it already did a gap analysis and the gap the gap analysis tells it what’s missing. Are they on par with reviews or they’re good or not? Um, are they uh have good conversions of the website or they don’t? So, it already knows what’s wrong. So, it knows how much it needs to work to complete those things. Then it says, okay, let me bring traffic. I need to bring 45 leads. How do I do that? I’m first going to look at if I can bring them with organic, if I can do it fast enough, and if I have enough volume. So we have hard data from uh uh DFS and SEMrush and also our own scrapers that tell us how much volume a specific keyword can generate. And we have what we call keyword analyzer which is a system in of itself that decides on the best keywords for that business. And the system runs uh won’t go into how and decides that these 30 to 50 keywords are the best for this business for near me and for SER and then it looks at the volume and it realizes that even at the optimal level it probably won’t be able to generate more than 20 leads. I’m just giving an example 20 or 25 leads for the business from organic. And then it says okay I don’t have a choice I need to supplement from paid I’ll do paid advertising as well. Then it has another data set and other APIs where it knows coming from Google ads it knows how much an average CPC it knows what’s the conversion rate are going to be for phone leads and for uh form leads for that specific niche in that specific area. And then it says, okay, now I can grab another 25 leads that I need to supplement from advertising. And that’s pretty much it’s going to be the cost for that. And now it has a bundle of all the things that it need. It plugged in all the services throughout 12 months. It plugged in which service creates which leads when. Don’t forget SEO, for example, takes time to mature. So, you need more PPC at the beginning, less PPC at the end of the of the 12 months, right? Maybe they’re already doing ads. There are a bunch of parameters. I’m just giving you the high level. It’s like it’s extremely complex and and um extremely complex and hard. Uh but I hope I’m doing a good job in explaining how it works. Then the actual execution, what happens? Some services are complete AI execution. Just as an example, business listing, website accessibility, um almost completely autonomous website fixes, um review generation implementation, um uh voice AI creation, those things are almost uh are mainly autonomous and being supervised by humans. Then there are services that are not autonomous where the robotic has an agent called communicator. I’m just I’m calling it an agent, but it’s a service, a full system. And communicator is responsible to communicating with human vendors that are connected to the system that umbrella has been working with for 10 years now, providing amazing campaigns for our members. And I decide what these vendors need to do. I’m going to tell them what they need to do. I’m going to supervise what they’re doing. I’m going to make sure it’s done. I’m going to pivot if they’re not doing a good job. I manage them, but they actually execute the SEO, for example. So, it manages both human and uh and autonomous execution. And as years go by, I imagine we’ll have more AI execution arms and less human arms or AI nebble humans. Um very do you think up until now it’s clear because I think I’m trying to paint a picture. No, no, it’s extremely extremely clear, guys. Um just guys anyone you got further questions we’re here to answer but I do want to answer just some other questions just to change the theme a little bit and we’ll come back to your more in-depth explanations ear apologize you completely destroyed my camera don’t know what you did when you made yours bigger but mine’s now doesn’t even exist I don’t know what happened um but never mind growth body is pretty much handling everything so our main focus of the training is all about landing and getting our growth plans out to businesses there’s going to be additional training which I’m going to be heavily involved with in helping you get this out to entrepreneurs and to agencies. And that is huge. Each agency that has clients, they’re going to be using this, right? What you may not realize, a lot of our members do realize, but some of our members who haven’t yet joined, what you don’t realize is that this is going to take over digital marketing. Agencies are going to be using this, right? There isn’t an agency practically that that’s in this realm that’s not going to want this. Not just because the amount of services that we provide, but because of the genius of Growotic and what he can do to help them to expand their agencies. You bring in an agency that alone could be worth tens of thousands of dollars. I gave an example on the actual training. I was going back over an hour ago, but that is it. And those are the two types of training guys because everything else Growotic pretty much does for you. You are not fulfilling anything. Our teams fulfill for you. Communication is done through the internal growth barting AI system. You don’t need to worry about 98% of the communication. The most and biggest communication you’re going to have with your with your prospect is when they want validation. That is it. They want a real human. Is this real? Etc. That is going to be it. So your role is extremely limited in this because Grow body is such a genius system. And I want to make it absolutely clear guys if you haven’t joined Cro body is not another program of umbrella. It is not just oh he’s got we’ve got something else. This is the evolution. Each umbrella now becomes robotic. It contains every single program. It can every solution. You don’t need to invest in any other solution. You’ve now got robotic has everything inside of it. This is the literally the endgame. This was the dream that Eimar set himself in the last couple of years more than two years he’s been talking about this and he’s built this out over over two years and this is unique and I want to make this clear to you guys. You who are joining right now, you have got something unique. This is not AI just chat GPT and throwing out some numbers based on on on hope. No, it’s based on eight years of internal data. No one else has got that data. Our second party partners data. No one else has got the accumulation, the umbrella if you like, of all of their data together with APIs and sophisticated algorithms all blending together to create an astonishing marketing 12 month plan for your prospects which will turn into clients. So, we’ve got something unique. Agents will jump all over this. You’ll see once this is released, you will see how agencies will fly into this. It is going to change the digital marketing world. That’s what we set out to do. And we can’t wait. You know, it one of the questions coming in is I can’t wait to get started. And my answer to that type of question is I can see support was was answering something similar. We can’t wait. We can’t wait for you to get your hands on this and go out there because this is going to explode when you do. Right, Ethan? I say it again. Is there an agency out there that is not going to say, “Oh, this will not help my agency.” Not one. Right. In our realm, of course. Yeah. Of course. If if they if they are working with local look, if they’re lo working with local service businesses, they’ll extremely appreciate it. Also, because it’s multilocation. We haven’t touched on that. That took us a lot of work. That’s insane in of itself. I just want you to understand something for a second. Let’s say you work with a roofer and the roofer has four service areas in four cities. You need to build SEO campaigns with different keywords for different cities. You need to decide if an SEO company is even worth in some of these locations. You need to decide where do you want to focus your advertising effort. How do you do that? You need to actually analyze each location. that made our system psychotically um uh resource intensive. By the way, that’s why when you think about how much a growth plan costs, it’s almost almost at cost what you’re paying. We are mainly making money when you guys bring in sales. So, it’s extremely resource intensive to do five locations, full gap analysis and growth plan across 10 services for one business. extremely uh so um it’s it’s I’ll share more in the training but I’m telling you guys you need to appreciate it also talking about the training bar I heard you were talking before there are three types of live training that you’ll see every week one is getting after businesses one is getting referrals and one is product and support office hours from a head of support and CTO so if you want to talk about things that don’t work bugs um um things that don’t work for some businesses. It gave me this marketing plan. I don’t understand it. Obviously, you can ask the chat AI and there is support. But if you come in live every week, you can actually have a discussion with the people who build the the products. Um which I think will be very very helpful for us. I’m sure we’ll find issues. I’m sure we’ll find businesses that the system may not be able to help them. Uh but it’s fine. who just, you know, if you prospect five businesses a day and out of those, even, and I’m exaggerating, 20% are not a good fit, you’re still going to close a few clients every month. So, and those clients, those clients could be worth, you know, they’re going to be worth tens of thousands of dollars, guys. Even for the best human agency, not every client is a fit. Not every client should be doing, you know, marketing. Not every client has a budget. It’s I I I I know you guys know this being marketers for many years, but I I hope it’s obvious, but I’m just I’m just saying because it is an amazing program, but at the end of the day, there is a business down the street and that business is doing something. It can afford something, right? And it might not be a good fit. Guys, we’re getting to get to that in just a second. But there are people that are on spilas here. They’re not sure if they’re in, if they’re safe or not. So, I have to read out a few more names, guys. This is huge. Dell Schaefer, you’re in. You’re safe. Miles, you’ve done it. David Wade, you’re in. Lawrence Franchie, Dan Hollister, Irea, Asamido, you’re in. Paula, Illen Cohen, Joseph Ryan, Austin, Thomas, John Wayne, Everett, BPI, I like the first name, BPI, you’re in. Tim Squires, you’re in. Denise Bailey, Eric Briscoll, Christopher Lender, Jennifer Higgler, Michael Jones, there’s a company name I won’t read out. Nile, you’re in. You are saved. Tony Matthew, John Fuller, you’re in. Ronald Garber, you’re in. Alexander Earl, Ross, Leonard, Karen, John, you’re in. Sraj, you’re in. Anderson, you’ve done it. Travis, Rissa, Cut, Mark, you in. Guys, if you haven’t yet joined, and I’ve got a load more names to read out. This is it. This is your moment. This is it. Before I lose my voice, you’ll be doing everyone a favor right now and saving yourself a fortune. You are going to want to join this. Everyone is going to be want to be part of gobotic. It’s going to take over the agency world and the digital world and it is something else as well. Every entrepreneur that you know with all the nonsense that exists out there, there’s so much utter nonsense out there. We’ve got something that is better than anything out there. Anything out there. You’ve got something better than anything out there. You can share this with anyone that you want. everyone that you want and you literally are going to have people flying in. The opportunity is like nothing you’ve seen before. Almost got my camera on, guys. It didn’t quite happen, but we’re working on it diligently. We’re not going to give up. Here I am. We’ve made it in with a bigger camera. We made it in with a bigger camera. So, we are safe as well. I don’t know what you did to this whole setup here. It have to hand it to you. He is the genius behind this, but he’s managed to put it off. But uh absolute genius. All right. So um you’re in the middle of discussing something. Well, you’re I just disrupted you. There are a lot more people. Not at all. Uh Barry, but but I think before I continue talking about billing, I see like a ton of questions coming in. Can we do just rapid fire answering everybody? Whatever comes in, you can read it. I’ll answer it. Do you mind? Okay. So guys, what we’re going to do is just to make this fair and since we’ve had a thousand people on here, which we have been unable to answer. It’s got be we got amazing support. Um, but it’s almost impossible for us to be able uh to answer this. So I had to relog in under a different name in order just to get in to get my video to work. So many apologies for uh for that. But guys, what we’re going to do right now is copy and paste your questions and they come it’ll be first come first serve basis. Matt, you’ve had your coffee. You’re ready to go. So, here goes guys. Where you at? Let’s go from the very beginning. What are the best markets? Any market that has a 400,000 uh population or the the businesses servicing a few smaller markets that go into 400,000 population or more just because we can support higher uh goal revenues. For my ulp agency, would I be upgrading the logo from power to umbrella to powered by Grootic? the logo. You don’t need to update the logo. You’re you’ll be using either the gray label or your own white label. The system is completely white label. Okay. Got to be fast tomorrow. Quickfire training. Yes or no? Yes, of course. It’s not just quickfire though. We said three times a week. Okay. But there also will be quickfire. People just want to get going. Any prom about competition? Look, we’re so far ahead in the game and with the help of you guys, with with our amazing community, we’re going to skyrocket this year. So it would be very hard to catch us currency people who want to use other things other than dollars. Yes or no? Currently USD only the latest. Okay, we’re honoring the next question to Antonio. He’s asked this question three times. We’ve only just about to answer it round for the first time. Antonio, thank you for your support and being here. To whom do I send the link if I don’t have any business contacts? Is that a problem? Not at all. You don’t have to have business contacts. The system was built for cold prospecting. Okay. And we’re going to show you how to your entire business plan right now is just handing this out to businesses. The business plan that all you have to do is literally give us out the business. That’s what our main focus of training is going to be. Uh is there going to be a firecracker video of E tomorrow Barry explaining robotic fire power for referrals? Yes, because you’ll need it when you refer to agencies and other entrepreneurs. But for businesses, the entire idea of sending them the chat, you want to impress them with an insane gap analysis and growth plan, not with a video of the system. Are you going to convince me to do a video for that or not? I I I think you’re convinced. No, you’re in. I’m convinced, guys. I’m on your side. Eim pointed out, guys, I want you to understand that to give out those plans, those plans are extraordinarily expensive for us for them to be utilized. So when you get a 100 and your investment’s 195 you understand our business model is based primarily on your success it because the plans cost us a fortune when people are actually filling them out it’s a hard hard cost. So we’d love to just be give you those plans to give away but they are using so much intense amount of data and AI and all the algorithms all the things that we and all the data that it’s pulling from our system it’s costing us a lot of money. In fact, Etimar and I sat down, had an entire day just going over the whole business model and thinking whether we are shooting ourselves in the foot doing this. And the conclusion is because we know about the conversions that it will create for you. And when you bring a client, it’s going to be worth 30, $40, $50,000. You are paying us $195 for each client. Heck, it makes sense. But we are arming you literally arming you with armory that is going to businesses take go through that. It’s a 12 month marketing business growth plan. Not a marketing plan, not a business plan. A growth plan. A growth plan. So they’ve added this is incredible. You don’t understand yet how incredible it is, right? And I’m telling you, if anyone really understands what it knows, you won’t be sleeping till next week. You literally will be up at night thinking about this like has for the last two years. You wonder why he sounds like something from from Star Wars when he does all I am not going to sleep by I’m not going to sleep now either. I’m probably not going to sleep until the end of the year. He could have he could have played Darth Vader in the last one. He so tired. He has not been sleeping because he knows what this is going to create for our members. This is it. There’s nothing else. You’ve now met. It’s the equivalent where Russell comes along and says, “Oh, here’s Clickfunnels, but this is an entire business.” It was a poor example. And people go, “Oh, well, that’s going to take over the world, is it?” Yes, it is. This is beyond that. It’s like the go level when it first was released. It’s way beyond that. And I think everyone here understands it. All right, why don’t you answer? I’m going to line up the next 50 people that joined. And there’s a lot of people that are joining, guys, but you are in. So, it anything you want to add? I’m going to line up the next 50 people that joined. But I want to ask guys, most important question for me is because you’re going to lose out on this. If you haven’t joined and you are like, I don’t know why you haven’t joined, but there’s something that you don’t understand that stop you from joining. This is it. So therefore, this is your time to join because it’s just a numbers game. You give out 100 plans, you get 30 people to 30 businesses through that. It’s almost impossible that you’re not going to make sales. a sales going to be worth tens of thousands of dollars. Guys, do it every single month. Remember, a client is paying you monthly, monthly, monthly. It grows. Therefore, the key is giving out plans. And by the way, those who are joining can also add new plans. If you want more plans, you can do that as well. So, unless you don’t have a pulse in that case and even then you’re making a mistake. If you haven’t got a pulse, find someone that can make sure you get a pulse and join. Do it right away. It have a lot you want to share. You’re very patient. I’m you’re sharing very important information and uh I’m listening carefully. I’m also getting we’re getting a lot of questions in chat here. Do you want uh do you want me to start going through them? Go for it. Go for it. I’m just getting over excited here because I can see what’s happening here. Members are getting go for it. Yeah. So So one of the main questions is I see from members is um they’re asking if is when somebody clicks the link. Is it when somebody becomes a client? What does that mean? So the growth plan is counted when somebody finishes the chat. When they finish the chat answering all the questions and then at the end there is a button start my marketing uh start my marketing plan then it’s counted as a growth plan because then we produce the gap analysis and the growth plan and that’s one. So you can even scale to more. I saw a lot of people that want wanted to do that. Uh but that’s how it works in terms of how many clients can you have unlimited amount of clients like it, you know, if you uh decide to buy a thousand growth plans and out of those you generate a 100 clients uh a month, great. Then you end up at the end of the year with a thousand clients. I’m just saying that’s a very that’s a huge agency. That’s an agency doing tens of millions of dollars a year. Um you can do that. Like there is no limitation to how many. Rick is asking, “Does it roll over? It doesn’t roll over. It’s per month.” Uh, c can you read some questions for me? I see they’re just long. Uh, Barry, yeah, I think one of the biggest questions, we’ve seen this throughout the last few hours actually, but it’s important. Um, is the difference between monthly and yearly bidding, guys. Uh, it doesn’t matter whether you go monthly or yearly. You’ve got a fullyfledged digital marketing agency. Normally to build such a business it would cost you tens of thousands of dollars of infrastructure. You’d need to employ many many different teams to be able to perform any sort of role properly. When it comes to building an agency, think about it. You need a team to do prospecting, reaching out to businesses and doing that discovery of getting some initial data from the business. You need another team of experts to create a gap analysis. And you need a superstar team that will be able to understand the full 360 picture the business is residing in to create a 12-month marketing plan. Executors, you need a massive team to execute on multiple different services. Well, with this, whether you join at monthly or yearly, you’ve got the lot. You’ve got an unparalleled amount of services that robotic is representing is Sherry is going to be selling on your behalf. We’re working with the very best service pres pro providers in the world, giving us the best profit margins, meaning you can make markups 50% 75% 200% depending on the market you’re talking to and the location that you’re working in. You can do this from anywhere in the world. Anyone can do this. We’ve literally narrowed down the entire marketing agency world to one thing and that is giving out growth plans. This is where there’s a difference between monthly and yearly and only there and one other place. Are you going to be getting 20 or 40 marketing plans for businesses to fill out? That is insane. That is insane because once they go through a plan, they see their marketing sucks. They see where the holes are. They get a marketing plan based on eight years of internal data and tens of thousands of campaigns. They are sold. They either reach out to you if you want. they reach out to us if you don’t want to talk to anyone. So the two differences monthly you get 20 plans. Yearly you get 40 plans. Monthly you get three months of sales done for you and if you want that and with yearly you get that for the entire year. Those are the differences. Other than that you are a fullyfledged digital marketing agency. Yes, Cla you’ve made it in as well. You are a fullyfledged digital agency owner. You can go to bed tonight knowing that you’ve literally changed your life, your status. You can be proud of what you’re about to do. Super proud, right? Of all those things we do online, are we proud of them? Can we share them with other people or do we just keep it to ourselves? Because, you know, it’s very hard to explain what we’re doing. And it’s not to particularly uh it’s not particularly fancyful either. Well, now you can be proud of what you do. So, this is a click away. you either join at at monthly or yearly but either way you’ve got a fullyfledged digital agency. Um so it one other question that’s coming in is people are asking about um the benefits um of uh being able to uh to add an additional feature that we’re adding. Um and people are asking this what happens if we want if we’re working say and we want to add a different service. In other words, uh we know that Grobotic performs all these services. Well, what if I want to for example take care of SEO myself or I work with a different team from which Grobotic works with? Can I make those changes? And the answer is moving forward. Um there’s going to be an opportunity for you be to be able to do that and that is massive. So, you guys are actually on to something here. Perhaps it you can share how important that is, why that is hugely significant. Again guys, just to make it clear that if you want to work with a different service provider for example in any of the services, you don’t need to. 99% of members will never do so, but if you want, you’ve got that flexibility. It why is that hugely significant? Adding your own solution. I want you guys to think about it for a second. It’s extremely complex. It basically means that the system needs to digest that new product. I’m just let me give you an a real example. In the system, we have uh Google ads that we provide to businesses. By the way, we even create their uh Google ads uh account automatically if they don’t have one. So, we have that service. But let’s say an agency come, maybe some of you, and you like to do your own PPC. You’re okay with robotic doing everything else, but you want to do the PPC yourself. You don’t want anybody else to do it. And you have your own prices, and you have your own prices for landing pages. And you have your own prices that you charge for the amount that is spent. And you have your own way of working. And you have your own expectations to what the performance is. And maybe you have some niches that you don’t even work with. And the system need to digest all that and turn you into a product that robotic can manage. What is a product robotic man would manage? You would get a vendor dashboard from our system. Our system in the case of PPC decides if if the client needs or does need a PPC campaign. Let’s say it does. It decides on the keywords. It decides on the locations. It decides what it buys from you. And then it sends you a package for execution. You can communicate with the system if you have um adjustments that you want to make in what the system did. The system can accept it or not. But once it’s set, you are execute. You’re starting to execute as the PPC vendor instead of the existing PPC vendor. And the system communicates and follow-ups with you to make sure you’re doing the right solution. If you’re not up to par with the delivery that are expected from you, the system will have no choice but to replace you, if you will. But, uh, you can definitely, um, uh, put yourself as the main product for the system. And now you can go to all your clients and say, okay, we just had PPC until now. PPC is still coming from us. Everything else is coming, everything else is basically coming from us as well. They don’t know it’s robotic in the back end. And now every campaign is uh you manage by the way the system sees overachievers as well and we might invite you to become a system vendor and not just your own vendor of course and but agencies imagine agencies they got their own service they can add that as well guys this is going to change the agency world you bring an agency they can add their own services it’s game over that could be worth a massive amount of money for one single referral we discussed that during the actual webinar we don’t need to go over it again but Guys, I want you to think big because just bring in four or five clients a year, you got yourself a sellable asset. You can bring in a couple of clients a month, you have something extraordinary. And there’s not a person here that’s not capable of building here something extraordinary. And all you really need to do is send out links. That’s pretty much it. You getting out this entrepreneurs and getting this out to agencies. Entrepreneurs are going to swallow this up alive. Have you ever I’m asking everyone here. I want everyone to respond. every person respond. Have you ever seen a business model like this? There’s so much awful stuff that you see online that promise you the riches and you know to make money in your underwear doing absolutely nothing. This is a real business that you can get your head around that there isn’t a person on earth is going to say I love this. Anyone that loves go high level, this is something this is like Pepsi to Coca-Cola, right? Because it’s an all-encompassing solution. It’s not I I absolutely love go high level. love them. But this is an all-encompassing service. It’s everything beyond way beyond. So, is there an entrepreneur that’s not going to want something like this? Guys, you bring in entrepreneurs that is making you money every single month recurring. Not just their subscription fees, but also where they bring on clients as well. You’re getting more and more and more. There’s multiple streams of income that open this opens up. We are going viral. I want to make it clear. I want to make it clear. This is our vision from the last several years, but this is going to go viral. Okay, let’s go. You want fire quick fire questions, but we need quickfire answers. Eto, are you ready for this? Let’s go. Okay, if you if a client doesn’t want to activate a growth plan, uh, but wants to do a test drive on one or two services, uh, will there be an activation fee? How does that work? There is no way to test run one or two services unless you go manually into the growth plan and hack it which you can and remove services from it. But then I don’t know what the client will test because the system won’t able to get to to the client’s goal uh without these services potentially. So the client doesn’t care about services. I just want to mention that the client cares about reaching the additional income per month. They don’t care if you’re doing it with SEO, PPC, website conversion or, you know, a man on the moon. They I don’t care, by the way. If you told me that you you can generate for me an additional X amount a month, as long as it’s legal and doesn’t hurt my business, I’m happy with it. Okay. Uh remind me, I do have something I want to share with you at the very end. This is very, very important. Don’t worry, it’s not about you. Always ends up being about you, but it’s not really about you. Um, so a good question from day. Go for it. Can you briefly Can we briefly touch on multilocation? Very important franchises. Yes. I said uh we handle multilocations but the franchises specifically we look at a growth plan per franchisee. If you want to show this to the franchise on the corporate level and say hey let’s white label robotic under the franchise brand and the franchise will give it to all the franchises. We can do that. So, if you want to do a mega deal, like an enterprise deal, just work with us on that. We’ll work with you and we’ll make that happen. Uh, we can definitely do that. Okay. Um, will there be digital training to refer to? Absolutely, Lonnie. Every single week, this is it. This is it. And it’s going to be singular training, right? You’re not going to have anything you don’t need, and it’s going to be focused on you making money. That is it. Um, if the Oh, we’ve already answered that. Uh, does it support different prices with different countries?

    It does not. Currently, it’s just in USD. Okay, fantastic. Santa has joined, guys. If Santa’s joined, this is it. This is the Santa. I love Santa. A bit early in the year though. Okay, Santa has joined. Um, I love the name. Okay, let’s go. Any further questions? Uh, Jay Marcus is in. I’m so glad to be in. Um, okay. Messaging. People asking about messaging, emails, where they come from, messages within the system to prospects, clients, etc. How does that work? Exa. Exactly. Excellent question. There is difference between prospects and clients. All the messaging in the system and communication in the system to clients is done by robotic. Obviously, you can reach out to your client anytime you want, but things like, okay, to-dos, reports, the we just send them out uh under uh your white label or if you don’t want to white label under your gray label, messages to prospects is what we’ll cover in the marketing training uh that we’ll do extensively. Okay, next question coming up. One second. Trying to get to their questions. Okay, Andrew folk, you’re in. You are safe. I will read out more names in just a second. How do we contact you? I found uh how do we get customer service or live support? So once you get access into the platform, inside the platform, there is the AI guide. If the AI guide doesn’t know how to answer something, you are able to click a button and connect with support. Hey people, I’ve got I do have something really personal I do want to share at the end, but I do want to read out some more names. Richard Newman, you are safe. Amy Wallace, you’ve done it. Paul Echelo, Kevin Coleman, you’ve done it. Michael Nottingham, Wendy Justice, Marco Aspass, Anne Matah, Heidi Johnson, Ron Johnson, Wow, Ronda Adams, Anthony Agua, Walter Watson, Linda Oliver, Doran Rand, Mlo, Gabber, Derek, David Wade, Harold Harold, Jirish Patel, MD, Islam, you’ve done it. Eric Ranks, Tucker, you’ve made it. Tucker Mixon has done it. Rodney Marcus, you’ve done it. Early wines, Philip Darita, James Smith, Matthew Janon, Water Carello, Allison Coats, Richard Wes, Richard Jablonsky, Boris Tiplitsky, Mary A. Fox, Chad Sliga, you’re in. You are safe. By Wenrich, Manuel Pinto, Paul Milard, Nilish, Bakata, you’re in your say. Let’s do a few more and then we’re going to leave the rest to the end. John’s in Lester’s in Travis Andrew M. Clemens, you’ve done it. Dina Vakova, you’ve done it. Wayne Gooderson, you’ve done it. David Marlo, Carl Kachcha, Leonard Meyers, you’re all in. Itar, what does it feel like after years and years? I know you got some questions, but I just want to get to this because you deserve this. This guy has spent years with this vision and then building it out, working on it day in day, night, every day, thinking about it 24/7, knowing what it’s going to do for our members and how it’s going to explode. This guy has done it. We are now a team to get this out there. Eimar, how does it feel? The reception that you’re receiving, the love, the hearts. Now with this go to webinar business, we don’t know how to turn on a camera anymore, but we do know it’s now got hearts and things that he throws onto the screen. Guys, give your appreciation for Marsha Fear. Years and years and years of no sleep. Literally, I speak to him in the morning. He hasn’t slept the whole night. I deserve a heart. I had to listen to this guy in the morning after he hasn’t slept the whole night. Where’s the hearts for me? I’ve put up with this guy for two years. I’m just kidding, guys. He is a genius. He is a workaholic. He is a visionary. He’s built this thing. And there is nothing like it. People will be talking about this. This is that ClickFunnels moment when Russell gets on stage and goes, “I’ve got something new for everyone.” This is it. I want to know. G says Barry’s amazing too. No, I’m not. But I’ve got tolerance for people that don’t sleep very well. That’s my main my main area of uh of of growth. I would like to guys, if you haven’t joined, I need your best excuse ever. I will not leave until I get every single person hasn’t joined. Why not? We’re going viral. We’re getting out there. Nothing compares to this. I want you to benefit from this as well. Anyway, people are sharing their love with you, Eimar. Okay, Paul’s joining those hasn’t joined, but he will be joining. I heard my I heard the crackling voice of EM Mars. He hasn’t slept in two years trying to do a walk through for you for us. I remember it and I remember it like it was yesterday because this is what changed my life. That’s what we want to see. Um, okay. It anyone hasn’t yet joined? I don’t know why not, but any last any other questions that you want to mention? And I will read out some more names in just a few seconds. Uh, before let’s get to the crescendo here, guys. If you got questions tomorrow, I’m sure you still got things you want to get through. Ask me super fast. So many so many nice like uh Thank you guys so much for all the kind kind words and the love. I really appreciate it, man. You deserve it. You definitely deserve it. I deserve it after two years. You deserve it. You deserve it. Only because you’re a genius. And uh it’s what a pleasure it’s been. I do have a personal story I do want to share. Don’t worry, it’s not about you because it gets cringey for he doesn’t like it. And then the next morning I get even more over the head. He’s tired and he said, “Why did you say that?” So, it any last questions you want to deal with? There are a ton of questions here, but uh you know you know we’re already 3 hours more. How long are we here? Three and a half hours into this session. Three minutes. Yeah. I I think we need to conclude soon. Um even though so many of you are still here. Wow. I really appreciate that. All right. This Why am I doing this after 3 hours and 34 minutes? So, uh, can everyone see this? Do you see this? Yes. All right. Okay. Yes. I I may be 53, but why is this here? I’ve got to share with you something, guys. So, um, unless you have some other questions you do need to you do need to share. Go ahead, please. I go I’ll just cover this guy. So, just under two years ago, in fact, how when did you first come up with this major vision of what robotic needs to look like? When was the day you realized this is what we need to build? Can you go back and and share with us when that happened? I think it was a couple of years ago. I don’t remember exactly, but it was a couple of years ago and so I remember it. I can remember it, guys. And I’m not I’m going to try not to get too emotional about this. Um, but it’s something I do want to get off my chest. And something I’ve been thinking about is I’m sitting here um talking on a webinar for the most insane system that’s I think ever been created. And I have a panda behind me. So that generally is not a normal thing to do on a webinar to spend three and a half hours with people with a panda behind you needs a little bit of explanation. So I do want to share this. Um so I do remember because uh just over two years ago um my mother had a fall and as a result that fall eventually um almost two years ago she passed away. So just before she did uh she hit her 80th birthday and this was the gift that we gave her. This was the gift that we gave her. And I’ll never forget my one of my mom’s before she like because she had a a terrible head wound. But one of the questions that she asked me almost as before she uh she had that wound was one question I’ve got for you Barry. What on earth do you do? What on earth do you do? And I never forget that question. I never was able to answer it. And then she fell. And I told her, “Mom, you you just have to wait. You just have to wait. It’s not ready yet.” She said, “You’ve been doing this for 10 years. is not ready yet. It’s not quite ready yet, but it will be ready. So, here it is 2 years later. I remember that day shared the vision. My mind space, my head space was not there. It was in a completely different stratosphere unfortunately dealing with with personal matters. Uh but this is what reminds me every single day of that vision that it had and what he shared it with me and I wasn’t 100% there. I’ve got to eat this on and despite that built this incredible system and I gave everything that he has got and to be honest as a partner in umbrella I wasn’t always there. This guy was a support to me in my moment of need and built this despite the fact that I wasn’t able to give 100%. Um and family always always is and always always always come first. Um, but it was my partner that allowed us to do this and build this. Um, and I’m sitting here and to my mother, this is what we’ve been doing these last couple of years. This is what we’ve been doing. This is what I wanted to share with you. So, here it is in her memory as well. And it you allowed us to reach this incredible point and we would never have done it, of course, without you. Um but it’s just the way that it’s been done and the uh the appre and the amount of support that you’ve given me over that period and it was a very difficult period in my life. Um and this reminds me every single day and I haven’t shared this with everyone but it’s been sitting here. You’ve probably seen it on webinars the last two years waiting for this moment and here it is. So, here’s a picture of her with us and that was taken with it was just us actually. We gave to her 80th birthday literally um a month or two before she passed away. So, anyway, just want to get this off my chest. I hope that’s that is okay, guys. And uh again, sometimes they say don’t ever show vulnerability. Never show vulnerability. It’s not a good thing. I think the opposite. We have Itar, the greatest community on earth. There is no community online that compares to ours. You knew what was going to happen and you knew the reaction you’re going to get and we all knew because we know what our members are like. And our prayer and our blessing to every single one of you is that you follow this training. We are now moving into this. This is it. This is what we’ve been waiting for for the last two years that we weren’t always able to share with everyone that that we loved, but we’re sharing it with you and you are here to represent them as well. And you’re now taking action. Next week, the rubber is going to hit the road and we’re going for it. This is going viral. There is no plan B. This is going viral. I think everyone that’s been here, it knows this is the next high level. This is the next Click Funnels and High Level and everything else stacked up one on top of the other. There has never been anything like this. There probably never will. But you are here at the very beginning of the journey. And you, it is our blessing, will be the ones that benefit the most. So, for the last time, Anita, I’m sure you’ve got some last comments you need to make, but don’t talk about me. I’ve spoken enough about myself. I had to get off my chest. But guys, join the CEO, founder, visionary, and close friend of mine, Eim Shafir. Any last comments you need to make as members make their final decision? Are they about to get their super agency right now, the investment of the medium plan, and get the benefits that it entails? What are your last thoughts? Uh, wow. Um, first off, this the last uh your last segment uh really moved me and I think you’re very brave to share it. Uh hard for a lot of people. You guys don’t understand. We’re going to be like a super explosive community, super explosive, especially with the three trainings a week that we’re going to do. That’s three one live training uh two live trainings and one office hours with uh the CTO and head of support uh that you guys can contribute to the product and talk about bugs and issues. Um we’re going to be non-stop. We’re going to move like like a like a jet. I don’t know um rocket ship today, right? We have rocket ships. Why jets? We’re going to move like a rocket ship uh so fast and everybody are going to explode this year uh 2026. We’re just all going to crush it. It’s going to be the same with robotics. Yeah. All right, guys. I uh I want to thank you all again. Um you’ve got the link. You don’t need me to say it again. I’m out of all energy. I’m going to lie down for 3 hours and probably wake up again like tomorrow does after 3 hours and then realize that we need we forgot something. Need to do something else. But if you need anything, where do they go for support? If they have any questions, any issues, where’s support? Currently, go to help.umbrellus.com.

    We have a chat there that you can connect with support. Guys, God bless you all. Thank you so much for being us. Look after yourselves. You got the link if you haven’t yet joined, but do it as soon as you possibly can. I know some people have to wait till tomorrow and things like that. Grootic is live. After years in the making to and all the toil and investment and tears and effort that this has taken, it is now here and now these are your fruits uh that you’re going to benefit from. So guys, thanks very much. Love to get your final one sentence response of how this was. And if you didn’t join, oh my goodness, you’re going to regret it. You are going to regret it down the down the road. Um and there won’t be exceptions. We won’t be able to get you in for less. So, if you can do it as much as you possibly can, join. The vision is now hit. It’s utopia. That’s where we are. And we’re going to build this out like there’s no tomorrow. Again, you got the link. Thank you so much. It Thanks, man. Thank you, guys. Thanks, Barry. Amazing stuff. See you soon. Bye.

  • 06/16/2026 – Full Claude Guide – Beginner to Pro in Under 15 Minutes

    I’ve spent over 1,000 hours inside Claude and I use it every single day to build tools, run workflows, and even launch million-dollar companies. And look, you might feel super productive using Cloud right now, but what if I told you you’re barely scratching the surface? In this video, I’m going to walk you through every level of Claude user from the amateur all the way to the one who builds fully autonomous systems that run without lifting a finger. Let’s start with level one, the amateur. See, the amateur treats Claude like a fancy Google search. One question in and a response back and then they close the tab. There’s no memory. There’s no projects. Claude has no idea what you’re working on and you’re using maybe 5% of what Claude can do. It’s like having access to a NASA supercomput and calculating 2 + 2. So, if you’re in this level, here are two pro tips to help you level up. Number one, make Claude interview you first. For example, you can tell Claude, “Before you answer, ask me any questions that you need to perform this task properly.” And watch it ask you the questions that provide the context that it needs to give you the best answer. The second thing is you got to make Claude check its own work. Watch it catch its own mistakes, which is annoying because you think it would do it in the first place, but it will give you a better output. You can use this every day by just saying, “Check your work.” Now, before we go to the next level, we have to stop working from scratch every time. So, how do you make Claude have persistent memory? Level two, the regular. The regular treats Claude like a workspace. They don’t just chat with it. They use projects, which is a feature within Claude, for their role. They use it per initiative. They use it per client. They’re using it per workflow. And what’s cool is Claude finally remembers who they are every time they come back. So, the work gets better. And this is how you set them up the right way. So, number one, on the left side, you will see create a new project. Click that and then name the project the role you work in. And in this example, we’ll just say marketing. Okay, that’s your role. Second, we need to build a master prompt for your role. So every time you chat with it, it knows who you are and what you’re trying to accomplish. Now, the cool part is you can ask Claude, type this in, interview me to build a master prompt for my role as a marketer. Watch Claude ask you questions, you answer it, and then you get a file. That is your master prompt. And what a master prompt is is a file of instructions that tells the AI everything about you. How you like to work, what your team looks like, what tools you use, everything about your role. So that every time it gives you an answer, it can use that information to guide its output. The third is we got to add the files. So now that we have the master prompt, let’s go back into the project, add that as a project file. than any other documents you have within your company. Maybe it’s sample data, maybe it’s examples, maybe it’s files, maybe it’s processes. Put that in the files directory with your master prompt. Now you have a customized space that has memory that has context and has your specific workflow for how you like to work. So for example, every time I sit down to create a YouTube video, I have a project folder to help me ideulate and give me outlines and strategies. In my files, I gave it everything that it would need. I gave it my voice document, my branding document, my examples of previous scripts that I like. It has everything that it needs to create outlines based on how I’ve done them in the past. And then I just direct it and then I hit enter and Claude gives me the outlines. Here’s a pro tip. If you want to take projects to another level, do this. Ask the AI to interview you to create a system prompt for a specific workflow that you’re trying to create with your chats. The master prompt is like your ingredients. That is everything about you, your context, etc. The system prompt is the recipe. It’s the instructions. It’s the process. So, you probably already have a process. You just never documented it. So, the AI can interview you so you get that as the output. So, once you get that, just copy and paste the system prompt into your custom instructions and watch this thing run like a machine. That way, you have the same quality, the same format every freaking time you use that project. And look, if you want to go even deeper on how to incorporate cloud or any AI into every department within your business, I have my AI company OS, the exact playbook I use to integrate AI into all my businesses, and I’m giving away for free. If you want it, just DM me, YouTube OS on Instagram, and I’ll send it over. So now your projects turn Claude into a workspace, like a desk with a process, and the whole thing’s automated. But what about everything else? Think emails, calendars, work you have to do in the browser. Level three, the integrator. The integrator plugs Claude into the tools where work actually lives. We use Gmail, Calendar, Drive, Slack, Notion. The integrator connects it to Claude, so they stop bouncing around from all these different tools and tabs. Why would I have to go copy and paste an email into Claude when I can just tell Claude to go get the email? The cool part now is that you can build an act inside Claude. The integrator doesn’t leave the tool. They do the work in the tool and then they send the information that the tool created to wherever it has to go. So here’s how you operate at the integrator level. Number one, we use connectors. Okay? So go through and connect your Gmail, your drive, your Slack, your notion, all the systems that you have. It has an ability for you to connect those data systems so that it’ll search those places next time you’re chatting with it. Two, build visualizations. This is my favorite feature in Cloud is that I can get it to visualize things. I can create graphs, bars, mockups all inside the chat. And even better, the third is build interactive artifacts. These are like little mini apps that you can have outputs that are clickable and sliders and buttons, and it makes learning or visualizing information or interacting with data so much easier. And here’s an advanced move that nobody talks about. You can actually paste text into chat and tell it to put it inside Composer, which is like a Google doc inside of chat. And then you can edit it and play with it so that it gets the output exactly like you want. My clock is connected to my Google Drive, to my Slack, to my calendar, to my email. So I tell it all the time, hey, look at my calendar. Tell me what I’m missing. Look at my email. Tell me what I need to know. I’m the CEO of my company. Scan Slack for the last week and give me CEO level understanding of what’s going on across the company. These are things that I run almost on a daily basis so I’m always on top of it. Now, if you want to level up with a pro tip, install Claude in Chrome. I use this all day long. Oftentimes, I’ll have a chat ask me to do something. I say, “Write the instructions for me.” I copy, I paste it into Claude inside of Chrome within some site, and I hit enter, and it goes and does my work for me. Now, this is all super cool, but the truth is Claude’s just helping you at this level. The next level, that’s where Claude actually does the work for us. Level four, the operator. The operator. This is where you stop being the doer and you start becoming the director. I consider this the human in the loop where the operator you are now setting up tasks that run on their own. You just review things and you approve it. This is where you stop using Claude and you start deploying it to solve problems for you. And these are three ways any operator can deploy Claude to do work for them. So number one is system prompts. Essentially, you want to have Claude interview you to create these system prompts for any type of output. So, I believe that the future of intellectual property and what makes teams or companies valuable is that they have system prompts defined for the things they create. Level two is skills. You will notice over time as you keep doing these things, these workflows, you can actually save them as skills. Claude has a bunch of skills that you can install. They’ve created hundreds, everything from financial skills and marketing skills, etc. But you might have some proprietary things you do inside your company. If so, you want to create a slash, name it, and run it and then make it a skill. My rule is if I’m doing it more than three times a week, I might as well have as a skill. For example, I’m always wondering what’s going on within my company. So, I created a company status skill that analyzes all the analytics and the metrics and the reports and everybody’s updates and then gives me a cute, concise little update on the company as it is today. So, I just type for/ company status and it does it every time. Third is scheduling co-work tasks. Now, if you haven’t heard of co-work, that’s an app that runs on your computer and it can literally take over your computer. So, you can get it to run a job like migrate from this system to another system, hit enter, go have dinner, come back and watch it get done. So, what a great operator does is he looks at his system prompts and he looks at his skills and he goes, “Hey, are these repeatable outputs that I can schedule and co-work to have it done every day?” So, for example, every night I get a message at 8:00 that shows me my following day and it looks at my emails and my calendar and lets me know everything I need to do as if I had a chief of staff and I do and she’s awesome. But I set it up cuz I don’t need her to do it. Then I know what tomorrow is going to hold. So, if I had to make any last minute changes, I can do it. I set it up once and it runs it every night and I never have to think about it. The operator realizes with AI, they direct the work. They don’t just do it. Now, this is a massive pro tip and it’s called chaining your skills. So, for example, you might have a copywriting skill that writes in your voice and then you’re writing emails, which is also its own skill, and it’ll use the copywriting skill. And those two skills might be called in a completely different skill that’s all about automating your inbox. And those skills are like separately packaged little genius agents that all chain together to create an outcome. The whole pipeline is chained skills. The operator is now really using AI. So, schedules and skills, those automate with your existing tools and connectors. But what if the tool doesn’t exist yet? Level five, the builder. Not too long ago, we shut down the company for 2 days. We held an AI hackathon. We taught everybody how to code. In those two days, everybody on the team became builders. Essentially, what you can do is use Claude to write code, build custom apps, dashboards, internal tools, all inside of Cloud Code. Now Claude isn’t just answering questions anymore or setting up skills. It’s literally shipping software. In this level, we’re introducing a new level of Claude called Claude Code. And just so you know, if you’re in this level already, you’re in the 0.04% of the population. Most people don’t know this. Inside Cloud Code, you can use three categories of building. The first one I called loops. These are reoccurring jobs that do work. They’re similar to co-work, but they run inside of a server and they can talk to other agents. They can talk to other systems, they can use other APIs, and they’re way more advanced, but they’re loops because they’re always running. Number two is tools. These are things you build for one-off situation. So, you might build a tool for a project. You might build a tool to help you accomplish something. It’s not going to be something you’re going to do forever, and that’s why I consider them disposable. The third level is apps. I’m talking real software. Everybody that was involved in that hackathon I talked about built real working production software. For example, I have this incredible person named Betty. She’s my house manager. She manages our lives for my wife and I. She built a system that manages all of our workflows, every aspect of my personal life, the cars, the real estate, the investments, the budgets, everything. And she’s not a programmer. In the world of AI, English is the new programming language. Now, if you want a pro tip, 100% of the time before I build anything, I use a feature called plan mode. Essentially, you hit forward/pl and then you just dump your idea. It hears everything you said and then it will ask you questions if it needs and then write a whole completed plan that you approve first before it writes any code. The reason why plan mode is so important is because people are always complaining, “Oh my gosh, Dan, it costs so much to do all these AI apps now.” It’s cuz they didn’t plan up front. If you do this, it’ll save you a ton of money. And another pro tip plus+ is cla code remote. And I use this every time I leave my laptop where in your terminal window where you’re writing code, you can say forward/ remote control and it will connect to your claude app on your phone. It keeps writing code. And I did this three or four times while I’m mountain biking on my phone. I’m writing code. And that is how I got this cuz I took a burm and my front tire washed out. Now, we just talked about how you build tools, but what if we could learn how to build team members? Level six, the agent orchestrator. The orchestrator is the agent you design that actually runs something. So now it’s a loop that keeps running a department, a process, a workflow, and you’re no longer involved cuz you took all these pieces we just talked about and you plugged it into the Claude agent. Now you’re the human on the loop, not the human in the loop. Claude stops being just the tool and it now becomes infrastructure. Now, there’s a million ways to build an agent, but instead of telling you how to build just one, I want to give you a framework to teach you how to think about building agents. First, you have to start with one main agent. This is your agent. It could be your chief of staff agent. It could be your admin agent. I’ve got a CEO agent. This is your orchestrator. Mine is called Kai. He doesn’t do anything really. He just directs the other agents. I know this is crazy. Next, you have to go and create specialized sub agents. And each sub agent owns a workflow. Your main agent communicates with the sub agents and tells them what to do. The third is you connect your telegram to talk to your agent through your phone. Reese is my real estate agent. He finds deals of investments that I can do. And Kai checks in with Ree every day and reports back to me because he does it with all my agents. All done without me having to do anything. The agents think, they decide, they execute within the parameters. See, we’re building the machine that runs the machine. Your main agent is that machine. Now, I use my own platform called Apex. You can go check it out, apex.host, but you can use Claude to do this. Actually, behind Apex, we use Claude as the main agent model. Apex just makes it more secure and way easier to interact with it. Now, here’s a pro tip. I have a critique agent that my main agent will ask to go and review things like copywriting or research or anything so that it’s done right. It creates a list of notes to make it better. Gives it back to the agent. It runs it again so I always get the best output. So now, do you see how I’m no longer involved in the work? I’m the human on the loop. My partnership with the AI allows me to do way more than if I was having to sit there and process information through a pipeline. And you can do this, too. Most people are just collecting cloud features. They’re like, “Oh, I use that. I use this.” But they don’t actually make it part of their habits. So, here’s what I need you to do. choose one of these features and make a commitment to do 30 days in a row of using it. Maybe it’s a cloud browser extension, maybe is advanced and say, “Okay, every day I’m going to work on an agent.” I don’t know what it is for you. Leave a comment below and let me know what you’re committed to. And remember, if you want my AI company OS playbook, the same one I use in all of my businesses, just DM me YouTube OS on Instagram and I’ll send it right over. And if you want to know the six most profitable AI businesses to start, click here and I’ll see you on the other

  • 06/16/2026 – Arrived Webinar

    Fantastic. Jake and team, thank you so much for prepared remarks as always. You probably saw we have folks from all over the country today, which is absolutely fantastic. Coast to coast. Uh for folks that are new here, feel free to drop any and all questions in chat. Uh I will either answer directly in chat or we’ll throw it right up on the screen and answer them live. So this is your time. Feel free to drop any and all questions. We’ll go ahead and get started here. Um, and one thing to mention, sometimes if we see like kind, I’ll group those together. So, if there’s a little bit of moving around, um, that would be why, but then at the end, I’ll definitely make sure we’ve answered all so you all feel supported. We’ll jump right in here. I briefly answered in chat, but always a good one to touch on live. Can we use IRA funds to invest with arrived? And how do we do this? Yeah, it’s been a long requested feature. Um, the answer is not really. right now we can take investments from checkbook IAS but that’s a very very niche subset of you know IAS that you know 99% of people don’t have the better answer is that it’s something that we know people are interested in um and we’re going to try working on over the next year it’s a great way to kind of pair your retirement dollars which are already kind of a a larger chunk of what you have available to invest and already has a long-term mindset which is perfect for investing in real estate so we’d love to enable some retirement account investing on arrived Um, I’d say look for that over the next year or so. Fantastic. Awesome. Great feedback. Definitely appreciate the question. Um, I can take this one quickly from Stephen. It’s a great question. Which short-term rental platforms, if any, do you use to connect guests to our short-term rental properties within our portfolio? So, our most common are Airbnb. You’ll see that directly on each of the individual offering pages. You can click directly into that listing. But then there’s also VBO, Marriott, Bonvoy, Booking.com, Expedia. This does vary on who the PM is and where they’re sharing it explicitly and there can be more there as as well. So, uh, we work hard to get those listings in as many places as possible. I also dropped a link, it’s called our Airbnb wish list, but that’s where all of our vacation rentals live, too. So, if you want to take a peek, uh, again, those are directly on Airbnb. That’s the one we’re constantly adding to, but we have a lot of investors uh that like to to view that one. That’s nice. I didn’t know we had that. That’s a super cool page. Yeah, it’s awesome. It’s an easy way to see all of them in one place. We’re at 3940 vacation rentals, so it’s definitely grown over time. Um I can take this one quickly, too. Can we call you on the telephone? Great question. We previously did offer a phone number, but it wasn’t monitored 24/7, so it left folks um unable to reach us quickly. That said, we host these webinars uh once a week right now at 9:00 a.m. PT. We have investors that jump in here just for Q&A. We also have live chat support in the bottom right hand corner of our platform. You can always click in there. Uh we do have a few steps that run through an agent before it goes to a human. You can suggest or ask for a human at any time, but our responses there are relatively quick. Um, and then we have other social channels as well, but I would say our webinars and our live chat are our easiest ways to connect with our team. All right, cruising through here. Uh, folks, keep the questions coming. This is your time. So, we want to be sure you feel supported. Um, Jake, one that’s really relevant for right now. I know Ryan talked about liquidity uh during prepared remarks, but we have a live window right now. So maybe we walk through a little bit of the history of secondary market um how it operates essentially and what properties are included. Yeah. So our secondary market is how you can get liquidity for the individual properties. The funds products, the single family fund, the private credit fund, the Seattle fund, they have a separate program for exiting the investment which is called a redemption program. The secondary market is specific to shares in the individual properties. And Ryan talked a lot about it, but the way it works is it’s really like the stock market where you if you own shares in the property, you can list them for sale. If you want to buy shares in a property, you can put in an order to buy them. And the price at which the transaction happens depends on kind of what’s available on the open market and where buyers and sellers tend to overlap in price. Just like with the stock market, you submit a price, you know, you submit a limit order that has a um, you know, a buy order or an a sell order. um you have a bid and ask and the order book will match up you know buyer and seller together. Um you guys as new arrived investors will have eligibility to start participating in the secondary market 60 days after your first investment. So you know we definitely want people to kind of get familiar with arrived and get to know how everything works by kind of buying you know into the new investments. But once you’re kind of an arrived investor then you’re allowed to participate in the secondary market which runs every month. every month generally toward the beginning of the month there’s a full week where properties are trading on the secondary market and so for you know you if you’re looking to invest right now that might be an opportunity where in you know a year or two or three you say hey I actually want to free up some of the capital that I put into some of these individual properties you can go and list your shares for sale and be able to exit the investment that way or close out a position or shift capital around however you may need it also for you guys in particular gives a cool opportunity to buy into older properties unrived so you’ll have all, you know, 400 450 some properties um that we’ve ever offered that are trading on the secondary market and it’ll give you an opportunity in about two months to be able to say, “Hey, I want to be able to buy properties that are in, you know, a market that arrived may not have. You can buy properties that have, you know, loans on them that have interest rates that are very favorable compared to where today’s interest rates are.” Um, so it’s a cool way to kind of be able to build out your portfolio and kind of piece together pieces of different individual properties from across the country because generally the best returns are going to come from having a well diversified portfolio. And while we usually have, you know, four to six individual properties that are available on the site at any given time, it’s nice to be able to go back and kind of backfill your portfolio with kind of the back catalog of arrived investments. So that’s a bit about the secondary market. Um, if you go to our site, you’ll see it in the kind of the top right corner. there’s a little sun button that says secondary market. You won’t be able to do anything on it right now, but you can go and kind of take a look at things, kind of see how properties are trading, what information is available. Um, and generally, you know, when you buy into properties on the secondary market, there’s a lot more information than when you buy into a new investment. Reason being, we have, you know, say four years of operating history for a property. So, we know how it’s, you know, valuation has changed over time. We know what dividends it’s paid out over time. Um, we’ve got a whole timeline that shows you all the events of when the property was leased and for how much and for how long and when it was vacated. Um, so it’s a cool way to kind of see all of the kind of suite of information that you’ll have available for your investments once you start, you know, um, investing with arrived as well. Absolutely. And Jake, very timely. Uh, we had another question come up here about how we find out the property’s historical appreciation and cash flow return to investors. So, Matthew, if you go directly to uh the invest page, and again, you do not have to have an account to view all this information. You’ll go to invest, and then I went over to the performance tab here. If you scroll down a little bit, you’ll see view full property timeline. Now, this is a brand new property that just recently uh was offered to investors. So, there hasn’t been a dividend on this property yet, but let me pull up one really quick where we can see more info. I’d even go to go to go to the secondary market and pull up the sheet from there or go to your or go to your portfolio and pull it up. Great idea. Yeah, because that then I’ll have the full the full set of information. Yes, I’ll go back here one moment.

    Perfect. Okay, so what I did like Jake mentioned, I clicked on that secondary market icon, scrolled down here. Let’s just pick one of these properties in here. Oh, what a great property. But we’ll pick the bean. Uh, so again, here’s all that information directly on um the page as well about this property, what the arrived valuation histories look like, dividend history, so on and so forth. You’ll also see that property timeline in here. Um, if you want to go direct to the property, too, you can always do that as well. But here’s that full property history. So, Matthew, you’ll be able to see dividends paid, more details on it, so on and so forth, if the lease started, if it ended, um, renewals, so on and so forth. You can also go to our learn blog or excuse me, our about section and we have historical returns and this will showcase historical returns on all properties to date on arrived. So, a couple different locations, but to Jake’s point, I think the property history page is definitely the easiest place to go. Jake, any color to add there? No, that was great. All right, moving back over to the key. Some good ones coming through here. Let’s see. A great one from Antonio. Can y’all create a way for us to tag properties in the secondary market to circle back to? Yes, it’s um like favoring properties has been discussed. Um, I don’t think we have anything in the works right this second, but I know the team is definitely aware, particularly as their secondary market has gone from having a couple properties trading at a time to having, you know, close to 500. I think now it’s, you know, a little bit unruly to try to figure out, wait, what was the name of that property that I was looking for? For right this second, the best workaround is to just, you know, oldfashioned, you know, piece of paper and a pen, write down the names of the properties you were interested in or, you know, put it up on a a notes file on your computer. longer term, yes, we’re definitely looking at, you know, how we can, you know, add a favorites list or a wish list like we were just looking at on Airbnb. So, you can kind of tag the handful of properties you may be interested and then even track them across multiple secondary markets to figure out when you actually make a trade in them. Kind of like your, you know, your stocks, you know, watch list. Absolutely. Yeah, great feedback, Antonio. I know, Jake, that’s been one of our most requested features since we launched Secondary Market. So, heard you loud and clear on favoring. We’ll be sure to share more um as we build out. I can take this one quickly right now. How do we uh how do new investors get help when starting to invest? Fantastic question. You can always email supportive.com or you can use that chat chat function menu in the bottom right hand corner of arrive.com. If you actually want to try it right now, I’m more than happy to respond on my side. Um it’s just a little black circle with a trying to describe it correctly with like a smiley in there. Um, so feel free to jump in there. I’m happy to respond so you can see what the chat function looks like, but we have folks that reach out um daily with any and all questions. Happy to help. All right. And I would say too, if there’s any questions that you have here too, we’re happy to answer them live. So, this should be a safe space for 101, 501 questions, anything and everything. Uh, good question from Scott. I can take this one. Do you anticipate adding more vacation rentals in the future? There were none listed in the search the last time I checked. Fantastic question. I would say we’re currently hyperfocused on operational efficiencies for our vacation rental uh segment that we have today. We have roughly 40 on arrived. Uh that said, Scott, they can always become available again on the secondary market which is live right now. Uh but again, that will be an existing vacation rentals at the mercy if existing investors are placing those shares for sale. Uh but we’ll be sure to share your feedback. again hyperfocused on those operational efficiencies for that segment. All right. Uh a good one from Renee. With the real estate market ever changing again, is a ride moving away from those volatile markets? Yeah, we’re constantly, you know, Oh, did I lose my video? You did lose video, but audio is still working. Weird. Um Okay. Um anyway, we are constantly evolving our strategy as the market shifts. You know, when we first started the Arrive platform, you know, interest rates were really, really low and we were buying each property with 60 to 70% debt. You know, investors were funding the other 30% or so with cash and we had this nice leverage investment because interest rates were low and it made a lot of sense. As time has gone on, you know, interest rates went up in 2022. We shifted our strategy a bit and started funding properties with all cash with the hopes that we would refinance them in the future. That hasn’t happened yet since, you know, interest rates are still high, but we continue to monitor the credit markets to see, you know, when that might be a possibility. Similarly, we’ve shifted around market strategies as well. You know, in that kind of similar time frame, we started to buy properties that were in more, you know, appreciation and kind of growth focused areas. Think places like Denver or Phoenix. And you know, as interest rates came up and appreciation leveled off a little bit, we’ve shifted more toward markets that, you know, cash flow really well on day one. So, properties like uh Huntsville, Alabama, Oklahoma City, Knoxville, Tennessee, Chattanooga, um some of these, you know, markets that you may not think of as being like the best place to invest in real estate right off the bat, but when you look under the surface, they really do provide a nice kind of steady stream of cash flow and some consistent appreciation. We kind of continued to evolve the strategy again probably 2023 when we launched our private credit fund. Um that was kind of in response again to interest rates being high and kind of recognizing the opportunity to take on an investment where investors can kind of play the role of the bank and invest in you know debt that is secured by real estate rather than investing in the equity portion of the capital stack. So we’ve continued to evolve our strategy and we will continue to evolve our strategy. the arrived model is really really really flexible. So we could end up investing in land in commercial and industrial um with all sorts of you know multif family. There’s all sorts of different strategies that we may be able to t tackle. It just really is a matter of kind of reading the market, you know, reading ourselves and understanding what we’re good at and what we’re not as good at and then making sure that we kind of place the right bets, you know, seeing what, you know, we are aware of today from, you know, the projections on appreciation forecasts, macroeconomic um situations, you know, um the situations in Washington on the political world. So, we are kind of constantly evaluating our strategy and how it compares to what’s going on and changing the world and figuring out how do we need to change and what other investment products should we offer as a result. I’m going to leave the room and come back real quick to try to get my video back. Yeah, that’s absolutely perfect. Um, we’ll give Jake a moment here um and see if the video will come back. There we go. We’re back in action. Perfect. And Jake, you just brought up very timely. mentioned um the political climate or environment that we have right now. So, a very pertinent one from Matthew. I answered in chat, but this is always a good one to take live. If large institutional investors um like folks have seen out there are restricted from purchasing single family homes, how would that affect arrived offerings or is arrived grandfathered in? It’s still a little bit TBD based on, you know, how they end up defining everything. So far, you know, we’ve got um, you know, folks that we work with in Washington that, you know, are kind of keeping us a breast of the situation, and we feel really good about where we’re positioned. You know, it really helps that the arrived investments aren’t, you know, consolidated under one group of ownership. Each individual property is owned by a different set of investors. So, it’s a little bit different than, you know, say one investment fund that owns, you know, 5,000 properties. We have 500 properties, but they’re each owned by a different set of investors in each of those 500. So that provides us kind of some protection. Um there’s also a lot of you know caveats and you know asterisks in all of the the you know way that some of the bills are written. Um and so far we feel really good about our positioning and kind of where we sit in you know how all of that stuff is shaking out. You know similarly it is a risk in general of operating a business and so it’s one that we kind of continue to monitor and be tracking. Um, and so we will keep everybody breast as we learn more, but right now we feel really good about the positioning. Fantastic. And moving into taxes, I’m so glad Larry asked. These are always my favorite. Tax situation. Will these investments involved uh filing different state tax returns of earnings? So yes, as Antonio Crim pointed out in the chat, the the 1099 DIV you receive will be consolidated. So you’ll get one tax form even if you invest in 20 different properties. What’s even better is that the investments are taxed as REITs. And what that means is that there is no state tax filings. So if you live in California and you invest in 15 different properties, all you have to do is file your federal state federal tax return and your California state tax return. You don’t end up filing a South Carolina state tax return and an Arkansas state tax return. uh which would be really really annoying because you’d have a little bit of income in a whole bunch of different states. Generally means that you know you have a high cost for your CPA and for actually putting together all of the filings. So um it’s really really really nice that you know one you can get it all in one form and two that unlike a you know a uh a partnership like a real estate syndication where you get a K1 it doesn’t trigger any of these other state tax implications. So makes it really nice and easy. Um, you get the one halfpage PDF. It’s about 30 seconds in Turboax to drag and drop or your CPA can handle it no problem. Absolutely. Yeah. For anybody that’s dealt with K1s, they’re a true nightmare. I can’t imagine having to submit like let’s say you you’ve invested in 100 properties havingund 100 different K1s. So, our goal from inception at arrived is to be as passive as possible. So, we try to do that for every uh single piece of our platform today. It’s a great question. Oh, a great one in here from Michael. Uh, how is Arrive different from I believe they used Mogul as an example. I think Jake, there’s a lot of u great prop great properties, great companies out there, different fractional options, traditional ways to invest. What would you say is Arrive’s biggest differentiator? Yeah, there are a bunch. Um, as far as mobile specifically, I haven’t looked deeply at their offerings in a while. Um, not not a knock on them or anyone else, but my recommendation is just, hey, look at all the disclosures, look at all the details. There’s been other investment platforms that have, you know, gone out of business where you kind of look at their, you know, underlying SEC documents and going, you know, you kind of go, they’re taking what kind of fees? You know, you’re kind you have what kind of control? You know, that seems a little bit extreme. Um, so definitely look at all the details and not just the shiny stuff that’s on the front page because there’s kind of always more than meets the eye. That said, kind of where does Arrive sit in the world of real estate investing? You know, we sit in a really unique place. So, for one, as far as, you know, competitors, it’s very indirect, but one that we often hear when we talk to folks is just buying a property on your own and just saying, “Hey, why don’t I just buy the property down the street and own it all myself and then I’ll just rent it out?” And that can be a great option, and it’s one that some people love, particularly if you’re handy and you like working on things. Um, you like kind of being in the physical world. Um, for other people it’s, “Oh my gosh, I just bought myself a part-time job and now I have to commit, you know, 15 hours a week, whatever to management, maintenance, paperwork, learning things, etc.” So, that’s kind of one angle. And again, if you do that type of thing, people tend to invest, you know, where they live because it’s easy for you to be able to work on things and do things. It’s a lot harder to buy a property that’s across the country and still kind of manage it correctly. Um, and you have a huge chunk of your investments tied up in the one property. So you have the opposite of diversification. You’ve got a lot of cash tied up in one particular property. So that’s kind of one kind of angle of competitor that we see. The other is just investing in REITs online. So you can go right now and invest in you know American Homes for Rent or you know one of the Blackstone funds. There are you know investment vehicles online like that. Um they tend to trade more so with the public markets. So American homes for rent invitation homes etc. you know, public storage. If you think about the, you know, all the self- storage facilities you see, um, it can be a way to get some exposure to real estate, but those tickers tend to trade a lot more on the broader, you know, macroeconomic cycle. So, you know, the president comes out and says something and the market moves, those stocks kind of go up and down even though the value of the real estate hasn’t really changed, you know, from yesterday to today. You know, gas prices tick up and instantly the the share price adjusts. Um, and so they can be a lot more volatile. And what really hits you is because you’re investing in a in a a stock that is fully liquid, you pay what’s called a liquidity premium. So you end up paying more for the ability to be able to sell those shares on the market any given day. But for people that want to invest in real estate long term, you’re effectively paying extra for this liquidity feature that you don’t really want to use. If you’re evaluating the arrive platform, I assume you are comfortable with saying, “Hey, I want to invest in real estate, put a certain percent of my portfolio into real estate and not touch it for five or 10 years.” And that is, you know, not generally how the best approach is on the stock market where you kind of pay this extra liquidity premium because of course, if you have something that is liquid every day and something that’s not liquid every day, you’re willing to pay more for the one that gets you that extra liquidity feature. So you end up kind of paying extra for a feature you might not even use effectively and it’s more volatile kind of on a day-to-day basis. And the last knock there is that you end up getting more operating company exposure than real estate. So if you invest in, you know, LAR homes on, you know, the stock market, yes, it’s real estate, but they’re a construction company. So you’re really betting more on their ability to buy land, develop land, build houses, which is a different business than just saying, “Hey, I want to invest in the Charlotte market and bet on Charlotte as an area that I think we’ll appreciate over the next several years.” So that’s kind of the the two main set of indirect competitors that we have. There’s all sorts of other kind of investment platforms, you know, Mogul and Fundrise and uh Yield Street, etc. Um, they all kind of vary a little bit on what they offer as far as types of investments, ability to pick investments, if they’re in funds, if they’re not in funds. Um, and again, definitely recommend looking at reviews, details, track records, um, etc. The, uh, the one last thing I’ll throw in on this topic because I know I’ve been rambling here for a little while, is that with Arrive, you have this kind of cool ability to pick and choose what you invest in. And so, a lot of, you know, real estate funds are going to be kind of all or nothing. just hey here’s our um single family fund and you get what’s in it or you don’t and with arrive you can really pick and choose and kind of customize what you’re buying. So, say that you go and you buy into, you know, um, American Homes for Rent online. You get an instant exposure to the 50,000 some properties that they own. Obviously, you can’t do due diligence on 50,000 some properties. You don’t know how kind of good they are, how bad they are, where they’re located. There’s not really a lot of details and visibility you can see. With Arrive, there is kind of the transparency and ability to look into what do you actually own. If you’re investing in these individual properties, you obviously are investing in that single address. So you can look it up on Google Maps. You can look it on street view. You can look at the school rating. You can check out the area. Um, and even in our single family funds, we list all the properties that are in it. So you can kind of take a peek around to see, you know, where you actually have exposure to. So you kind of have that transparency angle with Arrived. And you also get that customizability angle where you may say, “Hey, I want to invest in the US, but I am not investing in Florida because I’m worried about hurricanes.” You have the ability on arrive to just pick and choose properties that kind of fit that criteria. you can kind of filter and look around by what areas are in good school district. You know, you may only want properties that are, you know, have a certain price to rent ratio, properties that are in a certain location. And so, you have this kind of customizability aspect that you don’t really get if you’re buying whole properties, if you’re buying rates online, or if you’re investing in kind of these other, you know, um, investment platforms that have general funds. So, there’s a lot of really cool things that set Arrived apart. Um there’s a number of other companies that try to do the same types of thing with these individual property investments that we have, but we kind of grew faster right out of the gate and the rest of them kind of have uh have tailed off. So um right now we are really the the only and the largest player for single family home investments. Um and you know we are kind of continuing to expand and kind of grow grow our market share. Fantastic. Awesome. Yeah, great question. Uh very much appreciated. All right, moving back over here. Another good one from Matthew. I shared some details in chat. Always good when that’s live. What are the guidelines for selecting properties? How do you evaluate each property and their appreciation potential and or cash flow? Is there a go or no go threshold uh required in each, which is a great question. Yeah, awesome question. So, it’s really the the annoying answer is obviously it depends. You know, the underwriting for Phoenix is going to be different than the underwriting for Jacksonville, Florida, which is going to be different for Northwest Arkansas. Each market has, you know, a different flavor as far as what’s the expected appreciation in cash flow really as a function of what are home prices in the area and what are rents. So if you go to areas on the coast, you have really high, you know, property values and you have comparatively low rents relative to properties that are in the sun melt that have, you know, more moderate um prices but still have pretty strong rents. So we generally look at, you know, markets first. You know, we’ve got 50 or 60 some markets that we’re operating in right now. And from there, our team is kind of looking across the nation every day. So, we’ve got, you know, some some tech enablements that allows us to look at, you know, what’s been listed um and what kind of new construction opportunities do we see coming up from some of our, you know, partner partners. From there, we kind of do a first glance overview. So, you know, we just look at some easy screeners. You know, what’s the price to rent ratio? Um what are the zip codes? You know, there’s areas that we like, there’s areas that we don’t like. And from there, it kind of helps our team narrow down from the the world of infinite properties you can buy to, okay, here’s the ones we actually want a human to take a look at and and really kind of dive deep on. Um, from there, we can make the best acquisitions that we see. So, we don’t have, you know, a quota of we need to buy this many homes in this particular market. Um, and that really allows our team to be flexible. You know, we’ve got this nationwide presence. And so to us, it doesn’t matter if we buy three homes in Nashville this month or three homes in Tucson. We can kind of do either one just as easily. And so it allows us to, you know, really kind of go wide, find the best opportunities across the states and then make acquisitions accordingly. And so to the the question earlier about shifting strategy, that’s meant that we’ve kind of gone through dips and waves on different areas. You know, there’s been times where it’s like, hey, we are buying, you know, almost only Tennessee properties because we see a lot of great deals and a lot of uh, you know, it’s really a buyer market and then all of a sudden the tides may shift and we pull back a little bit and start buying more in different areas. Um, and so we we can kind of be flexible and shift along with the market as we go. Um, we do have kind of hurdle rates for each type of property that we have. You know, more broadly speaking, you know, you’ll see that a lot of our properties are going to be similar. you know, we’re generally looking for more suburban homes. You know, we’re not buying at properties that are in the kind of the downtown core area. Um, we’re generally looking for newer properties and so properties that are built in, call it 2018 and more recent. Uh, we’ve got a couple properties that are the early 2000s, maybe one from the ‘9s, but we’re not buying properties that were built in the ’60s that were remodeled by Joe and his brother a couple times. Um, you generally like the newer properties because you get a new roof, new HVAC system and pretty high confidence that, you know, over the next couple years, you’re going to have relatively low maintenance and capex requirements. We’re generally looking for kind of familyfriendly areas and homes. So, especially when we buy new construction homes, we’re often adding a fence. We’re often adding um, you know, uh, maybe a little bit of landscaping, things that are going to appeal to renters that have a dog, that are going to appeal to renters that have kids. Um, and so that’s kind of what we look for in the properties. We also kind of look at the path of progress. So, as I said, we aren’t really investing in like the downtown core areas, but we’re kind of looking at, well, where is this market growing? As more people move in, where are areas that are going to become the areas that you go, dang, I wish I had bought there 15 years ago. So, we look a lot at kind of the highway systems, where kind of the city is naturally expanding, and a lot of what the geographic constraints are. So take an area like Salt Lake City. You’ve got the Salt Lake, you’ve got mountains on two different sides. And so the city can really only grow north south. And so knowing that um and knowing that you know an area like Salt Lake City is attracting a lot of tech talent and you know the economy is really growing down there, we can kind of make some educated bets on okay well where in this market makes sense and we know that an area like that is a little bit more expensive and we’re going to kind of trade off some cash flow today for the hope of more appreciation tomorrow. Uh there’s a lot that goes into it. Um our team is really experienced and a lot of them come from American Homes for Rent. Um and so they have a lot of deep institutional experience in, you know, buying residential real estate. Um and so that’s a little bit of an overview on on the general guidelines. Everything kind of goes through our investment committee. So we take a look at everything. We analyze it. We kind of come up with some numbers. Gets presented to a group. And that kind of group goes through and figures out, okay, do we like this property or not? And then of course it goes into all of our due diligence process which I won’t go into now but similarly we kind of you know dot all the eyes and cross all the tees to make sure that it actually does make sense for us. Absolutely wonderful. Thanks for walking through it. Jake Matthew had a very kind comment. This has been very enlightening. Thank you. Well thank you Matthew and for everybody today for the awesome engagement in chat. It’s absolutely fantastic. I know we have a few more in here before we close our virtual doors. I touched on this lightly in chat from from Renee, but I feel like it’s a good one to walk through live, too. Uh because Jake, you walked through the political environment, and I think it’s a good differentiation between HOA. So, who keeps a breast of HOA’s changing their rules about fractional ownership, rental restrictions, in the event they change and can’t own a rental there? Does the property get sold and the net shared among owners? If if that were to happen, then yes, you know, we’d probably say, “Hey, let’s sell the property and and just kind of distribute what we can.” Um, in general, that’s one of the things that’s in our speaking of which, that’s one of the things that’s in our due diligence. And as we’re kind of doing that kind of second and third level evaluation of a particular property, some HOAs will have a cap on how many rentals can be in that community. They say, “Hey, only 20% of the properties here can be a rental home, and if you know there’s extra people that want to do it, then you’re going to get put on a waiting list.” And so, we don’t buy properties there. Um, it’s always possible that some of those rules change. Um, HOAs are known for always being cordial and polite with no drama or politics, of course. Um, that was sarcasm. So, we definitely keep an eye on things and are aware of what’s going on, but it hasn’t hasn’t really been an issue. You know, generally people buy their house. Um, you know, even the HOA is kind of fine if they rent it out. We try to avoid the ones that do have restrictions because that means it’s more likely that there will be more restrictions in the future. Um, but yes, in case something were to happen, you know, it’s not like your investment just goes up in smoke. You know, we still own a property. It may be that for whatever reason that we can’t rent that property out, we would just sell the property. Yeah. And I should have mentioned, Renee, cuz I misunderstood your question um more I thought you were referencing more of the political environment with like removing rental properties um from major conglomerates that are buying a lot. So, my apologies in the comment there uh but definitely appreciate yours. I would say too, I know a lot of times you would get questions on, well, what if vacation rentals are no longer allowed in a certain community, so on and so forth. We haven’t had that to date. Obviously, to Jake’s point about due diligence, that’s definitely there. Um, as you know, those are ever changing. We do have the option to move that from a vacation rental over to a long-term rental. We haven’t had to do that to date, but it is nice to have flexibility in the future if we should decide. I would say that’s not an ideal case because we’re typically making those vacation rentals into a true vacation rental, not a single family residential property. So, the funds that are being allocated to make um different features that would be exciting for a vacation wouldn’t necessarily pertain to a single family residential, but there’s lots of options there and flexibility, which is something that our team’s done a great job with. All right, I’ll take this one quickly from Antonio. Uh they asked if we have an app for Android. It’s a great question. As of right now, we’re currently live on all browsers, mobile and desktop. And then we have an iOS app as well. We do not currently have an Android app. We are hoping to build this in the future. Uh but it’s not on to be transparent our immediate road map for context. Uh we our secondary market was a massive build that we have and we have a few fast follows from that. The other thing I’ll say is our iOS app doesn’t have full parody with our browser. So I would say browser is still our easiest way to be able to do all things on arrive from account changes so on and so forth. However, we definitely know that accessibility for both iOS and Android is imperative. So more to come here. Uh if you haven’t already, Antonio, we’re happy to add you to the Android beta. um feel free to drop your private email in the or private DM or you can um email supportive.com or use our chat function and that goes for anybody on the line if you would like to join that beta in the future. So definitely let us know. All right, I think we cruised through all the questions here today. I know we have about 2 minutes left. So folks, keep me honest in the chat if I either missed a question or you have one last burning one in here. Uh ooh here’s a good one uh from Renee. Are arrive fees staying the same and do we get a notice if they go up? There definitely be a notice. Um all the fees for each of the investments are listed on their pages. Once you make an investment, the fees for that investment generally aren’t going to go up. Um it’s much easier to lower fees than it is to raise them because everything we do goes through the SEC process and it’s kind of like a mini IPO. So once we kind of have a new investment, it’s more likely that we end up lowering our fees um just because it’s very very very very difficult to raise them. So with some asset classes, we’ve kind of started with a fee level and over time as we’ve gotten bigger and more efficient been able to lower fees on some of those investments. Um the only time fees would really go up is if we launch a new investment product. So, say that we have a, you know, I don’t know, a new investment where you can invest in fractional data center real estate that might have a new fee set and that fees might be higher than some of our other products, but we wouldn’t be taking the fees on our, you know, individual properties and raising those. Fantastic. And Jake, um, maybe we one last mention like our redemption fees. We actually made a change to those. What was it? Was it Q425? Um, and we actually decreased the percentage of fee based on the time held. Um, and that was notified by to all investors. Maybe you have some more color on that one, too. Yeah, it’s a good example of of um, you know, being able to decrease fees over time is um, K’s talking about when you do the redemption program, so you get liquidity for the funds products. There is a early redemption fee. So um it was you kind of had to hold the shares for I think 5 years and then there was you know the fees kind of drop off completely. So after 5 years there was no fees for redeeming and we were able to accelerate that so that now after three years there’s no fees for redeeming your shares. So it’s another there’s another good example of yeah it’s easier to lower fees and and that’s the more likely direction that they go rather than being raised. Um and just it’s just something where as we continue to grow and get larger and have you know kind of better economies of scale and can you know run the whole business more efficiently it’s easier for us to you know be able to lower fees which you know obviously then helps the investor incentive to want to reinvest and to put more capital to work. So, um that um yeah, um as far as where are fees listed, fees are going to there current will drop the the FAQ that has kind of the the summary of information, but each investments page has it. Um I think it’s on the financials tab. Um if you click over to there, it’ll have something that shows you here’s what the fees are for this investment. Here’s kind of an example of it. And then there’s also the SEC documents linked from each of our investment pages. So you can also go into the SEC documents and those will also have all the mentions of you know what fees arrived earnings. Fantastic. Um and R rene I love your question on any bonus code for signing up after the call on sale today over here too. Fantastic idea. I’ll be sure to share with our team. Um but we don’t have this to date. Uh but I just took a screenshot and sent it over to our team. So very much appreciate you. Uh Jake, any closing remarks before we shut our virtual doors today? That’s all I’ve got. Thanks for a good set of questions. Um thanks for letting me ramble around a little bit. I hope it was helpful and I know there’s a lot of information we went through across the um that presentation and Q&A. So feel free to reach out. You know, you can find Karen and my emails really easily. Shoot us a note at supportive.com and um would love to keep the conversations going with you guys as you get started investing. Fantastic. Well, Jake, thanks so much for your time in prepared remarks, walking through the diversity of questions in great detail. Always appreciate you for the folks that spent what an hour or two with us on your Tuesday morning and afternoon. Absolutely exceptional. Fantastic questions. Your engagement was wonderful. Uh it’s the reason why we do these. So, thank you so much for showing up. Uh like Jake mentioned, if any other questions come up, feel free to reach out to supportive.com. You can use our chat function in the bottom righthand corner of our platform. Uh, and then we host these webinars every Tuesday at 9:00 a.m. PT. A lot of folks, even existing investors, just come for the Q&A portion. So, it’s typically 25 minutes prepared remarks and then you can jump in here. But, hope you all have a great rest of your day and happy investing. Thanks, folks. Talk to you later. Bye y’all.

  • 06/25/2026 – OpenCV Live

    Hey there. Hi there. Hello there, everybody. It is Thursday. It’s 9:00 a.m. You know what that means? It’s time once again for Open CV Live. We’re so happy to have you all here today. It’s going to be an educational episode with our friend Dennis Baldwin here from Drone Blocks. We’ll give you all a few minutes to get situated, get on all your various platforms. We’re live on Twitch, LinkedIn live video, YouTube, and now on live streaming on our Patreon, which is pretty exciting um to be able to bring this stuff straight to patrons. So, if you want to see OpenCV Live live without any of those pesky YouTube ads, you can become an OpenCV patron at patreon.com. I’ll talk a little bit more about that later in the episode. Great. got some nice stuff happening already over on uh YouTube and uh let’s see how see how our folks on Zoom are making it happen today. Indeed, we’ve got Carlos Carlos Nav says nice. Yes, Vamos Mexico uh 3-0 yesterday. A very exciting game in the World Cup. I hope that all of your teams are moving on to the from the group round, but if not, uh there’s always next time. They say it’s the hope that kills you, you know, but sometimes the hope is all we got. So, yeah, thanks. We’ve got uh Stefan SA checking in from Vancouver, Canada. So, as you join us today, wherever you’re watching, wherever you’re joining us from, uh let us know where you’re joining us from. We’d love to see the global OpenCV community chiming in on these Thursday live streams. I’m coming to you from beautiful, far too sunny for my pasty white skin Tana, Mexico. However, uh it was it has been super great to be able to be here in Mexico and watch the World Cup with uh the the people of Mexico and the excitement is so the excite it’s always you know with with these countries that are very very into uh you know soccer. It’s the it’s always excitement tempered with realism. Like they know that they’re not favorites, right? But and they know that they’re very hard on the team, but it’s just because they care so much and it’s it’s been it’s been really fun. You you you you clearly have not seen the ad where it says uh American you cannot smell spell American without I can. [laughter] Um well I I think they’re going to win. You have not seen the miracle ad, have you? No, you have not been seeing all that. I haven’t. But in Mexico it’s uh it’s Cis. Yes, we can. Um, we’ve got uh Madagascar, we’ve got Houston, uh, Edward Bragg says, “Uh, Merry Mryland.” I assume that’s Maryland, but I like that. Uh, we’ve got, uh, Axel Tracy says, “Kickoff time for the Sakaroos in 10 hours.” Hello from Australia. Good luck to the Aussies. We’ve got Petro from Saudi Arabia. We’ve got quite a few of the AI assistants today. We’ve got Doug chiming in from uh Pmpano Beach. That’s a that’s a fun name to say. And we’ve got uh Carlos from Bueno Buenoseries over on YouTube. Welcome, Carlos. Got Parker from Tampa, Florida. And we’ve got India, of course. What would OpenCV be without India? And we’ve got John D from Austin. We’ve got uh Clinton says he’s coming in from New Zealand at 4 am. Thanks for making time for us in your early early morning or late late evening. Uh we appreciate it. Phil, may I may I jump in on Clinton? He’s one of our team. So uh hi Clinton, welcome. Thank you for making the time. He’s up at the craziest hours of the day. So [clears throat] wow, dedicated team you guys got over there. We’re excited to hear about what you’ve been working on. Got Picass Singh from Dusseldorf, Germany. We’ve got Mthagoram from Nevada, Texas. We’ve got uh Pamu from Sri Lanka. We’ve got uh Penny from Charlotte, North Carolina, the Queen City. We’ve got uh uh Jirona from uh close to Barcelona, they say. I I think we we are ready to uh represent there. this one representative uh from all the you know all the teams uh [laughter] we got Spain, we got Argentina, we got US, Mexico. You’re you’re Mexican now. Yeah. No, I’m team Yeah. See, Vamos Mexico. Uh team Mexico all the way over here. Um for sure. Definitely better odds than the US. Uh just from a cynical perspective. I I I don’t believe so. We can have a debate [laughter] about that. Okay. Okay. Well, I mean hopefully they will meet. That will be a hell of a game. We’ve got Muhammad from Dubai. We’ve got uh Jose from Chile. We’ve got uh Nidal from Iraq. Rene is joining us from the Philippines at 12 a.m. Thank you, Renee. We really appreciate it. And uh Clinton says, “Always a pleasure. Couldn’t give my computer or drones eyes without open CV.” Thanks so much, dude. Uh we’ve got Pakistan joining us here. Excellent. Excellent. I see there’s a bit of an issue on the Zoom, so I’ll fix that. W Sati is doing his intro. I think now is a great time to get started. You ready, boss? Yeah. Hello everybody. Welcome to OpenCV Live. At OpenCV, education is very important to us and we have our own education platform through OpenCV University. And today because of that connection, I’m very happy to invite Dennis Baldwin from drone blocks which is an educational platform for drone learning. It is uh what I call an all-in platform. So, uh we’ll go to Dennis and learn more about the platform and how it works and what kids can learn from it. But first, as always, is with me Phil Nelson who is the director of content and creative at OpenCV. Phil produces the show and if anything goes wrong, it’s his fault. Hi, Phil. Hey there, everybody. Yes, it’s me. It’s me. It’s PHIL. I am your co-host with the co-host, The Second Banana, who’s second to none. I’m also your plus one and only. You know it’s Mr. Nelson if you’re nasty, but you, my dear friends here, can call me Phil. And I’m here to remind you of a few things that we do on every single episode of this here program that you’re currently watching. The first of which is a giveaway to you out there in the audience. Stay tuned. Later on in the episode, I will be asking a trivia question based on the presentation and chat with our guest today. And the very first person to answer that question correctly in the chat wherever you’re watching. We’re live on Twitch, LinkedIn Live video, YouTube, and on Patreon will win the OpenCV University course of their choosing. You can see what courses are on offer by going to opencv.org/university.

    And while you’re there, don’t forget to check out OpenCV5, our biggest release ever, which is available right now on GitHub. I think before we get started uh with the presentation proper today um Satia can you tell the folks a little bit about how important OpenCV5 is and I’ll remind you guys we are taking questions from you in the audience during the whole show post those in the chat wherever you’re watching I think Vleta outside has a question for us [laughter] you can you can ask that question wherever you’re watching at any time and we will do our absolute best to answer those questions live during the show and we’ll save some time at the end for any of those we don’t get to during the show. But boss, tell the folks what’s so awesome about OpenCV 5. Well, OpenCV 5 is the biggest release of OpenCV in many years. I think it is seven or eight years since we released OpenCV 4. Um, and OpenCV 5 it’s it’s not a minor release. It’s a major major upgrade especially the DNN engine has been rewritten from scratch. And the reason is that when we started writing the DNN engine, Onyx standard was not a standard and we didn’t want to layer you know code after code just to support the standard. So we wrote everything from scratch. It has a new uh you know under the hood even though it will work uh similarly as the old one but it will support 80% of uh the onyx layers etc. So because of that pretty much every any pretty much any uh you know any uh model you can think of for image classification segmentation detection it is going to run on uh OpenCV transformers everything is supported right. Uh not only that it has something called a hardware acceleration layer which means that different hardware uh you could be running it on Intel CPU, it could be AMD CPU, different kinds of or or ARM and based on what configuration your uh your machine is, it will automatically pick the best optimization. So every function even things like resize uh get optimized and they will under the hood uh things will run much faster sometimes 40 50% faster than uh than previous versions [clears throat] and we are also working on the new GPU HAL which will support uh you know GPU operations all these operations will be supported through the GPU HAL so very exciting release and uh you know uh we are uh we are looking forward to getting your feedback uh on how you like it. A lot of uh things which were legacy uh have been removed. For example, we do not have the C API anymore and uh we uh you know that that makes the library slightly lighter than before and uh it also becomes easier to maintain. So please check out the library and if you have any comments, suggestions, please let us know. Yeah, thanks for that boss. And I’ll remind people so you can scan that QR code at the bottom of the screen there to go to the uh in-depth blog post about everything that’s new in OpenCV5 including a link to the migration document. There are some breaking changes there. Um you know you can’t make an omelette without breaking a few eggs and we’ve broken a few eggs with this one for the first time in a long time in fact and so it may be a little bit tough for you guys to start out but the performance gains the ease of uh writing code gains are so so very worth it. And uh we should have the uh the pip package should be updated I think imminently, right? It’s it’s coming pretty pretty fast, right, Doc? Yeah, it should be uh it should be ready very quickly. All right, that’s great to hear. And uh so before we get started with our presentation, we got one more piece of business to remind you all about. Open CV is open-source software that is produced by a nonprofit organization and as such we depend on the support of our sponsors and partners all of which are listed here on opencv.org. We’d like to take this moment to thank ARM, Futureway Technologies, Google Summer of Code, Rooflow, Orbec, the British Machine Vision Association, Jet Brains, The Edgei and Vision Alliance, Open MV, Tangram Vision, AMP Software, Tuivo, Weer.io, Intrinsic, Bears Dev, and Big Vision because every company needs a big vision. Um, I know the guy that runs that. He’s he’s pretty good at his job. [laughter] Okay, I think now is a great time to get started with our guest. Let’s bring Let’s bring Thank you, Hilda. Let’s bring our uh guest Dennis. We We had a thunderclap to to bring our guest on here. Welcome, Dennis. Tell the people who you are there. Thank you, Phil. Thank you, Satcha. I’m Dennis Baldwin from Drone Blocks and uh really excited to to be on the podcast. You know, I I was telling Satia earlier earlier, Drone Blocks is sort of centered around open-source community and we really focus on enabling uh young learners to get into uh drone technology, robotics, hardware and software. And a lot of uh the foundation that we built the business on has been uh open source and learn open CV. There’s a lot of articles that I’ve read from Satia that have enabled us as as Clinton um who’s so uh gracious gracious with his 4 a.m. time to uh mention that uh we give the ability for drones and computers to see. So, um, thank you guys for for having me. And a just a a short small shout out to Ramon from the Drone Code Foundation. He’s the one who connected us. Really excited to be here. Uh, share a little bit about our history, um, what we’re up to today and answer any questions you guys might might have. Yes, indeed. Shout out to uh, Mr. Puyo, who’s also out here in Tijuana. Mr. Pooyo. Nice. Mr. [clears throat] Poo, the chicken man. That’s his handle on uh on Twitter. Yeah, there’s a there’s actually a sign there’s here in here in Tijuana, Mr. Puyo. Um so yeah, Dennis, I think uh take it away. Tell us about what Drone Blocks has been working on. We’re really excited to hear about it. Go ahead and bring up your your screen share and we’ll uh Absolutely. under the learning tree. Absolutely. Feel free to jump in with any questions. It will start with a bit of a hardware background because what we talk about on our team is the software enablement of hardware and a lot of what makes this possible right is CPU GPU vision those type of tasks and in the early days I’m going to begin my screen share now we had the the luxury when I say we the uh developer community um drone blocks and and where we started we didn’t have to be as concerned with um the hardware platform. So this started I’d say almost uh 14 years ago just as my passion my background is in electrical engineering. I got into software and really saw uh the beauty of open source with cutting my teeth on Linux some of the uh old C++ libraries diving in and learning OpenCV but at the time [snorts] we had access to DJI hardware and we still do today. don’t you know don’t don’t rule DJI DJI I out ever. It’s just we need to be able to for our market bring this technology to the classroom. So, it started with a open-source project called drone pan, which was just a simple app built on the DJI SDK for uh the camera to be able to grab photos at different perspectives, uh angles, attitudes, and then being able to run those through a pro post-processing uh pipeline. And so at the time I was using uh DJI with drone pan and KR pano to generate some really cool uh 3D panoramas to give a a great aerial perspective. And that what we learned and I encourage all of you developers that might be um whether you’re doing stuff for the good of the community or good doing stuff to monetize it’s very easy for a neat idea an application like this to become a fe a feature in a future roll out of an OS or a software update. So, drone pan ult ultimately became obsolete because DJI introduced a click of a button panorama feature in their um DJI Fly app. So, moving forward, one of the things that was really interesting to me was mapping, you know, because at the end of the day, there’s a lot of uh landscape and construction changes that happen on a daily basis and and being able to get a drone in the air to acquire that imagery. So, I had shared on YouTube basically how to get the different altitude and aerial perspectives of that imagery and once again running it through a post-processing pipeline. At the time there was SFM, the structure from motion libraries that would allow us to stitch them, would allow us to basically create map tiles. And I’ll just uh jump in really quick to this link. There’s kind of this historic uh view of the stadium near our house. I’m just outside of Austin in Dripping Springs. And so over time, football country. You’re saying Austin or Texas in general? Friday night in general. Yeah, exactly. So you can see here that a pre-planned flight, this existed of uh consisted of about 300 to 400 images with each flight. brought them down, were able to process process them. And and just getting back to the whole theme of, you know, a drone, having sensors, having high-res cameras, being able to do something that becomes the platform, right? I I know there is a whole market out there of enthusiasts, myself included, that love to fly, that love to solder, tinker, but it becomes basically a a flying platform to acquire imagery and do something interesting with it. So that was sort of my foray into maybe the the world of open source for drones. And then moving that forward, I got involved with our um afterchool program. One of my co-founders, Marissa Vickery, she was at Walnut Springs Elementary here in in Dripping Springs. And my daughter, sorry for the ads that you know they’re going to follow you wherever wherever you go, but uh indeed, she she was running a after school program called Tech Team. And so we taught the the students how to 3D print the frame and then build their own drone. And it wasn’t long before the kids were like, “Well, let’s put a camera on this thing. What can we do with this thing other than just fly it?” So this was sort of the genesis of drone blocks, right? Being able to then take what you built and have a uh let’s say a programmatic layer. So that led us down the path of um at the time I like to I like to say that uh a drone without a camera is a toy, right? And with a camera it is a sensor. Well said. That that’s actually a theme uh one of our team members uses when we talk about we we talk to a lot of different schools and um we get compared to a lot of different hardware and we like to lean on our stuff is open source. You can build on it. you can, you know, do interesting things with it. And when we try to compete with the $50 drone from China on Amazon, we lose every time, right? So sharing that that vision and and the capabilities of what you’re you’re talking about, Satia, is very important to us. Yeah, totally. I think we lost your screen share there, Dennis. Let me bring it back. You’re back. I’m back. Okay. So, moving forward, I don’t know. Sorry, I’m not a privy to what’s being if you can see my camera as well as my screen. Sure can. Okay. Thank you. This is the T. Many of you may or may not be familiar with it, but it was an incredible platform for us to build uh programming interface, right? Visual programming is important to us because we deal with students at the youngest ages, elementary school, right? to be able to simulate something then fly a drone, take photos and um learn about the aspects of drone flight and uh programming is is is a powerful thing. So we rolled out a course using Aruko markers open CV contrib and it was met with great uh fanfare. I will say we were able to get the camera images streaming over UDP to Python and then being able to simulate or when I say simulate I should use the term emulate a lot of what DJI was to do able to do in more expensive drones the tap to fly um you know being able to do pose estimation right to use hand gestures and navigate a drone with a sub $200 piece of hardware was uh pretty incredible. Very nice. So that that shift and when I say shift we had built a lot of content knowledge understanding around uh TE platform but we had seen through many conversations with DJI where that was headed right so DJI being very uh proumer industrial military you know enterprise um hardware that that’s where a majority of their business was and we really worked hard to figure out could we perhaps take over manufacturing and as crazy as that sounds, right? But TE ultimately was sunset and at the time we had done a lot of just our own R&D around Crazy Fly. If you’re not familiar with CrazyFly, a bit craze out of Sweden, they do incredible um hardware platform. They’re very involved in the Ross community. We saw that as a opportunity for us to to pivot a little bit to make um our programming interface available to those users. And so this is our our simulator. And the the really cool thing about simulation here is we have curriculum and these different environments that students can can engage with, learn math concepts, programming concepts. But I think it’s important. I know guys, you had um I forget the gentleman’s name, but he did Pi Simverse, right? You guys had him on the podcast. And that simulation is incredible. And for us, the step that we want to take is to be able to then have parody with not only simulation, but real hardware. So that’s where we have the ability that what you’re doing here, right, with with a simulated Crazy Fly, you then could power up your Crazy Fly, connect over Bluetooth, and be able to see your your real code take flight. And I think that’s an interesting thing that I tried to reiterate as a as a developer. If you’re doing a let’s say an iOS or Android, whatever platform that you’re developing for, especially now that we have we’ll say, you know, these flying sensors, right? You want to understand that simulation does not mean 100% par with real life because of environmental conditions, lighting, wind, all of that and crazy. All that pesky entropy in real life [laughter] without a doubt. Battery’s a great example, right? It’s like, oh, here you can run it. Click connect, your battery’s dead. Right? So, all those little things um that lead to sort of the complexity, but those are teaching moments for us, right? Being able to to share that. So, moving forward, we So, this uh also has a Python interface, right? I’m looking at the blocks. Uh but it has a pure Python. It does. And unfortunately for I I don’t want to say unfortunately the thing that we have to battle with in in the classroom right everything we do is web- based right because Chromebooks and all of that so when we get to Python we’ve tried to emulate sort of fake Python in a browser right but what we really want to encourage is you know like VS code or whatever IDE so crazy bit crates has their own CF lib Python on and and we have a separate curriculum around that, but that is not um directly accessible in the browser. Okay. So, moving I love this little uh I love this little anime classroom here, by the way. This assets delightful. Yeah. [laughter] All in full, you know, transparency, a lot of what we do is we just find assets. We have a young man who’s at a university here in in in Dallas and he does a lot of uh importing and modifying the assets for us to to create this from scratch. You guys know it’s it’s it’s quite the undertaking. Yeah. Right. So I I’ll move forward to Dex C3. So we have a larger version but I’m sharing Dex C3 just because I think it’s more relevant to the conversation today. And I was telling Satia at the beginning beginning of the call. [clears throat] It it’s it’s a challenge to to to manufacture hardware, right? Especially at this level where we’re trying to solve for, you know, the educational component, right, in in classrooms, you know, we’re once again up against, hey, I can buy this toy for $50 off of Amazon or you can buy the Dexi C3, which we’re going to retail for $750. And people are like, “Whoa, you’re you’re crazy. How are we that that doesn’t make any sense, right?” And so what we reinforce is that we’re giving them a whole learning platform. And I’ll I’ll jump to that in a minute. But this drone is 3D printable. We make the STLs for all the accessories, oh, available in GitHub, right? So you can print it, you can build it, understand it, modify it so that it can, you know, suit the needs. There’s there’s the manufacturing component, there’s the build component, programming, all of that. So uh sorry, sorry to interrupt. I’m I’m because I have kids too, too. And you know, u my wife actually just signed uh my son up for some robotics thing. I unfortunately ashamed to say that. I don’t know which which one it is. uh but she signed uh so I’m very interested in uh which means that you know when she signs my son up it means that she has signed me up for [laughter] right so I’m going to be involved uh that’s why I’m interested uh like uh my question was that this uh this uh the 3D printable parts right how what percentage or what are the components that are 3D printable because uh you know when we had the uh previous drone uh which u went out of you know the DJI and uh they stopped uh they stopped producing it uh the components right the parts etc they they break frequently right it is uh it’s just the nature you have to make it light so they are not very sturdy so they break frequently uh but just to order everything from Amazon one more time it’s just a pain right so to be able to download and 3D print at home that’s uh that would be exciting But thank you for [clears throat] validating what we believe to to be true and valuable. So, uh, this to to answer your question, Satia, as you know, electronics, we’re not there yet, right? You’re not going to be able to say, “Hey, I’m going to click a button and and print a flight controller and then put it in and solder it.” But all the peripherals, I I’ll just show you the the Dexi. This is our Dexi3. We have the the top plate, the bottom plate, we have the camera mount, a battery mount, we have an LED ring. I don’t know if the viewers can see the LED animating in the background here on our larger drone, but we want to make all of that accessible so that you can replace anything at any point in time. And um we also do sell a carbon fiber version. And and that’s what I wanted to share a little bit of just if we for for the audience who are I think very technical in nature we we call it our developer kit right so we’re proponents of uh PX4 right that’s our go-to flight stack and so PX4 is where we’re running you know the the flight firmware the IMU all the attitude all that information is being handled by open source with with some light modifications from us and then we add basically what we call our our code stack. So this ships with a CM5. We’ve designed our own carrier board for breakout, you know, for the LED or any GPIO that you might want. And then we have a a bunch of content and I I’ll I’ll jump into that here in a minute related to doing vision tasks. We we started as I mentioned with the TE and Aruko markers and more recently we’ve been shifting to doing um for the audience solving the problem of of drone positioning outdoors I’d say is significantly easier right than solving it for indoors. Outdoors you you plug in your GPS receiver. Now I’m not talking about drone light show. We’ve all seen that. That’s that technology is amazing. high-end GPS and accuracy, but a standard GPS, you have the ability to just get your position, right, 3D position, and then program your drone. So indoors we make use of optical flow and a distance sensor, but really the higher fidelity or higher accuracy positioning in my mind has to come from something like fiducials either like April tags or ruko markers you know um around the environment or Satia I know you’re you’re you’re a slam guy right so we’re we’re look looking at doing some pre preliminary vio with slam Right. Moninocular slam with a single camera would be amazing. Yeah. But I could ramble on and on about the complexities, but the thing that we want to do is sort of help solve for, you know, giving students the ability to build these technologies, understand them, right, and then jump into any of the repos, right, that we provide, our April tag, our YOLO, all of that. We make it available. We bundle that into just a we call Dexios. Dexi is our drone for exploration and innovation. But that that bundle th those packages are just, you know, Raspberry Pi OS with Ross 2 and all of the different libraries and packages built into it. Quick question. Have uh do any of the drones have speakers on them? And have you made any of them play Come on Eileen by Dexis Midnight Runners? [laughter] So, uh, no, but here’s what I will say with the carrier. I’m going to, um, just hold this up to the screen, Phil. I hope that the audience can see this. We have some breakout ports, right, that sit on the sides here. Sorry if that’s not visible. Yeah, you can see it. You would have the ability to whether it’s I squared C or whatever the interface of that speaker. The the the problem with the speaker is that the drone is also fairly loud, right? So, yeah, that that that great sound. Yeah, exactly. [snorts] Okay. So, I’m going to share this last [snorts] um piece that is I I would say near and dear to our team. It’s called AVR, Advanced Vertical Robotics. So when you come into the drone blocks ecosystem, you have the ability to go through the the different tiers, but one of them is a drone competition that started out of Bell Helicopter and in the DFW Fort Worth area, but now they’re known as Del Bell Flight, right? You you guys might be familiar with the Osprey. It’s a really cool aircraft, vertical takeoff and landing. Bell gener uh initiated this competition eight years ago and we got involved about four or five where we started bringing our own uh hardware to to the to the competition. So you have the ability in the platform to spin up the simulator and I’m just going to show a little example. So this is the simulator on the left and this is the 2025 game field, right? And so the student that keep in mind just for for the audience’s benefit that all of this existed physically before were teams from all over the country predominantly USA would compete in regional events and then the top let’s say 15 end up in Dallas and there’s a finals where they’re learning how to build solder program and and solve uh various challenges for time if you will Right. And so what is the team size? Usually it’s it the cool thing about it Satia is like so I don’t you mentioned your your your son or your daughter doing the the camp. Yeah. Those generally, you know, are probably first robotics. That’s my guess, right? FRC. And so what Ron Olsen, he’s the um guy that created the competition and just has a very uh creative mindset was like, “Hey, this competition needs to be different by including more uh players of the team. So a team should be a minimum of eight students, right? Because there’s a ground robotics part where they’re navigating a maze. um there’s somebody who’s sort of overseeing the team captain and then there’s multiple pilots. In this scenario, there’s just the one dexi, but in the real world competition, there’s a large dexi and and this smaller one and the kids the competition is by the age or how does it it it’s generally targeted at high school. But what we’ve tried to do with the simulation is expose it to a younger audience, right? because you you know in simulation for example I’ll just you know navigate around and I’m going to show you guys that we have a few April tags spread out through throughout the course there’s some images so it just scan the April tag and I I have code running in the background this is all node red on the on the right that that layers into a ROSS 2 kind of uh foundation [snorts] but those you know students we want to make it accessible at a younger age so that they just get the experience of learning how to fly, learning the different concepts and you know you don’t have the maybe the overhead of uh understanding all the electronics initially right if if the competition and the programming sort of piqus your interest I believe that just my own kind of mindset is as an engineer if I if I have some level of success at a higher level write some code and it does something then I dive in a little bit deeper if that makes sense. Right. Right. So, I’m going to just jump over really quickly. So, we have these inside these cabins. There’s a whole story behind this game. There’s stranded animals and then you look in here and you sort of scan for the animals and that’s all doing yolo um detection. So, we have this, you know, Onyx model that we’ve uh did some transfer learning on. Guess I’m I’m probably not doing a good job of flying here, but okay. Yeah. So there there’s the bird, right? And so gosh, apologize to you guys. Target scanned. And so what happens is we have all these ROSS nodes running. And I want to I want to wrap with this really quickly. And one of them is um a YOLO detection node. So we have our April tags and then YOLO detections. So, we’re teaching, you know, students, right, to to be able to to scan, to wire up their logic, right, to determine the confidence level. And then they want to go deeper in the future. It’s like, hey, we’re going to put completely new objects out there. You need to use whatever model you decide to use. uh fine-tune it to to detect some new or add new objects to the to the model to be able to train.

    Very nice documentation. Nice. [snorts]

    All right. So, yeah. Um we got some good questions here, but I think and you you you your timing is is just about right. We’re at 37 minutes here. So, not not bad at all. We got quite a few questions here. We’ll get to Sorry if there’s a little bit of background noise. Um, I’m going to quickly do our trivia giveaway here. Um, a little bit early in the show. So, solo myself. So, if you’re joining us for the first time or you just need a little reminder, one of the things that we do on every episode of Open CV is a giveaway to you in the audience. I am about to ask a trivia question based on today’s presentation and a little bit of the stuff we talked about. And the first person to answer that question in the chat wherever you’re watching on Twitch, LinkedIn, YouTube, Patreon, or on Zoom will win a free OpenCV university course. These are awesome industrial strength courses created by people from the industry to help you improve your understanding uh level up your career or uh get a better job, get a new career. Um so check it out at opencv.org/university.

    And here comes our trivia question. If you have won in the last couple of months, please don’t answer. Give someone else a chance to win that free course. I’m looking at you, Martha.

    So, in what year was OpenCV 4.0.0 released? We talked about this at the beginning of the show that it’s been quite a few years since major releases of OpenCV. In what year was OpenCV4 first released? Answer in the chat now.

    Oh, wow. Axel Tracy just boom out of the gate. You get out of my head, Axel. Uh the answer we were looking for there was 2018. The answer was 2018 2018. So it has been quite some time. Uh congrats Axel. Were you just guessing? [laughter] He says in in chat. Wow. He says yes. I just guessed. [laughter] Hey, it still counts. Um uh congratulations. We will uh so please go to opencb.org/university and choose one of those courses. Then send exactly one email to me, philopencv.org. That’s philopencv.org. And we will make sure that you get that course unlocked in your OpenCV University dashboard. Uh, congrats, Axel. He says he uses he used context clues. Satia said seven or eight years ago, and there we are. Yeah. So, congrats. Um, and I think let me go ahead and remove our thing here. Okay. So, we’ve got uh quite a few questions here. Let me pull up pull up the best one. A couple pe couple people were close. You you’re lost by maybe three five seconds. Uh cat 5Dev on YouTube. Um Penny on YouTube and Emmanuel on uh LinkedIn. Uh better luck next time, guys. Um so questions. Our first one here, uh, we’ve got, uh, YouTube asks, “Can you connect to the drone from the web, uh, or do you need to install an app on a smartphone?” Dennis, that that is a I wish there was a simple answer. So, I will say that if you’re flying with a TE, uh, definitely that was native because we had to use a Wi-Fi bridge. So that would have been an iPad, an iOS, or even our Android app for Chromebook for Crazy Fly. We use uh the Bluetooth web API, and you’re able to connect to that drone uh via web browser. And then now here we are with our own hardware with Dexi. When you boot Dexios, given the fact that it runs on a Raspberry Pi, what happens is that we bring up all the ROS services, we bring up the April tag, the YOLO detections node, we broadcast a hotspot, you connect to the drone over the hotspot or you put the drone on your network and all of that runs uh in your web browser or on your mobile device. We we aim to make our web interfaces as responsive as possible. what what we’ve struggled with I think the the the difference is you know being a developer doing sort of commercial stuff before drone blocks was oh we’ll just make you know native apps right and generally that becomes a bigger challenge at least in the US education market to allow third-party apps to be installed um on student devices and so that’s where if we can make our technology web accessible. Uh that that wins every time. Yeah, they tend to keep those Chromebooks locked down pretty hard for, you know, for obvious reasons. I It makes a lot of sense. Uh kids are going to kid. They’re going to they’re going to figure out ways around whatever blocks you put in front of them. I I’ll tell I’ll tell Phil, I got to share this. Please do. Side story. It’s It’s not going to be 100% accurate, but it’ll Ryan from our team supported this use case. So we have a native I’ll say a chrome app right so you used to be able to develop chrome apps that you install from the chrome web store uh chromebooks and so we used the standard uh Google authentication right to log in and some way shape or form during the on the off screen there was like a privacy policy or whatever and kids figured out how to click that took you to a page and all of a sudden you got to like unfettered use of the unrestricted use of the web and some kid made a Tik Tok video and then all of a sudden we saw inst installs spike and we were kind of like well maybe we’re in the wrong market right maybe we need to help kids figure out [laughter] how to get online so it was I love that pretty wild life finds a way you know totally that’s that’s what I love about our audience though even the the drone AVR sim that I was showing you kids are finding ways to to find loopholes Right. And I think that that ingenuity, that creativity, creativity is necessary. So, yeah, definitely. I mean, I think about when like back to when I was a kid, you know, we were figuring out how to install like uh, you know, Doom and uh, Sim City and stuff on the school PCs and and how to like, you know, set up the toggle so you could just like alt tab quickly over to the, you know, the Microsoft Word doc to make it look like you were actually doing your assignment and stuff, right? And I think about that like, you know, back then sometimes the teachers didn’t, you know, we knew more than the teachers. And I think that’s that’s definitely still the case, you know, today, especially today because technology moves so much faster now that the kids just instinctively know this. And so if you’re trying to, you know, any constraints you put in front of them, they’re going to figure out a way around it. And I love that. I think it’s a good sign like uh just the yeah as you said ingenuity and uh you know it’s it’s something that we reward in adults and sometimes unfortunately punish in children. Yeah. And uh yeah, they they find ways like uh my my wife uh you know uh closes down the Wi-Fi for my kids laptops, right? Uh to restrict time and uh even the younger one, he uh thought about it, how to bypass this problem. And so he swapped the names of his MacBook Pro like when he had the access to her phone, he swapped the names of his MacBook Pro and uh you know some some random thing like the water heater or something like that which is also connected to right and it shows up as the water heater, right? Swap out the name. So when she pauses the water heater, it’s paused. He’s still on his [laughter] right. That’s fantastic. So his MacBook Pro, the name is swapped. So, uh, they do all these, uh, things to, you know, I love that. If you’ve got any similar stories in the chat, please, uh, drop them in there. We’ll bring them up on screen because I I love that kind of stuff. Um, we got some more questions here. Um, let me go ahead and bring up the chat again. Um so uh Jurgen Fay asks I think a really good question here and especially this is I think a thing in you know in the United States where education is is vastly underfunded especially public education. Um Jurgen asks how do school folks deal with the cost even five or 10 per class are an investment for most. What would be the best age for starters? So I think these are just two questions but these are really good questions. Yeah. Well, h thank you th those are those those the first one makes my my head hurt but and I and part of it is because being a co-founder engineer evangelist whenever I’m faced with the question of how much it costs I like defer to someone like Lindsay or somebody else on our team sales is not my forte but I will share a little bit of what we’ve learned over the years at least here in the state so one there’s there’s Perkins grants right? There’s a Perkins grant, you know, from the federal government and that gets allocated to to schools that apply. So that that’s one, you know, grant funding that exists and we’ve actually worked in the past to sort of say, “Hey, school, we we will help you um with the grant application process. Marissa and our team has experience writing grants.” So, so that’s one thing. The um other thing is we’re part of this u I don’t know if it’s movement shift in education to this whole CTE uh space where it’s career and technical education maybe you know less students who are graduating or going off to university but they’re actually finding their calling maybe sooner or maybe they don’t know what they want to do but they’re not ready to invest you know what what a a college college college education cost nowadays. So, the career and technical education in computer science, there’s a lot of um funding and programs available, grants available in that market. And the other thing, the the final point I will make just based on what I know, there is a sweet spot for a purchase that’s maybe right under the the threshold of $5,000, right? Which is still a lot of money. I I understand that, right? But if you break things down, that’s sort of where we’re trying to to package our technology and and software. And and the thing that I will reiterate and the thing that I believe is is is tough for us to overcome is that we’re constantly being compared. Once again, getting getting back to someone’s gonna go put a programmable drone in their Amazon shopping cart that’s like less than $200, right? And so if you’re like, “Hey, I can get five of those for a,000 versus five Dexi3s for 4,000, it if it’s just a numbers or a math game, we’re going to lose every time.” So that’s where we have to reinforce just like you guys do with the platform and the education. uh the the soft skills, the the learning that you’re going to have access to when you don’t have hardware on your desk and in your hands. But um great question. And the the second one, what would be the best age for starters? Um if if I may, Phil, may I may I share again? Absolutely. Okay. So, part of what how we’re positioning this now is we have ground school, right? And and that’s where we’re focusing on like the the K through five, right? So you have we have our flight academy which is just a you know a simple hey here’s here’s how you might interface with with Dexi. Um well this is how you interface with Dexi before you actually have one, right? So you have all these challenges, right? You learn how to arm and disarm fly. So we try to make that accessible in the browser before they get to real hardware. So, we have a bunch of content and challenges around um simulated drones being able to do different uh tasks. This flying curves course is is incredible. This is from a advocate in um Italy, Luigi. He’s always sending us really cool content, right? Stuff that you can do with these lessons. And so, you’re learning, you know, different concepts of programming as well as math and you’re able to apply that in the simulation. So, our hope is that we make this accessible at at a at an age, ground school, K through five, that piqus their interest. So, when they get to middle school, getting their hands on the real hardware um becomes a lot uh more accessible and easier to understand.

    Yeah. Um great great answer there. Thanks for that context. Um more questions we’ve got. So, let’s’ll take a break from questions here for one second. Um, uh, Satia, I want to give the folks a little can we give them a little sneak peek of the pretty big announcement we’re we’re going to be doing in the next week or so um about the next OpenCV competition. Uh, without giving it too much away, I think we should uh clue them in a little bit. Yeah. So we are this close to signing a contract with uh one of the big u you know um big uh hyperscalers let’s call them um and we are working with them to create uh for a competition where you will build um applications just like our previous competitions we we will uh ask you to build applications and it could be in two stages. We are still deciding on the exact format of the competition but uh typically we do uh competitions in two stages. In the first stage we ask you to uh to basically propose a solution or propose an idea for a problem that you want to solve and based on that we select a few and then we will give them some credits on this hyperscaler and based on that you will build the final solution. So it’s uh it’s going to be interesting because you know a lot of folks would be using OpenCV5 in the process uh and we love that because you know it’s getting so much faster and uh we have divided the competition that we’ll we’ll let you know there are a few use cases that we are very interested in right if you want to use it um as an agent uh that would be that would be great if you create an MCP server that kind of thing uh it would uh there will be a few categories uh where you can compete Those are suggestions and you can pretty much compete in any category. Right? So a new competition is coming. It would be uh based on one of the hyperscalers and we will uh basically make some credits available to you for people who qualify the first round. So as exciting as always uh we’ll you know uh it’s it’s going to be fun

    indeed and I’m really looking forward to this one. Uh, as Satia said, we’re pretty close to being able to formally announce it and it’s going to be uh a little bit different than some of the previous competitions because of the uh the partner we have this time and it’s I think maybe more accessible than ever for for people to participate especially in countries where it’s hard to get the hardware or it’s difficult to access compute and and stuff like that. So, uh we’re really looking forward to it. Um, I’m also going to take this moment to remind folks that uh OpenCV has our official merch store um at opencv.mmyspreadshop.com and we just released a brand new t-shirt which I am going to bring the QR code up on screen for you guys. I think you’re going to like this one. It’s uh near and dear to our hearts. I will cover up Dennis’s face briefly, but you can buy official OpenCV gear on the OpenCV merch shop at opencv.mmyspreadshop.com. We’ve got a brand new shirt there. Says open- source, nonprofit, no [  ] That is the OpenCV credo. Uh we’re we’re leaning into it. We can uh get away with things that maybe some of the larger organizations out there cannot. And uh that’s part of the power of open source nonprofit software is that Phil’s allowed to say [  ] on official merchandise and on our live stream. [laughter] You you said worse things in in videos. That’s right. I’ve said worse things to you about you. [laughter] But please scan please scan that QR code and check it out. We’ve got hats, t-shirts, the OpenCV logo on all of that good stuff. We’ve got little bandanas that you can adorn your pets or small children with, as well as stickers and pins and all that good stuff. So, please check out the official OpenCV merch store. And if you buy something from the shop, take a picture of yourself wearing it. Take a picture of wherever you stick that OpenCV sticker and we’ll share it here on OpenCV Live with your permission, of course. Okay. And we’ve got a few more questions here and a little bit of time to answer them. Let me pull open the chat once more. Uh, we’ve got a question from Clinton Evans, who I think knows the answer, but uh, we’ll we’ll allow this uh, putting the thumb on the scale a little bit about how long should a drone kit last in the classroom on average, Dennis, this is a good question for those educators out there. Uh, a drone from drone blocks. Yes, I would say from others. We we want to we want to create longevity. So, uh, our our kind of phrase or tagline is elevating K through life, right? Get bringing them on the continuum. And so, in our scenario, if you’re introduced to the Dexi3, we we we bring that in around middle school, that should electronics wise, battery, you know, uh, motors wise, whatever. I don’t really it it’s hard to put a shelf life. I would say 3 to 5 years maybe on the electronics batteries depending on use, right? But the thing that I want to reinforce is that you have the ability to 3D print as we discussed earlier and add modifications. So we we’ve had some really cool contributions from the community on like claws and grabbers that you can attach uh bring up a servo, right? you know, wire it up with Node Red, Python, whatever your your interface of choosing and extend it, right? So, I would say, you know, a three-year time frame is what I would feel comfortable just, you know, off the cuff saying from from an electronic standpoint, but the the repeatability of printing and modifying, you know, can exist uh indefinitely. Yeah, that’s one of the really nice things I think about the platform you’ve built here is I mean you basically can you know if a servo burns out put a new one on there right that’s uh that’s very nice [snorts] what is the difference between a developer kit and the single build kit good question Satia like one of the things that we have been doing I I have a I’ll just call it the the flight kit it it’s just our our flight controller with optical flow and so there’s There’s no true programming, if you will. It’s learning how to fly, learning your different flight modes, navigating around. And then the the developer kit is where we introduced um the the Raspberry Pi CM5. Uh the carrier for more breakout and expansibility. One of the things that we do have uh for a larger drone and we’re trying to bring this down to a smaller scale is the ability to um add in this case we have a hat with a this Halo accelerator, right? So we we we right today that most of the YOLO that we do and vision stuff runs on CPU and that’s as you guys know constrained for a Raspberry Pi and we can slow we’ll slow the frame rate down but with acceleration we can um you know obviously run more uh frames for inference and so really the the flight kit is sort of the standard you you have to learn how to build and fly Right. So, if you that’s that’s what we reinforce and then when you get into the programming um that’s where you have the the add-ons with the compute and accelerator. Got it. Got it. Very nice. Um got another question here from Zoom. Um Zoom asks, “What’s the possibility of having a few different cameras facing down on one of these drones?” That’s a I wish I could untether from my headphones, but we have actually I might be able to do this in real time to um I I I understand the question. A few cameras. I’m going to share my screen if that’s okay. Phil, can I do that? All right. Here we go. And so, um this is for the downward. Let me just say down. Okay. Yeah. So we have a downward camera mount that that sort of mounts in the frame. We right now run py cam V2 and V3. And so you [snorts] there are two ports two camera ports on the I’ll say DEXC5 that’s the larger drone 5- in propellers that you can basically uh run through the the camera stack. Right. So you can do t two simultaneous cameras with the DEX3. Right now, we just support one and with with a tilt modification, right? So, you have the ability for the forward facing or the downward. And we’re working to uh have multicam support for the smaller drone, but it doesn’t exist today. Got it. Yeah, thanks for that. Um, I’ve actually got a question from me, which is I’m always really interested in the thermal issues for this this kind of embedded compute because it’s always an issue and and even with like the Raspberry Pi, especially with the Pi 5 uh and and the the CM5, they get a lot hotter than previous way hotter than previous versions. And so, uh, what I’d like to know is do you notice a like what are the differences in the thermal temp with say a drone at rest versus a drone moving around up in the air? Uh, if if you would have told me that question were coming, I could show I I would I’d spend the rest of this call trying to trying [laughter] to find that chart, right? But so CM5 is crazy hot, right? Right. And so we’re we advocate if you’re doing development, one of the things we do is advocate do your development in the simulation, right? Like that we have code VS code in the cloud, whatever. When you’re ready, bring that over to the drone. But I’m guilty of just testing on real hardware sitting on the bench. So we have like, you know, a cheap USBC CPU fan or GPU fan that just keeps it cool. Now, I would say under rest, we’re probably at 80 to 90C, right? And and we’re not really taxing the CPU very hard uh with our out of the box OS. But what you’ll observe is that the minute you arm the motors and because of all that, you know, propw wash we call it, as you get up, we’re we’re we’re down to 50C or less, right? While it that’s a huge drop. And I would there’s ever an opportunity to to share in the future. I I’ll I’ll send you a link just because you asked, you’ll see that just dip so quickly. Much faster than, you know, obviously a CPU fan sitting on the bench, right? It’s um Yeah, great great question. Oh, thanks. We’re we’re I think about at time here. Um, if we’ve got any last minute questions, let me go ahead and check out Zoom. Um, looks like I think we got to everything here. Um, thanks so much for joining us this week, Dennis. This was a lot of fun. I I’m really uh you you all have built a what looks like to be a a really thoughtful and uh well-made platform for for education and for especially I’m I love that what you’ve the thought you’ve put into you know the repairability and the the DIYness of it all because that’s also part of the education process like there’s something really exciting about uh oh you know one of the propellers broke well okay just go 3D print another one right like figure out the slicer and go 3D print another one like I I love that. Um, Phil, I know we’re running on time. I’ll just No, it’s all good, man. We We can The dream would be to 3D print and not have to injection mold propellers. Um, we’re still at the place from efficiency standpoint. I know you were using that example I’m getting hung up on. We would love to 3D print propellers that that were very efficient, didn’t kill battery life, and um but uh yes, everything but I’ll say that. Gotcha. Gotcha. So, the one example I chose was the wrong [laughter] one. But guess what? We have a gentleman that does a lot of CAD work and I’m going to tell his name is Aziz. Does incredible. He designed all our frame and everything. I’m going to say, “Hey, the Open CV Live guys uh said you couldn’t design and print a efficient propeller.” And we’ll see what he says. Oh yeah, sure. Blame me. I um Satia, we’ve got an awesome episode coming up next week with our friend France. Um I hopefully he’ll be wearing his raspberry beret. There’s another little musical reference for you guys out there. Um do you want to talk about cloud optimized OpenCV which will be our topic next week? Yeah. So uh next week we are going to talk about you know cloud optimized OpenCV. We some of you may have already heard about it. This is our uh optimized version of OpenCV on AWS Graviton. So uh Graviton’s new version Graviton 4 is out and so we are going to see how OpenCV performs on these processors. A ton of other things that France uh will is more more uh capable of uh explaining. So we’ll have that episode next time. So tune in. Uh it’s it’s going to be great. Yeah. Scan that QR code I just put up on screen. That’ll take you to the Amazon Web Services Marketplace listing for cloud optimized OpenCV. And you can join us next week to learn all about that. Um, I’m also going to remind you OpenCV has a Patreon. You can join us for just $2 a month and get OpenCV live streams over on Patreon as well as DRM free downloadable episodes of every new episode of OpenCV Live. Watch them however and whenever you want for just two bucks a month. There’s also a $7 a month tier. We appreciate all of your support. Everybody that gives us a dollar, $5. It really means a lot to us. Everybody working at OpenCV, not just myself, not just Satia, but the whole team out there. And uh we’ll be talking with a couple more of them. You guys have gotten pretty familiar with Gersomer and Abashek. and I I think they’ll be uh possibly uh be joining us a little bit next week as well to talk about cloud optimized OpenCV. But scan that QR code, join us on Patreon. You can sign up on the Patreon for free, but you won’t get those downloadables. You will, however, get um all of the Patreon posts and stuff like that as part of your uh free subscription on Patreon. We’re going to be trying to leverage this a little bit more. And hopefully in the future, we’ll also be now that Apple podcasts has video podcast support, we’re looking into uh setting up uh video podcast on Apple Podcast as well. That’ll probably be a paid thing, but it it won’t be expensive, I promise. So, please join us on Patreon and uh of course, subscribe to the OpenCV newsletter. Um follow us on the various social media platforms. We’re on Masttodon, Blue Sky, LinkedIn, uh YouTube, uh pretty much everywhere. And uh last but not least, thank you all for joining us this week and thank you Dennis for the presentation. Take care of yourselves out there, folks. And take care of somebody else if you can. And vamos Mexico. Adios.

  • 06/24/2026 – Alliant Webinar – Savvy Tax Planning – How Tax Planning Changes Through Four Stages of Retirement

    Good afternoon everyone. Like to thank you for joining my presentation today. Just going to give it another minute or so just to let everyone have a chance to join into the meeting. Connect to audio. Hopefully if you are connected if somebody out there if you could uh just confirm. I want to make sure you can see my presentation. Okay. That you can hear me okay that we have no uh technical issues. If anybody could respond to the uh chat feature in the Zoom meeting. Oh, perfect. We got a response. Just going to give it just about one more minute and then we’ll get started today. But thank you for responding. Okay, I think we’re in good shape. Looks like uh everybody has joined into the meeting. So I’d like to get started today. And first uh off, thank you again for uh joining me. My name is Tom Davia, one of the financial consultants here at Alliant. I’m a certified financial planner. Our department of Alliant is called Alliant Retirement and Investment Services. Today we’re going to be talking about tax planning and tax planning changes through the four stages of retirement. So during the presentation, we just like a uh disclaimer here. Presentation is intended for educational purposes only. Please do not record, reproduce, distribute any part of the presentation. And by continuing to participate in the webinar, you acknowledge and agree to these terms. So thank you for doing that. Um, just want to let you know I do an every other week schedule for a presentation for the uh the credit union. Today, tax planning and retirement coming up on July 8th, I’m going to be talking about Roth conversion strategies. Uh, we’re going to touch on that a little bit today. I’m going to go more in depth on it uh in it on July 8th and we’ll go into some examples on Roth conversions, the taxation uh beneficiaries, all the uh the benefits of doing those types of conversions. That’s going to be on July 8th. On July 22nd, I’m going to be uh talking about social security, taking a look at the big picture. So, we’ll talk about the history of social security, how we got to this point. We always hear in the news that there’s going to be some reductions in benefits. So, we’ll address that and then we’ll talk about how your benefits are calculated, choosing the right time to file and how it could play a part in supplementing retirement income. So, I always say uh everyone’s welcome to join these meetings. Uh if you know anybody who’d like to attend, you could uh just let them know. These are our websites. This is the full schedule of our webinars. I’m the co-host of the podcast as well. So, you can see podcast episodes on our website and there’s also a financial blog that we post some information to as well. Don’t expect you to write all this down. This website uh aerys.alliantcreditun.com/events

    for the webinars for the podcast and blog as well. But if you go to the credit union website, you click on the investment tab, it’s going to take you to our landing page here for the investment department. At the top of the page, you’ll see there there’s a webinar button, all full webinar schedule, podcast episodes, and the blog as well. So, you can access that information. And uh what we’re doing is we’re putting these presentations together to share some information with you, financial topics. Uh but we’re also doing it to promote our financial planning services. I always say we’re the best kept secret at the credit union. So we just want to do these presentations, let you know that we’re here, that we exist, and we can help with uh some of these financial topics. We can also help with full financial planning. Uh this slide here, this is an output from a financial plan. This is what we call the cash flow overview. And this really answers the questions, right? Do I have enough? Where do I draw funds from? Just make sure everything uh checks out and is working exactly the way you want it to. So, with something like this, we have a uh basic conversation, right? We gather some information from you. We help you build your comprehensive financial plan. We talk about different topics like today’s topic, taxes in retirement. So, we’ll talk about ways to fight taxes, uh, fight inflation, generate more income from your portfolio, and talk about volatility in the market, reducing risk, and really to, uh, where to draw funds from in retirement as well. And those also important, uh, health care costs, we can model that in there as well. So, this is a part of your membership at the credit union, right? We do financial planning. um no cost, no obligation service. Can’t do it for everybody, but that’s why we uh put these presentations on just to make some introductions, share some information with you and see if we can help you along your financial journey. We are a fiduciary firm, so happy to not only do the financial planning for you, review any accounts that you might have questions on, answer any specific financial topic questions that come up. I always like this slide as well, right? Only 36% of Americans have a written financial plan. So that’s why we’re here. We can help you with again some of these topics. Can’t do it for everybody, but if this is of interest to you, just uh let us know and we’ll help you with that. So we help with full financial planning. We help with uh estate planning questions, advanced topics, advanced planning, estate planning, Roth conversion, cash flow analysis, investment management, and investment choices as well. So, we are a financial planning firm. I’m also a registered investment adviser and can help you with some of these topics as well. That’s it on the credit union. Um, I’m going to jump into to today’s presentation, which is tax planning in the four stages of retirement. Just want to check in again with everybody. Uh, some of you were kind enough to share that the uh presentation was coming through on the chat feature. The audio is okay. If you have any technical issues, let me know. will go ahead and use that chat feature. I’ll be monitoring that throughout the presentation. So, if you need any help with anything, also uh we’re going to cover a lot of information today. So, if you have any questions, there’s any slides that pop up or any topics I bring up that need some uh explanation, you could put your questions as I’m talking in the chat feature. There’s also the Q&A feature in the meeting today. Just put those in and at the end of the presentation, I’ll be sure to uh get back to those questions. So, what we’re going to do is we’re going to dive into today’s presentation. We’re talking about taxes. So, a great way to start is to run through a simulation of an event, a tax situation. So, this is about Bill. And Bill really wants to go on a road trip to see a concert. Bill said, “Well, the only way I’m going to do this is if I take $1,000 out of my IRA to pay for the trip.” So, Bill is going to make a $1,000 IRA distribution. Little background on Bill. He has taxable income of 58,000. He has 45,000 that he normally withdraws from his IRA account and he’s got some social security benefits. So, as the slide says, a bit of a brain teaser, right? If Bill takes out $1,000 from his IRA, how much is Bill going to have to pay in taxes on that $1,000? So simply seems like an easy answer, but we just look at his taxable income, 58,000, puts him square in the 22% tax bracket. So we would assume that if Bill takes out $1,000, that Bill would have to pay 22% or he would have to pay $220 in taxes. So that would be the easy answer. Of course, can you you could tell I called this a brain teaser, so that’s not the correct answer. Uh, Bill is actually going to owe $400 on that $1,000 IRA distribution. Bill caused himself a 40% tax rate on that income. That’s really the heart of today’s presentation. Some of these pitfalls, traps, sir charges, penalties that come along with some income in retirement. So, I’m going to leave this as a brain teaser for now. Now, I’m going to show you how to get to that 40% taxation in a uh in a few slides, but four stages of retirement. So, this is really what we’re going to talk about. So, we always say you have a CPA, if you work with an accountant, anything like that, always consult with a professional tax advisor to discuss these conversations. But a basis of what we’re going to talk about today, right, a few definitions. traditional IAS. Traditional IAS are tax deferred. So, you get a little tax break up front for putting your money into a traditional IRA, but down the road you pay taxes on that money when you distribute a Roth IRA, non-deductible, meaning you don’t get a tax break today, but the money grows taxree. And when you take money out of the Roth IRA, it’s going to be taxree as well. So that’s the definition of the Roth IRA. And then also in the presentation, we’re only going to talk about federal taxation. So I’m not going to get state specific. Every state has its own rules. I happen to be here at the credit union headquarters today. I’m in Illinois. Illinois is generally tax friendly to retirees. Illinois does not tax social security benefits, does not tax pension benefits, does not tax IRA distributions. So every state is going to be a little bit different some of the definitions but now as we walk through the four stages of retirement right kind of setting the stage for that you look at it in accumulation right pre-retirement I always say this is the easy part you’re saving you’re accumulating assets money is maybe coming out of your paycheck every two weeks it’s going into an investment the market’s going down you’re maybe investing more buying on the dips the market goes up, you look at the balances, you feel better because you’re reaching a goal that you might have set or kind of a peak of the mountain of a asset base for your retirement. That’s an accumulation, but things change, right? When you actually go to live off this money or retire, there’s going to be different variations, right? New things are added into the conversation. Social Security timing, when to start benefits, Social Security taxation, required minimum distributions, the money you have to take out of those tax deferred accounts, how that’s going to affect your taxes as well. Paying for Medicare, long-term care needs, things like that. So, not only are these new concepts introduced into your financial planning, but you may have lost some tax credits along the way. child tax credits that may be gone in this phase of life. Mortgage interest deduction, right? You might not be able to itemize your taxes anymore. You’re taking the standard deduction maybe if you paid off the mortgage. Uh medical insurance paid for by the employer contributions to 401k. So, we’re kind of shifting the dynamics going from your accumulation phase to actually taking money out or distributing. So, we just want to make sure that you’re set up to do this the right way, either tax-wise or from which accounts to be withdrawing at what time. So, you put it all together. The problem is, as we almost noted with Bill and his concert trip, people pay more in taxes in retirement because they don’t know the rules. System is confusing. Income is treated differently for t different types of investments and there may be hidden taxes, fees, sir charges and penalties that go along with it. But you find out that you might be paying more than you uh than you uh originally estimated. So developing a solution, right? So we want to look through the four stages of retirement. You need a strategy that anticipates taxes, your traditional thought pattern on taxes and possible taxes going forward. What has changed in your distribution plan, sir charges that go along, penalties, social security, and other income? So, we want to come up with that solution. That’s what we’re going to be talking about today, right? The four stages are pre-retirement, saving up, uh working and saving up for those years. Number two, early retirement, kind of call them the go- go years. You retire, maybe you’re doing more activities, traveling, spending more money, possibly the first 10 years of retirement. Number three, middle retirement. We kind of call them the slowgo years. It’s almost like been there, done that. I’ve done the travel. Now I’m staying more at home, spending more time with the family. The expenses aren’t as much as they may be in the fourth stage, the late retirement. Call them the no-go years. You’re not doing as much travel as much expenses. But we also have to account for certain medical needs at that point as well. So those are some of the things that we look at throughout the four stages. Really what we’re paying attention to is inflation, longevity concerns, making sure in your financial plan that the assets can sustain themselves for a 30 or 40year retirement. Make sure you’re drawing from the accounts accordingly. Uh healthcare costs, as I mentioned before, they seem to be rising quicker than the normal pace of inflation. When you add in healthcare inflation, we want to make sure that assets are earmarked for those expenses as well. And then today’s topic taxes. So when you put it all together, right, what do you need to understand about retirement and taxes? So really the first thing is the most important is you need to know what your after tax retirement savings picture looks like. So what’s your after tax savings? Well, if you look at it and you say, “All right, I’ve saved up a sum of money. I had a goal in mind. I’ve reached my goal of $500,000, maybe a million dollars or so. But if you look at that in your 401k or your IRA, if it’s tax deferred assets, right, it might not really be $500,000 to you. So if you are married filing jointly, if you’re in the 22% tax bracket, that’s not really an IRA, an individual retirement account, more of like a JRA, a joint retirement account. It’s joint between you and the government. the IRS is in your pocket for 22% of that account. So although you have the feel and the statement and the balance of $500,000 in your pocket it could actually be 390,000 380,000 if you’re at the 24% tax rate. So as you’re looking at those balances they’re tax deferred. They’re growing over time. It’s been a great market the last three years. It’s just been going up and up. But if you’re not taking money out of your account, eventually you’re going to come across the RMDs or the required minimum distributions. If you were born before 1960, your required distribution age is 73. If you’re born after 1960, your required distribution age is 75. And all that is is the government saying, “Hey, this is half ours. We’re involved in this account. You’ve enjoyed tax deferral for so many years. You have to start taking money out. you have to start paying taxes on it. This is a retirement account. So, at that point at 73 or 75, that’s when if you haven’t taken money out, that’s when they’re in your pocket for possibly 22%, 24%, maybe even more depending on your specific situation and your taxes. Very simple chart here. Um, this chart does a good job because it shows the 0% tax rate. So, this is assuming a $500,000 investment. This is assuming a growth rate of 6%. But it’s also putting in place a reduction for taxation on the account. So, the top line, it’s hard to see, it’s a gray line. It says 0% tax rate. Now, when you look at that, that does exist. That is something that you could strive to. That is going to be if you have a Roth account because in the Roth account, it’s all going to grow taxfree. It’s all going to be distributed taxfree if you meet all the qualifications. So it’s all going to distribute taxfree. You don’t have a required distribution and the beneficiaries would receive the money without a tax liability as well. So that gray top line that is a possibility. Now the next line is 12% taxes. Basically alls we’re doing is taking the gray line subtracting taxes for it 12% less. So you can see less of a slope and even further reduced at a larger tax bracket at the 33% tax bracket. So as I mentioned uh I have a specific presentation coming up on Roth conversions. I do have some slides here as well. But if this is a concept that you’ve thought about before or heard about it, I believe everybody should consider a Roth conversion. Right? We can walk you through the exercise and we just have to make sure it makes sense in your specific situation, but could be something beneficial to you as well. All right, so we know that there’s going to be some reduction on those accounts due to taxation, but now we’re going to look at social security, right? At least we’ll have still have social security to supplement income and Medicare to pay health care costs. So social security and Medicare, right? They have their own traps, tricks, sir charges, just different things you need to plan for as well. So the first thing we’re going to look at here is social security. So social security and taxation. So to look at this, we’re going to go back to Bill and remember Bill took $1,000 out of his IRA to go on that concert road trip. So all he did different in his life from one year to the other, he took out $1,000 from his IRA. So his IRA income went up. It was $45,000. He bumped it up to 46,000. Social Security benefits stayed the same, $37,500, but that extra,000 increased his adjusted gross income from 74,000 to 76,600, increasing his taxable income from 58,6 to 60,000. So, by Bill taking out $1,000, he increased his taxable income uh by $1,850. So if you divide it out, every $1,000 that he took out, it had 1.85 in taxes. So every additional dollar he received, an additional 185 was added to his adjusted gross income. So if you put it together, what Bill did is he came across something that’s called the Social Security torpedo. So Social Security has its own taxation rates. So if you have low income, we have married filing jointly under 32,000. Social Security has a 0% tax on it. Now it was described last year in the one big beautiful bill that social security is no longer taxable. That’s not true. Social Security still does have its own tax schedule. What happened last year is the standard deduction was increased for those over 65 to compensate for the taxation on social security. But social security is still taxable. Again, married filing jointly under 32,000 no taxes. If you are 32,000 to 44,000, half of your social security is taxable. And then if you go above that 44,000, 85% of your social security is taxable. So that’s what happened to Bill. the social security torpedo. His $1,000 crossed that threshold. It pushed the taxation taxation into 85% taxable. So by walking through the scenario, his taxes would have been $7,600. His taxes are now 8,000. So, he effectively created a $400 tax bill on his $1,000 distribution, giving himself a tax rate of 40% on that versus the 22% marginal tax bracket. So, that’s what happened to Bill, right? He took more money out. He wasn’t aware of the taxation on social security. He didn’t know that that $1,000 pushed him into the next category, and he didn’t know he’d be paying a 40% tax rate on those monies. Maybe if Bill knew that, we could have looked through some scenarios, looked at other assets that were not his IRA that may have avoided that for him as well. So, that’s what happened to Bill. That’s the Social Security uh torpedo. We’re going to talk more about Social Security, right? Different approaches in retirement, right? This is kind of tied into Social Security. You could retire completely. You could stop working. You could continue to work, but you could work less, right? just maybe a part-time job, get some income, do it for some uh hobby or recreation while you’re still getting paid. Uh semi-retire into a passenger driven job. Uh retire and volunteer. So, we’re going to kind of look at these scenarios. We’re going to say, all right, social security, the good, right? We’re going to go over the good, the bad, and the ugly. Social Security is calculated on the highest 35 years of earnings. So if you’re still working and you are increasing, right, you are earning over 62, you can still increase your benefit while you’re taking social security payments if while you’re working you replace a low earning year or a zero year. So when you start receiving your benefits, they’re going to calculate it high as 35 years. So if you have a zero in there, if you didn’t work a full 35 years and you continue to work while you’re receiving benefits, it can increase how much they pay you. So that would be the good, right? You could still get some increases. Now, the bad would be if you’re working, if you’re under full retirement age, you’re working and receiving benefits, you could have your benefits reduced by your income. So, as the calculation goes, you’re going to have a $1 reduction for every $2 earned over a threshold of $24,000. So, for example, if you made $44,000, $24,000 is fine. $20,000 is an issue. The way they reduce it is one to two in earnings. So, they would reduce your benefit by $10,000 or $830 a month. So, you could see pretty quickly if you’re receiving benefits and you’re still working and you’re under full retirement age, this could be a substantial reduction for you in the amount you receive. So, you have to be careful of this. Now, they do pay this money back to you once you receive once you reach full retirement age. It’s a bit of a calculation. It’s not one big check when you turn 67 or 66 in a few months. It’ll be a calculation. It’ll be spread out over time, but you just need to know if you’re working, if you’re making more than 24,000, there could be a monthly reduction in there for you as well. Now, that was the good, that was the bad. We have the ugly. Now, the ugly would be social security taxation. So, you pay into the system if you’re still working, right? They’re taking money out of your check to pay into the system. If you’re working and receiving benefits, you’re receiving those benefits. And those benefits are being taxed to you at the same time. Earnings being taxed, benefits paid being taxed, you might call it a double taxation. But if you’re still working and you’re not replacing one of those low years out of 35 or a zero year out of 35, you just may have that double taxation going on and you may receive absolutely no benefit for it as well. So that is the ugly of social security. The taxation on the two things to consider when we’re walking through a financial plan is do I need these funds while I’m still working? Can I delay those benefits and find a more taxefficient way to take my benefits? So next we’re going to talk about Medicare. Medicare and taxes. Medicare again a good way to explain it is an example. George and Martha. George and Martha wanted to go on the same road trip kind of road trip that Bill went on. So George and Mara Martha uh they have Medicare Part B and Part D active. They have in 2024 because Medicare looks two years in a rear. 2024 they had $342,000 in modified adjusted gross income. they sell $1,000 in stock. So if they sell $1,000 in stock, right, it’s not an IRA distribution. A stock sale would count as capital gains. So what they’re looking at is 15% in capital gains plus an extra 3.8% in what is called net investment income sir charge, right? Because their income is over $200,000. So again, if you look at it, if they sell $1,000 in stock, they should only have to pay $188 in taxes, 18.8%. But we’re going to look at it differently here. We’re going to say they need to watch out for the Medicare Irma cliff. So what that cliff is is uh Medicare Part B is paid on income levels. So again, for 2026, it’s what your income was 2 years ago in 2024. So now uh they were at George and Martha were at $242,000. They took an extra $1,000 as a stock sale. So that’s going to push them into the next category in Medicare PartB Irma charges. So you can see here married filing jointly the base rate is $22 and then as you cross certain threshold it’s going to go up over time. The second bracket is 1.4 for the standard rate. The third bracket is two times the standard rate. And what George and Martha did by that stock sale, they pushed themselves in the 2.6 times the standard rate. So they’re going to go from paying $45 per person per month. They’re now going to have to pay $527 per person per month. So they have that extra charge. But with Medicare, they also have the Part D drug plan. And that’s going to have an increase per person per month as well. Same threshold. Once they went over 342,000, their premium went up from 3750. Now they’re at a plan premium of $60 per month. So, not only do we have to calculate the capital gains taxes on this, but we also have to look at the total Medicare Irma search charges of $3,470. George Part B, uh, an extra $121 per month, $1,400 per year. Drug plan part D, $275 per year. We times that by two because it was two, uh, George and Martha. So they’re going to have to pay an additional sir charge $3,470.

    So if you put that together, right, the stock sale, right, capital gains at $188, we have the 3470 and Irma charges. So now what they’ve done by selling that $1,000 in stock is they’ve triggered real taxes of $3,658 or a 365% real tax rate on that $1,000 tax sale uh stock sale. So they might, if they knew that in advance, they might back up that conversation and say, “This might not be the best tax thing for us to do is to sell the stock. we have other assets, other avenues. We don’t want to cross into the next Medicare uh bracket. They could look at possibly cash distributions, possibly other avenues to do this, but in their situation, not knowing the Irma brackets, it cost them quite a bit in those search charges to get that done. Next, we’re still on uh Medicare, but we’re going to talk about some of the penalties that go along with Medicare Part B. if you’re not aware of these dates. So again, another example, Jim and an Jim and Anne are both 68. Jim retired at 65 and one year later when she was 66, they did get coverage through Ann’s employer who offered retiree health insurance. So the question is when should they have enrolled in Medicare Part B? Now, we’re going to talk about some of the penalties because they did not enroll at the right time. So, they’re going to be subject to a penalty. But you have to understand that there’s different enrollment periods with Medicare. The first one is your initial enrollment period. Your initial enrollment period, if you’re not covered by an employer plan that has over 20 employees, your initial enrollment period is going to be your 65th birthday, 3 months prior, the month of your birthday, and 3 months after. It’s going to be your initial enrollment period. Uh after that, you’re going to have a special enrollment period. Special enrollment period kicks in when you have a qualifying event. In our situation, Anne had a qualifying event when she was 66. She retired. She separated from work. Ann really should have caught the special enrollment period, which is 8 months after that event. So, she had 8 months to do it. You don’t want to wait 8 months because there’s going to be a gap in coverage, but that would be her special enrollment period. Since they completely missed those, they’re going into a general en enrollment period. They were late in filing. So now they’re going to have a 10% penalty on the base premium of Medicare Part B for life. So 10% per person per month on that. So again, going back to that chart we looked at, Medicare Part B, base amount is $22.90. They’ve now have a lifetime penalty of 10%. If they missed it for two years, they’d have a 20% penalty, but they have a 10% penalty. So, they’re each paying $20 more a month. By 12 months, they’re each paying around $250. They’re each paying well, a combined $500 more in penalty for the late uh the late coverage. And that’s going to go on for life. So, they have to pay that $500. So, you could run some financial calculators. You could say life expectancy is another 30 years for them, $500 a year. We could translate that into a $10,000 mistake by missing their enrollment periods. So, you want to watch out for enrollment periods, but you want to also watch out for coverage gaps. A lot of people think that they will leave work, they’ll take COBRA, and they’ll be fine and they can wait a while. May institute a penalty. and that period of time where you have COBRA, that’s not going to be your primary insurance because if you are over age 65, you are expected to have Medicare as your primary insurance. So, watch out for the COBRA as well. But that is the uh the penalty and the search charges on part B for missed opportunities on the enrollment. So, we’re going to talk a little bit, right? Other tax traps, other ideas. What we want to talk about here is sequence of withdrawals. You’re probably familiar with sequence of returns, right? If I retire and the market’s down, what will that do to my financial plan? If I retire in a good market, what does that look like for the next 20 years? That’s a sequence of returns. What your accounts actually make. We’re going to talk about sequence of withdrawals. which accounts to take your income from. Whether it’s first using taxable accounts, tax deferred accounts, that’s the traditional 401k, traditional IRA where you have to pay the taxes when you t take it out. Or the third category, tax-free assets. If you have the Roth account, where do tax-free distributions fit into an effective withdrawal tax effective withdrawal strategy? So, when you look at this, we look again at another example. Husband and wife, they each have an IRA. Each is $450,000 in pre-tax money. They have to pay the tax in. So, it’s a joint retirement account with the government. They each have uh $60,000 in tax-free distribution assets through their Roth IRA. And then they have their joint bank account, savings account, CDs, things like that. So you put it all together, they want to spend out of all these assets, they want to spend $8,500 per month. But what is the most efficient way for them to go about this? So if you look at it in the most conventional basic way, what you look at is spending taxable money first. Taxable money would mean bank accounts, savings accounts, brokerage accounts, right? investments, stock accounts, anything that’s not a retirement account asset, that’s going to fall into the taxable money first category. Conventional wisdom continues on taxable accounts first, then you go into your tax deferred accounts. Tax deferred accounts are when you take it out, you have to pay the taxes. 401ks, traditional IAS, when you make a distribution, you have to pay the taxes. If you wait for the required distribution, you have to pay the taxes. And then the third layer in this theory is taxexempt money. Tax exempt money would be for example the Roth IRA. It’s growing taxfree. We have possibly some municipal taxfree bonds. Any tax exemp exempt money that can create some taxfree income for you. So if you put that together you might be scratching your head and say all right what does that look like? What do I have in each one of those categories? And if I do this conventional wisdom, what would that look like for my personal situation? I shared one slide from the financial planning before that was the cash flow overview. Another one that we have here is called lifetime portfolio values. So we can model the conventional wisdom and we can say if you take from taxable first tax deferred here’s what your distribution plan would look like not only for the next 10 years for the next 20 years and so on. We can model market performance in there as well. Show you those sequence of returns. Right? Here’s in a good market. Here’s in a bad market. We could do some stress testing to the portfolio. We could show the value of the account growing over time with your withdrawals on that conventional wisdom. Now we also have the ability here within this comprehensive financial plan on the left hand side we have the ability to change these scenarios and have different views or different tax conversations with you. So what I did here in this slide is I just changed it and I said instead of conventional look at it differently. Let’s look at it. A liquidation strategy using the IRA or the tax deferred assets first. So, we’re going with the liquidation strategy of 100% they call it qualified. Qualified is a retirement account qualifies for special tax treatment. But basically, we just turned on the switch saying jumping conventional wisdom for my personal situation. What does it look like if I take out those tax deferred assets as as as a first draw down now in this plan by putting on that toggle switch over the life of the plan this added value to the lifetime portfolio values bottom right hand corner just by looking at it in a different withdrawal strategy added close to $200,000 in portfolio values by looking at what your specific best tax withdrawal strategy is getting away from conventional wisdom. Um there’s different studies, different uh reports, white papers on ways to go about these withdrawals, right? Converting to Roth under the new tax laws, effective social security strategies. Do you start it early? Do you start it late with taking your u IRA distributions? How do you mix in the social security benefits? And then finally, efficient tax efficient withdrawal strategy. So many different ways to look at this. So we’re going to put all this together and we’re going to say here’s an alternative approach. So an alternative approach is number one, spending down taxable money first. You’re doing bank accounts, you’re doing brokerage accounts. These are the taxable nonretirement accounts. By doing that, you’re kind of keeping your tax brackets lower, right? So, what we’re going to do is have lower tax brackets. We’re then going to go to step number two. We’re going to convert the IRA and we’re going to do the Roth conversion in those low low tax years. So, taxable money first, convert the Roth, then we go into whatever’s left over from the conversions, we’re going to spend tax deferred money, spend that down until depleted. let the financial plan then pick up with the Roth or taxexempt withdrawals. That’s the alternative approach. Really, what we did is we put those Roth conversions in the middle. Again, based on your situation, we can model this for you and say if you go with the alternative approach, if we add in those Roth conversions and do a different taxefficient distribution strategy, this is what it would look like. Green is what it adds value to your lifetime portfolio values. Bottom right hand corner. We started at zero. We did a little tax efficient planning. We got you to $200,000 in value gained. We went further and did another alternative approach. Created almost $700,000 in value gained by going with this alternative approach. Again, everybody is different, right? Different scenarios, different phases of your life. But just want you to know that there’s some opportunities there to look at either the Roth conversion or the tax efficient withdrawal strategies from your accounts. Just continuing on one step further, this is another financial plan output. This is the tax ledger. Left-hand side is the do nothing strategy. Right hand side is where we show the alternative approach. I’m just going to highlight left-hand side there was very low tax years. you were paying no taxes in those first few years of retirement. And then by going into the alternative strategy, we did create some taxable income by doing the Roth conversions. But by doing so, we smoothed out the ride over time. So at the end of the plan here, instead of tax uh total taxes being $19,000, by doing the alternative approach, taxes were $10,000 in the last year. So, it was able to smooth out the ride over all those years instead of being all taxed backloaded at the back of the plan. So, with that said, I’m just going to go over Roth conversions here a little bit. Again, another presentation coming up on that in a few weeks. If you have any questions on this specifically, you don’t have to wait a few weeks. We can have these conversations, but everybody should consider a Roth IRA conversion. A lot of times in my conversations, it gets mixed up. you have a Roth contribution, you can make a contribution. We’re not talking about that. We’re talking about a Roth conversion. So, you already have IRA assets. You’re going to convert it to Roth. You’re going to pay the taxes now. You’re never going to pay the taxes again in the future. So, this uh example always makes me chuckle a little bit. Uh Jill converts $100,000 from her IRA to her Roth. Jill will have to add that to her income and pay income taxes. So, it makes it seem very simple. So, it’s a big number, but Jill would have to add $100,000 into her taxable income for the year she does the conversion. Uh, graphically, if you look at this, think of it as buckets and a and a watering can. Each one of those buckets is a marginal tax bracket. So, you have a standard deduction. Then, you’re going to go into the 10% bracket. You’re going to fill up that bucket. Those next dollars would be at the 12% bracket. a big jump to the 22% bracket, 24, 32, 35, and so on and so forth. So, if you look at those buckets, right, 32, 35, 37, you may think to yourself, I’ll never get to that point. We run some projections on required distribution. You’d be surprised at how large those can grow over time and how those distributions get. And if you don’t get to those buckets, it continues to grow. Maybe your beneficiaries get into some of those larger buckets. no laws right now in place, but if tax rates are ever increased in the future, right, a Roth conversion would hedge against that. So, basically, think of the Roth conversion as that watering can. What we’re trying to do is fill up the tax bracket. So, if you’re halfway through the 12%, we do the calculation. We look at your income sources and we say for 2026 I could tell you how much more room you have left in the 12% bucket before you go into the next the 22% bucket. Once you’re in the 22% bucket again we could do the calculations say how much room is there to fill that up before you would go into the next one. So we could tell you specifically how much it would cost to do a Roth conversion and how much room you have in each one of these buckets. Again, you might look at this and say, “This is a good idea. This may help me. This may help my family, but I have no idea where I’m at on these buckets, and I have no idea how to get a good grasp on where I’m at on these buckets.” So, again, going back to uh one of the outputs in a financial plan, this is the tax bracket output. So, this is showing the marginal tax brackets. Uh the orange line starts the 12% bracket. Once you get to the uh I’m sorry, the green line starts 12%. Once you go above orange, you’re in the 22% bracket. Once you go above blue, you’re in the 24% bracket. And then you can see on the right hand side, they go up, but then they shoot down. And what that is representing here is this is left hand side married filing jointly, right hand side surviving spouse continuing on. So a surviving SP spouse goes from married filing jointly to an individual tax filer. All the tax brackets are shrunken down. So if you notice left-hand side, more income, more income taxes. Maybe you’re working, maybe you’re both working, but at some point in time uh this little sunset, right? Stopping working. We have very low to no income tax years. So we’re going to specifically identify those low tax years as opportunities for a Roth conversion. So what we do from there is again we go through an interview process with you. We gather this basic information but we say in modeling a Roth conversion we can identify the years through 2030 in this example through 2036. We can say we want to fill up that 12% tax bracket. We want to do a specific dollar amount every year. We want to compare the two and find out what your best uh options are. And then we go back to the income tax bracket. We look at the results. Uh the results are signified by the yellow bars with the taxable portion of the Roth conversion. That’s just filling up those tax brackets. What you could see happen is it added some taxes with the yellow right on the lefth hand side, but significantly reduced future taxation on the right hand side. smooth out the ride and reduce the tax liability for a surviving spouse. As well, when I say everybody should consider this, um, what I mean at the bottom of the page, this is going to show you over the life of your plan how much this could potentially lower your overall tax liability. It’s also going to show you how much a strategy like this could add to total portfolio assets for you as well. So, that’s the things that we’re watching. Does it help you on the taxes? Does it help you on the portfolio? So, that’s something that we could uh definitely take a look at and help you walk through. Um, again, just kind of wrapping up on Roth conversions. Basically, you just want to low look for low income years. You’re a business owner. You might have a low sales year, high expenses year. If you have some medical bills, right? Maybe you’re able to itemize those on a non-reoccurring every other year or so. But uh if you have a higher itemized uh deduction and then at retirement will you retire but before you receive social security benefits you start pensions or you start taking your IRA distributions and again happy to walk that through if you’d like more information or model your specific situation. Uh a few other options right this is uh getting away from Roth conversions but looking at managing tax brackets. Uh some of you may have life insurance policies, life insurance policies if they carry a cash value. You may have the opportunity to take withdrawals, loans from those policies and do that on a tax-free basis to keep your taxation low and may help you with the Roth conversion. Uh selling highly appreciated stock, right? Depending on your income, there’s a 0% capital gain threshold. Most people fall in the 15% uh capital gains for selling uh stock and then taking distributions from your IAS of lower tax years, lower tax rates. It’s really the same thing. If you take a distribution, you have to pay the taxes on it. If you do the Roth conversion, you have to take the uh pay the taxes on it. So, it’s kind of a preference, whatever works out best in the financial plan. I just want to mention these really quick. Um, just the top one. I know a lot of people have health savings accounts. Uh, use those strategically and but what I mean by that is those are really Roth accounts, right? You’re not taxed going in, you’re not taxed going out if you have qualified medical expenses. So, not many people know this, but a qualified medical expense never expires. So, if you have receipts that you’ve saved from your medical expenses, but you haven’t gotten a reimbursement from your HSA, you could hang on to those receipts. They don’t expire. You could use it for future tax-free distributions either for medical living expenses. Um, not going to go too deep here into the qualified business income. If that’s something that uh you feel you want to talk about may affect you, it’s going to be a unique situation. Next topic with taxation, I want to talk about charitable giving. Uh what we’re going to talk about here is something called a qualified charitable distribution. Again, an example of this, Allen Shirley, they’re at the 24% uh tax bracket. Normal course of life over a year, they give $5,000 to a charity, multiple charities, it’s $5,000. They do not itemize enough. So they take the standard deduction. So their donations do not count for any tax benefits. So they just give away $5,000, get no tax write off because of it. Now, there’s something called the QCD, qualified charitable distribution. This is really going to tie up everything that we talked about, the IRA, the Medicare Part B, Irma. So you can give, an individual can give up to $111,000 this year, 2026. It goes up a little bit each year. So that is per person. So a couple can give $222,000. It’s a big number. You can give $1,000. You can give two. You can give whatever you want, but up to $111,000. The catch here, the caveat is the distribution must go directly to the charity. So, we’re talking about using retirement account assets, IRA accounts, right? You do the distribution to the charity. The big thing here is it counts as your required distribution, but it is not reported as income and you get no D tax deduction either. So, this is going to count as your required distribution. So, you need to be 70 and a half to do this. Again, required distributions are 73 75. So most people kind of time this with their required distribution. The first example is uh this Allen Shirley, they did not use the qualified charitable distribution. They took $5,000 out of their IRA. It immediately became taxable to them and they had a 24% tax liability on that. So they took receipt of those funds, paid $720, then they gave it to the charity. So total cost of the contribution 5720 because they had to pay the taxes on it. Now if you do the QCD qualified charitable distribution, it goes right from the IRA. It you do not receive it. So we get these requests all the time. They come in to say here’s my list of charities. This one gets X amount. This one gets X amount. So the IRA is actually going to send the funds to the charity, not to you. It satisfies your required distribution. It does not count as income. It does not subject you to the Social Security torpedo tax. It does not subject you to the Medicare Irma Part B sir charges as well. So, if you find yourself charitably inclined, this is a good way to do it. If you find yourself charitably inclined, but starting to cross some of those search charges, this is a great option for you as well. That’s the qualified charitable distribution. Um, finally, we’re just going to talk a little bit. I know it’s coming up on the hour, but this one I wanted to touch on, make sure everyone’s aware. Everything we talked about was retirement account assets, retirement account assets, taxation. So, if you have nonretirement account assets, if you bought some stock, and again, the last three years have been just phenomenal, that stock has gone up in value. I had a client that had some Caterpillar stock and he’s like, “It didn’t do anything for years. Now it’s $1,000 a share.” But there’s something called the step up in basis. So essentially, your beneficiaries get these funds with a step up in basis. So whatever end of life is value, that’s what they inherit it. If it appreciates from there, then they’d have to pay taxes on it. So stock things, accounts like that are very tax efficient, passing to the next generation or the beneficiaries. Traditional tax deferred IAS are not very tax efficient but step up in basis. This is an example. This is a very unique example but husband and wife uh husband was diagnosed with a terminal illness. So they kind of illustrate two examples here. Do nothing. It’s a joint account. If the husband passes away, they would get a step up in basis on half of the account for the husband. There’d still be a tax liability if the wife wanted to sell her assets. That’s scenario number one. Scenario number two, they’re illustrating, well, if they knew they had that diagnosis, if they changed all assets to the husband’s name, it’s a marital asset, they can do that. He passes away, then the entire account gets a step up in basis and the wife wouldn’t have to pay any taxes on the gains in the account. She would sidestep that because she would get the step up in basis. So kind of important for that conversation, more important for uh beneficiary planning. Beneficiary planning uh of course includes IAS and inheriting IRA accounts. These rules changed a couple years ago. Beneficiaries would be able to stretch IRA payments over their lifetime. That means it was kind of a tax-free distribution. They pay a little bit of taxes every year for a very long period of time. Government came in and changed that. They said, “No, we’re going to give you a higher required distribution age, but we’re going to make your beneficiaries take the money out quicker.” So now what has to happen is these balances have to be taken out over a 10-year period. So if you’re a beneficiary, if you’ve received one of these IAS, you’re probably aware of that. I had somebody come to me that they received one of these years ago and they did not take any required distributions to do a big calculation, get them current on the account. But if you have a beneficiary IRA, the way it stands right now, you have 10 years to take the money out. You could take it out equally over those 10 years. You could wait till the 10 years is up and then take it all out. But again, going through the tax brackets, probably a very large tax liability at the end of 10 years. This example was saying that the sun took the money out equally equally year-over-year. Took an annual distribution of $54,000, just paid a little bit of extra income taxes on it. If he would have waited the full 10 years, he’s got a 10-year distribution, $716,000, pretty much guaranteed that he’s going to pay 37% on all that money. So, that’s just a more efficient way to do it by taking the uh the distributions equally. Another side note on the 10-year rule. Uh this is taxable money that we talked about. There’s also a 10-year rule that applies to Roth IAS. So the beneficiary could hang on to that Roth IRA for 10 years, enjoy some continued time of tax-free growth. 10 years, the money has to be out of that Roth IRA as well. So that’s it. Uh there was a little section here on long-term care expenses. Uh I’m going to kind of breeze over this. It’s a bigger conversation. I just wanted you to know that those are conversations that we can have as well if you have any questions regarding health care cost, long-term care planning, and the effects on your uh portfolio as well. So, with all that said, right, we’re just going to recap here a little bit. Uh, four stages of retirement. Pre-retirement, right? We want to know how you’re saving. If you have a Roth 401k, if it’s tax-free, that’s a good thing. But if you don’t, we want to know what your after tax is. After tax liability, how much could be taxable? Early retirement, we want to start looking at your social security benefits, targeting the optimal time, whether you take it early or take it late, what the difference is over your lifetime. Want to make sure we understand the social security and Medicare taxation. We want to understand filling in income tax brackets on low years, either with Roth conversions or just plain old withdrawals. Now, we got to worry about middle retirement and the required distributions if that may affect Medicare, if that may affect your marginal tax brackets as well. And then finally, again, long-term care estate planning beneficiaries in the fourth stage of retirement as well. So, with all that said, um this is kind of the things that we do here at the credit union for you. All right, we can go through and put together that financial plan or tax strategy. It kind of shows you which accounts, which assets to go to first for your expenses to do it in a taxefficient manner. And then also uh manage the accounts just so you pay the lowest tax rates possible. We want to look at distribution, spending phases, make sure that is set up correctly for you. Managing taxes and also education and planning. as we go through these four different stages says here right request a tax and retirement planning overview meeting that’s something that we do here um I’m just going to launch a poll any of these topics that you want to learn more about if you want to talk to me about this financial plan uh just let me know we’ll make sure we respond back to you uh credit union likes me to put out these polls just to make sure we’re touching on the right topics for you making sure we follow up but this would be putting together your tax and financial planning strategy by working on your financial plan, customizing this. I know a lot of advisors, a lot of investment firms don’t even offer this or they charge thousands of dollars. So again, part of the membership of your credit union members helping members. So happy to go through the plan with you. Happy to go through these different financial foundational planning topics, making sure that we have you on the right path for retirement. I breezed through it. I got it done by the uh top of the hour. This is my contact information. I always say call, click, or visit, right? Phone number. Uh you can email me. Uh I’m at the credit union every day, so we’re open to investment in-person meeting. So if you’d like to talk about any of this in person. If you have a camera, if you scan that QR code, it takes you right to my calendar. Go right to my calendar. It sets up a Zoom meeting just like this. You’re also welcome to say, “Hey, I’d like to come in the office and talk.” But with all that said, I’m sorry it took so long. We got to the top of the hour. I think I noticed we have some questions coming in as well. I’ll give you one more opportunity to if you have any questions, any of the topics that I talked about, if you want me to address those, feel free to use the chat feature or the uh Q&A feature. And uh just a few questions that came in. Uh one said, will you discuss what happens to heirs if don’t live as long as planned? So, I’m not sure I understand the question, but it could be either if I don’t live as long as planned beneficiaries receive the money sooner might be a consideration if you have uh minor children as your beneficiaries. If you have beneficiaries that you outlive, uh there are certain beneficiary designation. So, number one, I mentioned estate planning. You could have a trust set up that specifically designates what happens in certain scenarios. Or when we do our investment account beneficiary designations, we could put on there a term that is called per sturppies. Purerpies means that beneficiary, those funds are going to stay within that beneficiary’s family. Doesn’t go to the other contingent beneficiaries. So yeah, I might have to walk you through your situation a little bit. Uh again, we could talk about uh estate planning documents, wills, trusts, power of attorneys, and the all important uh healthcare directives as well. Uh great question that came in. Uh are there limits on how much you can convert to a WTH annually? I always say with a Roth conversion, um anyone at any time for any dollar amount can do a Roth conversion. The government would love for you to do it all at once. have a giant tax bill. That’s not the most taxefficient way to go about it. We usually run the financial plans and we find a systematic strategy for you over the course of a few years just to take advantage of the lower tax brackets or keep the uh conversion as tax efficient as possible. But again, converting anyone anytime, any dollar amount, it’s different than a contribution, but a conversion must be done by December 31st. And once you do it, you cannot undo it. That’s a Roth conversion. Now, the good question is, is there an age limit on when you can do a QCD, qualified charitable distribution? So, there is. On the front side, you must be at least 70 and a half, but there’s no age limit on the back side. Once you’re 70 and a half, the only limitation is you could only do $100,000. uh $111,000 each year as a QCD. You can do any amount underneath. No age limit. Just got to be 70 and a half. Another question. If you do a Roth conversion for $100,000, does it count towards your Irma? Yes. Yes, it does. So, we have to watch that. We have to watch the effects of that. Uh for social security taxation, we have to watch the effects for Irma sir charges. And then we have to weigh those effects. If you cross some barriers, you say, does it make sense for me to pay a search charge this year when potentially I could benefit from this for many many years to come? But that does count towards Irma. Great question there. Uh we had a couple thank yous. So thank you for the thank yous. Uh we have a question here. What is the fee for financial planning? You state you can do that for some. What does that mean some people? Um, so financial planning, I’m a certified financial planner. I believe every client should have a financial plan in place. Helps you understand your situation better. Helps me understand your situation better. Um, I I’m also a registered investment adviser, so I cannot make any recommendations to you until I totally understand really what we’re trying to accomplish, how you’re currently invested, what your goals are, what fees you might be paying, what risk tolerance you’re currently taking on, and how that coordinates with where you need to be. So, the fee for financial planning, I’m sorry, that’s some people, but we don’t charge for the financial planning. Again, it’s a part of your membership of the credit union. helps us understand your situation a bit. The some people I might have said that because there’s so many members to the to the credit union. I can’t do this for everybody, but uh some people, you know, just uh if you’re aware that we’re here if you set up some time, happy to walk through that with you. Some people need the full financial plan, some people uh need some specific questions answered, but that is a free part of your membership. We’re not going to charge you for that. I think one more came in at the end. Um, so let’s see. Yeah, another question here. If Medicare rates go up one year, can it go down another year? Yes. Uh, it’s always based on two years in the rear. So, if you have a oneoff year, um, higher income, Roth conversions, employment in, anything like that, uh, it would go down the next year. It’s a 2-year in a rear. I looked it up. no other reason that it takes government two years to get all the numbers and figure everything out, but uh two years in the past. So, if you have some one-off situations, retirement coming up, there’s also a form that you could kind of uh request that you have a one-off income situation and it for not for it not to count in your income uh for that year. So, I could walk you through that as well, but two years in the rear. Uh I think we did it. I got through all the uh the questions here. We’re a little bit past the hour. So, I appreciate everyone kind of hanging on and uh and bearing with me here, but if you if you do have any questions, let me know. Um the credit union will send out a follow-up email on my behalf at the end of the presentation. Thank you for responding to the poll. It helps us uh improve the uh the content that we’re sending out to you as well and follow up with you. Appreciate your time. If you have any questions, please uh let me know. Otherwise, hope to uh talk to everyone soon. Have a great afternoon. Thank you so much.

  • 06/23/2026 – Content Growth Engine

    All right. All right. All right. What is happening? Oh, this is weird. Why is it zoom changing? It’s showing admin Kevin and admin Aaron on here. That’s weird.

    I don’t know why it’s showing you guys. There we go. Okay. Uh, how’s it going everybody? Hope you guys are doing great. Um, and uh, yeah. Uh, go ahead and comment where you’re calling in from. We’re getting started a little early here. I’m getting everything ready behind the scenes, but comment where you are calling in from

    Okay.

    All right.

    Getting the comments set up here.

    All right. Hi, Marie, Joseph, Christine, Raul, Anthony. Um, Christine, Frank, uh, Christine, um,

    Patrick, I’m like your brother, HVAC, uh, contractor in Texas in my 70s, retired. I have lots of powerpoints and training materials. I have many questions. Don’t want to make uh just another YouTube channel. Want to be different. I love it. Good stuff, Patrick. Love to hear it. John, greetings. Jim, hey Jim, here from Northwest Georgia, USA. Awesome. Sean in Germany, waiting for divorce before Thailand relocation and starting my channel. Um, well, hey, thanks for staying up late. I think it must be pretty late in Germany. Thanks for staying up uh late, Sean. I think it’s good evening to most of us. Uh, probably good morning to a few of us like Anthony from New Zealand. Uh, and then good middle of the night to a few of us as well. Tim, lunch today. Anthony, Lisa, uh, Cat Nightdale, North Carolina. Samantha, California. Isaiah, Canada. Garner, St. Louis, Metro. Denise, Seattle. Raul, Arizona. Patrick, Tamal, Texas. Reena, Greenville, South Carolina. Desa, Lacus, New Mexico. Ali, Germany. Hey, thanks for staying up. Uh, Sydney, Oakland, California. Eva, Budapest, Hungary. Hey, thanks for staying up. Yes, sir. Amsterdam, Netherlands. Also, also thanks for staying up. Tim, Parksville, BC. Uh, Christine, Mexico. Bill Rutled, Houston. Um, I’m so excited for this, but I can’t stay. Sorry to hear that. Robin Peter, New Jersey. Frank uh Canary Canaries I think Canary Islands Teresa Wildwood Missouri Patrick Temple Derek can you help me grow a virtual church with YouTube? Yes, we actually have um people on our team that have gotten churches to over 100,000 subs. Uh Susan Washington State currently Anthony Mobile Alabama New Jersey Washington Mary Julie Los Angeles Thomas Moore St. Louis. Okay. Uh Frank, Sacramento, California. Awesome. I used to live there. George, uh from Newcastle, Delaware Youette, uh Asheville, North Carolina. Teresa Terresa Miller. Joseph, New Jersey. Jack, Georgia. Salvador, Maine. Donna Gilmer, Texas. Donna Joe, uh Vicram, South Texas. You bet. You bet. Anthony, hello. Hello. Hello. Hello, Anthony. Michael, Utah. Sean, 1:00 a.m. Uh, Zol Australia, good morning. Bruno from Miami, Florida. Silan, Muldova, 2 a.m. here. Awesome. Okay, cool, guys. Um, next question I have. What is the number one reason why you showed up to this live training? What do you want to accomplish? Um, what is the number one reason why? And what do you want to accomplish from this live training?

    Go ahead and comment that in the chat.

    Okay, we’ve got Shrea’s passive income. Christine, make money. Um, Udell income. Soul make money fast. Desa want to learn specifics. Stephanie, uh, scared to start and don’t know where to start. Got it. Brandon, success. Scott, I’m trying to grow my mortgage business and get more referrals. Oh, wow. That’s a good business to be on YouTube with. Yeah, that we’re we’re finding those types of businesses are crushing it on YouTube right now. Even commercial real estate, we have one guy doing commercial real estate right now, Brandon. Uh, I think he’s Dallas. No, Houston. Houston. Um, he is absolutely crushing it. Um but um uh of course residential is a bit better but even commercial is is doing well. Um residential is a lot better but commercial is doing doing well. Um good stuff. Abby learn the process. Anthony work independence. Monica growing retention and views so that then I can make money. Sean make a difference in the world and be self-sufficient after stay-at-home dad for 12 years. Awesome. John Ken, learn more from you. Got it. Jordan, Sun City, Arizona, I need another job opportunity. Got it. Vicram, find a profitable niche and make money.

    Lawrence, get monetized. Uh, Ashiel, channel revamp. Bruno, geodetic freedoms. Anthony, income can replace my current job. Susan, to increase my video views and grow my channel and learn how to earn money from my channel. Uh, Isaiah, find a niche that I will earn. I will enjoy Oh, sorry. Enjoy doing but also make me money so I don’t burn out. Perfect. Ally, figure out what niche to start. Brad, stabilize my income. Uh, Eva, create a YouTube channel about paper engineering. One that makes an income. John, absorb knowledge. Bill, streamline niches for my three channels. Saluan, I want to grow a YouTube channel for HVAC company software and I’m convinced the info here can help. Awesome. Teresa, I’ve been a producer and a writer and I’ve won awards in television and I can just and I just really love the whole eye concept so that I can take it to a whole another level without having all the production cost and the production time. I love it. Sounds good. I mean, three uh movies within the last few months that have been box office hits coming from YouTube. So, yeah, it’s I’m not, you know, I’m not saying you’re making movies, but it’s just, you know, good good proof of concept there. Jordan making money. Helen, earn a decent income. George, uh, knowledge to start my own channel and make money. Reena, want to retire? I’m almost 63 and I don’t have retirement savings or investments. Oliver, learn and act. Um, Jason, finish building my YouTube. Marcos, bring about world peace. Uh, Donna, build an army of scripture knowledge and passive income.

    Um, Cat, I’m a 60-year-old grandmother and looking to make more income and work from home. I’ve started a few small channels but want to learn more. Anthony, YouTube newbie, intrigued about making extra income. Sydney, understanding how it works. Best way to start advertising for my life practice and coaching programs. Uh, Garner, figure out the five to 10 most impactful strategies for launching a new multivariant personal brand channel. Awesome. Garner, very specific. Love it. You bet. Want to learn uh how to build a channel and make some money and have fun while I’m doing it. Okay. Starting over in my 50s. Want to help others in similar situations. Awesome. Okay. Want to drive uh traffic from YouTube to my ecom site. Um Mesh. I’m a nurse pivoting into clinical data analyst. Want to earn money. I’m from West Bangal, India. Need help. Awesome. Okay. Um Jason, a financial adviser and a holding company owner. Awesome. Yeah, financial adviserss are another one. They’re absolutely crushing it on YouTube right now. I call those localized type businesses where you can work with people. It’s a local business, but you can work with people in, you know, larger areas. Uh those types of businesses are absolutely crushing it. So, businesses where people fly in, for instance, like cosmetic dentistry, uh financial advisor, insurance, um those types of businesses are absolutely crushing it on YouTube. So, yeah. Awesome. All right. Uh one last question while I’m getting set up here. What is the number one problem that you’re having right now that’s getting you that’s stopping you from getting started and having success on YouTube? What is the number one problem that you’re having right now that is stopping you from having success on YouTube and getting started?

    Okay, Sean says divorce. Got it. Sean, let’s see. Oh, wow. It’s moving so fast. Okay.

    There we go. Uh DJ says coding. Reed says overanalysis. Penny says creating AI videos. Shrea, keeping the momentum. Stephanie, self-doubt. Got you. Um Udell, experience. Patrick, don’t know where to start. Jennifer, coming up with an idea to start. Monica, consistency. Jill, not knowing which niche to pick. Sean, fear of not putting something together. Brad, I have a persistent hacker. Really? Okay. Leticia, time constraints. Eva, analysis paralysis. Karina, consistency. Bruno, courage. Zel, consistency. Scott, refining scripts. Vicram, don’t know how to monetize. Caleb, direction. Karen, getting started. Craig, workflow. Um, Yafael, chaos in the family and being a caretaker. Garner, labor retention at my small business. Brandon, uh, lack of knowledge. Suluan, uh, I already I have already started, but I do not know if I’m doing it right. You need your tools to crunch it. Awesome. Okay. Mike, unsure how to monetize the skills that I have. Uh, Esther, don’t know how to record. George, overthinking. Jason, building it. JF86, picking a subject. Uh, Christopher, nobody watches my stuff. Deciding what to do. Nobody watching your stuff is not something that’s getting that’s stopping you from getting started on on YouTube, right? That that’s we’re talking about something that you control, right? Because other people watching your stuff is not something that you control, right? So, what what are the actions that you control that are stop like it’s stopping you from getting started? Uh duds, deciding what to do. I have a channel but need to get more views. YouTube banner problem. How to fix it? I’ve already started but don’t know how to do things more effectively. Okay, fair enough. Um getting started. Susan Ray, not sure what I’m doing wrong. Low views, brand new, haven’t started yet. Anthony, having a system that can reliably build the kind of channel I can do. Okay, awesome. All right, guys. Uh, let’s go ahead and jump in. Let’s go ahead and jump into it. So, it should say on the screen, how to grow and make money on YouTube in 2026 without fancy gear, without techy stuff, and without spending hours on each video, provided you use this hybrid model and follow one simple rule. Very excited to get started here. Let’s go ahead and do it. So, first of all, why you’re here today, guys, we’re going to do a poll. Okay? So, I want you to do the thumbs up thing. That’s on the bottom right of the screen. Do the thumbs up if you’re excited about one of these things. First one, getting views. Are you excited about getting views? Is that what you are here for? Is you want to get views from YouTube?

    Okay. Okay. I’m seeing, you know, fair amount of excitement here. But how about this second one? How about the second one, guys? Making money. How excited are you about actually making money?

    Okay, awesome. Because getting views is not the same as making money. And I’m I’m, you know, for years people thought these two things were the same. And I would have to spend a crazy amount of time explaining to people that you can get a lot of views and not make any money. I’m actually going to show you examples of that. But people are getting smarter and smarter about YouTube. And they’re they’re starting to realize you actually don’t need that many views to make money. We have people with just a couple hundred views making full-time incomes easily. Okay, but how about this third one? Having an impact. Go ahead and do the thumbs up thing if this is what you want to do is have an impact. Basically, creating a business that you can be proud of and helping a lot of people. Awesome. Okay, so I’m seeing a lot of thumbs up with that. That is that is excellent. Okay, now the f the reason that this one is so good having an impact is because if you have an impact, if you’re solving other people’s problems, if you’re helping other people, the views and the money are going to come as a consequence of that, right? the the views and the money are going to be there. So, this is really good. You guys are the type of people I want to work with. So, that’s awesome. Now, by the way, we are giving away free stuff uh at the end of this workshop, right? At the very end, you will get a chance to walk away with the niche validator pro, the chatgbt or the cloud AI version. Um cloud AI version is the newer and better, but which whichever one you like to use. Some people prefer chatbt. And this is one of the newest versions yet. It’s a massive upgrade over anything that we’ve put out before. And you’ll also get $61,494 worth of bonuses, but only for those who stay until the end offer. So, Mr. Beast is building an entire company to connect brands with creators. This is the biggest creator in the world, and he’s not just making videos anymore. He’s building a business around the creator economy itself. Now, why would he do that? Well, it’s because of one number buried in this article. Brands are on track to spend $43.9 billion on creators this year. That is almost double what they spent just three years ago. Okay? So, even the biggest YouTuber on the planet is making the same move that I keep talking about. He’s not chasing ad pennies. He’s going where the real money is, which is brands paying creators directly. And here’s the part that matters for you. You do not need to be Mr. beast to get a piece of that 43.9 billion. That money isn’t only going to people with 100 billion subscribers. It’s going to creators that brands actually want to work with. And brands love working with what’s known as microcreators. Okay? So, a creator with the right audience and a clear focus can land brand deals a giant entertainment channel. Uh never will, right? Because it was never about the views. It was always about getting the right views. Okay? And that’s exactly what I’m going to show you today. Now, another thing I want to mention is last year, YouTube paid out $30 billion just in AdSense alone. That means that they had to make about $60 billion from AdSense on the platform. You add the $30 billion from AdSense to this $43.9 billion the company’s paid out for sponsorships. And that’s over 73 billion that people made from YouTube just with views, just AdSense and sponsorships. Now, with the sponsorships, you know that the company has to be making it back at least 4 to 5x on that, right? So, they probably made well over $und00 billion uh on top of the the sponsorships from people actually buying stuff. Okay? And then if you look at uh on top of that is people just selling their own stuff directly. That’s where the real money’s at, right? The the real money is literally just in selling your own stuff. Um you can make way more money just in selling your own stuff. That’s what we’re we’re going to get into today. But the point is there is hundreds and hundreds of billions of dollars people are making every single year from YouTube. This is verifiable, easy to look up information. Now, one thing I always like to say is this is a maze. You start here at the top and you finish here at the bottom. And your goal is to get from start to finish as fast as you can, whatever that goal is. And most creators start with good intentions, but then they fall into the maze. they end up burnt out, overthinking, stuck in analysis paralysis with zero views and zero income and then they just give up. But actually, most people don’t even start in the first place, right? So, if you’re here watching this now, you’re already ahead of the majority of people. Now, additionally, one thing that I like to say about this maze part is anything that you’ve heard about YouTube uh YouTube outside of what I teach, chances are it’s probably you falling into the maze. Because most people go into the maze, they get lost, and they put their hands up and they’re like, “Mazekeeper, come and get me.” And getting lost in the maze is focusing on all the stuff that does not matter. Like all the YouTube coaches that have entire channels about reviewing YouTube gear when that makes maybe like a 1% difference in the success of your channel. And that is the maze. That is the reason why you don’t get results because you’re focusing on all these things that do not matter when in reality you could just focus on the few things that actually matter and actually get you results. Well, let’s just say hypothetically you go into the maze and you just navigate it perfectly. Let’s say you’re an absolute pro. Here’s the fastest way that you could get from start to finish just like this. Okay, but actually it’s not the fastest because there’s another way. It’s faster, easier, and safer. And you’re basically going around the maze. Pretty clever, right? But even this is not the fastest route because we learned at a very young age that the fastest way to go from point A to point B is a straight line. And what if I showed you a way to do that, right? do just that. Skip the maze completely and you literally just go in a straight line from start to finish straight to the results. Now, one thing I want to say about this part really quickly right here is a lot of other YouTube advice out there, I don’t think they’re purposely giving you bad advice. At least most of them aren’t purposely doing it. Maybe a few of them are. A lot of them give good advice, but they give good advice for like a gaming channel or a prank channel or something like that because there are a bunch of different types of YouTube channels out there. Okay, but I’m going to be talking about a type of YouTube channel that is the easiest to get results with. And it’s the type of YouTube channel that you can pivot to anything else later on down the line. And that is why when it comes to winning on YouTube, I have the straight line for you today so that you can get there the easiest, quickest, safest, and most comfortable way possible. And specifically, you are going to gain access to the hottest opportunity to exist in the content creation business. Now, these are the newest stats that just came out. Before they were saying that the YouTube and content creator ecosystem in general was going to be worth about $1 trillion by 2034. Now they’re saying it’s going to be worth $1.6 trillion by 2034. Right? So just 6 months later they went from $1 trillion uh projection to a $1.6 trillion projection by 2034. So it has grown that much in just the last year. The projections are just going up and up so much faster. And by 2034 or 2035, it’s going to be $2 trillion. So this is just growing at an unprecedented rate. And look at this going up and up and up while so many other things are going down. It’s harder than ever to get a job. There’s so many industries that are being disrupted. Meanwhile, content creation is just going up and up. And that is a sign. And this is one of the biggest opportunities that I want you to get access to when it comes to content creation. And I want you to do it while bypassing all the traps, the gotchas, the limitations, the barriers to entry that otherwise would lock you out, forcing you to stand on the sideline as you watch generational wealth pass you by, help us to do anything about it. And you will definitely want to take advantage of what’s happening right now in the creator economy because you are in the perfect place and time to start. And mind you, YouTube pays out billions every year, but it’s not going to lifestyle vloggers, entertainment channels anymore. And today you will be handed the key to unlock that prison cell that is keeping you trapped and away from the YouTube growth that you’ve been wanting for a very long time. Seriously, we’ve helped online businesses of course, but also coaches, freelancers, job seekers, stay-at-home parents, nineto-fs, grandpas, grandmas, agency owners, service providers, digital product sellers, failed YouTubers, medical practice owners, YouTubers getting views, struggling with monetization, uh financial adviserss, um uh law firms, lawyers, successful YouTubers who are crushing it but want to crush it even harder. people that own software companies or SAS, location specific businesses. Uh I like to call them localized businesses, people doing paid ads that want to stop doing paid ads, people doing paid ads that want to make their paid marketing two times more effective by having a YouTube presence and getting inbound leads. Uh even physical brick-andmortar business owners and even people with disabilities do this, right? So this works for almost any niche in almost any situation because we designed this type of YouTube channel to be flexible so that you can go in so many different directions. And the good news is you do not need to be a YouTuber or an influencer to win on YouTube. But to get there, I’m going to be exposing the dark side of YouTube and creators who are now slaves to the platform. So here’s an example. Boogie2988. Now, I am not trying to make fun of him at all. I actually respect him for revealing his public income, but he’s got about 4 million subs. And he revealed on a podcast tour last year that he’s only making about $44,000 a year, which is less than the average income for an American. And he is one of the hundreds of thousands of creators who are promised success through views, but views do not automatically equal money, right? Meanwhile, I work with people who get 500 views per video, and they’re making $10 million a year on YouTube. But there’s also people who get a lot of views. And there’s a lot of people in this situation and they’re not really making a lot of money because they’re doing things wrong. And seriously, I know that there’s a lot of people in this crowd that are frustrated. They’re burnt out. They’re stuck because you were promised a gold mine and yet you found nothing. You’ve been uploading videos or you’re frustrated because you can’t even get started uploading videos because you’ve been told that you need to buy this camera first or that gear first or you uh need to be really good at video editing or any of those types of things, but you basically found nothing but regret. So, let’s talk about who this is for. This is for you if you’re a total beginner who wants to finally start and not burn out. And by the way, go ahead and drop your profession in the chat. I’m curious what all of you do for a living. Because an example of a total beginner is my brother Zach. You guys might have seen him. I’ve talked about him a few times on the YouTube channel. Um, and he was a total beginner when he started on YouTube. So, I’ve got an update on him as well, but let me read these first. mortgage broker, writing teacher, software, flight dispatcher, author, recruiting, accounting director. Uh, Shane, yes, it is. Awesome. Um, retired locksmith, realtor. I own an insurance agency. Yeah, we’re seeing real realtors, insurance agencies, mortgage brokers, like like lots of different real estate related stuff. uh financial advisors, um different types of medical stuff like uh you know um uh cosmetic dentistry, uh plastic surgery, etc., etc. Those types of businesses are doing great cuz people actually fly in to see them or they work with people remotely. Um but yeah, we’re seeing a lot of those doing great. John, retired military factory worker. Adam, voiceovers, Christopher between jobs. Shrea’s math faculty. Jordan, driver. Silhouan, student at med medicine software freelancer. Student at medicine software freelancer. Um, Mike, prison officer. Bill, disabled animal rescuer. Uh, MTS Uber. Kenneth, insurance.

    Um, Pian, legal assistant parillegal. Um, Clay, jewelry maker. Moansza, cyber security analyst. Oh, yeah. We’ve had a lot of successful cyber security people come through. Land developer. Uh, Vicram. Chris, lawyer. Cat, mortuary transport. Jacob, development executive at Sony Pictures Entertainment. Nice. Um, Eva, architect. Steven, marketer. Uh, Marilyn, director of healthcare operations. Francis, I’m a Filipino martial arts instructor. Nice. Christine, insurance agency owner. Richard, dog boarding. Oliver, travel agent. Marcia, OE, test scorer. Uh, awesome. Okay, good stuff, guys. Good stuff. So my brother uh he was a total uh newbie. His profession was he came from the trades. Okay. So he was working in HVAC uh for over 30 years. Um he did like HVAC welding school. Um worked in HVAC for about 30 years. 20 of those years he had his own local HVAC business. And this is a business he is currently selling. He’s very very close to closing the business now. And part of it is because he had so much success on YouTube. So, um, basically I’m so confident in this system that I literally used it on my brother who’s in his 50s and who isn’t techsavvy and he’s never made a video in his life. And first of all, for context, I use this system to start a new channel every single year. And the reason I do that is because I want to make sure that I’m updated on what the algorithm is like for a new channel. But last year, I decided, you know what? I’m just going to make a channel for my brother instead. Because he basically came to me and he said, Shane, I’m in my 50s. My body’s starting to wear out. I need to figure out how to make money without wearing out my body. Now, like I said, he’s in the trades and he thought I was going to recommend a remote job or some type of certification. And I was like, “No, you should just start a YouTube channel.” And he was very surprised. He’s like, “Well, I’m not tech-savvy. I’m not good on camera. I’ve never made a video in my life. I’m in my 50s. No one wants to listen to a 50-year-old.” All of these excuses started popping into his head for why he couldn’t do it. And I just told him, “Just trust me, bro. Just do it. Just do what I tell you. Use our system. It’s going to work for you. And the very first video that he posted blew up and got 800,000 views. And less than one month later, 29 days later to be exact, he made $214 in a single day. That is a $78,000 year run rate. So yeah, it works for beginners even with no experience or no tech experience. Okay. And by the way, update on Zach. He just had an $18,000 month to finish his first year on YouTube. This is a record month for him. Plus, he’s getting a lot of money from affiliate marketing, you know, AdSense, etc., etc. So, he’s not just making money from AdSense, right? And that is one thing we’re going to talk about. AdSense is not the only monetization method on YouTube. There are lots of other ways where you can make more money. Sometimes you can make a hundred times more than what you make from AdSense. This is also for you if you are a faceless creator um or you want to use YouTube automation. Now, we don’t work with most types of faceless creators, okay? Okay. And the reason for that is because we find that a lot of people who want to do faceless. They want to do AI slop. You know, they just want to like spam the internet with AI slop. But if you actually want to make really high quality content, you want to use your own voice for instance, um there are ways of doing that. Okay. Um and basically Whiz is an example of this. So Whiz was one of our clients and uh when we when he first started his YouTube channel, it was totally faceless. He he wanted to remain anonymous when he first started. Okay, so this is what he did. He had these little cartoon characters. Um and basically with these little cartoon character, it’s like a cartoon that represents you and um uh that’s one of the important things. He used his own voice for one and for two he had a cartoon character that represented him. Okay, so that is really really important to know here. Um because the reason for that is because people feel like they’re talking to another person. Okay, that is that is the thing that you really want. You want to capture that feeling cuz that’s what YouTube is all about. YouTube is all about connecting with other people. If people wanted high production quality or car, you know, cartoons, that kind of thing, they would turn on the TV, they would turn on Netflix. That is not why people go to YouTube. People go to YouTube because they want to generally speaking connect with other people that they can relate to. Okay. So, it’s very important uh that you you know do this the right way if you are going to do a faceless channel. Now, he actually had an agency. He made it to seven figures a year u from this from YouTube from his personal brand. And he got almost all of his clients either directly or indirectly from his YouTube channel. He said that almost all of his clients went through his YouTube channel. So they might have originated from other sources but then they watched his YouTube channel and that’s what helped prospects make the decision to buy from him. Okay. So he runs an agency. That’s what he does. He’s an agency guy and um yeah he built his faceless channel in a very specific way where you can do that um because again he used the hybrid personal brand method which means you have a lot of options in the future and we’ll get into how to do that. Right? So if you’re making a faceless or a YouTube automation channel you need to listen to this because it’s very important you do this the right way. If you don’t do it the right way, you’re going to have a ceiling in terms of how much money you can make. And you’re also not going to have options in the future. This is also for you if you’re a business owner, freelancer, or coach who wants inbound clients without paid ads. So, an example of that would be Davis. Davis’s sales went up by 400% and after working with me, he’s making 100K per month. And basically, Davis owned a portfolio of companies. He was spending about 20 hours a week on just one of his companies, which was a company where he helped people become management consultants. and just one YouTube channel and one company and that is obviously not sustainable. But eventually he outsourced everything on his channel to the point where he’s not even recording the videos anymore and he has other people recording the videos and now he spends zero hours a week on his channel. Even though he has multiple channels and for multiple different companies, he is spending zero hours a week. So if you’re a business owner, you’re super busy, you have a portfolio, you can actually have other people record the videos for you and you can have a system that just takes care of everything. and we help people with that as well. This is also for you if you want to network so that you can land high-paying jobs, find career opportunities, become an authority in your niche by standing out with your YouTube channel. So, here’s a really good example of networking. Uh Josh basically just started making really useful videos for on his channel for people in the IT and cyber security industry. He talked about how to get better jobs, which certifications are good to take, what skills to learn that are valuable in the job market, etc., etc. and he was able to go from making less than $1,000 a month when we first started working with them on his channel to actually getting offers from Fortune50 companies, including companies that are part of Fang, like Facebook, Apple, Amazon, Netflix, and Google, right? These are some of the biggest and most prestigious companies in the world, where it’s literally harder to get into a fang company than it is to get into Harvard or Yale. And usually, you have to apply to these jobs for years before you get accepted, and you have to be really good, too. Um, but the companies were reaching out to him. So he got an offer from sever several different fang companies and ended up going with one of them for his dream job where he got to travel the world. He lived in Japan and he was working a remote job making multiple six figures a year. But then the YouTube channel kept going 5,000 a month then 10,000 a month then 30,000 a month and eventually he scaled all the way to $186,000 in a single month using my strategies. And of course he quit his dream job because it just didn’t make sense for him at that point. So, I like his example because it goes over every single stage. Just getting started as a beginner, using it to become an authority in his niche, for networking to get his dream job, starting a side hustle, making a little bit of money on the side, starting a full-time business, making 10 to 30K per month, and then of course scaling his business. But you might be thinking, “But Shane, if it’s easy, then why do most people fail?” Well, it’s because they believe in these myths. One, you need to be an influencer. Two, you have to show your face and have a fancy camera and have a great set with the best lighting and the best lenses and the best editing, etc., etc., and the best production value, right? No, you don’t. Okay. Three, it takes 40 hours to create one video. Or four, you have to endure the process because it takes a long time to succeed on YouTube. These are some of the biggest myths that people believe in that actually cause them to fail. Now, the last one specifically, the reason that most people think it takes a long time to succeed on YouTube is because they think they need a big channel that has lots of subscribers and lots of views to make money. If you choose the right niche, you do not need a big channel. So, just as an example, when I started my second channel, Shane Humus, the content growth engine, we actually made $30,000 in the first month starting that channel. And a lot of that money was made before we even got 1,000 subscribers as well. And these are the myths that people believe in that stop them from having success on YouTube. But in reality, one of the biggest reasons that you failed is because before today, you lacked the leverage to invade this soon-to-be trillion dollar opportunity. And I’m going to help you mine this opportunity so that we can grow rich together fast. First though, who am I? My name is Shane. I’m an ex-farmarmacist. I have a 1.5 million subscriber YouTube channel. You can see it down here. And I’ve helped over 20 businesses get to 100K per month on YouTube from scratch. I’ve helped another 20 businesses that were already profitable. I helped them scale and it’s probably triple that amount now. And I’m also industry recognized as an expert on growing and making money from YouTube for businesses. Here’s a company that I worked with. They liked working with me so much that I actually got equity in the company. Um, this is course careers right here and and that’s because I gave so much value to the company and we were able to over 30x the amount of money that they made. With that being said, this is a startup and I usually like to work with individuals. And one reason I like to work with individuals is because you guys remind me of myself. So, let me go ahead and get into my story. This is me working as a pharmacist for 15 hour shifts. Um, but before this, I came from a very poor background. I lived in section 8 housing. I lived in trailer parks. I was even homeless at one point. And I did what society told me to do. I went to college. I got a doctorate. I became a pharmacist. I got a good job, right? Six figure job, uh, making $10,000 plus dollars a month. And I also had to take out a lot of money in student loan debt to get there. I went over $300,000 in student loan debt. And the thing is, when I was poor, I had a lot of time, but I didn’t have any money. So, I couldn’t really do anything besides play video games or whatever. But when I became middle class working as a pharmacist, I didn’t have both time or money because I was spending all of my time working and all of my money paying down my student loan debt. So, it was kind of an out of the frying pan into the fryer type moment. And it was really a terrible situation because I started as a pharmacist right before the pandemic hit. And just to emphasize how bad this was, we got robbed three times in a six-month period. Here’s kind of a screenshot from one of the videos of us getting robbed. Um, so overall, I can’t describe how stressed, how depressed, how burnt out, how anxious I was in this situation because on top of everything else, I, you know, being super stressed and burnt out and anxious, I was literally in fear of my physical safety. Okay? And like many people out there, I started wondering, wait a minute, is the stuff that society told me to do actually a good idea. Maybe I made a mistake. And because of that, I tried just about every side hustle out there to make money, right? Shopify, Amazon FBA, SMMA, coaching, consulting, courses, digital products, uh, real estate, white labeling, SEO, flipping websites, flipping physical products, etc., etc. Here’s one of them that I tried. It’s called the booty kit. It’s basically an atome workout thing so that you can work out your booty. Um, I tried selling this on, I think, Shopify, drop shipping, as well as Amazon FBA and I pretty much failed at almost all of them, right? I couldn’t make any of these sustainable. And a lot of it had to do with me having ADHD and just always trying a bunch of different things. But, as you can see, my bank account was constantly very close to $0. But YouTube was different than all of these other side hustles, right? See, all the side hustles that I tried, they actually work, but they only work if you have traffic, aka views. if you don’t have views, it’s kind of like trying to sell something without having a store. Uh it’s almost impossible to sell. And so I realized one that I really enjoyed YouTube, but two, I realized that I could make any of these other business models work if I just focused on YouTube and getting views. And because of that, I gave YouTube another shot. And after I tried it again, you know, um at that time, I was basically living in a house of seven guys. I was an entrepreneur house. And I was kind of, you know, networking a bit and getting introduced to different entrepreneurs. And one of the guys I met was Sam. and he started a wedding photography business and he barely even knew English. He came from Lebanon, okay? And he started his YouTube channel where he was making about 10 to 20,000 a month from his 10,000 subscriber YouTube channel and his wedding photography business. And he was doing wedding photography in Las Vegas and on the West Coast. And you know, I don’t know everything about his situation, but basically I don’t think he could actually get a job. So he literally had to make money um from a business in an alternative way cuz he just couldn’t get a job. Um, before this I, you know, I’d spent some time in LA. I’d met influencers who have millions of followers or millions of subscribers and they were not making money. Okay? And I was like, Sam, how are you making so much money from YouTube even though you have a small channel? And he showed me what a proper monetization method looked like. He showed me how I could monetize a channel without having that many views. And he additionally taught me how to make money from a small channel, like 10,000 to 20,000 subscribers. But I took it to the next level to the point where there are some channels that we work with that only have a few thousand subscribers and they are making seven figures a year because there are some niches where you’re talking to an affluent audience and you can get a couple hundred views and make $10,000 from a video. So this is where I found the secret formula of YouTube success where everyone else was not talking about it. And so basically I started posting videos. And just to put this in perspective, I have gotten a lot of views. 6 million, 1.2 2 million, 1.7 million views, 4.3 million views. I know how to play the views game with the best of them in the educational space. But this video right here, just as an example, the most useless degrees, this is my first ever breakout video, and it got over 4 million views. But in its whole lifetime, it made about $30,000 from AdSense because it wasn’t making money outside of AdSense. And I’ve had several videos just last month, for instance, that got less than 10,000 views, but made $40 to $50,000 from all income streams. And there are several videos with less than 10,000 views that made as much or more than this video as well. So that’s kind of the secret, right? Um because listen, it is way easier for me to reproduce this video that got 8.8,000 views and in 6 months made $48,000 than for me to reproduce this video that got 4.3 million views over 6 years and made $31,000. Right? This video is way more reproducible. And chances are by the time this video gets to 6 years, it’s probably going to make double that amount of money. Okay? So, it is way easier for me to reproduce a video like this than a video like this, you know? Um, it’s hard to get 4 million views. It’s not that hard to get 8,000 views. And just to show you guys proof, here’s how much I made about three Septembers ago. So, this was before I ever taught anybody how to do YouTube, right? This was three Septeers ago. This is when I was teaching people uh how to get remote jobs and helping people get remote jobs. Um, and I made about $283,000. So, that was a multi-sefigure a year business. Then, uh, two Septeers ago, I made about $325,000. Then, this last September, I made over a million, uh, in a single month, right? And I’m not saying this to try to make people jealous. I’m just showing you the receipts so that you know that I know what I’m talking about because there’s a lot of YouTube coaches out there that are just coaches, coaching coaches. They’ve never actually started a successful YouTube channel themselves and they’re basically cosplaying as successful YouTubers and they’re trying to teach you how to be successful at YouTube when they’ve never actually started a successful YouTube channel outside of just teaching YouTube. Okay? But me, I actually started a successful YouTube channel and YouTube business before I ever started teaching other people how to do it. I didn’t teach a single person. And the craziest thing is I did all of this while being able to travel the world and only having to work four hours a week. So here’s a picture of me in Tokyo at the famous crossing square. I’m going back there here in a few weeks. Uh this is the famous crossing square with the Tokyo cab driver in the background. Um this is a picture of me in Singapore. I was there just a few weeks ago. This is a picture of me in Vancouver, British Columbia. Um whale watching just off of uh the uh San Juan Islands. Okay. And I only had to work four hours a week. Okay. Now, I choose to work more than that sometimes because I genuinely enjoy YouTube and I enjoy helping people with YouTube. So, I choose to work more than that. But the whole point is I only have to work four hours a week. There’s only four hours a week that I absolutely have to do to maintain my channel. In many cases, I’ve actually gone as much as 2 months at a time without working at all, spending zero hours on my business. So, I have an online business where I don’t have to have any in-person employees or anything like that. I can travel the world. I can do whatever I want. And my business just keeps going up and up and up. But something kept bothering me because I got the life that I dreamed of. But once in a while, I would create a video and post it on YouTube, uh, just telling people what I was doing, right? Because I was seeing YouTube advice online, and I would watch and I’d be like, hm, I don’t really think this works for most people. Maybe it would work for a gaming channel, but it wouldn’t work for most channels. And so, I decided once every 6 months, once every year, I would post a video about what I was doing on my YouTube channel and what was working for me. And every time I do that, I would get comments, emails, DMs. Everyone would reach out to me being like, “Hey, can you coach me? Can you help me grow my YouTube channel?” and I turned them all down because I was too busy or I just didn’t really want to do coaching or I thought maybe it works for my niche but it doesn’t work for other people’s niches. So, I turned them down but I felt bad about it and I shrugged it off for years until one day one of my friends reached out to me who had a YouTube channel. They were struggling financially. Okay, he was really struggling financially and I was like he asked me if I could help him if I could coach him uh to help him monetize his channel correctly. And I was like, you know what? I’ll do it. And since I’m going to coach you, I’m also going to coach all these other people because it doesn’t take that much extra time if you’re coaching many people at once. Okay? And so I reached out to a bunch of these people. And I decided to do a cohort where I worked with a bunch of them who had reached out to me. And it was a very diverse set of people. professional truck driver for 28 years, a fresh graduate engineering student, a current engineering student, an Amazon FBA uh business owner, uh a coach, a freelancer, a failed YouTuber, a successful YouTuber who was crushing it but wanted to crush it harder, a content creator for 11 years who wanted to shift over to YouTube, a tech salesperson, a girl in cyber security, a coach, an agency owner, an online service provider, a fitness dude, a finance guy, a realtor, a physical brick-and-mortar business owner, just on and on. The point is, they were all different. Some had YouTube experience, others had zero knowledge of how YouTube works. And then we applied the exact same format that I found to be working on my YouTube channel. Same YouTube format, same proven way of making thumbnails, titles, and intros, same strategy for coming up with winning video ideas. And of course, a little bit of tweaking because every single niche is a little bit different. Uh there are a lot of underlying principles, but they all do need a little bit of tweaking. And the craziest thing is every single one of them blew up. And the best part is they all got their version of rich by helping other people live better lives. And that’s the thing that made me feel so happy, right? Because I can only have so much impact with my channel, but I got to help other people have impact with their channels. Okay? And they were able to impact lots and lots of other people, millions of people, hundreds of millions with their YouTube channels. And so I was basically spreading my impact to so many other people. And they all got their version of rich by helping other people live better lives. And that is the first time in my entire life where I thought I could do this for the rest of my life. I could literally just do this exact thing that I’m doing for the rest of my life. Okay. So, I guess I found my passion, right? Um, but I, you know, that is the first time in my life that I ever felt that way because I was able to help so many other people and impact such a massive amount of people and it just it just made me incredibly happy. And the reason for that is because I taught them how to make a very specific type of content, which is educational niche content. And the channels that are winning today are educational niche channels because they are helping other people solve problems. In fact, educational channels make 10 to 20 times more money and there are more opportunities for every 1,000 views than any other type of content. And in fact, in the very first month that we launched my second channel, we were able to make about $1,736 per 1,000 views. So it got about 24,000 views in the first month right off the bat and it made about $42,000. So that’s about $1,736 per 1,000 views. And one thing you have to understand about educational content is the world is changing so fast right now that the traditional education system like colleges and and schools, it just can’t keep up. It’s just impossible. Like you can’t come out with a degree on something so specific and so that’s moving so fast. Uh even stuff like digital marketing, you know, I’m a digital marketing expert and the stuff that they teach in schools is outdated. It’s usually 5 to 10 years old. Uh never mind AI and stuff like that that’s moving way faster. And so this is where the unbelievable opportunity for you is to literally just be the person who teaches other people how to solve their problems on YouTube, right? It’s an incredible opportunity. And that’s why if you choose the right niche, you can make $1,736 per 1,000 views and make $42,000 in the first month, right? So, just to put this in perspective, entertainment channels in general make about $1 to $3 per 1,000 views. So, if I started an entertainment channel, I would have made somewhere between $24 to $73 if I got $24,000 views. Uh, like my second channel, right? So, right here, Mr. Beast style channel, $1 to $3 per 1,000 views. I would have made about 24 to 73, right? If I got 24,000 views. Um, then you’ve got educational channel. So, this is like a typical education channel, right? mass market education channel that you know a channel that doesn’t really know how to monetize that well. Let’s just say they’re making $20 per 10,000 views. If they would have got have gotten those 24,000 views, they would have made about $484. So better, but still not as much as you want, right? Then you’ve got my second channel, which is a niche education channel or a niche authority channel, and it’s monetized properly, and it made uh with 24,000 views, $1,736 per 1,000 views, and it made $42,000. Okay? And uh by the way, this is from all money, not just from AdSense. So ads, AdSense are the ads that pop up on your channel, but these are from all different methods of monetization. And so with educational content, right off the bat, you’re making like 10 times more money than entertainment content. But there is a better type of educational content, which is niche educational content, where you are properly monetizing your channel. Now, you can do mass market educational channels and properly monetize your content, and you can still make a heck of a lot more money than this. For instance, on my main channel, Shane Hummus, of course, that is a mass market channel with 1.5 million subscribers, and that channel makes more or less around $400 per 1,000 views on average. So, still makes a ton of money. You can make way more money if you do niche educational content. And that is what I recommend that people start off with is just talking about a very niche subject and doing that first. And I’m going to get into that here in a moment because you don’t always have to stay with a niche subject if you set up your channel with the hybrid personal brand method, right? Which is something that we’ll talk about here in a moment. So, let me give you some examples of niche educational content. So, this is the organic chemistry tutor. He makes about $36 to $100,000 a month on his channel according to view stats. Um, and that is just from AdSense alone. So, those are just the ads that pop up on his channel. If he is monetizing properly, he’s making a heck of a lot more money than that. So, let’s just say very conservatively, he’s making $10 to $20 per 1,000 views. Remember, I said that uh educational content like mass market educational content, it typically makes about $20 per 1,000 views. So, let’s be very conservative here and say $10 to $20 per 1,000 views. In that case, he’s probably making about 136 to $273,000 a month from his channel. Now, the interesting thing is he didn’t upload in 62 days and he was still making that much money from his channel. It says right here, 62 days. So, he uploads like one video every two months, three months, whatever. And he’s absolutely crushing it, making tons and tons of money. And that is because he has been uploading these videos for a long time. And each video is like a little soldier that’s only job is to just go out, get views, get subscribers, and make him money forever. It never sleeps. It never takes a day off, and it just goes out, and it’ll make him money for the next 10, 20, who knows how long, many years, right? Uh, we still get views from videos that we posted 6 years ago. Uh, I’ve gotten a client worth six figures from a video that I posted 5 years ago. Okay, so who knows how long these videos are just going to continue getting him views and making him money. Here’s another one. Scotty Kilmer. He’s in his 70s and he makes content helping people save money on their cars. Now, one of the greatest things about him, he is quite entertaining. So, when I say make educational content, I’m not saying by any means that you cannot be entertaining. You could definitely be entertaining. And Scotty Kilmer is hilarious if you’ve ever watched him. Think back to your favorite teacher in school. Maybe your favorite professor, your favorite teacher in school. Chances are they weren’t super dry and boring. They were a little bit entertaining, but they’re still teaching educational content. That’s the point, right? You’re educating people. You’re solving their problems, but that doesn’t mean you have to be dry and boring. You can still be entertaining. Um, but he basically made $24 million from YouTube. Okay, it says right here, $24 million. And he even said in an interview that he made more in one month from YouTube than he made in his entire 40-year career as a mechanic. And basically what he does is he just helps people pick the right cars, maintain their cars, fix their cars, and help them different car related products. Right? That is his whole channel. And basically this stuff is dead simple for him. And that is one thing that I want to point out with the organic chemistry tutor as well. This stuff is dead simple for him. He is just talking about stuff that he is already tutoring people on. and he just did the same thing but he recorded it with a camera and posted it online. Now this is one of the craziest stories physics walla he came from a small village in India and his first videos were in his parents’ basement and you can see how bad they are blurred face etc but it didn’t matter he started making videos about these standardized tests in India and the standardized tests are incredibly important for your future so it’s kind of like the ACT and the SAT for the US and he just made videos about these certifications and standardized tests and the first thing he was talking about uh was physics and then he expanded to other stuff okay so let’s just say this uh let’s just put this in perspective right how specific this physics India standardized test only very specific how he was tutoring people and what type of content he was making and he started making these videos and then he kept going and he kept growing and then he launched a company that’s now worth $5.2 billion from his YouTube channel called PhysicsWala it is an education app and it’s now worth $5.2 2 billion and it all started in his parents’ basement just making physics videos and he is probably richer than Mr. Beast now and that is the power of educational content because you are solving people’s problems. So now I’m going to hand you the formula for how to do all this and there is a secret formula and these are the most important things. So if I don’t talk about it it’s because it’s not important. So first thing you need is a niche hypothesis statement. Now, generally speaking, there are three niches out there that are the most profitable niches, and that is health, wealth, and relationships. With that being said, there are a lot of other niches outside of that, and you can make money in all of those niches as well. But generally speaking, if you’re confused about what niche to go into, you should be going into health, wealth, or relationships. And the reason for that is because almost everybody in the entire world has a problem in one or more of those three areas. Now, just want to make this very clear. You do not have to go into health, wealth, or relationships. What I’m saying is if you haven’t selected your niche yet, that is where you should look is in health, wealth, or relationships. Okay? And then what you need to go ahead and do is what uh is make what’s known as a niche hypothesis statement. Okay? So, what you want to do is you want to pick a niche. And by the way, while we’re doing this, go ahead and comment what you think your niche is, right? Just comment what your niche is in the comment section. And I’ll probably read a few of them while we’re going through this. And I’m actually going to do this to illustrate something as well. So, comment what you think your niche is. All right? in in the chat. Okay. Um All right. We’ve got uh estate planning, HVAC companies, geopolitical risk, relationship, business continuity, in-home sales, home buyer education, wellness for over 50s and 60s. Uh no clue. All good. Firearms. Stephen. Uh remove AI confusion for CEOs. That’s a great niche. Love that. Cats. Uh food science. Health and wellness. I teach math to IGSE. Uh all all kinds of state boards. Uh training tech support HVAC. Uh Kira Kuragami. Um I help burned out women educate and grow through YouTube. Uh Daniel health and fitness. Deborah money. Okay. Awesome. So um I know a lot of you are probably going to end up saying one or two word answers which is exactly what happened right when you commented to your niche. And I don’t blame you for that. But that’s actually incorrect. And let me show you why. The niche hypothesis statement goes like this. You select a market or what people would traditionally call a niche, but I call it a market. And then you pick one specific problem that people in that market have. Okay? And you need to pick a specific problem, right? Because they might have 20 different problems, but you pick one problem the market has. Okay? And then you find a specific solution for that one problem. And that is your niche. So it’s going to look like this. I help X do Y or I help X overcome Y. Now the Z part, don’t even worry about that right now. The Z is something that we can do later on. Okay, but the important part is that you establish that there’s a market of people and they have a problem that isn’t being solved very well and you help them solve that problem and that is the foundation of how markets work. Markets are all about solving problems efficiently. And if you want to give value and receive money for giving that value, then you really just want to focus on solving as many problems for people as you possibly can, which is what YouTube allows you to do in mass. Okay, so let’s uh go ahead and give you a few examples of how to do this. Okay, so I’m going to use the accounting market specifically because for some reason I’ve worked with a lot of accountants. My partner is an accountant as well. So I’m going to use the accounting market, right? So, I’m going to show you a bunch of different levels. And all these people, by the way, are either people that are my clients, I’ve worked with them, or they’re business owners that I’ve met that are currently uh crushing it on YouTube. Okay? So, I’m not making any of these up. These are all real people. Additionally, I’m going to show you five, but if I wanted to, I could do 50. I could probably do 500, maybe even 5,000 if you if you do enough subniches. Okay? But just for the sake of time, I’m going to show you five and I’m going to show you to illustrate how different these are. Okay? So at the very first level is just teaching students basic accounting concepts. So that is a more of a mass market channel but it’s teaching people and typically students who are taking an accounting class right now basic accounting concepts. So it’s kind of like the organic chemistry tutor but for accounting and this person is making really good money probably pretty close to seven figures a year and they’ve been doing it for a very long time and they’re making really good money right and the people who are in this market would be interested in a video like what is a P&L? Uh now let’s go to the second level which is accounting specifically for existing accounting students or someone who just graduated with an accounting degree. So they’ve got an accounting degree or they’re trying to pass standardized tests or pass certifications and that would be like physics walla but for accounting right because he was helping people pass standardized tests in certifications. So physics walla but for accounting and in the US typically. So, that’s the second one. And I know for a fact that in this that this this niche is making multiple seven figures a year. And people who are in this market would be interested in a video like how to become a CPA. Okay. Third level, people helping land their first entry-level accounting job. And that’s another business owner that I know and they’re making multiple seven figures a year. Okay. So, so who’s in the market there, right? People who just graduated with an accounting degree and they’re trying to get their first ever entry- level job. That is the market. And that is going to be different than all of these other ones, right? It is totally different content than all these other ones. People who are trying to refresh their knowledge on accounting do not want to get an accounting job. Okay? Totally different content. And people who are in this market would be interested in a video like how to land a bookkeeping job. Fourth level, the people who are already accountants and they’re making $50 to $100,000 per year and they want to become what’s known as a financial controller. So this is one of my clients as well. He helps people who are already accountants making $50 to $100,000 per year become a financial controller who can make 200 or even $300,000 a year. So this is totally different types of content when you’re targeting that audience, right? And people who are in this market would be interested in a video like how to become a financial controller. And then finally the fifth level which is basically helping businesses hire accountants. So hiring and placing accountants in businesses. So in that particular case, it’s either accounting businesses or big businesses that need accountants and they’re actually trying to hire or place really good accountants in their businesses. So even though you’re talking about accounting topics, it’s still a completely different audience and the type of content you’re going to make is going to be completely different for all of these different ones. So I hope you understand why it’s so important to have a niche hypothesis statement, right? Even though it’s all the same niche, it’s all accounting, right? Because if I would have asked you if you’re in one of these niches, hey, what’s your niche? you probably would have said, “Oh, it’s accounting.” Right? Just like all these people for instance that commented their niche and they probably said something relatively short like plants education or marriage relationship or teaching etc. And that is why you need to have a niche hypothesis statement. If you don’t know your niche hypothesis statement, you have lost from the beginning. It is so important to have a proper niche hypothesis statement. Now, did you find that valuable? Give a thumbs up if you thought that was valuable and if you want the niche validator both in the chat GBT version as well as the cloud version that we’re going to be giving out here in a short while to help you dial in your niche hypothesis statement. Okay, awesome. Love it. Love to see it. And people are in this market would be interested in a video like how to hire the best accountants just as an example, right? Which is totally different than someone who’s interested in, you know, uh learning basic accounting, right? Uh in a in a in a class. Okay, so now I’m going to be handing you the blue pill to make you invincible as a creator because once you have your niche down, you’re already way better than most people. But you need more than that, okay? You need what’s known as a hybrid personal brand because you probably know what personal branding is. But when you mix personal branding with the correct niche and our YouTube automation AI system, you have what’s known as a hybrid personal brand. And one thing you need to understand is I just told you that you have to have a niche hypothesis statement. But I’m going to say something that’s probably going to confuse you a little bit and that is you are the niche. Okay? So many people get this wrong. They think their niche is what makes them successful as an educational channel content creator. But when you have a hybrid personal brand, you are the niche. So yes, you are going to start extremely niche with the iHel X2 Y. But once you get traction, when you build your channel in the correct way, when you’re building a hybrid personal brand, you can then easily pivot to something else if you want to. So, let me show you an example of that. Alex Herozi, when he first started posting on YouTube 4 years ago, his niche hypothesis statement was, I help gyms do marketing and sales. And now he can talk about anything. Now, obviously, he’s really well known for his business stuff with all the different types of businesses, but now he can talk about his unconventional diet. This is why you’re not happy. He talks about his book launches. He talks about how to stop wasting time and yeah, I mean now he can talk about just about anything that he wants. But he started niche and if he tried to do that from the beginning, he probably wouldn’t have had nearly as much success as he has right now. But he started off being the king of a puddle. Then he became the king of a small pond. Then he became the king of a lake and then the king of a river and then the king of a sea and then the king of the ocean. Right? So you got to start small. You have to start niche. But don’t make your channel in such a way where you can’t expand it. Because that’s how we teach people to do it with the hybrid personal brand method. Because when you create a hybrid personal brand, there are so many different ways that you can monetize your channel. And there’s so many different directions that you can go both in terms of the content and the topics as well as how you make money with your channel. So AdSense, affiliate marketing, sponsorships, job opportunities, networking, memberships, SAS, high ticket offers. Alex Moszi, for instance, opened up one of the rarest types of businesses on earth known as a family office, which is basically like an investment fund, right? He’s got a portfolio of companies that he invests in, and he got most of his deal flow from YouTube. So, he’s making money from eight and nine figure business owners and making millions from each one all the way down to doing a SAS that cost a few dollars a month. You could do memberships, you could do courses, digital products, and so many other things, even physical products. The point is all of these different business models work when you have a hybrid personal brand traffic and you have distribution people that actually know, like, and trust you on your channel because you built it with the hybrid personal brand method and you help them solve a bunch of their problems. So, they see you as an authority. And not only that, you can even sell the brand or step down as the face of the brand in some cases. So, let me just give you an example of that, right? Doug Demiro uh launched his website called carsandbids.com and he sold it for $80 million, right? And the reason he was able to do that is because of the fact that he built his channel with the hybrid personal brand method. His channel, his personal brand is the golden goose. He can lay eggs from the golden goose and sell the eggs, but the golden goose you need to keep. You need to keep that golden goose. Never sell the golden goose, right? And this is a secret way of building your channel that makes it so much easier to do whatever you want in the future. Because none of us can predict the future. But what we can do is build a channel that can evolve as things change over time. As we evolve, as the market evolves, as things happen in the world, you can build a channel that where it can evolve so it has the ultimate advantage, which is that it can adapt to changing circumstances, right? Because you know obviously the markets change. Everybody knows that. But also you might change 3 to 5 years from now. You might be a totally different person than you are now. And you want your business and your YouTube channel and your personal brand to be able to grow and evolve as you grow and evolve as well. And if you think this only applies to big educational channels, well, that’s just wrong. Here’s some examples of our clients. So, this worked for Walkin. So, Wen was 18 years old when we first started working with him. He was a freshman in college and he was making all kinds of random content on study skills, productivity content, all kinds of stuff like that. and he was making content on engineering as well because he was basically a business and engineering double major and he wasn’t making any money, right? But we basically sat down, we hashed out his niche and it became very clear that he should help foreign exchange students get into elite universities in the US. Why? Because he was a foreign exchange student that got into an elite university in the US. So, we really dialed in his offer and the very first month that he launched or very close to the very first month, he made about $80,000. And he actually got so many client requests that he was oversubscribed. He had to stop making YouTube videos and weightless customers trying to give him money, trying to buy his program. He had to be like, “No, you can’t give me money.” Okay? Because he just had too many people that wanted to work with him immediately. Now, that is a pretty good place to be as an 18-year-old business owner, right? And we joked around that he was making more money than the president of his university, which he was, which is pretty crazy to think about as a freshman. Right? Here’s another example. Richard, we helped him go from making almost no money whatsoever on YouTube and also being one of the busiest clients that I’ve ever worked with, right? He was a product manager at a Fortune50 company and he was basically working like 60, 80 hours a week. He had a brand new baby. He had lots of investments like real estate investment properties, etc. All kinds of different stuff like that. Just a super, super busy guy. and he was basically able to grow his channel to $12,000 in a single month despite the fact that he probably could only work about 2 hours a month. So yeah, I’m very proud of this case study because it was quite difficult to get him results because he could only work a couple hours a month. And another example, Guy, this is uh a really cool story right now. Guy is actually disabled and his goal before he worked with us was just to make one to 2,000 extra dollars a month. Um and he wanted to uh cuz he was close to retirement and that would make a big difference in his quality of life in retirement. Okay. So, he’s disabled and he has what’s known as tendis, which is constant ringing in the ears. And this is something that a lot of veterans have. My dad has it as well. He’s a veteran and it’s really debilitating. And so, he made this channel where his goal was to just make a couple extra thousand a month in retirement. And that was his version of rich, right? So, he made $1,500 a month with less than 500 subscribers, 446 to be exact. And this was a brand deal for $1,500 a month. And now he’s getting close to like 10,000 subscribers. So, he’s crushing it. And this was before he made even, you know, got to 500 subscribers, never mind 1,000 subscribers, he was already making $1,500 a month. And this is ongoing $1,500 a month. And yeah, now he’s got over 10,000 subscribers, he’s crushing it even more, making a lot more than that. But the point is, he got there with a tiny channel. Um, so if you don’t think you can make money with a tiny channel, you absolutely can. Um, and this was his actual brand deal, which is an ongoing sponsorship. So, one simple rule, guys, to make this happen. Start simple and scale fast. You do not need a fancy camera, fancy editing, a million-doll studio, high production quality, or top tier video editing skills. Uh, and you definitely do not need to make highly entertaining content. Here’s what you do need, and these are the most important things by far. Viral video ideas. This is the most important thing after dialing in your niche, getting the right views with your video ideas. Then, you need titles and thumbnails to get clicks. Then you need an effective intro for video retention. And then you need to just deliver value to your audience. And that’s a lot easier to do than people think. Now, let’s talk about the most important out of all those things, and that is the viral video ideas. So, I got this from Carl Icon. He’s in the finance industry, and basically, you would find businesses that were making a ton of money despite being ran terribly. And I took that idea from the finance industry because I think some of the smartest people in the world work in finance. And I applied it to YouTube. So, I was the first person to ever do this. So, what I did is I found YouTube videos that had a lot of views despite not having that many subscribers. That’s important. It’s important that they don’t have that many subscribers because uh if they have a big channel, then they probably have a big audience of people that are going to watch just about anything that they put out, right? So, you find a video that has lots of views despite coming from a channel that doesn’t have that many subscribers and despite the video itself being either mediocre or preferably bad. Okay, so the thumbnail, the title, the intro, they were either mediocre or preferably bad. So, just as an example, this guy right here, you can see his face is bl his face is blurry. The door is in better focus than his face. His audio was really bad. Um, and he was drunkenly ranting for 25 minutes about college degrees while literally drinking beers. This is a Coke Zero, but he was literally drinking beers, right? And yet, despite this video being objectively bad, he still got 760,000 views and probably all of his subscribers came from this video. Okay? And this was the thumbnail, by the way, right here. Then what you do is you steal the idea of the video and you make a better version of the video. So, the most worthless college majors. You could change the keyword a little bit or just keep the same keyword and boom, the most useless degrees. That’s what I did. The point is, you just keep the title very similar. You change it slightly, make a better video, and boom, that’s what happens. So, I made a better video with almost the same title, right? The most useless degrees versus the most worthless college majors. Very similar. I made a better thumbnail, a better video, and it blew up and got millions of views. And this is what I’ve been doing for the last 6 years now, guys. This is my secret. The icon method is the most powerful way to do it. Now, there’s a bit more to it, but that is the gist. So, once you get these down and you join our program, finding the video ideas will never be an issue for you ever again. The icon method is incredibly powerful. There’s lots of different ways of doing it as well. You can do it just in terms of views, but you can also do it in terms of how much revenue you think the video is going to make because we kind of know how much revenue our videos make. So, you can use the icon method for revenue instead of views. You can also use it with other platforms, right? So, there’s other versions of it, but uh once you get this down, the icon method, finding the video ideas will never be an issue for you ever again, and it is the most important thing by far. Then once you get this down, giving the value will also never be an issue for you ever again because it’ll be very easy for you to write scripts and give value and make very good videos quickly. Okay? Because your videos will do all of the work for you after you posted them. Now, let’s talk about what it takes for you to be a part of this YouTube gold mine with no daily uploads if you don’t want to, no complicated editing, no being on camera if you don’t want to, no expensive gear or software, no burnout or desk work, no algorithm chasing, and no spending months without monetization. Instead, you’ll get an ondemand content plan tailored to you, a hybrid model that works with or without your face, proven video templates, plus AI assisted scripts, automated systems for publishing and repurposing, one day per month content workflow, scalable monetization from day one, and top tier coaching behind sevenigure YouTube brands. Introducing the content growth engine. This is the easiest and fastest way to grow a cash printing YouTube channel, even if you’re not an influencer. So, click the link in the chat to get access to this early because there’s a few bonuses that we’re only giving people that get this early access to and you’ll have a higher chance of getting the bonuses if you actually book a call now or you can type in go.shinhome.com/coaching or you can scan the QR code with your phone. So, here’s what you get access to inside of CGE. And by the way, guys, uh we’re going to go over these bonuses here. You’ll get all of these when you join the program, but some of them you don’t even need to join the program to get. And by the way, who’s booking a call right now? Go ahead and comment in the chat if you’re booking a call because we have a special bonus for you. First, we are going to help you pick a profitable niche. We are specialists on this. We have spent thousands of hours perfecting this. We have a bunch of YouTube coaches with 100K subscriber plaques, the best of the best that will help you find and pick the best niche. And that niche will be in between being the most profitable one where it’s sustainable, it’s profitable, and also something that you’re passionate about. Next is the mindset section. You might be having a hard time starting even though you just have to make videos consistently to be successful on YouTube. And I get it. It sounds easy, but it’s hard to put your mind into making videos or having success on YouTube. And you probably would have started YouTube or you would have had success on YouTube already if it was that easy, right? Even business owners face mindset issues. This module helps with that. This helps remove all the overthinking, all the imposter syndrome, and it helps you take action fast. And this is actually when I ask people, these first two are usually their favorite modules, right? The side the the niche selection. Uh people are just obsessed with this and then also the mindset section. And even though a lot of people really don’t think that they need the core foundations, like they don’t need mindset help, uh a lot of people end up loving these, right? And another thing I’ll say about this is it’s going to help you understand that if you follow our system, success is inevitable. Right? If you follow the system, you will understand that when you go through this on a deep, logical, emotional, almost on a spiritual level that if you follow the system, success is inevitable. For some people, like my brother, it was the very first video that he posted. For some people, it takes 5, 10, 15, 20 videos. But if you follow the system, success is inevitable. And you will understand that on a logical level when you go through this. Number three, the content genesis system. Um, this is going to show you how to find viral video ideas in your niche that will have a higher chance of getting views and going viral. Okay? And in my opinion, this is my favorite module because I think this is the most valuable one out of all of them. This is where the secret is right here. Finding the right video ideas. Okay. Um, the link should be dropped again. I don’t think anybody dropped the link. Yeah. Yeah, the link should be dropped again. Um, yeah, this is the secret right here. Finding the right video ideas, right? I personally think this is the most valuable module out of all of them. The next is the holy trifecta where we go over how you can make your thumbnail, your title, and your intro to package the viral video idea to have the highest chances of success for your video to get views. So, all three need to be good and you want to make sure that they are congruent as well. Next is the script writing alchemy system. This is where we help you write scripts with the help of AI to get your writing time down to less than 1 hour per video or in many cases way less than that. So, just as an example, my brother, who got his video to 800,000 views, only spent about 15 minutes on the script. In fact, it was less than 15 minutes. And we show you the exact same system. Next is the viral video creation system where we actually turn things into a system. And this is what makes it possible to only work one or two hours a week on your YouTube channel and in some cases, if you’re a very busy business owner, zero hours a week or a couple hours a month. And this is done with systems and our own in-house AI that we only allow our clients to use. So, the niche validator that we’re going to be dropping here in a minute is just a fraction of a sample of the power of the AI systems that we give to our clients. And we have systems for every problem that you could imagine on YouTube. And lastly is the cash code system. This is where we actually make money out of the views that you’re getting, even if you’re not getting a lot of views. Now, it’s very, very important that you’re actually monetizing correctly. And that is just a taste of what’s inside of the community, right? You don’t just get one or two tools. You get the entire arsenal. custom GPTs, Cloud Skills, all built for one thing, growing and monetizing your channel. We’re working on an in-house software that we’re thinking about potentially releasing, but we might just keep it for our in-house clients cuz it’s super powerful and it gives them a massive advantage. And our clients are getting updates in real time and they’re loving it, right? And the tools that we don’t build ourselves, we tell you exactly which ones are worth your time. Gemini, Descript, Pixels, and much more. So whether you run Chachi or Cloud, there is a tool sitting there ready for you. No guessing, no piecing it together yourself. This is just a taste of what’s waiting inside. Um, and this is just a peak inside of our community, by the way. Real wins coming in every single day. One member hit 10,000 subscribers and 1 million views, grew 5x in a few months. Another finally landed their first 10 leads straight from YouTube. Another one just closed $75,000 a year contract inbound straight off the platform. Uh, someone else made their first $10,000 on YouTube. Someone else 4xed their subscriber count in a single month. Another person crossed 5,000 subscribers. Uh, another person made 39,600 views on a channel with just 800 subscribers. So, this isn’t a course that you buy and forget about. This is a community of people winning together every single day. And these are just a few. And this is what our group looks like on any given day. And this is the exact system that’s responsible for 0 to 10K in just 18 days. Here’s an example. Bro, I just hit my first 10K within 18 days of watch. I don’t even have 1K subs yet. This is nuts. Thank you, man. This is the system that’s responsible for these results as well. Usually there’s a shaded graph right under your videos. Uh if you’re familiar with YouTube Analytics, uh just as an example, this graph that you see below uh is what you usually would see. And the shaded graph is basically the typical views a video would get uh in a person’s channel. Now, for this particular person, there’s a shaded graph there. Uh but it’s so small that it’s actually blending in with the x-axis. And this person had been posting on YouTube for well over 5 years, and they have never had a single video get over 100,000 views. Then they worked with us and one of their first videos got over 180,000. Right? So this is what a normal graph looks like. There was we thought this was weird because there was no shaded part. And we realized there is one. It’s just so low it blends in with the x-axis. And that is because their very first video got over 180,000 views after working with us. And they never had a video touch even close to that before then. All right. It was so much bigger than anything they had ever posted before that you couldn’t even see the shaded part. And all these people are crushing it as well. Right. This person uh made $1,000 pretty much in their first month after working with us. Got 8,000 subscribers. That’s just from AdSense alone, too. Uh they were making money from other things, too. This person is literally number one in their niche. We are the king makers and queen makers in many different niches out there. We’ve made lots of people kings and queens of their respected niche, you know, category kings as we call it. Um and yeah, this person is number one in a pretty competitive niche. Pretty competitive niche. Now, this isn’t some like tiny little micro niche. This is a very competitive niche and they are literally number one making 50,000 a month and 8 million views a month just from AdSense alone for the 50,000. Making multiple eight figures a year from that niche. Uh, this person right here booked five calls immediately and closed four of them. Never took sales calls before in their life. Booked five calls, closed four of them um immediately. That’s an 80% close rate. That is if you’re not familiar with with sales. 80% close rate is extremely high. Uh typically new people are going to close like 10% of their calls if they’re lucky, right? So yeah, absolutely crushing it. Um Bill transformed his YouTube channel’s uh impact among 177K subs and he’s now making 30K plus per month at the time of this testimonial. He actually made over 70,000 in a single month. But basically, he said, “Shane helped me out with his keyword research, titles, and thumbnails, as well as turning my YouTube channel into a business.” So, he turned his YouTube channel from a liability, sucking up all of his time, to a business that works for him while having a full-time job. And Sean was stuck making $30,000 a month. Um, I’m sorry. Oh, no, no, no. You better book now. Yeah, but guys, you better book now. Just put it on there, guys. You better book now cuz the the spots are filling up. Um, but uh but yeah, he said Shane knows what he’s doing. Uh, so Sean went from 30,000 a month to 500,000 a month and he said Shane knows what he’s doing. He’s not another fake guru. Uh, his program goes beyond just tactics, teaching you how to build a personal brand and master the back-end systems that actually drive revenue, right? Um, he’s another category king. He’s number one in his niche, which is again a pretty big niche, KDP. Now, by the way, a lot of people that work with us do not want to go public, right? They don’t they don’t want to do a public testimonial because they don’t want competitors. Okay? So, I’m showing the pe you the people that were nice enough to give public testimonials. There’s tons of people that that don’t want to give public testimonials because they want they don’t want competitors, right? Which is which is understandable. Um, next is Cheryl. She helps people through spiritual awakenings and before joining us, um, and the reason I’m saying that is because I worked with some of the biggest YouTubers, like big, you know, brand names that you you would know by firstname basis probably, but they don’t want to know, right? They don’t want people to know. Um, but anyways, meet Cheryl. She helps people through spiritual awakenings. And before joining us, she was stuck under 50 subscribers for years with a great message, but no strategy. And we gave her the system, the content strategy, the titles, and the thumbnail frameworks, and the hands-on coaching. And she immediately grew to 9,000 plus subscribers and got monetized in months. One video hit 128,000 views. And now she’s landing brand deals. This is what happens when you stop guessing and start following our system. And she’s making money. She’s making good money now. Just like Jyn here, she’s a healthcare professional who recently joined our program. She was in the exact same situation as you are right now just a couple months ago. And before joining us, she was a complete beginner. She had no idea what to make, no experience, and in her own words, she said, “I hadn’t dipped my toe into YouTube yet. And now she has 22,000 subscribers, and her channel got 2.4 million views already. And two of her videos already went to over 500,000 views. These are numbers that most creators chase for view for years, right? Um, and she built it all on what she already knew, which is healthcare navigation. This is stuff that she was literally already telling her patients on a day-to-day basis all the time, like what to do, like how to navigate the US health care system, which is a very messy, convoluted system. I would know. I used to be a pharmacist. Very messy, very convoluted system. She’s just telling her patients how to navigate that system on a day-to-day basis. And guess what? She just did it on webcam. literally just used her webcam, recorded on her laptop, uploaded those videos, and now she’s making a full-time income from YouTube, right? More than her job. Okay, so if you’re a healthcare professional, there is so much amazing content that could be made in the healthcare arena. Um, and this could be for you, right? So, this is what happens when you follow the system. So, I know all kinds of different people who work in the YouTube industry. I basically know all the different types of coaches, the consultants, the agencies, etc. And I’ll kind of tell you how this industry works, right? Usually the highest paid people, the best of the best work with big corporations and so they’re going to be doing like seven figure contracts a year. And in many cases working with these big companies, it’s at least a six-figure contract. Okay? Even for just like a short duration, it’s going to be a six-figure contract. Um the the second highest tier of what you can offer is probably what’s known as a build and release offer. And this is uh I have some friends that do this basically, and they’re some of the very few people besides that are actually really good at YouTube and they really know what they’re doing, right? and they charge $300,000 to do a build and release software. And this is basically where they work with like seven, eight, nine figure companies and they build out their YouTube channel for the first three to six months. They hire everybody for the channel. They built it out and they figure out exactly how the channel works and then they release it to them once everything is working and they’ve hired the team out to them. Okay? And they charge usually about $300,000 to do that. Now, I myself have attended four masterminds that are $50,000. Last year I was in two. This year I’m in another two. And these are extremely valuable, too. I learned tons of stuff from these masterminds, and I pass it down to you guys. So, there’s lots of YouTube masterminds out there that are like $50,000, and it would easily cost you 35,000 mistakes if you were to try to do it on your own. And 25,000 is more than a fair investment to make to even get one for the knowledge contained in the content growth engine. But a special offer only for this workshop when you book a call within the next 24 hours. We’re offering something that we’ve never offered before. and we’re going to talk about some of these bonuses that we’re giving out. And by the way, gosh.com/coaching, click the link in the chat or or scan this QR code. We are I’ve gotten a word running out of spots. Um, but we might be able to open up some spots here in a minute, right? But bonus one, this is a big one. You get a one-on-one YouTube niche growth session call with me personally. Now, let me tell you why this matters. When I was starting out, I had a mentor named Sam. He was doing YouTube for his wedding photography business. And Sam showed me how to actually make money on YouTube, even with a small channel. And that changed everything for me. That is when I started earning big, not because I got lucky, but because someone who already figured it out showed me the ropes. And that one relationship changed the entire direction of my channel. And that is exactly what this call is, right? Everything that I have learned building a channel to 1.5 million subs and over 1 million in revenue applied d applied directly to your niche, your channel, and your situation. So this is worth $12,000 easily. But this is only for five of the first people who sign up within the next 24 hours. So go to goshomes.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. This is what the actual coaching looks like. It’ll be right here in my kitchen. Um I can already see people signing up as I’m talking. So definitely do not wait on this one. Go to goshomes.com/coaching. Scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. Bonus two is the 302 title maker AI. This is easily worth $8,500. Now, if you sat down to find winning ideas yourself, researching what’s working, checking view count, studying channels, you’re looking at weeks minimum, probably months of trial and error, and still most people will pick the wrong ideas. And you just can’t do that because ideas are so important. But if you hire somebody to do it, a real content strategist who actually knows YouTube, they really know what they’re doing, you’re going to be paying $7,500 easily, okay? And that’s just a onetime engagement. So, we built a custom AI tool that helps you find proven video ideas in your niche in about 30 seconds. And this isn’t generic AI spitting out random titles. It’s built on the icon method. It finds what’s already working and it hands you a better version of this. The titles, the hooks, the angles, all of it. And you get it both ways. A chatbt version and a Claw AI version. So, whatever AI you already use, you’re covered. This is included as a bonus. So, go to go.sh.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Here’s what it actually looks like. And whether you use Chat GPT or Claude, we built it for both. You give it a video that’s already performing. It reverse engineers why it works. And then it hands you five highconverting titles and hooks for your channel. No guessing, no staring at a blank screen. The winning ideas are already out there. This tool just finds them for you. So go to go.shenhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus three is the 30 secondond script writer. This is worth $7,000. This is the ultimate content creation tool. uh you tell it the goal of your video to inform, to entertain, to sell uh or to inspire. And it turns your spoken ideas and emphasis on the spoken part. I highly recommend you just talk to it. Never type, right? Just talk to it. Um into a polished, attention-grabbing YouTube script. It captures your tone, your style, your voice, so that it actually sounds like you. And just like that last one, you get it both ways. Chat GPT or Claude, whatever you are to use. If you hire a professional content team to do this, a script writer, a content strategist, someone who understands YouTube, you’re going to be paying $3 to $5,000 a month minimum. This does it all in seconds. So, go to go.inhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. This is what it looks like. You say your script idea out loud and it turns it into a ready toreord script. No typing, no clicking. You just talk. And you can even pick your vibe. friendly, high energy, calm, conversational, authority, whatever fits your channel. It matches your tone so that the script sounds like you, not like a not like a robot, right? So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Um, and yeah, bonus four is the high converting thumbnail swipe file. Um, this is worth $10,000 easily. Your thumbnail is the first thing that people see before the title, before the hook, before anything. If your thumbnail doesn’t stop the scroll, nobody clicks, nobody watches, doesn’t matter how good your video is, right? But if you hired a thumbnail designer who actually knows YouTube, you’re going to be paying $1,500 a month minimum easily. And that’s for a part-timer, right? That’s $18,000 a year. And they might make a thumbnail that works for gaming, but not for educational content. And there’s a real psychology behind attracting the right views, not just attracting views. Okay? There’s a real psychology behind that um for every thumbnail. And this is my entire thumbnail system. The guide, the templates, the swipe file, the framework. You get it all as a bonus. So go to go.streamhomes.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. This is what’s inside. On the left, you get the full guide, the secret of creating viral thumbnails, the psychology behind why certain thumbnails get clicks and others don’t. On the right is the thumbnail vault. Fully editable templates in Canva. You just click file, make a copy, and it’s yours. And you see those annotations? That is me breaking down exactly why each thumbnail works, where the faces go, how big the head is, the rule of thirds, the spacing, all of it explained. So, you’re not just getting templates, you’re learning the framework so that you can build your own. So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus five is the 2026 Creator Rolodex. This is worth $6,997, and this is my personal list of recommended editors, tools, and services that we actually use. Not stuff I Googled, not random recommendations. These exact people and tools, uh, these are the exact people and tools that my team relies on uh, every single day to run a channel with over 1.5 million subscribers. So, do you need an editor? It’s in here. You need a thumbnail designer, it’s in here. You need tools for scripting, SEO, analytics, automations, uh, analyt like tracking your clicks, whatever you need to do on YouTube, it’s all in here. Okay? Most creators waste months and thousands of dollars testing the wrong people and the wrong tools beind before they find ones that actually work. Right? This skips all of this. You get the cheat sheet on day one. So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching. Scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. Bonus six is the YouTube niche accelerator. 0 to 100K subs stepbyep worth $4,997. This is the full playbook. Everything that you need from day one to 100K subscribers. How to pick your niche using cheat codes that actually work. How to build uh how to build a hybrid personal brand so you’re never stuck in one topic. How to find video ideas using the icon method. How to nail uh how to nail your title, thumbnail, and intro. Uh what I call the holy trifecta, and how to monetize beyond just AdSense, affiliate marketing, sponsorships, digital products, coaching, all of it. Um and this is specifically designed to get you from 0 to 1k subs subscribers, then 1k to 10k, and then 10k to 100k because what you do at those different levels is different. There even there’s even certain cheat codes that you can use to get your subscribers faster and grow faster. Okay, so most people spend years figuring this stuff out on their own. This lays it all out step by step so you skip straight to the part where you start making money. And I’m not just telling you what to do. There are videos walking you through inside showing you exactly how to do it right. So go to go.shenhome.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Now, for those of you who stay until the end, we made something special for you. This is the niche profitability maximizer AI. And this one is different from all of the other bonuses. This is an AI tool that takes your niche and maps out exactly how to make money from it. Okay? Not just AdSense. We’re talking affiliate deals, digital products, coaching offers, uh service products, uh uh agency products, sponsorships, the full picture. Because here’s the thing that most people get wrong. They pick a niche and then they hope the money figures itself out later. That is backwards. This tool shows you the money map before you even record your first video. So you know exactly what you’re building towards from day one. And like every tool that we give you, you get it in both chatbt and cloud version, whatever you already use. Now, here’s the catch. This bonus is worth $12,000 and you get it for showing up to the call that you booked. That’s it. You book the call, you show up, and you get it. So go to go.shm.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. The second you show up to the call you booked, you get instant access on the spot. Just ask for it. And whether you like Chachi PT or Cloud, you can use it either way. This isn’t some watered down freebie. It’s the same tool that we use inside of the content growth engine, and it is yours for life. So go to go.namos.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in that chat. Bonus eight is the 90-day YouTube Accelerator money back guarantee. Now, this one is priceless. You got 90 days. You follow the program, you do the work, you show up, and if it does not work, you get your money back. Okay? We have a very, very low refund rate and a very high satisfaction rate. We sent out a survey to our clients asking them if they thought that they got an ROI from the program, a return on investment, and 91% of them said that they did. Okay, that is absurdly high, especially in a space where less than 10% of people, usually even less than 5% of people even finish the courses that they buy. Right? Usually people buy courses, they don’t even finish them. And yet, we have a 91% uh ROI rate. 91% of people say that they got a return on investment. Uh and there’s a reason for that because this is not just a course. Yes, there is some very valuable information. There’s amazing course material, uh amazing resources as well. We have awesome software, awesome AI, um just great templates, etc. But it’s the one-on-one coaching and it’s the group element that makes this special. Okay? And that is why we’re very happy to do a 90-day YouTube Accelerator money back guarantee. We’re very confident that if you follow the steps that we line out that you are going to be happy with the program and you are not going to uh request a refund. Okay? So, that is why we’re able to do this cuz we’re so confident in the results that we’ve gotten and we have a 91% satisfaction rate. Right? So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching. Scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. So, let’s add this up. Eight bonuses. Total value $61,494. Now, remember bonus one, the one-on-one session with me personally, that is only for five of the first people who sign up today. Once the spots are gone, they are gone. And bonus seven, the niche profitability maximizer AI. You only get that if you book a call and actually show up to it. That’s it. Everything else is included free when you join. Now, this workshop special is only available for the next 24 hours. And after that, these bonuses go away. This exact package at this exact price with all eight bonuses, you will not see it again. Okay? And let me clear something up really quick because I get this question every single time. The 24 hours is for booking the call, not for attending it. So, if you book right now and the next open slot on my calendar is 3 days from now or even next week, that is totally fine, okay? You’re still locked in. You still get every single one of these bonuses. You just have to schedule the call within the next 24 hours. So, if you’ve been going back and forth on this, now is the time to move. Go to go.shenhome.com/coaching or scan the QR code right now. Book your free strategy call. We’ll figure out if we’re a good fit to work together or not. Worst case, you get on the call, you get some clarity on your niche, you get a lot of value out of the call, and you walk away with a plan. No pressure, no hard cell, but if it’s the right fit, we go to work. So go to go-inhom.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. And one last thing, and this is important, once you book, you will get two emails, one from Kalanley, one from the consultant that you booked uh with. Okay? Uh both are going to be titled CGE MasterClass call. Okay? So, if you don’t see them, if you booked, if you see the calendar, and you booked a call, and then you don’t see those emails, it is, I promise you 100%, I guarantee you, it is still in your email. It’s just going to be in the all mail folder, the promotions folder, the spam, or the junk mail, right? It’s called different things on different uh email providers, you know, whether it’s Yahoo, Outlook, Gmail, etc. It’s called slightly different things, but it’s in one of those folders, right? Look in all mail, look in spam, look in promotions, etc., etc. Okay? Sometimes they hide in there instead of your main inbox. And those emails have your call details. So find them and open them and make sure you read them and go through those, right? Uh very important you do that. Okay. Um and with that being said, uh I’m going to go ahead and take some questions. So let’s go ahead and uh take some questions here, guys. Um I’m going to scroll down to the bottom. I do apologize if you ask questions before. I won’t be able to scroll up to the top, but yeah. go.coaching. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat, guys. Um, okay. Yes, the call is free, guys. So, yes, the the call is free. Um, it’s a totally free call. Um, I will say you are applying to work with us. Okay. The call is valuable, but you are applying to work with us. Okay? So, we only accept about 18% of people who apply. We also only allow a limited amount of people into the program at once because it is an intensive one-on-one program and we simply just can only onboard so many people at once, right? So, um just keep that in mind, but you are applying to uh to work with us when you when you book that call. Um you get uh so I’m not going to explain the bonuses. I’m going to explain it one more time and that’s it. Okay. Uh this bonus, the one-on-one YouTube niche growth session with me, that is for five of the first people who sign up. is randomized, but the sooner you sign up, the higher the chance you have to get it. Okay? So, if you’re watching this right now, you are still super early cuz once we send out like the replay and stuff, that’s when most people end up signing up. Okay? So, $12,000 uh 1,000 YouTube niche growth session with me. I do pre-work, we do the niche growth session together, then I do postwork, and I follow up with you on as well. Okay? So, it is one-on-one coaching directly with me. Next is the niche profitability maximizer AI. You get this just for showing up to the call. Okay? You just got to ask. You get it for showing up. They’ll give it to you. All the other ones you uh you get when you join the program. Okay? So, I will hopefully that is uh made very clear. Um yes. And the question about how much the coaching is. Okay. So, we always have different people at different levels that work with us. You know, I have worked with companies where we were very intimately involved with the company. we help them with their entire social media strategy. Um, and you know, course crews for instance, right? I I got equity in that company. So, we do have sometimes like big companies that want to work with us and we’re talking like sometimes we’ve worked with 10 figure companies um on their social media strategy. So, in that particular case, that’s usually going to be seven figures. Okay? That’s going to be a seven figure contract for us to work together. All right? So there’s always a few people out there like a six-figure contract at least, but if it’s ongoing for years, it’s going to end up being seven figures. So we always have a few people out there that are like marketing managers, CMOs, etc. for big companies. Um, so that’s that’s what that is. Now, the reason that’s so much is because they want us to do a lot. They want us to do a lot of done for you stuff. They want us to hire like find source the best people, hire them for their company. They often want us to go into their company and train people uh their entire department, make the SOPs, make the systems, etc., etc. So, of course, you know, we have to charge a lot for that, right? Then you’ve got multi6, seven, and eight figure businesses. Um, typically these types of businesses want us to sometimes hire people for them, but it’s typically like a video editor from the Philippines or something like that. Um, and uh they do want us sometimes to do done for you work for them. So, they want us to just do it for them sometimes. And they want there’s just there’s just different things they want help with. They want help with monetization systems, processes, just streamlining things. They’re usually very busy and they just want to get their YouTube content done and grow their channel in a very uh uh short period of time. They don’t want to have to spend that much time, right? So, in that particular case, for those types of companies, depending on whether they want done for you work or just us to help them with it, it’s going to range anywhere from about 12 to $60,000. Okay? Then if you just want us to teach you how to fish, right, just a program, which is super valuable, by the way, just teaching you how to fish instead of fishing for you, that program is going to be about $9,800. There is a little bit of done for you components, but mostly it’s just us teaching you, that’s going to be about $9,800 or $1,000 a month. Okay? So, I’m totally transparent about the pricing. Uh, you know, we do have in-house payment plans. If we think you’re a good niche, you think we’re a good fit to work with us, we have in-house payment plans. we can get it down to $1,000 or even less than $1,000 with that. But this is an intensive one-on-one coaching. It’s for 6 months. Uh we have 15 people that we hired on the team to make this happen for you. That’s why uh we get such incredibly good results. And so of course we do have to charge a bit of money, right? 9,800. We did actually charge 6,000 for a long time. Um we raised the prices. Okay, we raised it to 9,800 because we just had way too much demand. It was also it’s really hard to deliver a good coaching program for only $6,000. So, we raised it to $9,800. And to be honest with you, with all the updates and the upgrades that we have, we’re going to be raising it soon. So, you definitely want to get in now. People thought I was kidding when I said we’re going to raise it to 9,800. I’m not. And we’re probably going to raise it to 12,000 here pretty soon. Okay. So, um just just saying you get in now while you still can. Um okay. Um Troy, what were some of the reasons that the refunds were requested? Yeah, absolutely. So, one of the guys I I can think, you know, off the top of my head, he was a great guy. Uh he was a um uh product manager and um great guy, but he just got fired like a couple days after he started the program, you know, so he needed the money, right? So, like he’s like, “I’m so sorry, but I have to request a refund. I’ll I’ll try to, you know, do it again in the future um after I get get back on my feet.” But he got fired like a couple days after the program. thing things like this happen, right? It happens. You get busy, you get fired, you go through a divorce, like what whatever, right? Like life circumstances happen. And uh that those are usually the reasons why people don’t get results is like stuff outside of u what we can control. Patrick, how could I know this will work for me? Um you can’t know. You can’t know this will work for you. If if uh there is no sure things in life, I I don’t I don’t know what what you mean by that question. Even what do do you want like a crystal ball? Like what do you mean? How can you be sure that it’ll those will work for you? I’ve shown you an abundance of proof that it works. I’ve shown you example after example after example. I will say one thing that’ll probably help you make that decision is if you look on the thank you page. So after you book a call, you’ll see on the thank you page, there’s a bunch of people who we’ve helped get results for. Those are just a fraction of the people we’ve helped get results for. I’ve helped a lot of other people that want to remain anonymous um because they don’t want people copying them, right? So I think that might help you. Um, but yeah, if you if you don’t think like if you’re not convinced yet or at least interested enough to book a call um at this point, then I I don’t know what to tell you. Like there’s just there’s just a ridiculous amount of abundant amount of evidence and information showing that it’ll work for you. Makesh sir, I’m watching your revenue from webinar. I’ve tried to book several times. I’m not able to book. Yeah, we only work with people from uh first world countries. mash. Um, people from other countries just generally speaking, they just don’t have the disposable income to work with us. Um, so that that might that’s probably why. So I think it just automatically geoblocks you. I apologize, but hey, just enjoy the free content. Enjoy our free resources. It works even better um in India, but it just like obviously it’s not going to make as much money. Um, but it it works even better in less developed markets, right? So you can you can get results just with our free stuff. Um, Stephen, how many people at once? Uh, very very low amount. Very. Do you basically go in with a cohort? Desa, can you talk about Patreon? What is the financial potential? Patreon can be really good. Um, certain niches, of course. Go. Scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. There’s certain niches, of course, uh, that work better on Patreon, but, uh, yeah, I’ve seen people make 100,000 a month or more on Patreon.

    I personally recommend school. I like school better. Uh there’s some niches where Patreon is nice, but Patreon kind of gives the connotation that you’re, how do I say, like you’re donating money to them, whereas school is like I’m going to give you value and if you want to support the channel, you can as well. Um but you’re Patreon is almost like asking for charity. That’s the vibe that it gives, you know. Um so it’s not not as effective. Tiffany, can YouTube also be beneficial for introverts? Oh, of course. I would say most of the successful YouTubers I’ve met are introverts. You don’t have to be extroverted to talk to a camera, right? You really don’t. Most of the successful YouTubers I’ve met are introverts. Um, Tina, what are the most important factors you look for when evaluating candidates? Yeah, great question. So we typically try to work with people like first of all you want to make educational content that actually helps other people solve problems right? So we typically look for people who are experts of some capacity. You don’t have to be like the number one expert in the world but you want to you want to be an expert at something some capacity. And and the weirdest thing is in many cases you could be an expert at something in terms of like just problems that you’ve had in your life. So, let’s just say you’ve had terrible migraines and you figured out how to make the migraines better or something like that or you had really bad brain fog and you figured out how to how to make the brain fog better and have more energy, right? Um, you could be an, you know, that that makes you an expert because you probably spend a lot of time figuring out how to solve that problem, right? So, a lot of the time it comes from problems. But, uh, people that are experts in some capacity, right? Even if you’re just like a five out of 10, um, you’re an expert and you want to help other people solve problems. We do occasionally work with people who kind of want to just like share their journey of like document in public and share their journey of uh becoming an expert. That does work too in certain niches, but the big thing is we want to make sure that you are uh someone who’s going to give value to the world and help people solve problems. We don’t really want to work with entertainment channels. Um it’s way harder to make an entertainment channel grow. It’s way harder to monetize it. It takes way higher skill level. Um and it’s just way harder to get results with an entertainment channel. So, we typically don’t want to work with entertainment channels. Um, we typically don’t want to work with people who want to make AI slop content. Um, that kind of thing and just other other stuff like that. Uh, we work with a lot of professionals. We work with a lot of people who have good jobs. We work with a lot of, you know, in the medical industry or tech industry or business. We work with a lot of people who have businesses, right? So, they’re business owners. Um, we work with a lot of people who are very high up in certain companies, right? So, those are the types of things we look for. We basically just want to make sure that you have the best chances of success before we join let you join the program and give you the guarantee. Um, John, what is the percentage of people who make money with this versus the people who don’t? It’s impossible to track that. It’s literally impossible to track, but what we did do is we sent out a survey where we asked people if they felt like they got an ROI from the program and 91% of them said yes, uh, we feel like we got an ROI. So that 91% uh survey right Paul who will be working with us a USA crew or person or is it overseas USA crew or people from first world countries? We do have support staff from overseas. Uh but all the people that you will be working with one-on-one have 100,000 subscriber plaques. Almost all of them are from the USA. We have one guy from Canada. Um also he literally sold a YouTube software company. The level of talent that we have on our team, okay, is insane. We are working with people who literally sold already sold their own YouTube software companies, okay, and of course they have a successful YouTube channel and blah blah blah, right? So, um yeah, this is why we have to charge 9,800 because we are you’re working with the absolute best of the best. Um Peter, how long did you work as a pharmacist and who did you start looking for other streams of income? I worked as a pharmacist for about three years or so. Um so right after graduating um I worked for worked as a pharmacist through the pandemic too. I started in 2019 and I worked through the pandemic until about 2022. Um

    and you asked like who uh who did you start looking for other streams of income? Um I I’ll give a lot of credit to Sam Ovens. Uh his stuff was great. Tony Robbins I think is pretty good. I definitely for motivation. Um yeah, those are those are two of the big ones. And then of course Sam, my men my mentor that I talked about who initially showed me how to do it. I think you know obviously Sam’s isn’t Sam uh not Sam Ovens but Sam my my other mentor, the wedding photography guy. Obviously he’s not as good at business as Tony Robbins or Sam Ovenans. But the thing is is when you get to work with somebody one-on-one, it’s just this magical experience, right? So, he was able to help me because I just I could see it right in front of me. Like, this is possible. I could see it right in front of me. So, yeah. Go. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat. And it’s kind of like getting private tutoring versus just being a member in a class full of 300 people. Like, which one do you think you’re going to learn faster from? The private tutoring or being in a class full of like 300 people? Probably the private tutoring, right? Um Denise, how do we know if we are selected as one of the first five? Uh we will let you know. We will let you know. Uh you can just ask your uh your coach, your CSM. Chris, I saw the email from the consultant, but not from Calendarly. As long as you got one of them, you should be good. Um but yeah, it should hopefully it’ll show up in Calendarly and and show up on your uh uh in your in your email there. Uh Reena, should a faceless channel always have some sort of avatar avatar representing me? Yes. either a cartoon character, yeah, or an avatar, something like that. If so, should it be a hyperrealistic avatar or an animated avatar? I think animated is better because people are going to know that it’s fake. Um, no matter how good the avatar is, people are going to know that it’s fake. Okay. So, you might as well just make an animated avatar. So, it’s make you just make it obvious that it’s fake, right? Um, I record the audio myself, but I don’t record my face. Yeah, that is an option. That is exactly what I I showed you before, Whiz of Ecom. That’s exactly what he did. and uh worked really well for him. He made it to seven figures. Um yeah, that if you’re going to do Faceless, that’s the way to do it. Justin, Shane, I have a question. Do you know any person, by the way, I don’t recommend doing Faceless for most people, but if you are going to do it, that’s the way to do it. Uh Justin, Shane, I do have a question. Uh do you know any person that do YouTube’s sports influence that get up subscribers and make money? I’m I think you’re talking about sports. Yes, there’s tons and tons of people who talk about sports that make money. Uh you can do it in a somewhat educational way as well. Um you know, just because something is an entertaining entertainment niche doesn’t mean you can’t make educational content, right? Um but yeah, uh yeah, definitely.

    Sean, my appointment tomorrow. Can’t come soon enough. Awesome, Sean. Love to hear it. Good stuff. Can’t wait. JF, I have a police dash cam body cam channel where I narrate what’s happening during chases and police incidents. Is that niche oversaturated and am I wasting my time to even try and build it? Or could I make this into an educational channel for aspiring police officers? I love that idea. That’s what I was just going to suggest to you, JF. Uh, would this be a better question for the call I’ve just booked? Yeah, for sure it’ll be a better question for the call because they can ask you questions, they can get context, you can kind of go back and forth. With that being said, I like the direction that you’re going here. Okay. I really like the direction that you’re going. I don’t know if police officer specifically is the way to go, but maybe just like self-defense, like self-defense information or something like that, right? Uh could be that police officer would be the way to go, but you’d have to figure out how to monetize that. Um it would probably be some sort of maybe training academy or something along those lines. Uh but you yeah, you’d have to figure out how to monetize that properly. Um, but yeah, I like the direction you’re going. You got to work out the details a little bit, but I actually really like that because that makes it educational content that that turns it from just, you know, mind, you know, entertainment to to education. Um, Adam, where do most students stall out in the program? Not attempting YouTube on their own and quit, but the ones that ask for refunds, etc. Usually, it’s like a personal issue. Like, usually that’s what it is. It’s like a p some kind of personal issue, like I said before. Um, and that’s where they end up stalling out. they just they just can’t do it because of personal issues. Something pops up in their life and and that’s where they end up selling out. Um yeah, that’s the typical reason. Dan JF, use dry humor to stand out? Yeah, I I like it. I like it. Reena,

    in addition to the YouTube advice, do the consultants advise about other sources of monetization? Yes, they do. One of our consultants, like I said, literally sold a YouTube software, like he had an exit of a of a YouTube software company. So yes, we definitely can uh help you with the monetization side. Sean GF, I’m a retired police captain. If you approach it with an educational spin, I think it will do very well and is highly needed. They crap. The crap we see youngans do nowadays is insane. Yeah, for sure. I like that idea. I like it. Um Denise, I prefer call over video. Uh all good, Denise. Uh Nigel, what about those of us that had the call within the last 24 hours? Do we get the bonuses? Yes, you you will grandfather in in the program, Patrick. Just hard for me to trust have been burned. Sorry. Yeah, I mean, hey, Patrick, I get it. Like, I bought a bunch of courses and coaching programs and some of them were good, some of them were not that good. Um, but at the end of the day, that’s the reason why I’m here right now is I I bought coaching programs and I got that one-on-one mentoring from people in coaching. Um, so I totally get it. Go. Guys, scan the QR code, click the link in the chat. Um, Susie, are you moving to using Claude more than Chat GBT? Yes, Claude is the best for content creation. Chat GBT is still good at very it’s it’s better at very specific things, but overall, if I could only use one tool without a doubt, no doubt in my mind, it would be Claude. No doubt. John, hi Shane, I keep referring your CG system to people I see on YouTube. Love it. Love to hear it, John. Awesome. Joy, have you taken on anyone who has completely no current YouTube channel yet, just a niche idea? Yes. In fact, I’d say a lot of people are like that. Yeah, they haven’t had a YouTube channel yet, and we help them start their channel the correct way. We teach them the right habits as well, so they don’t have to unlearn things. Yeah, that’s totally fine. Dan, that’s where I am. Awesome, Dan. Yep. Yeah, totally. Esther, I don’t have money but have a lucrative healthcare niche. How can you help and I can pay later? We don’t do any sort of like uh business type thing if we don’t do anything any sort of thing like that. Um so it’s pretty obvious if you think about why um you need to have skin in the game, right? You have to have skin in the game in order to get results. If you don’t have skin in the game, you’re not going to try and you’re not going to get results. That’s why you haven’t got results yet, right? Um, if we were to partner with somebody, why wouldn’t I just one start my own channel to to do if I’m just going to do all the work to start my own channel and do it myself like another channel or partner with someone who would be a lot easier to get results for someone who already has a big YouTube channel, right? So, we don’t do the partnership thing. It just doesn’t make sense. That would be us fishing for you. And again, if we’re going to fish for you, why wouldn’t we just do that, right? We’d have to charge a heck of a lot more um for it to make sense. We are teaching you how to fish. Okay? You have to understand this distinction. We’re teaching you how to fish. We’re not fishing for you here. We’re teaching you how to fish. Okay? So, that is how you can do it for yourself and you can um many many people have done it and they’ve had lots of success. Um so, yeah, that’s that’s why we we don’t do that. With that being said, I mean, we kind of do it in so far as we let you start for a very low amount and we have a 90-day money back guarantee, right? So, we let you start for a,000 a month, even less than a,000 a month if you want to. And we have a 90-day money back guarantee. So, it’s almost like as if like you’re not really taking that much risk if you do it right. There’s pretty much no risk there. We take all the risk on our side. Salvador, thanks for the guidance, Jane. I will learn from the best. Awesome. Salvador, love to hear it. Thank you so much. Appreciate you. Dan, no real channel, but a few ideas. All good. Onelio, uh, is there a month-to-month plan asking for a friend? Yes, we do have a month-to-month plan. Richard, realistically, how quickly can we get an ROI? Usually within like 2 to 3 months, that’s when people start making money is about 2 to 3 months in. Of course, we have lots of people that have done it way faster than that, but I’m just telling you like the average, right? 2 to 3 months in is typical. That’s that’s a realistic expectation. Um, and the great thing about a YouTube channel is it usually just keeps going up and up and up. So, it’s not like you make a certain amount of money and then it just stays there forever. Usually over time, the income just goes up and up and up. I showed you guys the income curve on my channel, how it just kept going up and up. It was pretty absurd. Um, and it’s and it’s continuing to be absurd. I mean, it’s it’s this this month is another record month. So, um, Richard, realistically, how quickly can we get an ROI? Okay, read that one already. Troy, can you give your quick thoughts on niche business continuity resilience for medium and large cap companies? I have my X and Y working on Z. I help companies maintain essential functions and minimize downtime during unexpected crisis. Um okay so for medium and large cap companies first of all you want to identify what is the TAM of that so the total adjustable market how many medium and large cap companies are there okay

    and then once you identify the TAM that is going to make it much easier to figure out um what you should offer to those companies or whether you should actually just zoom out a little bit, right? So, what is the total adjustable market of medium and large cap companies? And if it’s too small, then you probably need to either zoom out a little bit or you need to make your offer a little little wider. Okay? So, this is something I’ll be honest with you, Troy, we we’d kind of have to go back and forth on this. I’d recommend just booking a call and they’ll be able to kind of go back and forth on that. With that being said, a lot of the time with these B2B type companies, you can make a lot of money with a tiny channel. Tiny channel. I showed you guys the example of Carla, um, she was make she made she closed a six-figure contract with a 1.5K subscriber channel, barely ever posting videos. And when she does post, her videos only get 100 to 200 views per video, right? And she closed a huge contract with that six-f figureure contract. Um, and it’s an on it’s ongoing as well. So, she’s crushing it. We have another client who works with uh small to mediumsiz businesses, SMBs, and uh he gets about 500 views per video, maybe a thousand on a good video. Um posts, you know, once, twice, three times a week on a good week and he’s making well over $10 million, right? He’s he is a multi-igure company. So, a lot of these B2B companies like that’s man, there’s a lot of opportunity there. Nobody really knows how easy it is to get clients to get inbound leads with these B2B companies. So, I love where you’re going with that, Troy, but uh yeah, I think you you’d probably just want to book a call a little bit. Um we can help you with that. Sean, no one click on that spam. Yep, looks like there was a spammer. Apologies for that, guys. Tina, do you work with faceless channels? Only very specific types of faceless channels, Tina. Um and I went over earlier how to do that, so you can watch the replay if you’d want to to know. Um we do work like for instance whiz of ecom we we worked with him uh he he started off faceless but only very specific types of channels but yeah gosh.com/coaching guy scan the QR code click the link in the chat we can uh discuss whether your channel is a good idea to work with us or not Frank uh is there payment or does it have to be paid upfront? By the way guys did we did we open up more spots or what what happened? Okay we opened up more spots guys. So, I know that we almost ran out or if maybe we even ran out. There was basically zero spots left. We just opened up more spots. So, if you tried to apply before, you couldn’t get a spot. Go ahead and try again. Uh there might be a better time for you. Frank, is there payment or does it have to be paid up front? There is payment plans. We offer payment plans.

    Uh, yes. All of our coaches are YouTubers, Paul. They either literally grew their own YouTube channel to 100K subscribers or they were the person who grew a business’s channel to 100K subscribers or more. Sean, do you notice different results between ChadByt and Claude versions? It seems as if Shane prefers the Claude model now. Is that correct? Yes, Claude is better for most things. admin Aaron Sean, we do prefer Claude. Yep. Uh, Adam, sweet. Thanks, Shane and team. Um, I would disagree with Aaron here. It is not a tiny bit better. It is significantly better than Chad GBT uh for for most uh creative things that Chad GBT is better at certain things. So, there’s a few things that Chad GBT is better at. Um, but Claude is significantly better at most content creation stuff. Adam, sweet. Thanks, Shane. and team. You got it. Adam Sean, thank you. I have a subscription for both. Awesome. Good stuff, Sean. Uh, Pettanne, I’m so bad with tech. I cannot even send an emoji. Thumbs up. All good. Penne Ken, what do you think of YouTube’s AI thumbnail generator? It’s pretty terrible. Better than nothing, though, I guess. Petty, I’m so bad with technical stuff. It’s just sad. No, it’s okay. My brother’s pretty bad, too. He uh he got results quickly. Denise, does your system work with Tik Tok, Instagram, etc.? Nope. YouTube only. But we do teach you how to syndicate the content to other platforms. So, we can teach you how to like automatically syndicate the content with tools to other platforms. Matt, the call booking process is a tiny bit confusing. I booked a call, which prompted me a landing page that now having me to book a one-on-one strategy call, yet I already had the masterclass call booked. What did I miss? That’s weird. Uh, anybody else having that issue? That is very weird. Uh, did you guys hear that?

    Did you guys hear that?

    No. Okay, let let me read it again. The call booking process is a tiny bit confusing. I booked a call which prompted me uh to a landing page that is now having me book a one-on-one strategy call. Yet, I have already had the masterclass call booked. What did I miss? What’s going on there? Anyone else having that issue? This is very weird. You guys need to look into that. Okay, thank you. Peten, uh, cannot afford. All good, Peten. Just enjoy the free content. Enjoy the free trainings. Robert, right after police officer, lol. Do you work with the cannabis industry? Um, we haven’t worked with anybody in the cannabis industry. I can’t say. Um, but I mean, any educational content is fair game, right? Uh, Stephanie, uh, how do you niche down if you have so many different interests? It’s a great question. Um, one of the greatest ways to do that is to do what I did and just create a hybrid personal brand. That way you start off niche, but then down the line you can talk about whatever you want. That’s what I do on my channel. I talk about whatever I want. Now, you’ll notice I talk about many, many different subjects and yeah, I talk about whatever I want.

    Okay. How do you niche down if you have so many different interests? Craig, chat doesn’t scroll.

    Yeah, it does for me. Susie, thanks Shane. Very helpful. Awesome, Susie. My pleasure. Stephen, is it a good use case for someone looking to land a job? Absolutely. I I talked about Josh before. He had the biggest, most prestigious companies in the world reaching out to him uh to to offer him jobs. Very underrated. One thing I want to say is the indirect benefits that you get from YouTube are probably greater than the direct benefits. Okay? The direct benefits you get from YouTube are amazing. You can make full-time income. You could make a million dollars a year, $10 million a year. There’s even people making a hundred million or a billion dollars a year from YouTube. But the indirect benefits are even bigger than the direct benefits because they say that your net worth is your net worth, right? And when you become known as an authority in your niche, it becomes so much easier for you to grow your network and become really well known in your niche. So yeah, uh the indirect benefits are incredible. Uh whale, how many videos shall I create at the beginning of for the new channel? Um well, one right off the bat for sure. Uh but generally speaking, you want to do at least once a week. Amy, I can’t upload onto Claude. Um make sure you’re logged in. Troy, thanks. Call is booked. Awesome, Troy. Good stuff. Uh, guys, I’m going to talk for a few more minutes and then I’m going to be out. Okay, so I highly recommend go to go.streamhomes.com/coaching, scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. Like I said before, we open up a few more spots. Uh, this might be the last time I give you guys opportunity to do it. Um, and then after this, we’re uh we’re um going to end the call here. Onelio, I’m signing up for the big plan and I’m ready to rock and roll. I know I have this upfront cost to get the help. However, I need a bigger budget for extra expenses to run the channel outside of the course. There’s honestly not that much when it comes to expenses. Uh, Anelio, to be honest with you, Nurse Jen, for instance, literally just started with her laptop. So, if you already have a laptop, she used the webcam on her laptop. This one right here. Okay, that’s it. She just used the webcam on her laptop and she was able to grow to a full-time income immediately. So there’s I can’t I could give you so many examples of people that just started off with very basic equipment, right? Um Mr. Ballin, you guys might know him on YouTube. He used a phone for years. He grew to over 5 million subscribers just recording on his phone. Okay, that’s it. It’s just a phone camera. There there’s tons of examples of people that have grown on YouTube and made full businesses without buying any fancy equipment. And you guys might be thinking, “Well, Shane, you have fancy equipment?” Yeah, it’s you get bored after a while and you want to have nice equipment and you want to like learn how to use it and stuff like that. You get bored and it does help a little bit, okay? But you don’t need it. You don’t need that to get started. I did not start with nice equipment. I started with an absolute potato of a camera that literally any phone within the last 5 years is 10 times better than the potato of the camera that I started with when I started on YouTube. Okay? So, you don’t need fancy stuff. Um, let’s see here.

    Sean, good question. Yeah. Uh, Jacqueline, where is the person who interested in who’s interested in peace? Peace. I don’t know. Boss, for an English channel, can you help with converting to other languages? Yeah. Yeah, there’s easy easy way to do that automatically. We can definitely help with that. Desa, what basic equipment do you recommend to get started? Um, a phone and or your laptop. That’s pretty much it. If you want to get a speaker like a um a little bit better audio, that is recommended. You don’t have to. There’s ways of doing that. For instance, you could just record audio on your phone and then just put it close to your face. Um like like that’s pretty much it. We do have a whole protocol for what we recommend in the program, but that’s all you really need to get started. Um the only piece of content you need a little bit of lighting. So, you can either use natural lighting or you can buy like a ring light, which you can probably buy at like the your local Walmart pretty easily. But yeah, gosh.com/coaching guys. Scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. I’m probably going to end it here in a couple minutes. Um, okay. Thank you. I’m using your chat GBT model now, but I’m getting Claude soon. Yeah, the the GPTs are really good for kind of like answering questions and stuff like that, but for actually making the content, Claude is going to be better. The GPTs are good at like strategy. Um, and Claude is really good at strategy, too. I’d say they’re they’re kind of on the same level for strategy, but the actual making of the content, Claude is significantly better. Um, Nigel, what about using Grock? Grock can be good for specific niches. So, Grock can be really good for news style content because when the news happens, the first place you’re going to hear about it is on Twitter/X. And Grock is plugged into the Twitterx API. So it has an unfair advantage when it comes to information and data. And so Grock is especially good for making news style content, right? So that that is what Grock is great for. Frank also subscribed to you and your brother’s channels. Awesome. Frank, keep following. Appreciate you. Appreciate your support. Reena, yes, I had that happen. A yes, me too. It redirects to a video. It redirects to a video. What what do you think is happening there, guys? So, for some reason, Caleb added like a link on the uh Income page that sends them to another call. We’re fixing that. Oh, okay. Yeah, make sure you tell tell Caleb. Okay, guys. So,

    so this is what the thank you page is going to look like. By the way, guys, either this or this. Make sure you watch the video and then follow the instructions on this page. Okay. Um, so yeah, watch the video, follow the instructions. Um, it doesn’t take that long to do this. There’s also some really good stuff. It’ll also answer a bunch of your questions so that you can get the most out of your call. So, what does the first 30 days actually look like? How long does it take per day? I’m not techsavvy enough. I don’t have time. Like all these all these questions you might have, you can they’re very short videos that answer the questions. Okay. Um, we’re talking like like 30 secondond videos, right? Um, uh, then you want to follow these steps here. So, you want to make sure to add to calendar, you want to make sure to follow the directions on the email that you get, etc. And then at the very bottom, you can look at all the different results for all the different types of people we’ve gotten results for. So, I guarantee you, you’re going to find different people from different types of backgrounds, uh, people that you relate to, people that are similar to you, people that are in similar niches, similar verticals, similar businesses, etc., etc. You’re going to see, uh, for instance, she’s from Germany, right? Project manager from Germany, right? You’re going to see somebody that you relate to and somebody that is, uh, inspires you when you watch that. Okay? So, make sure you watch those. That’s going to get you ready for the call, too. Uh, and then same thing here, right? Same thing here. you can watch them here on this one. Right? So, you want to make sure to follow those. Um, we will go ahead and put those uh in the chat as well. Okay. Probably the last time I’m going to say this. Go. Scan the QR code. I’m going to drop that in the chat as well uh one last time. Uh let me see here. I’m going to drop it in the chat one last time. I recommend that you copy paste that and save it. Also, what you could do if you’re driving or whatever is you could just screenshot this. You could just screenshot it. Um, and then you can get access to it later on. And then, additionally, if for whatever reason you close down the thank you page, we’re going to drop the thank you page as well. Okay. So, we’re dropping the thank you page. You can have those. You can copy and paste those, too. So, you can take a look at those. With that being said, that is going to be it for me, guys. Thank you so much for coming out tonight. Enjoyed interacting with everybody. Enjoyed answering all your questions. Uh looking forward to working with some of talking to some of you and uh working with a few of you as well. And uh yeah, I think that’s it for me guys. Have a good one. Thank you so much. Appreciate it guys. Uh Raina, Nelia, Randy, Richard, Susie, thanks guys. Cheers. Denise, take care. Have a good one. Thanks guys. Have a good one. Bye for now. Take care. Peace.

  • 06/21/2026 – Content Growth Engine

    All right. How’s it going everybody? What’s happening? Good evening to most of you. Maybe good morning to some of you and maybe good middle of the night to a few of you as well. Um, where’s everybody calling in from? Go ahead and comment in the chat. And also uh while you’re commenting where you’re calling in from uh also comment let’s see um what the number actually yeah we’ll just we’ll just go where you’re calling in from right now. I’m I’m starting a little bit early so um yeah we’ll we’ll just we’ll just do that for now. Um okay we’ve got Cameron looking forward to the meeting. Awesome. Cameron looking forward to it as well. Karen, good evening all. Good evening Karen. George, uh, hey Shane, looking forward to the meeting. Awesome. Looking forward to it as well. George, Glenda, good evening. Good evening, Glenda. Jim from Northwest Georgia, USA. Awesome, Jim. Uh, good evening, Penny. Love, Texas. Awesome. Chip, Gold Beach, Oregon. Masimo from Italy. Tim from North Dakota. C. Oh yeah. Hey, thanks for staying up, Massimo. Wow. I think it’s like middle of the night for you. Appreciate you staying up. Cameron, good evening uh to everyone from Northwest Indiana. Awesome. Paul from Chicago. Cassandra from sunny Florida. Awesome. I’m I’m going to be visiting Florida here pretty soon. James from Florida. Awesome. How’s it going, James? Mary, East Hartford, Connecticut. Glenda, Florida. Waqen, Texas. Talib, uh, Englewood, California. David Dumont, New Jersey. Raphael, Orlando. Jay May Ralph, good afternoon, San Diego. Jennifer, I’m coming from Louisiana. George, Newcastle, Delaware. Ken, Western North Carolina. Daniel, Brazil. Steven, Oregon. Nachi, LA. Jay, Baltimore. Jeff Eastern Washington. Cassandra Florida. Cody Middle Tennessee. Mitchell Oregon. Gertrude. Trudy from Italy. Hey, thank you for staying up as well. Gertrude and Richard from London. Appreciate you guys. Jay, Callie, but now in the Philippines. Awesome. Jay, good morning to you. Luciano, New York. Pete, Pennsylvania. David Baton Rouge. Vic Tampa. Dale from Canada. Uh Romesh Bahamas. Bryant, Cincinnati, Anthony, Los Angeles. Grant Hawaii. Caroline, um, or Carolyn, uh, Cleveland. Tamara, Illinois, Regina, Houston. Gerender, England, Denise, Seattle, Dolores, uh, San Pedro, California. Kathy, New Zealand, Brent, Baltimore. Awesome. Okay, so next question. What is the number one thing that brought you here to this live training? Okay. So, try to try to try to think deeply about this. What what is the number one thing that brought you here? What what is the number one thing that you want to get out of this uh live training tonight? And just be honest. Just be honest. Go ahead and comment in the chat number one thing you want to get out of this live training tonight while I’m getting ready here.

    Okay.

    Okay. Learn how to make money from Raphael Carolyn dollars. Learn how to get Penny. I’m lost. Uh CJ, best teleprompter setup. Okay, we can definitely help. We can definitely help you with that uh towards the end for sure. CJ Cassandra, learn how to create something. Uh CJ, uh get the um Elgato Elgato teleprompter. Elgato, E L G- A T O. And there’s lots of uh videos online for how to use that. Cassandra, learn how to create something one time and continue to earn income. Got it. Awesome. Tamara, love to create and want to fully utilize AI to uh relate better content and make money. Uh, Jay, knowledge. Waqen, learn a new skill to further my income while still working on my carrier. Um, Stephen, I want your prints. All right. Regina, learn about starting a YouTube channel. Denise, I don’t know how to create, set up, start a YouTube channel, especially editing and effects and rules, etc. Pete, learn to make easy money. Well, making money is simple, but it’s never easy. So, that might you might be in the wrong place, Pete. Yeah, it’s simple, but it’s never easy, right? And even if it is easy, you don’t want to go into it with that mindset. Okay? I don’t So, I don’t want anyone to think that it’s like I just don’t want you to go into it with that mindset. That’s a bad mindset to begin things with. Steven prompts Jennifer, I just lost everything in a flood. Need to know how to start over. Oh, I’m so sorry to hear that, Jennifer. Um, you could potentially make a video about that though, right? Like literally like that could be the title. I just lost everything in a flood, you know. But uh I I yeah, sorry to hear that. But yeah, I I’m I’m glad you’re here. Glad to have you here, Tim. To get more views and start to monetize them. Chip, uh to help get my channel out of the 100 views per vid syndrome. Got it, Anthony. Uh to actually put things into action. Got it, Zachary. Direction and guidance. Uh to leave a proven uh formula to follow to make a passive income. Got it, Melissa. more subscribers and how to make money it and of course knowledge. Lonnie, how to make money on YouTube in the most direct way. Dale ha have a great part-time job and travel. Oh, nice. Karen to learn what’s possible. Paul to get the bag in the new age of AI. Oh, I love that. Okay, Michael, show me the money. Carol, how to create something including a lifestyle that will work for retirement. Uh Jay, prompts and howto. Romesh, help my YouTube pages get more views on shorts. Richard, starting and optimizing a YouTube channel as a full-time occupation and quitting the day job. Luciano, want to learn how to write better prompts. Grant, your videos have helped me a lot with my career choices and development. For this video, I want to learn the feasibility of content creation into clients and income. Awesome. Awesome. Okay. Love to hear that, Grant. Good stuff. Earn. Okay. I I don’t know what that is. Kelly Brett, find a way to simplify my workflow and setting a foundation to make my channel grow. Cody, starting YouTube and getting the most out of it. George, have a I’m guess Kelly, were you trying to like I don’t earn H6WT6. What is that? Um, George, I have a story to tell and want to learn how to monetize that story. Awesome. George Cameron, to build my YouTube following, which will make money to help my color grading business take off. Oh, and you’re Claude niche tool. Lol. Okay, fair enough. Fair enough. Uh, awesome. Okay, what is the number one problem that you guys are having? And and welcome in, guys. Welcome in. What is the number one problem that you’re having when it comes to starting on YouTube or growing your YouTube channel? What is the number one problem you’re having? Go ahead and comment that your number one problem. And while you’re doing that, I’m going to go ahead and get started here. should be in presenter view.

    mate. Let’s see. We’ve got

    Shoot. The chat’s moving so fast I’m having trouble reading it. Okay, let’s see here. There we go. Where to start? Carol James knowledge gap. It’s easy to find content but not good content. Yep. clear direction. Florence, uh, scared to waste time and energy. Melissa, good content. Chip, not enough views. George, where to start? Michael, under 1,000 views, only 258 subscribers. Chase, brand new, no direction. Niche. Gerinder, getting views. Ralph, choosing a niche. Uh, Tim, getting views. Kelly, yeah, my keyboard had a mind of its own this morning. Yes, you got it right. Okay. Oh, good. David getting uh started and analysis paralysis. Karen, learning where to start to eat the elephant. Got it. Yeah, I think that’s a title of a book, right? Eat the elephant. Um, uh, Raphael, deciding what to create videos about. Jeff, uh, letting go of negative thoughts. Jay, editing time takes a lot of time to edit all the vids. I have three channels. Scott, Jay, Ernest, low views for sure. also coming up with content. Leslie being in front of the camera. Caroline need a mentor. Mitch just getting started. Fear procrastination. Uh Katie Brennan getting the ball rolling. Jennifer views. Brent get over imposter syndrome and start running like a business. Mary the niche. Okay, awesome guys. So appreciate your comments. Uh we always, you know, review those and always take those into account uh for future trainings and and I’ll keep them in mind as I’m doing this training as well. So, let’s go ahead and jump in, guys. How to grow and make money on YouTube in 2026 without fancy gear, without techy stuff, and without spending hours on each video, provided you use this hybrid model and follow one simple rule. So, why you’re here today, guys, go ahead and do the thumbs up thing if you’re excited about one of these things. It should be the bottom right of the screen. So, the first one is going to be views. So, do the thumbs up if you are excited about getting views. That’s what you’re most excited about. Okay. Got some people doing it. All right. All right. Some people want views. Okay. Let’s Let’s do the next one, though. Let’s do the next one here. I think you might be more excited about this one. Money. Actually making money from YouTube. Do the thumbs up if that’s what you’re There we go. Okay. Okay. I’m seeing a lot more excitement in the crowd now. All right. Different emojis, hearts, confetti, thumbs up, lots of thumbs up, clapping. Okay. Excellent. Excellent. All right. But how about this third one? How about this third one? Cuz I think this might be the most important one right here. Impact. Okay. Uh basically creating a business that you can be proud of that helps a lot of people. Thumbs up if you’re excited about that. Okay, great. See this one right here? the impact. If you if you do this one, the views and the money will take care of itself, right? So, that’s why it’s kind of smart to actually just focus on impact, right? And that’s kind of what we’re going to be talking about actually, you know, starting a YouTube channel that solves people’s problems and educates them and that kind of thing. Okay. Excellent. All right. You guys are definitely the type of people I’d like to work with. So, that’s awesome. Okay. So, by the way, we are going to be giving away free stuff at this workshop. At the very end, as promised, you will get a chance to walk away with the niche validator pro uh both the chat GBT as well as the Claude AI version, whichever you like to use. And uh this is the newest version. Okay, we are constantly updating these and this is a this is a pretty big upgrade. We recently did the cloud one. It’s we’re upgrading it really quickly. You’ll also get $61,494 an opportunity for those uh bonuses, but only for those that stay until the end offer. So, look at this. Julian uh Shapiro Barnum just launched his own late night show. It’s called Outside Tonight and it’s all happening on YouTube. Now, if you don’t know Julian, you’ve probably seen his work. Uh he’s the guy behind recess therapy, those street interviews with little kids in New York. And he’s the reason you know the It’s Corn Kid. And here’s the cool part, okay? The the It’s Corn Kid. You probably know who that is, right? And here’s the cool part. Uh he didn’t wait for a TV network. He didn’t wait for a studio to hand him a budget. He built his own late night show and put it out himself. And that’s what makes YouTube so powerful. It is the only place in the entire world where a regular person can uh regular creators, just a regular person can build the kind of show that used to take a network and tens of millions of dollars and then somebody deciding that you’re the right person like some gatekeeper deciding, you know what, we’re going to let you be famous, right? But here’s what I really want you to notice. Julian did not start famous at all. He built recess therapy out of a college thesis project. Just him showing up as himself, doing something specific. That’s a personal brand. And a personal brand is the most valuable thing that you can build online because once people know you, you can launch anything, a new show, a product, a business, etc. And you don’t need millions of subscribers to start building that. You just need to show up consistently as yourself for the right people. And that’s exactly what I’m going to show you how to do today. Now, one thing I’m always uh uh you know trying to tell you guys is just just to set the tone for for the way to think about this is this is a maze. Okay, you start here at the top and you finish at the bottom. And your goal is to get to the finish as fast as you can, whatever that goal is. And most creators start with good intentions and then they fall into the maze. They end up burnt out, overthinking, stuck in analysis paralysis with zero views and zero income and then they just give up. But actually, most people don’t even start in the first place. Right? So, if you’re here watching this now, you’re ahead of the majority of people. Now, additionally, one thing I like to say about this maze part is anything you’ve heard about YouTube outside of what I teach, chances are it’s probably you entering this maze because most people go into the maze and they get lost and they put their hands up and they’re like, “Mazekeeper, come and get me.” And getting lost in the maze is focusing on all the stuff that does not matter. Like all the YouTube coaches that have entire channels about reviewing YouTube gear when that makes like 1% of a difference in the success of your channel. And that is the maze. That is the reason why people don’t get results because they’re focusing on all these things that do not matter when in reality you could just focus on the few things that actually matter and actually get you results. But let’s just say hypothetically you go into the maze and you just navigate it perfectly. Right? Let’s say you’re an absolute pro. Here is the fastest way that you can get from start to finish. Just like this. Okay, I’ll kind of outline it here. Right? Zero mistakes. That is the fastest way uh to get from start to finish. But actually, it’s not the fastest because there is another way. It is faster, easier, and safer. And you’re basically just going to go around the maze. Pretty clever, right? But this isn’t even the fastest route. This is We learned from a young age that the fastest way to go from point A to point B is a straight line. What if I showed you a way to do just that? Skip the maze completely and you literally just go from start to finish straight to the results. Now, one thing I want to say about this part right here is a lot of other YouTube advice out there, um, you know, I don’t think most of them are purposely giving you bad advice. Some of them are probably purposely doing it, but most of them are not purposely giving you bad advice. I think a lot of them give it good advice, but they give good advice for like a gaming channel or a prank channel or something like that because there are a bunch of different types of channels on YouTube. Okay. Um, but I’m going to be talking about the type of YouTube channel that is the easiest to get results with. for one, and it’s a type of YouTube channel that you can pivot to just about anything else that you want to later on down the line. So, it’s an extremely flexible type of YouTube channel. And that’s why uh when it comes to winning on YouTube, I have the straight line for you today so that you can get there the easiest, quickest, safest, and most comfortable way possible. And specifically, you’re going to gain access to the hottest opportunity to exist in the content creation business. Now, these are the newest stats that just came out. So before last year you could see uh that they were saying that by 2034 the uh global creator economy um it was going to be about $1 trillion. Okay. And then they updated it just 6 months later. They updated it and said it was going to be about $1.6 trillion. So a massive 60% increase in just a six-month time period. Right? The experts were off. Right? They knew it was going to be growing fast, but they did not expect it to grow as fast as as it did, right? And it’s growing at an unprecedented rate that even the experts didn’t expect. And look at this going up while so many other things are going down. It’s harder than ever to get a job. There’s so many industries that are being disrupted. Meanwhile, content creation is just going up and up. And that is a sign. Uh, and this is one of the biggest opportunities that I want you to access or want you to get access to when it comes to content creation. And I want you to do it while bypassing all the traps, the gotchas, the limitations, the barriers to entry that otherwise would lock you out, forcing you to stand on the sidelines as you watch generational wealth pass you by, helpless to do anything about it. And you will definitely want to take advantage of what’s happening right now in the creator economy because you are in the perfect place and time to start. And mind you, YouTube pays out billions every year, but it’s not going to lifestyle bloggers and entertainment channels anymore. And today you’ll be handed the key to unlock that prison cell that is keeping you trapped and away from the YouTube growth you’ve been wanting for a very long time. And seriously, we’ve helped online businesses of course, but also coaches, freelancers, job seekers, stay-at-home parents, nineto-fivers, grandpas, grandmas, agency owners, service providers, digital product sellers, failed YouTubers, YouTubers getting views but struggling with monetization, successful YouTubers who are crushing it but want to crush it even harder. people that own software companies or SAS, location specific businesses like law firms or um dental cosmetic clinics or uh financial advisors or um I’m I’m forgetting all of them, but yeah, different location specific type businesses. Uh people doing paid ads that want to stop doing paid ads, people doing paid ads that want to make their paid marketing two times more effective uh by having a YouTube presence. even physical uh brick-and-mortar business owners in some cases and even people with disabilities do this, right? And this works for almost any niche in almost any situation because we designed this type of YouTube channel to be flexible so that you can go in so many different directions. And the good news is uh the really good news is you do not need to be a influencer or a YouTuber to win on YouTube. But to get there, I’m going to be exposing the dark side of YouTube and creators who are now slaves to the platform. So here’s an example. Boogie2988. Now, I’m not trying to make fun of him at all. I actually respect him a lot for revealing his public income, right? He’s being very transparent about his income, and you have to respect that, but because there’s, you know, there’s not a lot of upside to that, especially in this case. But he’s got about 4 million subscribers, and he revealed on a podcast tour last year that he’s only making about $44,000 a year, which is about $3,700 a month from a 4 million subscriber YouTube channel. That is less than the average income for an American. and he is one of hundreds of thousands of creators who are promised success through views, but views do not automatically equal money. Okay? Meanwhile, I work with people who get 500 views per video and they’re making 10 million a year on YouTube, right? I work with people who get one or 200 views per video and they’re making 2 million a year on YouTube. And this is not just like one or two channel. This is like a lot of people in this situation. Okay? So, there’s a people who get there’s lots of people who get lots of views that, you know, influencers that have millions of followers, millions of subscribers, but they’re not making any money because they’re doing things wrong. Okay? And seriously, I know there’s a lot of people in this crowd that are frustrated. They’re burnt out. They’re stuck because you were promised a gold mine and yet you found nothing. You’ve been uploading videos or you’re frustrated because you can’t even get started uploading videos because you’ve been told that you need to buy this camera first or that gear first. you need to be really good at editing or any of those types of things, but you basically found nothing but regret. So, let’s talk about who this is for. This is for you if you’re a total beginner who wants to finally start and not burn out. Now, by the way, go ahead and drop your profession in the chat. I’m curious what you all do for a living. Um, so yeah, go ahead and drop that in the chat because my brother was a total beginner himself. Okay, so um my brother was in HVAC. So that’s heating, ventilation, air conditioning. So he’s the person who fixes the heater and the air conditioner in the summer. Um, so Matias says, uh, financial adviser. We’ve got dream analyst. We got insurance agent, healthc care. Michael says, IT professional. Rachel, life coach. Claire, artist. Laura, business consultant. Aaron, special education teacher. Cassandra, medical coder. Uh, Tuuna, sales. Carol, hall truck driver in a gold mine. Nice. Okay. Uh, Coutura, receptionist. James C. project manager. Brent, scientist. Abdul researcher. Uh, Tamara, health coaching and ministry. Mary, former lawyer. Cody, auto tech, Kaden, IT, MSP. Ralph, accounting finance. Waqen, electrician. Uh, Esmeralda, personal care attendant. Uh, SA AI content creator. Brennan, HVAC trades instructor. Awesome. Awesome. Okay. Well, there you go. HVAC field operator coordinator. Uh, Michelle or Michelle, retired healthcare. Jorge, uh, commercial building manager. Uh, Arif, car sales. Raphael, I’m a math teacher. Awesome. Okay. Uh, Ernest, independent author. Okay. So, my brother, just as an example, uh, he’s an HVAC, right? So, he’s been in the trades for about 30 years. He’s also in his 50s. And, uh, I’m basically so confident in this system that I literally used it on my brother, you know, who’s in his 50s, right? Who isn’t techsavvy. He’s never made a video in his life, right? And first of all, for context, I use the system to start a new channel every single year. And the reason I do that is because I want to make sure that I’m updated on what the algorithm is like for a new channel because it’s not the same between a new channel and a big channel, right? But last year, I decided I’m just going to make a channel for my brother instead because he basically came to me and he said, “Shane, I’m 50 years old. My body’s starting to wear out. I need to figure out how to make money without wearing out my body.” Now, he’s in the trades, right? and he thought I was going to recommend a remote job or some type of certification. And I was like, “No, you should just start a YouTube channel.” And he was really surprised. He’s like, “Well, I’m not techs. I’m not good on camera. I’ve never made a video in my life. I’m in my 50s. No one wants to listen to a 50-year-old.” All these excuses started popping up in his head of why he couldn’t do it, right? And I told him, “Just trust me, bro. Just do it, okay? Just do what I tell you. Use our system. It’s going to work for you.” And the very first video that he posted blew up, got over 800,000 views. And less than one month later, 29 days later to be exact, he made $214 in a single day. That’s a $78,000 year run rate. So yeah, it works for beginners even with no tech experience. He went from zero to a full-time income in less than one month. And by the way, update on Zach. He had an $18,000 month to finish off his first year on YouTube. Plus, he’s getting a lot of money from affiliate marketing. So, he’s just, yeah, he’s, you know, he’s not just making money from AdSense. Uh, he’s making money from affiliate marketing and other things as well. And, uh, that’s one thing we’re going to talk about. AdSense is not the only monetization method on YouTube. There are lots of other ways where you can make more money. Sometimes you can make a hundred times more than what you make from AdSense. All right. Now, this is also for you if you’re a faceless creator or you want to use YouTube automation. Okay. So, uh, here’s an example of that. Whiz was one of our clients. Now, by the way, when I say faceless creator, uh we we typically don’t work with most types of like AI faceless creators, that kind of thing. But let me show you a type that we do work with, right? So, Whiz was one of our clients when Whiz first started on YouTube. Uh it was totally faceless channel and he actually scaled his business to seven figures a year just being faceless, right? Then he did a face reveal and now he’s making multiple seven figures a year. The point is he said that almost all of his clients watched his YouTube channel and either directly or indirectly he got almost all of his clients from YouTube. So they might have originated from other sources but then they watched his YouTube channel and that’s what helped prospects make the decision to buy from him. and he runs an agency and he did make the decision to reveal his face later on, but he built his faceless channel in a very specific way where you can do that because again he used the hybrid personal brand method which means you have a lot of options in the future and we’ll get into how to do that as well. So if you’re making a faceless or YouTube automation channel, you need to listen to this because it’s very important that you do this the right way. Okay? Um, if you don’t do it the right way, you’re going to have a ceiling in terms of how much money you can make, and you’re also not going to have options in the future. This is also for you if you’re a business owner, freelancer, or coach who wants inbound clients without paid ads. So, an example of that would be Davis. Uh, Davis’s sales went up by 400% and after working with me, he’s making over 100K per month. And basically, Davis owned a portfolio of companies and he was spending about 20 hours a week on just one of his companies. One of his uh main businesses was a coaching company where he helped people get into management consultant uh management consulting. They helped them become management consultants. Um so just you know he was spending over 20 hours a week on just one of his companies and just one YouTube channel and in one company right with a portfolio that is not sustainable obviously right but eventually he outsourced everything on his channel to the point where he’s not even recording the videos anymore. he has other people recording the videos and now he spends zero hours a week even though he has multiple channels and from multiple different companies. He’s spending zero hours a week. So if you’re a busy business owner, uh you’re super busy, you have a portfolio, you can actually have other people record the videos for you and you can have a system that just takes care of everything. And we help people with that as well.

    This is also for you if you want to network so that you can land highpaying jobs, find career opportunities, or become an authority in your niche by standing out with your YouTube channel. So that that is a a super underway underrated way of uh getting a lot of value out of your YouTube channel. So here’s a really good example of networking. Josh basically just started making really useful videos on his channel for people in the IT and cyber security industry. And he talked about how to get better jobs, which certifications are good to take, what skills to learn that are valuable in the job market, etc., etc. and he was able to go from making less than $1,000 a month on his channel um to actually getting offers from Fortune50 companies, including companies that are part of Fang, which is Facebook, Apple, Amazon, Netflix, and Google. Now, these are some of the biggest and most prestigious companies in the world, where it’s literally harder to get into a fang company than it is to get into Harvard or Yale. Now, usually you have to apply to these jobs, but the companies were reaching out to him. So, he got an offer from several different fan companies and he ended up going with one of them for his dream job where he got to travel the world. He lived in Japan and he was working a remote job making multiple six figures a year. But then the YouTube channel kept going 5,000 a month, 10,000 a month, 30,000 a month and eventually he scaled it all the way up to $186,000 a month using my strategies. So, it went from a side hustle that is really great for networking to a full-time income to making more than his uh full-time job, even though he’s still just working part-time on it, a few hours a week. And then finally, scaling his business, right? So, I really love uh this example because it goes over like every every single stage, right? And of course, he quit his dream job because it just didn’t make sense for him at that point, you know? So, this yeah, this goes over every single stage. Just getting started as a beginner, using it to become an authority in his niche, for networking, to getting uh for getting his dream job, starting a side hustle, making a little bit of money on the side, starting a full-time business, making 10 to 30K, and then scaling his business. But you might be thinking, “But Shane, if it’s that easy, then why do most people fail?” Because most people do fail when they try to start on YouTube. Well, it’s because they believe in these myths. One, you need to be an influencer. Two, you have to show your face and have a fancy camera. Three, it takes 40 hours to create one video. And four, you have to endure the process because it takes a long time to succeed on YouTube. These are some of the biggest myths that people believe in that cause them to fail. Now, the last one specifically, the reason that most people think it takes a long time to succeed on YouTube is because they think they need a big channel that has lots of subscribers and lots of views to make money. If you choose the right niche, you do not need a big channel. Just as an example, when I started my second channel, Shane Homus, the content growth engine, we actually made over $30,000 in the first month starting the channel. And a lot of that money was made before we even got to a,000 subscribers as well. And these are the myths that people believe in that stopped them from having success on YouTube. But in reality, one of the biggest reasons that you failed is because before today, you lacked the leverage to invade this soon tobe trillion dollar opportunity. And I’m going to help you mine this opportunity so that we can grow rich together fast. First though, who am I? I’m Shane. I’m an ex-farmacist. I have a 1.5 million subscriber YouTube channel. You can see it down here. Um, I uh have helped over 20 businesses get to 100K per month on YouTube from scratch, from complete scratch. Um, I’ve helped hundreds of people at this point make full-time incomes on YouTube. And I’ve helped dozens and dozens of other businesses that were already extremely profitable on YouTube uh scale and become even more profitable. So, I’m also industry recognized as an expert on growing and making money from YouTube for businesses. Here’s a company that I worked with just as an example. Course careers. Um, they enjoyed working with me so much uh that they actually gave me some equity in their company because I gave that much value to the company, right? We were able to help them over 30x the amount of money that they made since I first started working with them. With that being said, this is a startup and I usually like to work with individuals. And one of the reasons I like to work with individuals is because you guys remind me of myself. So, let me go ahead and get into my story. This is me working as a pharmacist for 15 hour shifts. I came from a poor background before this. Um, I lived in section 8 housing. I lived in trailer parks. I was even homeless at one point. Uh, this is the exact Salvation Army in Lawrence, Kansas that I stayed for about six-month period. And, you know, I didn’t want to be poor. So, I decided to do what society was telling me to do. I went to college. I got a doctorate and I became a pharmacist. I got a good job. And I also had to take out a lot of money in student loan debt to do this, right? So, I went over $300,000 in student loan debt to get there. And the thing is, you know, when I was poor, I had a lot of time, but I didn’t really have any money. So, I couldn’t really do anything besides play video games or whatever. But when I became middle class working as a pharmacist, I didn’t have both time or money because I was spending all my time working on all my money, paying down my student loan debt. So, it’s kind of like an out of the frying pan and into the fryer type moment. And it was really a terrible situation cuz I started as a pharmacist right before the pandemic hit. And just to emphasize how bad this was, we got robbed three times in a six-month period. So, overall, I was incredibly stressed, incredibly depressed, very burnt out, and uh anxious. I felt like I always had a sword dangling over my head with my debt as well all the time. And um on top of all that, I was literally in fear of my physical safety if if all the other stuff wasn’t enough. Okay, so uh it was a pretty bad situation. And like many people out there, I started wondering, wait a minute, is the stuff that society told me to do actually a good idea? Maybe I made a mistake. And because of that, I tried just about every side hustle out there to make money. Shopify, Amazon FBA, SMMA, coaching, consulting, courses, digital products, real estate, white labeling, SEO, flipping websites, flipping physical products. Here’s one of them that I tried. It’s called the Booty Kit. It’s basically an at home workout thing so that you can work out your booty, and I uh pretty much failed at all of them, you know. Uh this one, I think, uh I tried selling it on Shopify and Amazon FBA. Uh so Shopify, drop shipping and Amazon FBA. But yeah, uh couldn’t make any of these sustainable. Um, a lot of it had to do with me having ADHD and just always trying a bunch of different things and kind of having shiny object syndrome. Uh, but as you can see, my bank account was constantly very close to $0. But YouTube was different than all these other side hustles, right? See, all the side hustles that I tried, they actually work. They all work, but they only work if you have traffic, aka views. If you don’t have views, it’s almost impossible to get any of these to work, right? It’s kind of like trying to sell something without having a store and nobody knows you exist, right? It’s just impossible to sell. And so I realized one that I really enjoyed YouTube, but two, I realized that I could make any of these other business models work if I just focused on YouTube and getting views. And because of that, I gave YouTube another shot. And after I tried it again, you know, at that time, I was basically in a house full of seven guys to save money. And one of the guys that I met, his name was Sam. and he basically moved from Lebanon and he started a wedding photography business and he barely even knew English, right? He was kind of forced to start the business because he couldn’t I don’t think he could actually legally get a job and so he kind of had to start a business and uh he started his YouTube channel where he was making about 10 to$20,000 a month from his 10,000 subscriber YouTube channel. Um it was actually less than 10,000 subscribers and his wedding photography business. And he was doing wedding photography in Las Vegas and on the West Coast. And before this I’d even spent some time in LA. I’d met influencers who didn’t have any money and I was like, “How much are you how are how much are you making how are you making so much money from YouTube uh even though you have a small channel, right? Uh that’s basically what I asked Sam, right? Um because I’d seen lots of influencers who had big channels and lots of followers and they weren’t making any money. And he showed me what a proper monetization method looked like, right? He showed me how I could monetize a channel without having that many views. And he initially taught me how to make money from a small channel like 10 to 20,000 subscribers. But I took it to the next level to the point where there are some channels we work with that only have a few thousand subscribers and they’re making seven figures a year because there are some niches where you’re talking to an affluent audience and you can get a couple hundred views and make $10,000 from a video. So this is where I found the secret formula of YouTube success where everyone else was not talking about. And so basically I started posting videos and just to put this in perspective I have gotten lots of views. 6 million 1.2 2 million, 1.7 million, 4.3 million views, right? I know how to play the views game with the best of them. But this video right here, just as an example, the most useless degrees. This was my first ever breakout video. It got over 4 million views. Took, you know, 6 years to get there. And it’s a whole lifetime. It made about $31,000 in 6 years. Okay. Um, you know, it wasn’t really making money outside of AdSense. It was mostly just AdSense that it made money from. But this video right here, top 10 richest YouTubers in the world, new number one revealed. This one got 8.8,000 views. It was posted around 6 months ago versus 6 years. And it made $48,000. Okay, so it made more money than this video right here, even though it barely got any views and it only was up for 6 months. Right now, by the time this one gets to the six year mark, it’s probably going to make double that or even more. Okay. So, the point here is it’s way easier for me to reproduce this one right here and make another video like this than it is for me to make a video like this. It is way way way easier. This is a very difficult to reproduce video. This is an easy to reproduce video. Okay? It’s a lot It’s a lot easier to get 8,000 views than it is to get 4 million views. And just to show you guys proof here, uh here’s how much I made around two plus years ago. Right? So this was before I ever uh taught anybody how to do YouTube, right? So this is when I had a business where it was a career coaching business basically helping people get jobs. We helped over a thou like literally a thousand verified testimonials like video testimonials of people getting jobs. Um and so uh at that time I made about 283,000. This is also money literally going directly into my bank account. So this is no revenue shenanigans or anything like that, right? 283,000 directly into my bank account. Um, and so yeah, that was before I ever taught anybody how to do YouTube. That’s a like multiple sevenfigure business uh helping people get jobs. Um, which is a a boring business, but it’s something that a lot of people need, right? So, this one right here was about uh two September ago. So, this one was three Septeers ago, this one was two um $325,000.

    Um, so this is after I had already started my coaching business. And then this one right here is $1 million. Okay, this is last September, so about 6 months ago or so, or 9 months ago. And so I’m not saying this to make people jealous. I’m just showing you the receipts so that you know that I know what I’m talking about cuz there’s a lot of YouTube coaches out there that are just coaches, coaching coaches. They’ve never actually started a successful channel themselves. They’re basically just cosplaying as successful YouTubers and they’re teaching you how to be successful at YouTube when they’ve never actually started a successful YouTube channel outside of just teaching YouTube, right? But me, I actually started a successful YouTube channel before I started teaching other people how to do it. So, I know how it actually works. I started a successful YouTube channel and successful YouTube business making multiple seven figures a year before I ever taught a single person how to do YouTube, right? And the craziest thing is I did all of this while being able to travel the world and only having to work 4 hours a week. So here’s a picture of me in Tokyo, just as an example, the famous crossing square. Here’s a picture of me in Singapore. I was just there uh about a month ago or so. And here’s a picture of me in the San Juan Islands uh just off of uh British Vancouver, Columbia whale watching, orca watching specifically. And yes, we did see some orcas and it was pretty awesome. Um, now I choose to work more than that sometimes because I genuinely enjoy YouTube and I enjoy helping people with YouTube. So, I choose to work more than that. But the point is I only have to work 4 hours a week. And in many cases, I’ve actually gone as much as 2 months at a time without working at all, spending literally zero hours on my business. So, I have an online business where I don’t have to have any in-person employees or anything like that. I can travel the world. I can do whatever I want. And my business just keeps going up and up and up. But something kept bothering me because I got the life that I dreamed of. But once in a while, I’d create a video and post it on YouTube just telling people what I was doing because I was seeing YouTube advice online and I would watch it and I’d be like, “Yeah, I don’t really think this works for most people. Maybe it would work for a gaming channel, but it wouldn’t work for most channels.” And so I decided once every 6 months, once every year or so, I would post a video about what I was doing on YouTube that was working for me. And every time I’d do that, I would get comments, emails, DMs. Everybody would reach out to me being like, “Hey, can you coach me? can you help me grow my YouTube channel? And I turned them all down because I was just too busy or I just didn’t really want to do coaching or I thought, you know, maybe this works for my niche, but it doesn’t work for other people’s niches, right? And so I turned them down, but I felt bad about it and I shrugged it off for years until one day a good friend of mine who happened to be a YouTuber uh reached out to me and like they were financially struggling and they were like, “You know what? Um, can you please help me? Like I I really need help right now.” And I agreed to help them. And at the same time, I decided if I’m going to help them, I might as well help these other people as well because it’s probably about the same amount of time uh for me to help them as to help everybody. I can just tell everybody how to do it all at once. And so I reached out to all those other people. I decided, you know what? I’m going to do it. And I reached out to a bunch of those people. And I decided to do a cohort where I worked with a lot of them. And I worked with a very diverse set of people as well, right? a professional truck driver for 28 years, a fresh graduate engineering student, a current engineering student, an Amazon FBA business owner, a coach, a freelancer, a failed YouTuber, a successful YouTuber who was crushing it but wanted to crush it harder, a content creator for 11 years who wanted to shift over to YouTube, a tech salesperson, a girl in cyber security, a coach, an agency owner, an online service provider, a fitness dude, a finance guy, a physical business owner, etc., etc., just on and on. The point is they were all different. Some had YouTube experience, but others had zero knowledge of how YouTube works. And then we applied the exact same format that I found to be working for my YouTube channel. So, same for YouTube format, same proven way of making thumbnails, titles, and intros, same strategy for coming up with winning video ideas. And of course, a little bit of tweaking here and there because every single niche is a little bit different. There are a lot of underlying principles, but they all do need a little bit of tweaking. And the crazy thing is, every single one of them blew up. And the best part is they all got their version of rich by helping other people live better lives. And that’s the thing that made me feel so happy because I can only have so much impact with my channel. I can only cover a few niches with my channel, but there’s literally millions of niches and subniches out there, probably tens of millions, if not hundreds of millions of niches and subniches out there. Okay? So, I got to help other people have impact with their channels and solve lots of problems and give value to the world. And I was basically spreading my impact to so many other people. And then they were able to impact hundreds of millions of people with their YouTube channels. And they all got their version of rich by helping other people live better lives. And this was the first time in my entire life that I felt like, wow, I could actually do this for the rest of my life. Like I could actually just do this this one thing. I could do it for the rest of my life, right? And so I guess I found my passion, right? Um, and the reason for that is because I taught them how to make a very specific type of content, right, which is educational niche content. And the channels that are winning today are educational niche channels. In fact, educational channels make 10 to 20 times more money. And there are more opportunities for every 1,000 views than any other type of content. In fact, in the first month that we launched my second channel, we were able to make $1,736 per 1,000 views. So, we got about 24,000 views in the first month right off the bat and made about $42,000. So, that’s about $1,736 per 1,000 views. And to put that in perspective, entertainment channels in general make about $1 to $3 per 1,000 views. So, if I uh started an entertainment channel, I would have made somewhere between $24 to $73 uh if I got 24,000 views, right? So, a typical Mr. be style entertainment channel. If I got 24,000 views, I made about I would have made about $24 to $73. Plus, this style of content is is much more difficult to make and it’s much more uh competitive, too, right? You’re competing with Mr. Beast, right? So, this one right here, typical education channel, if I would have gotten 24,000 views, I would have made about $484. So, still a lot better, right? That’s still like 10 to 20 times better for sure, but uh still not really a full-time income, you know. But the channel that I did, my niche authority channel, which is my second channel, that channel made about $1,736 per 1,000 views, which was over $42,000 with 24,000 views. Right? And by the way, this is from All from AdSense. Okay? So, uh, AdSense are the ads that pop up on your channel, but these are all different methods of monetization. Okay? And so, with educational content, right off the bat, you’re making like 10 times more money than entertainment content. And, uh, there’s uh there’s a better type of education content, which is niche educational content, where you’re properly monetizing your channel. Now, you could do more mass market educational channels and properly monetize your content, and you can still make a heck of a lot more money. For instance, my main channel, Shane Hummus, of course, that’s that’s more of a mass market channel. Um, I kind of do whatever I want with that channel. I talk about a lot of different subjects and, you know, I kind of can just do whatever I want with that channel at the time. It’s probably not the best for monetization, but it still works. Uh, because I still make a certain type of content and I monetize it in a certain way. So, that channel makes more or less about $400 per 1,000 views on average. So, so it’s still making a ton of money, but you can make way more money if you do niche educational content. And that is what I recommend that people start off with is just talking about a very niche subject and doing that first. And I’m going to get into that here in a moment because you don’t always have to stay with a niche subject if you set your channel up with the hybrid personal brand method, which is something that we’ll talk about here in a moment. So, let me just give you an example of niche educational content. So, this is the organic chemistry tutor. He makes about 36 to 100,000 a month on this channel according to view stats. And that is just from AdSense alone. If he’s properly monetizing, he’s easily making far more than that. So, if you just do that $10 to $20 per 1,000 views, he’d probably make about 136 to 250,000 a month from this channel. Now, the interesting thing is he didn’t upload in 62 days and he was still making that much money from the channel. And that is because he has been uploading these videos for a long time. And each video is like a little soldier that just goes out and makes him money forever. Okay, here’s another one. Scotty Kilmer. He’s in his 70s and he makes content helping people save money on their cars. Now, one of the great things about him, he is quite entertaining. When I say make educational content, I am not saying by any means that you cannot be entertaining. You can definitely be entertaining. Scotty Kilmer is hilarious if you ever watched him, but he basically made $24 million from YouTube and he even said in an interview that he made more money in one month on YouTube than he saved in 40 years as a mechanic. Absolutely insane. And basically what he does is he just helps people pick the right cars, maintain their cars, fix their cars, and he helps them with different car related products. That’s his whole channel. And basically this stuff is dead simple for him. And that’s one thing I want to point out with the organic chemistry tutor as well. This stuff is dead simple for him. He’s just talking about stuff that he was already tutoring people on and he just did the same thing, but he recorded it on camera and posted it online. Right? So, a lot of the time the best niches are very boring quote unquote niches where you’re literally just doing like talking about very similar stuff to what you do every day in your job, but you’re just recording it and posting it online or what you do every day with something that you’ve gotten really good at already and you’re just recording it and posting it online. Right now, this is the craziest one. Physics Walla, he came from a small village in India and his very first videos were in his parents’ basement and you can see how bad they are. It’s a blurred face. uh bad lighting, can’t even see the board, etc., etc., but it didn’t really matter. He started making videos about these standardized tests in India, and the standardized tests are incredibly important for your future. So, it’s kind of like the ACT and the SAT in the US, but kind of like on steroids, honestly. But he just made videos about these certifications in standardized tests. And at first, he was just talking about physics, and then he expanded to other stuff. So, let’s just put this in perspective how specific this is. physics India standardized tests only very specific how he was tutoring people and helping people he started making these videos and he kept going and then he launched a company that’s now worth $5.2 billion called Physics Walla from his YouTube channel it’s an educational app and it’s now worth $5.2 billion okay and it all started in his parents’ basement just making physics videos and he is probably richer than Mr. Beast, right? And I’m chances are none of you have heard of Physics Walla unless you heard of him from me, right? Cuz nobody even knew about this guy until I did the research on him. But chances are nobody knew about this guy. But chances are almost all of you know who Mr. Beast is. And yet this guy is making more money than Mr. Beast. And that just shows how powerful educational content is. Okay? And it all started in his parents’ basement just making physics videos, teaching what he was already teaching people on a day-to-day basis, but he just posted it online, right? And now he’s probably richer than Mr. Beast. And that is the power of educational content because you are solving people’s problems. So now I’m going to hand you the formula for how to do all this. And there is a secret formula. And these are the most important things. So if I don’t talk about it, it’s because it’s not important. So first thing you need a is a hypothesis statement. Okay? a niche hypothesis statement. Now, generally speaking, there are three niches out there that are the most profitable niches, and that is health, wealth, and relationships. With that being said, there are a lot of other great niches outside of that, and you can make money in all of those other niches as well. But generally speaking, if you’re confused about what niche to go into, you should look into health, wealth, or relationships. All right? And the reason for that is because almost everybody in the entire world has a problem in one or more of those three areas at any given time. Okay? Uh and then you need to go ahead and make what’s known as a niche hypothesis statement. So what you want to do is you want to pick a niche. And by the way, while we’re doing this, go ahead and comment what you think your niche is in the uh chat. Okay? Just comment what you think your niche is in the comment section in the chat. And I’ll probably read a few of them while we’re going through this. And I’m actually going to do this to illustrate something as well. So comment what your niche is. Okay?

    All right. So, and by the way, don’t just say health, wealth, or relationships, right? That’s that’s a a broad niche. Okay. Get get a little more specific than that. Okay. So, educational creators, I don’t know. Uh financial literacy for kids with special needs. uh relationship, life coach, homeschooling, color grading and editing, skincare, wealth, SEO, agency, trauma support, education, finances and wealth, Christopher creativity, options trading, spirituality and psychology, uh business owners in healthcare space, Bible, relation to today. I think my niche is helping aspiring authors publish their first book. Mary, English as a second language.

    Caroline, AI for seniors. Christina and creativity. Uh, music education and tech, AI and sci-fi, insurance, bodybuilding and physique progression, AI agency, don’t have one, why I’m here. Uh, how to mom when you didn’t have one, cat history and cat care, nutrition, bicycling for people over 60, dementia care, arranged loans for small businesses who’ve already been turned down by their local bank, substance use disorder, investigation, uh, investment migration, marketing for Gen X. Uh, awesome. My niche is faith-based and looking to end times comfort food. Okay, awesome. So, uh I know a lot of you are probably going to end up saying one or two word answers when you comment your niche, which which you did, and I don’t blame you for that. Um but that’s incorrect. And let me show you why. The niche hypothesis statement goes like this. You select a market or what people would traditionally call a niche, but I call it a market. And then you pick one specific problem that people in that market have. And you need to pick a specific problem, right? because they might have 20 different problems or 100 different problems or 500 different problems or 2,000 different problems. But then you find a specific solution uh for that one problem, right? So just pick one problem. That is your niche. So it’s going to look like this. I help X do Y or I help X overcome Y. Okay? X is the market. Y is the problem. Now there’s also I help X overcome Y by doing Z. That’s the solution. Z is something we can do later on. Don’t even worry about the Z part right now. Z is something we can do later on. In fact, a lot of people just don’t even include the Z. Like they they know themselves what the Z is, but they don’t actually include it publicly. But the important part is that you establish there’s a market of people and they have a problem that isn’t being solved very well. Okay? And you help them solve that problem. And that is the foundation of how markets work. Markets are all about solving problems efficiently. And if you want to give value and receive money by giving that value, then you really just want to focus on solving as many problems for people as possible, which is what YouTube allows you to do. Okay, so let me give you a few examples of how to do this. Now, I’m going to use the accounting market specifically because for some reason, I’ve worked with so many accountants. So, I’m going to use the accounting market, right? So, I’m going to show you a bunch of different levels. And all these people, by the way, are either people that are my clients I’ve worked with them or they’re business owners that I’ve met that I’ve confirmed are crushing it on YouTube. Okay. So, at the very first level is just teaching students basic accounting concepts. So, that’s more of a mass market channel. Um, it’s teaching people basic accounting concepts. So, it’s kind of like the organic chemistry tutor but for accounting. And the person is making really good money, probably pretty close to seven figures a year. And they’ve been doing it for a long time, but they’re making really good money. And people who are in this market would be interested in a video like what is a P&L right now. By the way, I’m going to go over five examples, but I could do 50. I could do 500. I could probably do 5,000 just in this one market alone. Just in accounting alone, I could probably do 5,000 subniches. Okay. Um, but you know, we only have limited time. So, I’m going to go over five. And plus, I want to go over five that I’ve actually met. So, you know, you know, for for sure that it’s it’s the real deal. Um, now let’s go to the second level, which is accounting specifically for existing accounting students or someone who just graduated with an accounting degree. So they got an accounting degree and they’re trying to pass standardized tests or pass certifications and that would be like physics walla but for accounting right because he was helping people pass standardized tests and certifications u so physics wala but for accounting and of course in the US typically so that’s the second one and I know for a fact that this niche is making multiple seven figures a year and people who are in this market would be interested in a video like how to become a CPA. Now notice I said this is for the US. Okay, you could probably do the exact same thing for maybe the UK or maybe Italy or whatever. You know what I mean? So, there you go. Like this is this is the process that’s going to get you started thinking about the niches, all the different niches out there, right? So, uh people in this market would be interested in a video like how to become a CPA. Okay. Third level, helping people land their first entry-level accounting job. That’s another business owner that I know. They’re making multiple seven figures a year. Okay. So, who is the market there? People who just graduated with an accounting degree and they’re trying to get their first entry-level job. That’s the market. And that is different than all of these other ones, right? It’s totally different content than all these other ones. People who are trying to refresh their knowledge in accounting do not want to get an accounting job, right? Totally different content. And people are in this market would be interested in a video like how to land a bookkeeping job. Okay. Fourth level, the people who are already accountants. They’re making $50 to $100,000 a year and they want to become what’s known as a financial controller. Okay, financial controller is a very high level accountant that makes like $200 or $300,000 a year. This is one of my clients as well. So, he helps people who are already accountants making 50 to 100,000 a year become financial controllers who can make 200 to $300,000 a year. Totally different types of content when you’re targeting that audience, right? And people who are in this market might be interested in a video like how to become a financial controller or what are the best certifications to become a financial controller or how to pass XYZ certification to become a financial controller or maybe what are the highest paying accounting jobs right someone who’s looking to upskill who’s already an accountant. And then finally the fifth level which is basically helping businesses hire accountants. So hiring and placing accountants in businesses. So in that particular case, it’s either going to be accounting businesses or big businesses that need accountants and they are actually trying to hire place really good accountants in their businesses. So even though you’re talking about accounting topics, it’s still a completely different audience and the type of content that you’re going to make is going to be completely different for all of those different ones. So I hope that you understand why it’s so important to have a niche hypothesis statement even though it’s all the same niche, right? It’s all accounting. It’s all the accounting niche. Because if I would have asked you if you’re in one of those niches, hey, what’s your niche? You probably would say, oh, it’s accounting, right? Just like all these people for instance, that commented their niche and they probably said something relatively short like plants education or marriage relationship or teaching, etc. That’s why you need to have a niche hypothesis statement. If you don’t know your niche hypothesis statement, you have lost from the beginning. It is so important to have a proper niche hypothesis statement. Now, did you find that valuable? Give a thumbs up if you thought that was valuable. And if you want the niche validator GPT, uh, both in the chat GPT version as well as the new Claude version that we’re going to be giving out in a short while cuz that’s going to help you really dial in your niche if you already have an existing niche or find the proper niche for you if you don’t have the niche already. Awesome. Okay, cool. We’ll be giving that out here in a short while. Okay. Oh, yeah. And people in this market would be interested in a video like how to hire the best accountants, right? Obviously. Okay, so now I’m going to be handing you the blue pill to make you invincible as a creator because once you have your niche down, you’re already way better than most people. Most people do not get that far, right? They’re just throwing stuff against the wall. They have no idea what they’re doing. But even once you have your niche down, you need more than that. You need what’s known as a hybrid personal brand because you probably know what personal branding is. But when you mix personal branding with the correct niche and our YouTube automation AI system, you have what’s known as a hybrid personal brand. Now, one thing you need to understand is I just told you that you have to have a niche hypothesis statement, but I’m going to say something that’s probably going to confuse you a little bit, and that is you are the niche. So many people get this wrong. They think their niche is what makes them successful as an educational channel content creator. But when you have a hybrid personal brand, you are the niche. So yes, you are going to start extremely niche with the IHEL XDY uh framework, right? Your niche hypothesis statement. But once you get traction well when you build your channel in the correct way uh where you’re building a hybrid personal brand, you can then easily pivot to something else. Okay? So let me give you an example. Alex Heroszi when he first started posting on YouTube four years ago, his niche hypothesis statement was I help gyms do marketing and sales. And now he can talk about anything. Now, obviously, he’s really well known for his business stuff with all of his different types of businesses, but now he can talk about his unconventional diet. This is why you’re not happy. He talks about his book launches. He talks about how to stop wasting time. And yeah, I mean, now he can talk about anything that he wants, but he started niche. And if he tried to do that from the beginning, he probably wouldn’t have had nearly as much success as he has right now. He started off being the king of a puddle, then the king of a small pond, then the king of a lake, then the king of a river, then the king of a sea, and then the king of the ocean. Right? You got to start small. You have to start niche. But don’t make your channel in such a way where you can’t expand it. Right? That’s how we teach people how to do it with the hybrid personal brand method. Okay? Because when you create a hybrid personal brand, there are so many different ways that you can monetize your channel. And there’s also so many different directions that you can go both in terms of the content uh uh and the topics as well as how you can make money with your channel. Right? So, AdSense, affiliate marketing, sponsorships, job opportunities, uh networking, memberships, SAS, high ticket offers. Alex Mosiezi opened up basically like an investment fund. So, he has a portfolio of companies that he invests in and he gets his deal flow from YouTube. This is one of the rarest businesses on Earth. It’s called a family office, right? And and he’s he uses YouTube to send the majority of his deal flow to his family office, way more than all the other platforms combined. So, he’s making money from eight and nine figure business owners, and he’s making millions from each one, all the way down to doing a SAS that costs a few dollars a month. Uh, you could do memberships, you could do courses, digital products, and so many other things, even physical products. The point is, all of these different business models work when you have a hybrid personal brand, traffic, and you have distribution. People that actually know, like, and trust you on your channel because you built it with the hybrid personal brand method, and you’ve helped them solve a bunch of their problems. So, they see you as an authority. And not only that, you can even sell the brand or step down as the face of the brand in some cases. So, let me just give you an example of that. Doug Demiro or uh uh basically he launched this website called carsandbids.com. Okay, so you can see carsandbids.com. carsbandbs.com. He launched this website from his YouTube channel. Of course, Doug Demiro is a very famous car reviewer on YouTube. And then he sold this website that he launched for $80 million, right? And the reason that he was able to do that is because of the fact that they built their channels with the hybrid personal brand method. And this is a secret way of building your channel that makes it so much easier to do whatever you want in the future. And it makes it to where it’s almost impossible to fail on YouTube because uh because basically the way that it works is even if it doesn’t work out at first, as long as you build your channel with a hybrid personal brand method, you can then easily just pivot to something else, right? Because none of us can predict the future. But what we can do is build a channel that can evolve as things change over time, as we evolve, as the markets evolve, as things happen in the world, we can build a channel that can do that so that it has the ultimate advantage, which is that it can adapt to changing circumstances. Okay? So, if something doesn’t work when you first try it, as long as you build it with a hybrid personal brand method, you can try other ways, right? Um, if let’s just say 3 years from now, you don’t really like making you’re a different person. you’re you’re you grow and evolve and change yourself. You want your channel to be able to grow, evolve, and change with you, right? You want a business and a YouTube channel that can evolve as you evolve, right? It’s really important to do that just on a personal level, but also on a more logical business level. It’s really important to do this. Okay? Um, and if you think this only applies to big educational channels, well, you’re just wrong. Here’s an example of our clients. This worked for Waqen. So, Waqen was 18 years old when we first started working with him. He was a freshman in college and he was making all kinds of random content on study skills, productivity content, all kinds of stuff like that and he was making content on engineering as well because he was basically a business and engineering double major and he wasn’t really making any money, right? But we basically sat down, we hashed out his niche and it became very clear that he should help foreign exchange students get into elite universities in the US. Why? Because he was a foreign exchange student that got into an elite university in the US. So, we really dialed in his offer and the very first month that he launched or very close to the very first month, he made around $80,000 and he actually got so many client requests that he was oversubscribed and he had to stop making YouTube videos and weightless customers trying to buy his program because he just had too many people wanting to work with him immediately. Now, that’s a pretty good place to be as an 18-year-old business owner, right? But we joked around that he was making more money than the president of his university, which he was, which is pretty crazy to think about as a freshman. Here’s another example. Richard, we helped him go from making almost no money whatsoever on YouTube and also being one of the busiest clients I’ve ever worked with. He was a product manager at a Fortune50 company, basically working like 80 plus hours a week, had a brand new baby, had lots of investments, like real estate properties he had to manage, etc., etc., all kinds of different stuff like that. Just a super, super busy guy. and he was basically able to grow his channel uh to $12,000 in a single month despite the fact that he probably could only work about two hours a month. So yeah, I’m very proud of this case study because it was quite difficult to get him results because he could only work a couple hours a month. Here’s another example guy. This one is a really cool story. He’s actually disabled and his goal before he worked with us was just to make a couple thousand extra dollars a month because he’s close to retirement. So, he literally just wanted to make 1 to2,000 extra dollars a month cuz that would make a massive difference for him in his quality of life in retirement. So, he’s disabled. He has what’s known as tenitus. And uh this is constant ringing in the ears. And this is something that a lot of veterans have. My dad has it as well. He’s a veteran. And it’s very debilitating. And so he made this channel where his goal was to just make a couple extra thousand dollars a month in retirement, one to$2,000 extra dollars a month, and help people who either already have tenitus uh basically treat it and and maintain it so that it doesn’t get worse um and manage it or help people to just not get it in the first place, right? And so that was his dream is to make a 1 to2,000 extra dollars a month uh helping people with the ailment that he personally has. Right? when life gave gave him lemons, he wanted to make it into lemonade. And that was his version of rich, right? So, he ended up making $1,500 a month. And this was a brand deal, an ongoing $1,500 a month brand deal with less than 500 subscribers. 446 to be exact. Um, and now he’s closing in on 10,000 subscribers. So, he’s making way more money than that. But the point is, before he even got to 500 subscribers, never mind even a th000 subscribers, he was making money just from sponsorships alone. So, if you think you can’t make money with a small channel, you absolutely can. And this was his actual brand deal, which is an ongoing sponsorship. So, one simple rule, guys, to make this happen. Start simple and scale fast. You do not need a fancy camera, fancy editing, a million-doll studio, high production quality, uh top tier video editing skills, and you definitely do not need to make highly entertaining content. Here’s what you do need, and these are the most important things by far. Viral video ideas. And not just viral video ideas in terms of getting a lot of views, but getting the right views. Okay, so this is the most important thing uh after dialing in your niche. The idea is the single most important thing that will make or break your video. Okay, then you need titles and thumbnails to get clicks. Then you need an effective intro for video retention. And then you need to just deliver value to your audience. And that is a lot easier to do than you think. Now let’s talk about the most important out of all those things. And that is the viral video ideas. So I got this from Carl Icon. He’s in the finance industry and basically he would find businesses that were making a ton of money despite being ran terribly. And I took that idea from the finance industry because I think some of the smartest people in the world work in finance and I applied it to YouTube. So I was the first person to ever do this. So what I did is I found YouTube videos that had a lot of views despite not having that many subscribers. That’s important. It’s important that they don’t have that many subscribers because if they have a big channel, they have a big audience. And if they have a big audience, they’re going to watch everything that that person puts out, right? So, had a lot of views despite coming from a small channel and despite the video itself being either mediocre or preferably bad. So, the thumbnail, the title, the intro were either mediocre or preferably bad. So, just as an example, this guy right here, you can see his face is blurry, the door is in better focus than his face, his audio is really bad, and he was drunkenly ranting for 25 minutes about college degrees, and yet he still got 760,000 views, even though it was an objectively bad video. This was the thumbnail, by the way, right here. Then what you do is you steal the idea of the video and you make a better version of the video. So the mo most worthless college majors, you can change the keywords a little bit or just keep the same keywords and boom, the most useless degrees. That’s what I did. The point is you just keep the title very similar. You change it slightly, make a better video, and boom, that’s what happens. So I made a better video with almost the same title, right? The most useless degrees versus the most worthless college majors. Very similar. I made a better thumbnail, a better video, and it blew up and got millions of views. And this is what I’ve been doing for the last uh six years now, guys. This is my secret. Okay, the icon method is the most powerful way to do it. Now, there’s a bit more to it than that, uh but that’s the gist, okay? So, there’s different ways of doing the icon method. For instance, if you know that there’s certain types of videos that make a lot of revenue, then instead of doing it for views, you can do it for revenue. That’s typically what we do it for. So, there’s different versions of the icon method. You can also do the icon method on other platforms. There’s different ways of doing that, but this is the uh most simple and most straightforward version of the icon method. And this is the gist of how it works. So once you get these down and you join our program, finding video ideas will never be an issue for you ever again, right? And finding the video idea is the most important thing. And also once you get this down, giving the value uh with our AI systems that we’re going to give you a taste of here in a minute, uh liter quite literally your videos will do all the work for you. every single one of your videos will be like a little soldier that you post and it just it for the rest of its life, its only job is to go out, get you views, get you subscribers, and make you money. Now, let’s talk about what it takes for you to be a part of this YouTube gold mine with no daily uploads if you don’t want to, no complicated editing, no being on camera if you don’t want to, no expensive gear or software, no burnout or guesswork, no algorithm chasing, and no spending months without monetization. Instead, you’ll get an ondemand content plan tailored to you, a hybrid model that works with or without your face, proven video uh templates plus AI assisted scripts, automated systems for publishing and repurposing, one day per month content workflow, scalable monetization from day one, and top tier coaching behind 7Figure YouTube brands. Introducing the content growth engine. This is the easiest and fastest way to grow a cash printing YouTube channel, even if you’re not an influencer. So, click the link in the chat to access this early because there’s a few bonuses that we’re only giving to people that get this early access to and you will have a higher chance of getting the bonuses if you actually book a call now. Or you can type in go.shinhome.com/coaching or you can scan the QR code with your phone. So, here’s what you get access to inside of CG. And by the way, guys, uh we’re going to go over these bonuses here. You’ll get all of these when you join the program, but some of them you don’t even need to join the program to get. And by the way, who’s booking a call right now? Go ahead and comment in the chat if you’re booking a call because we have a special bonus for you. First, we’re going to help you pick a profitable niche. So, we’ll either help you dial in your existing niche and really make sure that you have a great niche hypothesis statement. Um, because most people their niches are kind of messed up to be honest with you, even if they already have a niche. Um, even successful businesses often times their niches are messed up. Um, so first we’re going to help you pick a profitable niche or dial in your existing niche. Okay? And we have a bunch of YouTube coaches with 100K subscriber plaques, the absolute best of the best. They will help you find and pick the best niche. And that niche will be in between being the most profitable one where it’s sustainable, it’s profitable, and also something that you’re passionate about. Next is the mindset section. So, you might be having a hard time starting even though you just have to make videos consistently to be successful on YouTube, right? And I get it, it sounds easy, but it’s hard to put your mind into making videos or having success on YouTube. And you probably would have started YouTube or you would have had success on YouTube already if it was that easy, right? And even business owners sometimes face mindset issues. This module helps with that. This helps remove all the overthinking, all the imposttor syndrome. And it helps you take action fast. And this is actually when I ask people, these first two are usually their favorite modules. The niche selection and then the the core foundations and the mindset section, right? Um the niche selection, people are just obsessed with that one. And then also the mindset section. People find it incredibly useful. Even though a lot of people don’t really think that they need the core foundations, uh they end up loving it. Right? And one thing I’ll say about this is it’s going to help you understand that if you follow our system, success is inevitable. Right? If you follow the system, you will understand that when you go through this on a deep, logical, emotional, almost on a spiritual level that if you follow the system, success is inevitable. The only way to lose the game is to stop playing the game. Okay? It is just a matter of time before you’re going to have a video that pops off. Right? For some people like my brother, it was the very first video that he posted. For some people, it takes 5, 10, 15, 20 plus videos. But if you follow the system, success is inevitable and you will understand that on a logical level when you go through this. Number three is the content genesis system. Now, this is the one that helps you find viral video ideas in your niche that will have a higher chance of getting views and going viral. And in my opinion, this is my favorite module because I think this is the most valuable one out of all of them. This is where the secret is here, which is finding the right video ideas. Okay? If you find the right video idea, everything else can be pretty mediocre or in some cases even a little bit bad and your video’s still probably going to do well. If you have a bad idea, everything else can be phenomenal and the video is probably not going to do well. It’s it’s just that simple. Like the video idea is that important. But the next most important thing is the holy trifecta. This is where we go over how you can make your thumbnail, your title, and your intro to package the viral video idea to have the highest chances of success for your video to get views. So, all three need to be good and you also want to make sure that they’re congruent as well. So, you got to have you have a winning idea, but you got to package that idea in the right way so that people actually know what the winning idea is, right? Next is the script writing alchemy system where we help you write scripts with the help of AI to get your writing time down to less than 1 hour per video or in many cases way less than that. So, just as an example, my brother who got his video to 800,000 views only spent about 15 minutes on the script. In fact, it was less than 15 minutes. And we show you the exact same system. Next is the viral video creation system where we actually turn things into a system, right? And this is what makes it possible to only have to work one or two hours a week on your YouTube channel. Uh, and in some cases, if you’re a very busy business owner, zero hours a week or just a couple hours a month, right? So, this is done with systems and our own in-house AI that we only allow our clients to use. Uh, so the niche validator that we’re going to be dropping here in a minute is just a fraction of a sample of the power of the AI systems that we give to our clients, right? We have systems for every problem that you could imagine on YouTube. And lastly is the cash code system. This is where we actually make money out of the views that you’re getting, even if you’re not getting a lot of views. And it’s very, very important that you’re actually monetizing correctly. And that is just a taste of what’s inside of the community. You don’t just get one or two tools, you get the entire arsenal. Custom GPTs, Claude skills, all built for one thing, which is growing and monetizing your channel. And our clients are getting the updates in real time, and they are loving it. And the tools that we don’t build ourselves, we tell you exactly which ones are worth your time. Gemini, Descript, Pixels, and much more. So whether you run ChatP or Cloud, there’s a tool sitting here ready for you. No guessing, no piecing it together yourself. This is just a taste of wait of what’s waiting inside. And this is just a peek inside of our private community. Real wins coming in every single day. One member just hit 10,000 subscribers, 1 million views, grew 5x in uh a few months. Another finally landed their first 10 leads straight from YouTube. Um, another one closed a $75,000 year contract inbound straight off the platform. Uh, someone else made their first 10K from YouTube. Uh, someone 4xed their subscriber count in a single month. Another one crossed 5,000 subscribers. Uh, 39,600 views on a channel with just 800 subs. This isn’t a course that you buy and forget about. This is a community of people winning together every single day. And these are just a few, right? This is what the group looks like on any given day. And this is the exact system that’s responsible for 0 to 10K in just 18 days. Here’s an example. Bro, I just hit my first 10K within 18 days of launch. I don’t even have 1K subs yet. This is nuts. Thank you, man. This is the exact system that’s responsible for these results as well, right? Usually there’s a shaded graph. This is what a typical uh YouTube graph will look like if you’ve ever seen the YouTube studio. Um, typically there’ll be this little shaded region under your YouTube views graph. And it basically says like this is the normal amount of views that you usually get. Right now, you’ll notice there’s no shaded region right here on this one. Right? And that is because this person had been posting for 5 years and they’d never had a single video get 100,000 views. and that there is an actual shaded region, but it’s so low that it literally blends in with the x-axis. Like we were looking at this and we were like, “Whoa, is the studio glitching out? What’s going on?” But it turns out there actually was a shaded region. It was just so low is blended in with the x-axis. And it’s because this person had basically barely gotten any views for a 5-year period. And then their very first video with us got over 100,000 views. Okay. So, this person right here started with us uh this this client and uh got to, you know, 9 953 $1,000 a month just from AdSense alone almost immediately. 800 uh 8.4,000 subscribers as well. And this is just the money they’re making from AdSense, right? So, they’re making more money outside of AdSense. This person right here is literally the king of their niche. This is we are the king makers and the queen makers in many different niches. There’s probably about 10 or 20 different like larger niches out there where we are the king makers and the queen makers in. And yeah, this person, it’s a pretty pretty well-known niche, too. Uh, very competitive and they’re literally number one in their niche. 8 million long form views, $50,000 a month, making multiple eight figures a year in this niche. Probably about 20 to 30 uh million a year. This person right here, so far out of five bookings, uh, they closed four of them, right? So, literally closing 80% of their calls brand new, never taking sales calls before. That’s the power of YouTube. The calls that come from YouTube, they’re you’re basically a cashier. You don’t have to have that many sales skills. Your sales team doesn’t have to be that good. The calls that come from YouTube, you’re essentially a cashier, right? Uh because they’re already pre-sold. Here’s another one. Bill transformed his YouTube channel’s impact among 177K subs. He’s now making over 30,000 plus per month at the time of this testimonial. Basically, he said, “Shane helped me out with his keyword research, titles, and thumbnails, as well as turning my YouTube channel into a business.” So, he turned his YouTube channel from a liability, sucking up all his time to a business that works for him while having a full-time job. Sean was stuck making 30,000 a month, and he scaled all the way up to over 500,000 a month. He’s another one of the kings of his niche. He’s literally number one in his niche, which is Amazon KDP. So, he said, “Shane knows what he’s doing. He’s not another fake guru. His program goes beyond just tactics, teaching you how to build a personal brand and master the back-end systems that actually drive revenue. Cheryl, uh, she helps people through spiritual awakenings. And before joining us, she was stuck under 50 subscribers for years with a great message, but no strategy. We gave her the system, the content strategy, the title and thumbnail frameworks, and the hands-on coaching. And she immediately grew to 9,000 plus subscribers and got monetized in months. One video hit 128,000 views, and now she’s landing brand deals and making money, right? So, this is what happens when you stop guessing and start following our system. And Jen’s here is another example. So, she was actually in your position about 2 or 3 months ago. She was literally watching a live training just like this 2 or 3 months ago wondering if she should join the program. And she’s a healthcare professional. And before joining us, she was a complete beginner, no idea what to make, no experience. And in her own words, she said, “I hadn’t dipped my toe into YouTube.” And now she has 22,000 subscribers and her channel got 2.4 million views already. So, two of her videos already went over 500,000 views. And these are numbers that most creators chase for years. And she built it all on what she already knew, which is healthcare navigation. This is the stuff that she was already talking about to her patients every single day. She just recorded it, put it on camera, and posted on the internet. And and now she’s making a full-time income, absolutely crushing it, probably making more than she’s making in her job already, right? And she just got started, right? So, if you’re a healthare professional or just a professional in general that solves problems for people, uh there’s so many boring niches out there where you can make a full-time income just literally talking about what you’re already talking about and then posting it online, right? So, this could be for you. And this is what happens when you follow the system. So, I know all kinds of different people who work in the YouTube industry. I basically know all the different coaches, the consultants, the agencies, etc. And I’ll tell you kind of how this industry works, right? Usually the highest paid people, the best of the best work with big corporations and so they’re going to be doing like seven figure contracts a year and in many cases working with these big companies is at least a six-f figureure contract, right? The second highest tier of what you can offer is probably what’s called a build and release offer. So I have some friends that do this and basically they’re like one of the very few people that actually are really good on YouTube besides myself that really knows what they’re doing and they charge $300,000 to do a build and release. And this is basically where they work with like seven, eight, and nine figure companies and they build out their YouTube channels for the first 3 to 6 months. They hire everybody for the channel. They build it out. They figure out exactly how the channel works and then they release it to them once everything is working and they’ve hired the team out to them. And they usually charge $300,000 to do that. Now, I myself have attended four masterminds that are 50,000. Last year I was in two. This year I’m in another two. And these are extremely valuable. I learned tons of stuff from these masterminds and I pass it down to you guys. So, there’s a lot of YouTube masterminds out there that are like $50,000 and it would easily cost you 35,000 in mistakes if you were to try to do it on your own. And 25,000 is more than a fair investment to make to even get one of the knowledge contained in the content growth engine. But a special offer only for this workshop when you book a call within the next 24 hours. We are offering something that we’ve never offered before. We’re going to talk about some of the bonuses that we’re giving away. And by the way, go to go.shenh.com/coaching, click the link in the chat or scan this QR code that you’re going to see right here. Bonus one, this is a big one. You get a one-on-one dominate your niche call with me personally. Now, let me tell you why this matters. When I when I was starting out, I had a mentor named Sam. I actually mentioned him before. He was doing YouTube for his wedding photography business. And Sam showed me how to make money on YouTube, even with a small channel. And that changed everything for me. That is when I started earning big, not because I got lucky, but because someone who already figured it out, showed me the ropes. And that one relationship changed the entire direction of my channel. And that is exactly what this call is. Everything that I have learned building a channel to 1.5 million subs and over 1 million in revenue applied directly to your niche, your channel, and your situation. So, this is worth $12,000 easily. But this is only for five of the first people who sign up within the next 24 hours. So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. And this is what the actual coaching looks like, right? And I can already see people signing up um as I’m doing this. So, don’t wait on this one. Go to go.shinhome.com/coaching. Scan that QR code or click the link in the chat.

    Bonus two is the viral titlemaker GPT. Easily worth $7500. Now, if you sat down to find winning ideas yourself, researching what is working, checking view counts, studying channels, you’re going to be looking at weeks of trial and error. And most people still pick the wrong ideas. Hire someone to do it, a real content strategist who knows YouTube, you’re going to be paying $7,500 easily. So, we built a custom AI tool that finds proven video ideas for your niche in about 30 seconds. And this isn’t generic AI spitting out random titles. It is built on the icon method. It finds what’s already working and hands you a better version. The titles, the hooks, the angles, all of it. And you get it both ways. A chat GBT version as well as the new Claude AI version, which we think is even better. So, whatever AI you already use, you’re covered. And this is included as a bonus, too. So, go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Here’s what it actually looks like. And again, whether you use catchb or cloud, we include it for both um for this tool as well as all of our other tools. So you give it a video that’s already performing. It reverse engineers why it works. Then it hands you five high converting titles and hooks for your channel. No guessing, no staring at a blank screen. The winning ideas are already out there. This tool just finds them for you. So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. Bonus three is the NoClick Script Writer Pro. This is worth $8,000. This is the ultimate content creation tool. You tell it the goal of your video to inform, to entertain, to sell, and it turns your spoken ideas into a polished, attention-grabbing YouTube script. It captures your tone, your style, your voice, so that it actually sounds like you. And just like that, uh, just like that last one, you get it both ways. Chat GPT or Claude, whatever you already use. If you hire a professional content team to do this, like a script writer, a content strategist, someone who understands YouTube, you’re going to be paying 3 to 5,000 a month minimum. This does it all in seconds. So go to go.shanhome.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. And this is what it looks like. The same tool running in both ChatJBT and Claude. It walks you through niche validation, your audience, your format preference, dialing in exactly who you are. Then you tell it the goal of your video and it writes the full script, a real YouTube script with hooks, structure, and a tone that matches your channel. So go to go.shane.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Bonus four is the high converting thumbnail toolkit. This is worth $10,000. Your thumbnail is the first thing that people see before the title, before the hook, and before anything. If your thumbnail doesn’t stop the scroll, nobody clicks, nobody watches, and it really doesn’t matter how good your video is. If you hired a thumbnail designer who actually knows YouTube, you’re going to be paying $1,500 a month easily. That’s $18,000 a year. And they might make a thumbnail that works for gaming, but not for educational content. So, this is a psychology behind every thumbnail. This is my entire thumbnail system. The guide, the templates, the swipe files, the framework. You get it all as a bonus. So go to go.shenhus.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. And this is what’s inside. On the left, you get the full guide. The secret of creating viral thumbnails, the psychology behind why certain thumbnails get clicks and others don’t. On the right is the thumbnail vault. Fully editable templates in Canva. Uh you just click file, make a copy, and it’s yours. And you see those annotations. That is me breaking down exactly why each thumbnail works. Where the face goes, how big the head is, the rule of thirds, the spacing, all of it explained. So, you’re not just getting templates, you’re learning the framework so that you can build your own. So, go to go.shinhomus.com/coaching, scan the QR code, or click the link in the chat. Bonus five is the profitable hidden niche vault with live updates. This is worth $6,997. And this is the one that everyone asks me about. What niche should I start in? What niches are making money right now? What niches are nobody talking about? This vault answers all of that. Profitable niches that most people don’t even know exist. And we update it live so that you’re not looking at niches that worked two years ago. You’re seeing what’s working right now. So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Bonus six. I was literally looking at this last night, by the way. Like I was literally looking at this and updating it last night. Um, bonus six is the live icon method deep dive recordings with five real clients worth $4,997. So, this is not me explaining the icon method on a whiteboard. Uh, sorry, uh, on a whiteboard. This is me doing it live. Okay, so not me explaining it. This is literally me doing it live with real clients in real niches. Okay, so you get to watch over my shoulder as I find winning video ideas for five completely different channels. You see exactly how I think, what I look for, what I skip, and why. Most people hear the method and still don’t know how to apply it to their niche. This fixes that. So, you’re basically sitting in on $5,000 worth of private coaching sessions completely free. So, go to go.shenhome.com/coaching. Uh uh uh scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Now, for those of you who stayed until the end, we made something special for you. This is the YouTube niche profit accelerator GPT. And this one is different from all of the other bonuses. This is an AI tool that takes your niche and it maps out exactly how to make money from it. Not just AdSense, we’re talking affiliate deals, digital products, coaching offers, sponsorships, the full picture. Because here’s the thing that most people get wrong. They pick a niche and then they hope the money situation figures itself out later. That is backwards. This tool shows you the money map before you even record your first video. So, you know exactly what you’re building towards from day one. And like every tool we give you, you get it in both ChatBT and Claude, whatever you already use. Now, here’s the catch. This bonus is worth $12,000 and you get it for showing up to the call that you booked. That’s it. You book the call, you show up, and you get it. So, go to go.shom.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. The second you uh show up to the call you booked, you get instant access on the spot. And whether you like chatgpt or cloud, you can use it either way. This isn’t some watered down freebie. It’s the same tool that we use inside of the content growth engine, and it’s yours for life. So, go to go.shenhus.com/coaching, shane.com/coaching. Scan the QR code or click the link in the chat. Uh, next is the 90-day YouTube growth guarantee. And this is absolutely priceless. You’ve got 90 days. You follow the program, you do the work, you show up, and if it does not work, you get your money back. Okay? I’m not asking you to trust me blindly. I’m asking you to test it and see for yourself. So, go to go.shenh.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. By the way, the reasons we’re so confident doing this is because first of all, we have the absolute best results in the industry by far. It’s not even close. Uh but the second reason we’re so confident in doing this is we actually sent out a survey asking our clients if they felt like they got an ROI from the program, a return on investment. 91% said yes. Okay, so 91% of people, just to put this in perspective, in the course industry, less than 10% of people even finish courses usually, right? It’s like this is a well doumented stat. So for 91% of people to feel like they got an ROI. The reason is because it’s not just a course, right? This is a coaching program. It’s one-on-one coaching. It’s also group coaching with a great community of people all winning together. And that is why we’re able to get such good results. Okay? So that is why we’re so confident in giving a ridiculous guarantee like this. Okay? So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code or click the link in the chat. We take all the risk on our side and you can just try it out. Right? So, let’s add this up. Eight bonuses, total value, $61,494. Now, remember, bonus one, the one-on-one session with me personally. That is only for five of the first people who sign up today. Once those spots are gone, they’re gone. And bonus 7, the YouTube niche profit accelerator GPT. You only get that if you book a call and you actually show up to it. That is it. Everything else is included free when you join. Now, this workshop special is only available for the next 24 hours. And after that, these bonuses go away. This exact package at this exact price with all the bonuses, you will not see it again. And let me clear something up real quick because I get this question every single time. The 24 hours is for booking the call, not for attending it. So if you book right now and your next open slot on the calendar is 3 days from now or 5 days from now, that’s totally fine. You’re still locked in. You still get every single one of these bonuses. You just have to schedule the call within the next 24 hours. So if you’ve been going back and forth on this, now is the time to move. So go to go.shinhome.com/coaching or scan the QR code right now. Book your free strategy call. we’ll figure out if we’re a good fit to work together or not. Worst case, we get on the call, you get some clarity on your niche, and you walk away with a plan. No pressure, no hard sell. But if it’s the right fit, we go to work. So go to go.shenhome.com/coaching, scan that QR code, or click the link in the chat. Now, one last thing, and this is important. Once you book, you’ll get two emails. One is from Calendarly, one is from the consultant that you booked with. Both are titled CGE Masterclass Call. So check your uh inbox right now. CGE masterclass call. Okay. So, check your inbox right now. Um, if you don’t see them, look in your promotions, your spam, your junk, or your all mail folders. Sometimes they hide in there instead of your main inbox. Those emails have your call details, right? So, find them and open them. Um, and yeah, with that being said, let me go ahead and uh uh Oh, shoot. Yeah, somebody had a tornado. Wow. Hope you’re okay, Emily. Jeez, I just read that. Wow. With that being said, uh let me uh uh yeah, we we had an earthquake a few weeks ago when we were doing a live training. Crazy. Crazy. Um yeah, hope hopefully Emily’s okay there. Uh with that being said, I I think somebody asked about the price. So, let me go ahead. I’m going to I’m going to talk about the pricing one time. We’re totally transparent with our pricing, but it is a little complicated, right? It really depends on what you need. We we serve a lot of different types of clients and that kind of thing. So sometimes we work with uh there’s always like 5% of people or so watching that are like you know big companies they’re either the CEO of a big company or uh an executive or somebody maybe on the marketing team for a big company. Um so for big companies we do work with big companies right uh but that is typically like their needs are typically totally different than smaller companies. So big companies often times will want to start entire YouTube division. Okay, content creation division uh department, right? So that means we need to come in, we need to hire people or train the people that they already have uh like a consultant almost like a consulting company, right? And we need to help them set up everything. We need to um uh you know hire and train and place people. We need to set up the systems, the SOPs, the all the tech like all all that stuff for them, right? So that is obviously completely different than the scope that someone at a smaller level would want, right? Um and so that is usually going to be like a six-f figureure contract or more. In some cases, I’ I’ve actually got an equity in those those types of companies, right? Uh then at the the kind of a middle level, so let’s just say you’re a multi-6, seven or eight figure business owner. A lot of the time those business owners will want us to help them uh hire like video editors, maybe a creative director, that kind of thing. um they want us to come in, help uh place people, train them, set up some of the SOPs and the systems and basically kind of just like release it to them. Sometimes they literally just want us to do the work for them, kind of like an agency, right? So, in that particular case, that’s going to range anywhere from like 12 to $60,000 depending. Okay. Um again, depends on the needs that they have. If they want us to literally just do the work for them, right? Then more of the beginner course, the CGE thing. um that is typically going to be uh about $9,800 or it’s going to be about $1,000 a month. You can even get it a little bit less than $1,000 a month. Now, we don’t accept that many of the people who apply. We only accept about 18%. In fact, it’s less than 18% of people uh who apply to work with us. Um but if we think you’re a good fit to work with us, we can we can work with you on on the payment side. Basically, if we think that you choose a good niche, which will help you actually dial your niche in on the call, but if we think that you chose a good niche and you’re going to be able to make money right away, then we can work with you on the payment side. Okay? So, we can get it down. We have in-house payment plans where we can get it down to like $1,000 a month. But, yeah, it’s a six-month coaching program overall. Uh $9,800 is the total price. We also have a few little upgrades and that kind of thing if you want us to do some of the work for you, right? Um, but if you just want us to teach you, right? Like like teach teaching somebody how to fish. You fish for somebody, you feed them for a day. You teach them how to fish, you feed them for the lifetime. If you just want us to teach you how to fish, in this case, teach you how to do YouTube, that’s going to be uh the the program, right? So, that is the pricing. Like I said, totally transparent with the pricing, but I don’t want to have to explain uh the different levels again. So, that’ll be the last time I explain that. Um, but yeah. All right. I’m going to go ahead and take questions now. So, I see a bunch of people booked. Uh Anthony, um Jack, Brennan, uh Dave, uh somebody just said that they were not a good fit. Yeah. So guys, we we’re having to get more and more strict just simply because we literally like I I I hate to say I hate to say this like I know this kind of sounds a little a little bit I don’t know like braggy, but um we’re we’re basically like the Harvard of of YouTube coaching programs, okay? So we’re we’re we have a lot of people that want to work with us, okay? And so we’re get having to get more and more picky because we just have capacity, okay? We we just can’t we can only accept so many people at a time, but we’re having to get a little more and more picky about who we accept, right? So, you know, one thing I’ll say is like like a big thing is when you apply, uh make sure that you follow the instructions on the page. Like there’s going to be a thank you page that pops up where where there’s a video and stuff. actually follow the instructions on that page. That’s going to give you a much better chance of us uh accepting you to work with us. So, make sure you do that. That’s very, very important, right? Um and then another thing is when you apply, there’s there’s two big reasons why we reject people. One of them is that you say that you can’t get started right away. Okay? So, if you’re saying like, “Oh, I’m going to get started in 3 months or 6 months,” we’re probably not going to work with you. Okay? So, that is one of the big reasons why we reject people. The second reason why we reject people is uh when you say um that uh uh you you have no money to get started, right? YouTube does it it is a business. You you typically you need a little bit of money to start a business, right? So you’re going to need a little bit of money to get started on YouTube. All right? So if you say you have absolutely no money whatsoever to get started, then we’re probably not going to uh uh uh uh have you book a call. Okay? So those are the big reasons. So, if you want to review your questions, that kind of thing, feel free to do that. Um, but yeah. So, Colin,

    Laura, Isaiah, Aaron, Daniel, Canura, um, iPhone, Glenda. Let’s see

    Kevin. Uh, yeah, Samuel, we’ll post it. Don’t worry, buddy. You’re all good. We’ll post it. just just if in fact if you scroll down you’ll probably see it. All good Samuel. Um because I I enjoy coaching Jessica. I love doing this. I love helping. I think I actually explained that during the training. I don’t know if maybe you weren’t paying attention or maybe you logged in late or something. I actually explained exactly why I’m doing that. Denise, how do we learn how to make and edit a YouTube video? Um, oh well it’s like first of all I have videos talking about that on the channel but we go into much more detail in the in the coaching program. Um, the script is what we recommend. We love the script for for beginners. We love to script for beginners. If you’re a bit more advanced, you’re making more advanced type of content. Um, we like Adobe Premiere Pro. Um, but but for beginners, Descript is a total no-brainer. Like everybody should be using Descript 100%. Um, awesome. just scheduled a call. Awesome. Good stuff. Tried again and wasn’t a good fit. Um yeah, so those are the two reasons why people get rejected, guys. I mean, I’m just I’m going to give you that information. Do with that information what you will. Um but yeah, and you know, guys, don’t only book a call if you are like serious about getting started as well, right? Um if you just want to, you know, if you’re you just wanted like a free consultation session, don’t don’t book a call. Um, let’s see.

    Uh, answered the how much does it cost question. Michael, Jen, Jeff, Jen, awesome. Jeff, man, a lot of Jens and Jeffs here. Chris, um, Zach signed up. Awesome. Great name, Zach. It’s my brother’s name. Um, booked. Booked. Awesome. Why did I get rejected? Like I said, guys, we, you know, again, we we literally just we can only take a certain amount of people at a time, right? Like we we this is true one-on-one coaching, right? So, our coaches can only hand handle a handful of clients at a time, okay? And we pay our coaches really well, okay? So we can’t, you know, it’s it’s difficult to find new coaches. So we can only uh find and train uh coaches at a at a you know, a certain clip, right? So that’s why that’s why um

    Bill, I keep seeing the same chat link, not what you’re talking about. Yep. Uh I think it should be in there, the chat link. Yeah, it’s a matter of being ready for the call. Shane has talked about during the presentation. Yeah, I think that’s that’s one of the big things. You got to be you got to actually be wanting to start soon, right? If you’re like, “Oh, maybe I’ll start in three months. We’re not going to take a call with you.” Like, book your call in 3 months in that case. Denise can’t complete the process and questionnaire. Really? Anyone else having that issue? Not being able to complete it. Uh Stephen, how do we access the prompts after signing up? uh we’ll give you full information on how to access uh all of our paid prompts after signing up for the coaching program. Brandon, sign up for the call, but can get the access to the gifts. Uh the well, there’s one gift which is the niche validator. That one we will be dropping here in a minute. Um so you’re good. I think it we might have already dropped it even if you scroll down. Um or scroll up depending on where you are in the chat. Uh awesome. Yeah, good luck on the call, Julia. Awesome. Denise, I’m trying to sign up, but I keep getting the loading indicator. Brennan, still booked. Are all the bonuses given out during the call?

    All the bonuses, man. You You really didn’t listen, did you? Okay, so I’ll I’ll say this one more time, guys. The one-on-one dominate your niche call with Shane is for five of the first people who sign up. So, the earlier you sign up, the higher the chance that you get this call with me is. It is randomized, but the earlier you sign up, the higher the chance you get a one-on-one uh strategy call with me where I will just teach you how to become like a the you know uh uh the category king or category queen in your niche. Okay. Um so that’s for five of the first people. It is randomized. Okay. So, if you’re seeing this right now, you still have a very good chance of getting that cuz typically we get most of the signups when we send out the replay. Okay? So, if you’re seeing this right now, you have a very good chance of getting this. All right? Uh, this one right here, the YouTube niche profit accelerator GPT. This is for showing up to the call. So, you show up to the call and you get this one right here. Okay? All the other ones you get when you join the program. Now, there is a uh niche GPT, okay? Like a niche selection GPT. That one we’re dropping in the chat. So, if you just scroll down, scroll up, you get that one. That one, that one will help you dial in your niche. I do actually highly suggest that you go over that, okay? Even if you think you have your niche dialed in, I’d highly suggest you go over that because often times it’ll help you dial it in even further. Okay? So, definitely go over that before your call for sure. Uh, David booked. Brandon booked. Ken booked. Awesome. Jennifer booked. Jeff, you got it. My pleasure, Jeff. Uh, Stephen, awesome. Denise, um, I’m trying to sign up. I’m having issues getting in. Anybody else having issues? And could you explain, if you’re having issues, can you explain what the issue is in plain English? Jeff White House, high five. Awesome. Jeff Denise, I will keep trying over the next few hours. Um, yeah. What what what is the issue? It looks like a few people are having issues. Please look into that thoroughly. Um, admins, thank you. Um,

    okay. Pay attention. Right. It is 1:30 a.m. I’m going to bed now. All right. Have a good one. Good night. Didn’t receive any emails. Um, check your spam. Check your all mail folder. Okay. Spam, trash, junk, and all mail. All mail is the easiest one to check. Check that. I promise you that if you saw the calendar and you selected a time in the calendar to book a call, I promise you that you you received an email. There is a 100% chance that you received an email cuz we send it from multiple different uh domains and Calendarly sends it. So, if you’re not seeing it, it’s because it’s in your all mail, your spam, or your trash. Look in one of those. It might be called something else on your email provider. Maybe it’s called promotions or whatever, right? But look in there. If you if you can’t find it, I don’t know what to tell you. Um, that would be the direct link to our type form. Yep. Okay. Uh, Emily, it’s safe now. Tornado passed by. Woo. Good stuff. I’m glad it passed by, Emily. Yeah, I was uh Yeah, I was I was like, whoa. When I saw that, I was like, “Oh, man.” Um, Jeff, yeah, great. Emily, awesome. Awesome. Uh, Denise, thanks, Stephen. Same thing. I think it’s my internet. I will keep trying over the next few hours. Really? Okay. Well, if multiple people are having the problem, then it might be something else. Are you trying on your phone or on the computer, Denise? Um, yeah. Admin, follow up with Denise, for sure. Uh, yep. Yep. It was it was an earthquake. Yep. Must not have thought the earth was rumbling that day. Um,

    the price is not 61,000, Denise. No, no, I went over the pricing in in great detail. It’s definitely not 61,000. Yeah, it’s uh I went over the pricing in detail and I said I’m not going to go over it again. So, if you want to know the pricing, you can watch the replay. Okay. Amir, is the coaching experience ideal for a couple who wants to start a podcast? I assume most of your clients are talking head. Yeah, I’ve I’ve worked with uh I I’ve done consulting for the number one business podcast in the world, which is $100 MBA. Uh they’re arguably the number one business podcast in the world. Um so yes, it does it definitely does uh work for work for a podcast cuz uh the the that’s the thing is like a lot of podcasts don’t realize that they should actually think about packaging and stuff like that and ideas even more um than than a YouTube channel. And that’s one of their biggest mistakes is they don’t do that.

    Okay, Jennifer, can you give an idea how much money? I I went great detail, step by step, told every single type of person who could apply how much money we typically charge in in great detail. I did it just a few minutes ago. So, no, I am not going to go over the pricing again. Grant, for smaller, poorer individuals, are there ways to get some of this value on a tight budget before scaling to a point of being able to afford it besides subscribing to your YouTube channel? Yeah, absolutely. Just watch the watch the content on YouTube, attend these live trainings. You can ask me literally any question you want about YouTube at these live trainings. We’ve had lots of people in this situation. Isaiah, for instance, was dirt like like he was broke uh getting fired from his job. Uh came to these live trainings and uh I I I saw him here every week. He’d ask me questions. He’d watch all my YouTube videos, uh, implement the training, the stuff that I told him to do at the live training, the stuff I told him to do when I answered the questions, the YouTube videos. He made $30,000 in a single month. 28,000, I think, to be exact. And, uh, then he joined the coaching program and now he’s making even more money. So, he’s crushing it.

    Yeah. So, click that link in the description uh in the chat, guys. Uh, scan the QR code. Click the link in the chat. Um and uh uh

    uh go or go to go.shinhomes.com/coaching. There we go. Okay.

    Okay. iPhone, it asks what I made. I’m not working currently as a homeschooled for the last 20 years. Just getting back to the work field. Um yeah, just go ahead and reapply again. I told you why it doesn’t accept people sometimes. Just go ahead and reapply with that knowledge that I just gave you. Um, if you have the money to get started, then you know, just like you have the money to get started, right, Tom? Seems like finding the videos that get lots of views but are not from channels with lots of views is the challenge. YouTube is a sea of information. Finding something in my niche or similar that fits the criteria would be a monster hurdle.

    finding the videos that get lots of views but are not from channels with lots of views is the challenge.

    Yeah. Yeah. I mean that it it is a challenge to find those, but when you do find them, it’s that’s it’s a gold mine. Yeah. But we it’s pretty easy for us to find them. That’s that’s what we teach our clients. Not easy for people who don’t know how to find them to find them. Yeah. Stephen, I’m in the marijuana industry. Can you help overcome my unique niche? Yeah. I mean, we’ve helped people in a lot of different industries. Um, yeah. I mean, to be honest, like that that is one of those subjects that is kind of like taboo. There’s probably some um you know, certain uh certain um uh unique problems you’re going to run into with that. Like you got to be a little bit careful about making content. For instance, um I know there was one guy, just as a kind of an anecdote, there was one guy who um basically made videos about rapping on different drugs. Um and he started running into some some issues from YouTube. YouTube was not happy about that cuz apparently he was actually, you know, doing the drugs while he was doing it. So there are some unique problems you can run into with that. Um, I sell products with this. Help me take my business to the next level. I haven’t done YouTube in this way, but I’m no novice to social media. Just haven’t mastered YouTube. Yeah, selling products is great because that means you already have something to sell. It’s going to make it even easier for you to uh uh start a profitable YouTube channel. Brandon, did you go over how to properly start a faceless page? I know you said you would circle back to explain how to do it in the correct way. Yes, I did. Yeah. So, Whiz of Ecom um is an example. That’s uh that was one of my clients. Uh he started Faceless. He eventually did a face reveal. And basically, one of the biggest things is you need to have some sort of cartoon image that represents you. The biggest thing is they need to feel like there’s a real human being on the other side. That is extremely important. They must feel like there’s a real human being on the other side of the screen. Okay. uh cartoon image helps with that. Using your real voice helps with that as well. Highly recommend it. Um and uh yeah. Yeah, those are those are a couple of the things. Okay, so yeah. Um yeah, th those are those are a couple of the biggest things. Overall, I recommend just doing a personal brand channel, right? It’s it’s just better in every single way imaginable. With that being said, uh if you do a faceless channel in the right way, you can make it work. That exact client that I showed you, Wiz of Ecom, he of course chose to reveal his face later on because he understood how much better a personal brand channel is. Uh but yeah, go. Coaching, scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. One thing is I will say guys is we do not accept faceless AI slop channels that want to use AI voices or use fake avatars. or anything like that. We we don’t work with people like that. If you want to spam the internet with AI slop, then go go join another program. We don’t we don’t work with people like that. Um yeah, but if you want to make actually valuable content that educates and helps people then but you just don’t want to show your face in some cases, we can work with people like that. But you have to do it in a very specific way. Okay. Um Talib, what about YouTube’s YPP policies and using AI? Yep, we’re 100% on top of it. We’ve had zero people get in trouble with AI. Um, zero people. Uh, whereas a lot of people outside of um, you know, teaching other stuff have gotten in trouble with AI. I’m a pastor. I’m not sure you can help me. Um, we we actually one of our coaches got a church to over 100,000 subscribers. Um, so yeah, and that we we could so we have we have definitely helped with that niche. Um, Daniel, what about anonymous? We’ve also helped like there’s um Dan and Kennedy on our YouTube channel that’s a Christian couple. They make content about finding your ideal Christian partner. Uh, that we’ve also helped them. They’re great.

    Okay, Jeff Keith, you have a great niche. Awesome. Yes, Isaiah, we have 100K followers across our gaming news social channels and are launching website to sell branded products. Would you focus on expanding the existing brand or leverage that audience to launch additional game specific channels? Uh where do you see the biggest revenue opportunities beyond merch? depends on exactly uh what what you’re talking about here. Um you did give me some context, but I probably need more context to help you more with that. So, I think you should really book a call. We could give you a lot more context and help you a lot more with that. Um okay. Branded products. Would you focus on expanding the existing brand or leverage that audience to launch additional game specific channels? Um I would say definitely uh focus on the existing. 100% focus on the existing. that’s going to be your best bet 100%. So my my general rule of thumb is don’t even think about changing your niche or launching a new channel or anything like that until you’re making like and this is this is actually on the lower side at least 300,000 a month, right? So multiple seven figures a year. Don’t even think about changing your niche or or launching a new channel or anything like that. you have not tapped out the potential of your main channel. And because of the fact that you have not tapped out the potential of your main channel, the smartest move for you would be to focus all of your attention, energy, and effort on that main like your main thing that you already have, right? So that that is how business is one, okay? Is just focusing on like doing more of what already works. Like if something is working, do more of it. Like I know as simple as that sounds, like that is that’s million-dollar consultant advice for you right there. As simple as that sounds, like that that is probably better than most consulting companies will give you. If you have something that’s working, do more of it, right? Before you think about doing anything else outside of what is already working, just do more of what’s working, right? Um yeah. So go.com/coaching. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat, guys. Um, let me see here.

    Okay, Daniel, can you comment on faceless channels? Does that work? Uh, I just made the comment on that. I think I pretty extensively made that comment. Bari, ready to start now? Hey, sign up for a call. Go. Uh, scan the QR code. Click the link in the chat. Sign up for a call. Okay. Um, iPhone 17, is there anything else I can do? I I’ve explained why we reject people. Those are the two main reasons. Um, which one of those reasons is why you’re being rejected? Like, think about it and then maybe redo the application. Rafaro, book a call, but Shane just clarified, definitely don’t have money to spend at the moment. How do I remove my booking? I will book once I can afford it. But, um, I think in your email, you should be able to, uh, cancel the call. Appreciate that. Regina, don’t have much money, but I’m ready to start. I want to use your guide to start. Awesome. Regina, book a call. Sounds good. Do it. Click that link in the chat. Denise, can you talk about what is the VIP program about to clarify? Yeah, VIP is a $47 thing where on Tuesday nights uh right before the Tuesday live training, I uh will get on with you guys at 600 p.m. Eastern time and answer your questions. So, if you sign up for the $47 VIP training, that’s what that is. So, if you don’t know what it is, then don’t worry about it. It’s like that’s after you sign up for the webinar. You see that? Uh Regina would like the niche GPT. Yep. Just scroll up and scroll down. You got it. It’ll be there. Um,

    uh, Ken, retired industrial troubleshooter. Awesome. Yeah, cool. I mean, hey, that sounds pretty good. I think maybe even teaching AI for older people would be really good, too. But yeah, that sounds good. Uh, usually when when people send really long paragraphs, I usually don’t read it out loud. I just read it in my head. Jennifer, can you repeat go over what before call? Oh, yeah. Uh, just on the thank you page, guys. Like, um, you know, there like make sure like there’s a big stop sign here. There’s a reason that there’s a big stop sign here. It’s it’s bec and there’s a reason that it says important. Do not close this window or click off yet. Right? So, make sure you go through these steps. Okay, make sure you go through these steps like watch like actually follow these steps. Watch that short video. Um, you know, you can access resource documents, step three of five, most common questions. We answer most common questions. Step four or five, uh, make sure you check, you know, check add to calendar, check our, you know, team master class, etc., etc. Step five of five, check these out. Watch these videos here because, you know, you’re probably going to relate to some of these people. There’s going to be people that came from the a similar background to you, similar age as you, um, you know, similar career, sim similar niche, etc., etc. You’re going to see a bunch of people in a bunch of different niches that got extreme success, uh, from the program or sometimes just a little bit of success, right? Sometimes people their goal is just to make a couple thousand extra dollars a month. You’re going to see examples of that as well. So, make sure you watch this, okay? Um, and your thank you page might look like this as well. Uh, make again, make sure you watch the video. Just follow all the instructions on the thank you page. Okay, very important. Um, we can post those thank you pages later on as well. Okay,

    Aaron said, “Booked a call. Thank you so much for your time.” You got it, Aaron. My pleasure. Mary, thanks, Raul. You got her, Mary. Um, awesome, Raul. Uh Justine, YouTube is one of the greatest, especially selling products. Our team can definitely help you with that. I highly suggest you book a call. Yes, good stuff, Justine. Okay, James, having trouble with the Claude niche validator. I got an error message. Hey guys, make sure you’re logged in to if you’re using the Claude skill, make sure you’re logged into Claude. If you’re using Chad GBT1, make sure you’re logged into Chad GBT. You don’t have to have a paid account, but you do need to make sure that you’re logged in. Okay. Isaiah, are you going to answer VIP upgrade questions? Yes. Uh, all of the information of that is detailed in extreme detail in the email that we sent uh that we send multiple times from multiple different domains. Okay. So, Tuesday night, 600 p.m. Eastern time um we we do the the VIP. Okay. That that’s when it is. So, it it’s going to be there. Uh Tim, during the call, will you determine if our channel will be profitable or a good fit? Uh yes. Yes, we we absolutely. That’s one of the big things we do. We’re evaluating if you’re a good fit to join the program. So yeah, go to go.janomomas.com/coaching, scan that QR code, click the link in the chat, and there’s literally no reason to not do it because uh you’re going to get a lot of value from the call whether we end up working together or not. Okay? You’re going to get a ton of value from the call. Now, by the way, I will say guys, we are probably going to increase the price soon because again, we just have so much demand and we just don’t have like we we only we can only accept so many people at a time. So, this could be the last time you can get in at that price point. Um, a lot of people didn’t believe us when we said we were going to increase the price. We increased it by over 50%. We used to sell it for 6,000, we increased it to 9.8,000. Uh, we increased it by over 50% and we still have too much demand. Okay. So, we are almost certainly going to be raising the prices soon. So, I’d highly recommend booking a call now. Um, you can get that locked in. You can get the price right now locked in as long as you start the process right now. Okay, Jen, thanks. You got it, Jen. Um,

    Justine, awesome. Cameron, does the niche validator only work while you are using Claude on Internet Safari or is there a way to add the skill when you’re using Claude? I think the biggest one, Cameron, is just make sure you’re logged in to Claude. Okay, that like everyone says like that’s the reason why they can’t use it is because they’re just simply not logged in. Just make sure you’re logged in first. Like before you click on the link, make sure you’re logged in and you should be good to go. Ellie, question. Was there a question about VIP on Tuesday? Yep. VIP 6 PM Eastern Eastern Standard Time on Tuesday. Julia, oh, I already having way too much fun with the GPT. Yeah, awesome. Glad you enjoy it. Uh, Grant, thanks Shane. I’ll keep that advice in mind. Keep doing what you are doing. It makes the difference to people who I haven’t spoken to. Awesome, Grant. My pleasure. My pleasure. Yeah. Like guys, I’m telling you right now, like one of the best pieces of advice ever is I think I think Grant was talking about that. I’m pretty sure. I hope maybe I’m getting this mixed up. Apologies if I get get the people mixed up, but um if you have something that’s working, just do more of it. Like this is something that I just have come back to a hundred times in my business career. If you have something that’s working, just do more of it, right? Like that is million-dollar consultant advice right there. That’s probably way better than most million-dollar consultants. Um, so many people and and myself included by the way, so many people will be like, “Oh, YouTube’s working really well. Let me start on Tik Tok and Instagram and Facebook and I I don’t know, Twitter and LinkedIn and Pinterest as well.” And then all their attention gets diverted over to these things that do not matter and do not get results. and then the thing that’s actually getting them results they stop paying attention to, right? Or it’s like, “Oh, I have this one YouTube channel that’s going really well. Let me start two or three more YouTube channels, right?” Well, there’s an old saying, if you try to catch multiple rabbits, you will catch no no rabbits, right? It’s an old proverb and it’s very true. Okay? One channel at a time. Always always focus on one channel at a time. Okay? Um and and yeah, one, you know, one channel at a time, one income stream at a time. Um put all your focus on that. Diana, I am interested and have watched many of these over the past couple weeks, but have not called yet. As uh you as Diana, take the leap. Take the leap. Uh book a call. Samuel, for someone like me who is in zero dollars, completely broke, what should I do? Uh enjoy my free content on YouTube. follow actually follow the instructions because I make my content actionable. 99% of people do not take action. I make it actionable but 99% of people do not take action. Probably 99.9. Okay. So actually take action on the content like Isaiah did. Uh use my free resources like the GPTs that I give out, the Claude skills that I give out, etc. Um uh uh attend these live trainings and ask me questions. You can ask me any question you want right now. Okay. And then when you start making money, you can join the program. That’s exactly what happened with uh Isaiah. So that’s exactly what you should do. Um we cannot give any discounts. We can’t do anything like that because the our our coaches are very expensive. We’re this is a team of 15 people that that serve you that we have. Okay. It’s over 15 people now actually. Yeah. Well over it’s getting close to 20 people. Okay. So I I got to I got to pay their salaries. I can’t I can’t be giving away free stuff. This costs a lot of money to deliver on this, right? That’s how a business works. This isn’t like a course that I just give you for free, okay? But even if I did give you the course for free, you wouldn’t get results because less than 10% of people even finish courses, right? There’s a reason that we set it up with one-on-one intensive coaching with an environment of other people around you that are all doing the same thing with group coaching on top of that and a really good course, but also a great community and accountability because that is what actually gets you results. Okay. Um, it is so easy to get good at something if you’re in a situation uh like that where it’s just it’s very easy. Everybody’s doing it. That that makes it super easy to get good at something.

    Samuel, for someone like me who is in 0 completely broke, what should I do? Is there a possibility of paying installments? Uh, oh yeah, yeah, I just answered that question. Yeah. Yeah, you definitely, by the way, yes, you definitely can pay an installments. you can get it down to like a,000 a month or something like that or even less than 1,000 a month if we think you’re a good fit. Uh but it is in-house. Uh uh we we we make the decision whether we can do it inhouse um on a case by case basis. Sharon, trying to find the briefcase icon on Claude Pro. I don’t see it in the far left sidebar. Can you help? I I don’t know how I’d be able to help you with that, Sharon. The briefcase icon. I’m not I’m not sure what you mean. Um Samuel, no worries. highly recommend you book a one-on-one call. Well, that is one thing, by the way. If you ever have issues like that, we literally have people you can just jump on one-on-one with anytime, right? So, so that’s one thing we offer in the coaching program is one-on-one coaching. Um, so yeah, go.coaching, scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. We will literally jump on oneonone, solve, help you solve any tech issues that you have, anything like that. That’s one of the big reasons why we get people such amazing results. Jennifer, yes, you did go over pricing. Thank you. I typed that question. Okay, all good. No wor no worries. Jennifer Leticia reacted, “Yes, you did go over pricing.” All good. All good. Regina, I’m starting to use the niche validator on Chad GBT. Thank you. I have a call scheduled Tuesday. Awesome, Regina. Um, Leticia, do you recommend making your own AI generated avatar? Honestly, not really, Leticia. Um, I do think it’s useful if let’s just say like you forgot to say something like let’s say you forgot to say something very important. I we we’ve used the AI stuff for that before. Just like putting in these little tiny, you know, one sentence things if we forgot to say something important, just as an example. Uh we we’ve used the AI for that before. Um but to to replace yourself for the full video, absolutely not. Absolutely not. No. No. Like YouTube is the the whole thing that YouTube is built off of is people wanting to connect with other people. AI avatars are the exact opposite of wanting to connect with other people. I’m assuming you’re talking about making like an AI like a fake version of yourself, right? That is the that is like like especially with the voice. The voice is the worst thing. Now, if you had your real voice, but then you had like an AI avatar, that’s a little bit different. It’s it’s a bit better. But um if if it’s just like a fake version of yourself and you’re just like, you know, typing the stuff in or having like no, it’s just I’m just going to be honest with you. 99.99% of the time that’s not going to work. Um and you’re just going to be wasting a bunch of time. It’s actually going to take more effort than if you just made the video yourself, honestly. So yeah. Um yeah. Uh gosh.com/coaching guys. Scan that QR code. Click the link in the chat. By the way, uh it looks like we did run out of spots a little bit ago. I’m pretty sure I got I got noted that. Um we did open up a few more spots. Okay, so we did open up a few more spots. So, if you weren’t able to find a good spot or or you want to jump in, go. Scan that QR code, click the link in the chat, and I’m probably only going to be uh doing this for a little bit longer. So, lock your lock your spot in while you still can. This might be your last chance uh to uh sign up. Chass, hi, I got in late. May I have the link to your new validator? Yes, just scroll up and scroll down. You’re good to go. Nice. Can you talk about the VIP? Already talked about it. Sharon, didn’t scroll far enough down. Sorry. All good, Sharon. Denise, signed up for the VIP program and a tad confused on the differentiation from this offer. The VIP program? What are you talking about? It’s a It’s a one on It’s a one-time VIP call that we have one hour before the live training where you can just ask me questions. I I I don’t know what you mean by a VIP program. Not I’m not sure what you mean that if you’re talking about the VIP the $47 VIP training that is a one-time training where we send you some resources and then you on Tuesday night one hour before the live training you can jump on and we can we can talk with each other like you can ask me questions with a with a very small group of people. Okay. It is all like it could not be more clear if you read your email what the $47 VIP product is. Okay? It could not be more clear. Now, if you didn’t read your email, if you just decided to to to not read it, then I’m I’m not surprised that you don’t know what it is, right? But I would recommend that you go back and actually read your email, okay? It could not be more clear what the VIP product is. It’s a $47 product. you you show up one hour before the training on Tuesday night and um uh we we send you some resources as well and then I answer your questions, okay? Give you give you a little a little training right before there and then I answer your questions as well. Any questions you have in a small group of people that is what the $47 product is, okay? Hopefully that clears things up. Okay, iPhone 17, watch some of your videos. Thank you. wondering if you can suggest a video that will help me learn uh the cloud code more in depth.

    Uh yeah, we can definitely get way more in depth on that in the in the um the program. The biggest thing about claude code when you’re trying to learn it more in depth is personalization. Like that is the biggest thing is there’s going to be certain things that you need in your niche and for your specific content style and your specific personality and the types of videos that you like to make specifically uh that that are going to help with personalization. Okay, so that is the biggest thing by far.

    Okay. Watch some of your videos. Thank you. Wondering if you can suggest a video that will help me learn the claude code. Yep, I already answered that. Sorry, Talib, uh, I know showing your face helps, but if a great content using Higsfield, is that a great way to go? Uh, it is not a great way to go, Talib. Um, and anybody telling you otherwise is just feeding you a croc of BS. Um, there are so few people that are making money with purely AI generated content. Um, it’s it’s it’s it’s it’s a joke. And even if you are making money, it’s incredibly easy for someone else to copy you. So, you’re not going to be making money for long because you’re just going to have a million copycats. And then even if you are making money and you for some reason don’t have copycats, you figured out some way of making it to where other people can’t copy you, uh YouTube often times will just demonetize you or uh straight up ban you. And sometimes they won’t just ban one channel, they’ll ban all of your channels. That’s happened to some of these AI gurus, some of the big names, too. It’s literally happened to some of them, which is pretty crazy, right? So, um, yeah, all these these big names that were teaching people to make AI and then they got like 15 of their accounts banned or something like that, right? So, yeah, it’s, you know, I don’t recommend it. We have had zero people get demonetized or banned or anything like that, um, with, you know, for the AI stuff. Uh, literally zero people. Zero, right? We haven’t had any issues with that. Whereas other programs I’ve heard of have had countless issues, just non-stop, never- ending issues. Okay. So, you don’t want to work really hard on a channel just for it to get demonetized a year later or banned, right? That would suck. We don’t want that to happen to you either. Um, so yeah, the the type of faceless content you can make is you’re actually using your real voice. It’s actually you and you’re just you’re educating people. Okay. Um, we recommend using like a cartoon or something like that, but you’re educating people and you’re using your real voice with maybe a cartoon avatar of yourself, something like that. Um, but it’s very clear that it’s you like you as a real person, right? That’s the type of content we do recommend. Um, awesome, Rafaro. Appreciate you. Jennifer, is the skincare for aging women saturated? Definitely not, Jennifer. That is a phenomenally profitable niche. Um, George, thank you, Shane. Don’t have the funds at the moment. All good, George. By the way, guys, uh just just book a call. It’s all good. If you if you have the funds, you don’t have the funds, go ahead. Just book a call anyways. It’s all good. Um we’ll see if we’re a good fit to work together. And again, if we think you’re a really good fit, if we think your niche is really good, you’re going to get a lot of value from the call whether we end up working with each other or not. If you think you’re a good fit, if you think your niche is if we think your niche is good, we’ll figure out the payment side. Okay? We’ll figure that out, right? Um but uh yeah. Yeah, we we we can figure that out. We can get the payments pretty low. Um, Bill, did I get VIP? Is it about all I can afford? I did get VIP. All good, Bill. Yeah, enjoy enjoy the VIP. It’ll be Tuesday night. Caspers, have you worked with any clients who started a YouTube channel while speaking English as a second language? Yes, we have worked with uh English market obviously also Spanish market. Spanish market is really good. French market, French market is great. Uh, Netherlands, so Dutch, Dutch market is really good, too. Um, Arabic, Arabic market is great. German German market is really good. Portuguese, uh, Portuguese market’s okay. It can, it can be okay in some cases. And then I think I’m forgetting one that we’ve worked in. I feel like I’m forgetting one. It’s a European country. I’m forgetting what Greece. Greece. Yeah, Greek. Greek market is okay as well. Um those are the those are the markets uh with uh different languages of people we’ve worked in. Um the same principles apply in every single market. We do recommend that to do this is designed for first world English speaking. It is designed for first world countries. Okay. And the reason for that is because you are going to be helping people solve problem problems and they need to have disposable income. Right? So that is something that people have in first world countries is they have disposable income. Uh whereas in some countries like people don’t have any extra money because they have to spend all their money on food and housing and and health you know healthcare and stuff like that. They just simply do not have any extra money right um so so yeah we it is recommended in in first world countries. Okay. Um, David, uh, let’s see. Uh, what if my niche doesn’t technically fall under the health, wealth, or relationship categories? It’s totally fine. Totally fine. I I said that earlier. Completely fine. There’s tons of niches outside that. I’m just saying if you don’t have anything, you want to start with health, wealth, or relationships.

    Yeah, that totally that Yeah, that sounds like it could work, David. Uh, but it’s something you could definitely brainstorm on the upcoming call. For sure. Definitely. Chass, thank you for sharing the links. I assume these are the newer and the ones shared last June 11th this year. Am I right? Yes. Yes. The the we are constantly updating these. Yeah, absolutely. We are constantly updating these and making them better and better. Uh the chat GBT one, we’ve updated that many many times. the Claude one. Um, that one’s still, you know, relatively new, but it’s it’s really really good as well. So, we’re continuing to update that one. Denise, uh,

    is the VIP more specific. Guys, listen, if you haven’t signed up for the VIP, just don’t worry about it. It’s literally just one hour before the live training where you get extra time to ask me questions and then a little bit of u you know work that you can you can do before that so that you’re not just asking me the same questions that would be answered immediately if you just attended the live training right so so if if you didn’t sign up for the VIP just don’t worry about it okay um yeah it’s it’s Tuesday night it’s it’s it’s 1 hour right before the live training um gosh.com/coaching scan the QR code click the link in the chat. Perplexity or des uh description? What’s your pick? Uh out of those two, Perplexity. Uh Denise, I sign up for the VIP.

    Uh Denise, there there is no there’s no refund for the VIP training. It’s a $47 training. There’s no refund. We don’t we don’t do refunds for $47 trainings. If you’re asking for a refund, you’re probably not a good fit for the program to be honest with you. Uh if you’re asking for a refund for a $47 product, you’re not a good fit for the program. Um but yeah, it’s it’s tomorrow night, Tuesday night, 6:00 p.m. uh Eastern Standard Time. Additionally, uh everybody who signs up for the VIP, we give them two weeks just in case they miss the first one. Um but yeah, that that’s that’s the VIP. Rob Lee, my niche. I help high school engineering and CTE teachers use AI tools to run a modern classroom without wasting hours on prep. Combined with this, I help CTE and career tech educators build real engineering classrooms without starting from scratch. Um hm. Okay. AI tools to run a modern classroom without wasting hours on prep. Ah, okay. Okay. Um, I like the first one a little bit better, Rob, uh, out of the two because I think it solves a very, very real problem, which is creating a curriculum for teachers is very difficult. It’s very difficult to create a good curriculum for teachers, right? And, you know, PE teachers probably want to use AI to help them create a curriculum faster, more, and better, right? So, I like that first one a little bit better, but that’s definitely something you can discuss on the call. Sharon, I the second one seems I don’t know. The second one just doesn’t quite seem right. Um, yeah, it it just doesn’t really quite seem right. Also, both of them you need to be very clear on what your outcome is. The first one’s a bit more clear on what the actual value proposition is, which is you’re helping people save time. So, one thing you guys always want to avoid is I help people have the confidence to endeavor to do something da da da like wishy-washy language like that. Absolute death of your niche hypothesis statement like avoid wishy-washy language. Okay? Must be straightforward, a tangible straightforward outcome. Okay? So I help teachers uh design their entire curriculum in one day like a high quality curriculum or something like that right like if they usually takes them months to do it or or weeks to do it say I I help teachers design their entire curriculum in one day and it’s a very high quality amazing curriculum something like that right okay that you see how that’s tangible like one day entire curriculum not I help them save a little bit of time on endeavoring to design their curriculum for their you know what I mean that’s just wishy-washy like it’s that is not valuable you got to be specific you got to be tangible with your niche hypothesis statement um Cameron not sure what happened but I just audio to Zoom meeting all good George going to try to make some money then want to join your program awesome George yeah enjoy the free content in the meantime uh Samuel uh thank you for your advice I’ll be back to join the program by the way guys uh go-inhas.com/coaching scan that QR code, click the link in the chat. Um, and uh, yeah, I’m going to be leaving here in a few minutes, so this might be the last last opportunity for you guys to sign up. Sharon, uh, the question was already answered. Yes, thank you, Sharon. That is right. Yes, thank you for pointing that out. I know I sometimes people ask me the same questions over and over again. Uh, oh, shoot. Hope so, the audio was was messed up. Uh, yeah. Okay. Okay. Okay. Well, hopefully it’s back now. Leticia, real voice plus cartoon then? Yeah, that does work. Leticia, that’s fine. As long as you’re like actually solving people’s problems. Jennifer, typically how long before you start making money? Usually about that 2 to 3 month mark is when people uh really start making some money. Diana, usually I have a clear idea of what I want to present, but right now I just don’t know what I want to share. I am living in a nursing home and writing in a wheelchair. I’ve been living here for 2 years. I am 73. I’ve lived in a lot of places. I’ve done a lot of interesting things from art, some theater, holistic health. I was massage therapist for 40. I’ve worked uh for chiropractic offices in three different states in three different decades. I’ve gone medication camps for meditation camps for decades. And I’ve lived in my tent. I’ve been a spiritual person my whole life as a student of metaphysical content. Yeah. I mean, Diana, you sound like a very interesting person and it sounds like you could you have a lot of value and wisdom to share with the world. Um I think you should definitely check out our our niche validator. Um, I think that would really help you. You can kind of go back and forth with it and uh check that out. Additionally, if you wanted to book a call, we can kind of help you uh dial something in and help you figure out what what uh would be good for you. But this is what we specialize in helping people do is pick their niche. I mean, that’s one of the biggest things that we help people with cuz we have to make sure that the niche is dialed in to get results, right? That that’s kind of like the foundations of the house or the foundations of a building. If the niche isn’t good, then when you try to build the building, it’s you’re you’re just going to be screwed. So, uh, yeah, good stuff. All right. Um, got it. I see what the VIP Tuesday is understood. No need for the refund. All good. Okay, good. Um, Justine, way to go, Denise. Make sure to set an alarm before the VIP session schedule. Awesome. JG, thanks. Awesome. Bandar, how to know if a niche is saturated or not. Um, Denise, finally got the call booked. Awesome, Denise. Good stuff. Leticia, Brazilian, Portuguese. Yeah, I think I it was I I think it was Portugal. Portuguese uh to be fair, but I’m sure it would work in Brazil as well. There’s there’s, you know, Brazil is a pretty big market, too. James, thanks for all the helpful information, feedback on this webinar. Had my one-on-one call about a month ago, half ago. Working on getting the money to join the program. Hope to have it soon. Awesome, James. Good stuff. Love, love to hear it. Bandar, how to know if a niche is saturated or not. I don’t really believe in saturation, Bandar. So what what the way it works is if a niche is more I I call it more uh matured if if a niche or a market is more matured then that means that you just need to niche down a little bit further. That’s it. So you just have to niche. You have to be more niche. Okay? So instead of fitness, you should do fitness for men. And if fitness for men is too niche, then you should do fitness for men past the age of 40. And if that’s too niche, you should do fitness for men past the age of 40 who are high achievers uh that work a lot and they still want to stay fit, you know, and then you just keep going down from there. You know, fitness for men past the age of 40 who are doctors. You see what I mean? You just go more and more niche until it’s not saturated anymore, quote unquote, right? That is all you have to do. There’s no such thing as saturation. It doesn’t really exist. You just have to niche down further, right? Um, George, the chatbt evaluator scored me 9.7 out of 10. Awesome. George, good stuff. Mitch Shane signed up for a call. May I sign out now or is there anything? All good, Mitch. You’re good to go. You are good to go. Isaiah, what about reaction channels? Um,

    uh, yeah, reaction channels can be good as long as it’s educational. So, I think a really good example of an educational reaction channel would be Graham Stefen, his his second channel. I think it’s Graham Stefen Reacts or something. Yeah, as long as it’s educational, it’s it’s totally good to go. JJ, the quote of the day, if you’re asking for a refund, you’re probably not a good fit for the program. Yes. If you’re asking for a refund for a $47 purchase, you are not a good fit for the program. Like I I have never refunded anything in my entire life. Um and if you’re asking for a refund on a $47 product, like that just shows how little you value your own time. Um and you are not a good fit for the program. Leticia cloud skill error API is overloaded. What does it mean? Really? Well, that might be on the cloud side to be honest with you. Go. com/coaching. Scan the QR code, click the link in the chat. Um, yeah, that might be on cloud side. I I Hey, I apologize if that’s happening. I think that that must be a cloud side thing. Maybe try refreshing. Maybe try logging in and logging or logging out and logging back in. Um, and it might help. Denise, I got the intro call booked, but no email as of yet. I assume to keep uh checking spam folder. Um, yeah, check all mail, Denise, because these these silly email providers, they have like all these different folders. Uh, if you open all mail, uh, that’ll do all of them, but you know, there’s promotions, there’s spam, there’s, uh, trash junk, whatever. There’s there’s a lot of different ones. Um, but but yeah, check, uh, all mail. That’s usually the best one to check uh, to see if you’re you’re booked in. Um, let me see here. Oops. Oops. Okay. Yeah. Hey guys. Um, listen, I’m gonna I’m gonna jump out now, guys. Um, I’ll say one thing before I jump out. First of all, uh, the thank you pages. All right. Thank you pages. Uh, make sure you check these thank you pages. All right. Uh, make sure you check these. Uh, actually follow the instructions on those. Again, make sure you also like like watch the video. uh look at the look at the um you know the the follow the instructions, right? Like just just just spend some time on that. That’ll answer probably 80% of the questions that you have. So that that hour that you have with our consultant is going to be much more valuable for you if you just read those pages because it’s going to answer 80% of the questions that you would have had for the consultant so that we can really get into the nitty-gritty of making sure that we can help you pick your niche and and dial it in. Okay, so that’s the first thing. Second thing is if for whatever reason you can’t sign up for a call right now, go ahead and screenshot this page. Okay? Screenshot this page or uh click the link in the chat. Copy that link in the chat if you can’t sign up for a call right now for whatever reason. All right? Uh go ahead and do that. Um and uh save that for later. I recommend signing up right now, especially if you want this one-on-one call with me. Once we send out the replay, like all the spots will be taken. we we we run out of spots every single time, especially once we send out the replay. Okay, so yeah, make sure you do that. And overall, I think that’s pretty good. We are going to drop the thank you page links just in case just in case you uh didn’t get access to them, we are going to drop the thank you page links right now so you can copy and paste those thank you page links. All right, with that being said, uh uh very very last Oh yeah, let’s see. Let’s see. I’m going to copy. Yeah. Uh, okay. I’m going to I’m going to save this link one last time. If for whatever reason, like you’re driving or anything, I just posted it myself. You can have this link right now if you’re driving or whatever, you know, hey, don’t don’t do it right now, but at least, you know, here’s the link for you to copy so you can sign up later. I don’t want you to be unsafe or anything, right? But here’s the link right now so you can copy and sign up later. Okay? So, I just dropped it myself. With that being said, thank you so much, guys. Have a good one. Have a good evening. I’m gonna jump off now. Take care and I’ll see you guys when I see you. Cheers. Have a good one. Bye, guys. Thanks. Cheers, guys. Take care. Bye. Thanks, Laticia. Thanks, iPhone. Thanks, Stephen. Raul. Awesome. Cheers, guys. Uh, yeah. Happy Father’s Day, too. Yeah. Happy Father’s Day, guys.

  • 06/15/2026 – AI Traffic Machine VIP

    three four hour trainings on this numerous welcome impressive attending listenology has come but I feel that people are still stuck where they were 2 years ago like you tell me okay give me give me a number here okay just give me a number or actually don’t even give me a number say answer this in a very simple we’ll do a quick poll given how much money you were making last year has your income gone up, down, or is it the same? So, type U if it’s up, type down if it’s down two from two years ago, let’s say when AI was really picking up, or S if it’s kind of like the same. UDS, UDS, UDS, let me know. I’ll also try and see if I can do a poll uh in this live right now. If I can’t, it’s okay. Just type in UDS. And I’m looking forward to hearing from you where that went, like how how that’s gone for you for the last 2 years. My answer will surprise you, right? I’m going to tell you and my answer is going to surprise you. But I’ll tell you my answer in a second. I want to first see your responses. U D Same. Okay. U S S D S U D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D I see another down same down, same. Okay, I mean, look down. I’m I’m seeing all the responses and this is what it looks like to me. About 20% of you have said up. About 40% of you have said, 40% have said it’s down. And there’s a good reason for that, right? AI was supposed to make our life easier. It was supposed to make us do things faster, make us more money, but we haven’t really got to where we wanted to. Now, I’ll tell you where I am uh with this. So, my response is actually the same. A little bit more, but same. And before you come at me saying, “Oh, you, you know, you should be making a lot more money with AI,” I get it. But I’m not using AI the way a lot of other people are using. I was making good money 2 years ago. I’m making good money now, like much more than wages. Enough to take good profits, take my family for vacations. We’ve just come back from the UK, uh, for a two from a two week vacation in London, like it was museums every days, dining every day, uh, taking kids out every day, ice creams, like everything, right? And this is how I’ve used AI. I’ve basically set up traffic machines for myself for my own business which take about an hour a day to run and now it can be done in my team as well. So it doesn’t even need me. It takes about an hour a day per business to run and that brings all the results that I want. Right? So, my day has gone from those chaotic 8 hours with a never- ending to-do list down to about an hour a day of very structured work that we do with AI, which just creates a machine for us. And I’m no different. I want to talk about Stacy’s example here. So, Stacy, for example, is quite an incredible story, right? Nobody knew she existed for a long, long time. as it is with you, as it was with me. Just like us, Stacy was someone who was kind of just like she was trying stuff, but no one knew she existed. And she sold, she sells, she still sells sensory toys to preschools and daycarees. Like, it’s a very specific thing. She figured out something that preschools and daycarees needed because she had some background in that. So, she started selling sensory toys specifically to them. And it was a real product solving a real problem for a very specific buyer, right? Something I tell you all the time to do is like go find a specific problem a specific buyer has and then solve that problem using a specific mechanism and then you can basically make money, right? As long as you do those three three things, you can make money. And she did the same as well. But what worked for her was setting up those traffic machines, right? Cuz initially no one knew she existed. But what she did was she knew that there was a target market out there. There were daycare owners searching for the right products. There were preschool teachers researching options. There were parents looking for recommendations and all of them were searching online for help, but none of them were finding Stacy. Right? When people are looking to buy things that you’re trying to sell, the problems are real. I mean, look, you are here, which tells me that you’ve taken some steps in your journey. You have some ideas you want to sell. You have some products you want to sell. And there are people out there that are actively looking for what you have. But the problem is that even if you have a good product, you have real demand, you have zero visibility, right? So Stacy made made a decision just like you are going to make a decision today. Stacy, you made a decision. She decided to try something different. She decided she’s not going to run paid ads. She’s not going to spend money on influencers because that can be quite costly as well. She’s not going to try some magical viral content strategy that works today doesn’t work tomorrow or you know you kind of have to be on the the ground level for that to maximize it and she didn’t have a technical team that she could lead on, right? She didn’t want to go out there find someone to hire and basically get her to do the work. All she executed, which is what you’re going to do as well after today, is a system. And it takes 90 days to set up. Actually, it’s going to be much faster for you after today. But that’s all you need to do. And once you do that, once you set the system, and pay very close attention to this, once you set up the system, 90 days later, this is what happened for her. 123,000 targeted video views. After 90 days, this is what she had collected. going from a nobody to someone that had 123,000 targeted video views, 638,000 image impressions, right? So, she had been publishing images of her products of what she did online and it had 638,000 image impressions. She was on Google’s front page in 90 days. There were news talking about her. There were videos, there were podcasts, business listings, and again there is tons and tons of proof of that. Stacy is one of our students. Stacy is one of the persons who has gone through this program and that’s the program that I’ll be telling you about today. Now

    this results still surp and from a brand new channel for example started from absolute zero in 90 days going up to 123,000 views. Those are the kind of things that Stacy has done. And here’s what makes this even more remarkable. In all of this, in doing everything that Stacy was doing, she didn’t go viral, right? None of her videos went through the roof, racked up a million views. None of them. She didn’t have to dance on the stage for that. She didn’t have to do any crazy things that kids these days are doing on TikTok. She didn’t get featured anywhere. She didn’t have to pay for any kind of getting featured. She had no existing content working for her, right? She had tried a few things like a lot of you have as well, but nothing that she had before was working for her. She followed a system. what she did differently this time compared to every time before. Every time she had tried something before, you know, she had bought a product that would automate videos for her. She had brought a pro bought a product that would automate social media for her. She had bought a product that’s going to automate basically some things. And I say automate with air quotes. I know you can’t see me. I’m saying automate with air quotes because both of us know it’s not really automated to the level that we want. So Stacy had tried all of that, but what changed for her this time was that she followed a system, one hour a day AI traffic system. And anyone can follow a system, right? This is why I love systems more than software. Cuz if I give you a software, there’s a lot of variables. It’s going to work for someone else. It’s not going to work for you. It’s going to get incredible results for someone else. It’s going to burn money for you. Because what they have found, what they have realized is like this one thing magically they figured it out and you haven’t. So no matter how much crap you throw out at a software that can automate crap for you, it’s still going to be crap. But what they have figured out is this one thing that works. And again, you can only do that when you have a system. Now look, this is this what I’m telling you about Stacy. This is not a story about a special person. Stacy was not special. She’s not special. This is a story about a replicable process, about a repeatable process. Now, before I show you what that system actually is, before I take you into that, I want to ask you something first. Okay? I want to I want to ask you about this and this is very very important. Are you making significantly more money now than you were before Chad GPT? And again, you already gave me the answers. If you didn’t before, you can type in again. 80% of you said you’re not up, right? And you’re still working a lot. 80% of you said you’re still not up. Write down the answer. Right? Write down the answer. U for up S for same, D for down. Last I checked, 80% of you were same or down. Same. Same. Down. Up. But I’m working a lot. Up. But my costs have gone up. Down. Down. Same. Down. Still. Still, we’re looking at 75 80% of you that have had no remarkable difference in your income because of this kind of sucks, right? It’s bad. And look, Stacy asked herself something similar before she found this system and her answer was down as well. Her answer was same as well, which is why she decided to affect this change. Now, I want you to stay until the end of this session today because you’re going to discover why 99% of businesses are invisible online even with amazing product, even with amazing solutions. I mean, like, if you don’t believe me, just think about it. How many people are selling a weight loss pill? How many? Thousands. Thousands of businesses out there selling weight loss pills. Why are only one or two or five or 10 of them actually successful? What makes them different from 990? The pills are same. It’s all like white label from the same company. So why is it that 10 of them are getting remarkable results but 990 of these businesses are failing? Think about that. And I’m going to talk about how or why the real reason AI tools haven’t moved the needle for most of entrepreneurs. That’s you. Why even though you have a Chad GPT subscription, you try Claude, you want to go into a new open source model has come up, you want to try Hun 11 Labs, all these things, why are your results still the same or down?

    And I’m going to talk about the exact system Stacy used to go from zero to being everywhere, getting visitors, buyers from everywhere in 90 days. And how you can replicate that in under one hour a day in any niche. Doesn’t matter what niche you’re in. You might have a very special niche. You might be in the basic make money online. It doesn’t really matter. This setup, this system is still going to work for you. But first, let me show you why most people never find what Stacy found. So, if you don’t know me, my name is D Napia and I’m here with Chris Man. Chris is not here right now, but he’s going to be joining us in subsequent training if you decide to come and continue working with us. Now, between us, we’ve generated over $50 million across multiple businesses. We’ve created Kaio, Mail View. I mean, Chris has created Amplifier. massive massive company. They do huge numbers every single year. And I’m not sharing this to impress you. I’m sharing it to impress upon you so that you understand that the system that I’m being I’m going to share with you has been tested at scale. Not just with us, but with a lot of our students as well across industries over multiple years. So the $50 million I’m talking about didn’t just come from luck. It came from repeatable systems. And this what I’m sharing with you, the organic traffic system that you can set up in one hour a day is one of them. We are pioneers in building AI powered content systems. Before most people even knew what a prompt was, right? And again, if you don’t believe me, go check out Amplifier online after the session. You can do it now, but go check out Amplifier and look when that came about compared to when Chad GPD came about and you’ll know what I mean. Right? We’ve served over 100,000 customers and we’ve done incredible, incredible work. Now, look, I’ll tell you this. By 2026, the average entrepreneur is subscribed to 6 to 12 AI tools. I’ll tell you about me, too. If you don’t believe me, like I’ll just tell you my list, right? And you tell me yours. Chad GPT. I canceled it, but I had Chad GPT. Claude, I have Claude. I pay like a finger hundred bucks a month for that. 11 Labs, which is $22 a month. Hey, Jen. $29 a month, right? And I’m trying to think of more. Like I usually I have like support desk and all these other things as well. So they’re not all AI tools, but other people like me are subscribed to six to 12 AI tools out there, right? Just just type in for me how many AI powered tools are using right now. Just give me a number. How many AI powered tools are using right now? Oh, I have Gemini as well. Forgot about that. Let me know. Yeah. And you’re going to see a lot of these like, yeah, tons of them. And each one of these, by the way, each one of them is promising to solve a problem for you, right? Each one of these is like, hey, we will do this for you. We will do that for you. We create beautiful images. We create great copy. You can create software. You can market this and you can do that and you can do this. It’s too much. It is way too much because what they’re doing is they’re adding a monthly charge to your bottom line. And when you buy them one by one, it doesn’t hurt. But by the end of the month, you know, you you’ve kind of paid a couple hundred bucks a month, 300, 400 bucks a month, and you’re like, “Wait, I’m not even using all of this. What’s happening?” Right? Every single one of these tools that you purchase made the same promises. Like I was saying, you’ll automate your business. It’ll 10x your outputs. Work smarter, not harder. This changes everything. And you believe them because why wouldn’t you? These tools were sold to you with a promise that you can do all these things. automate your business, 10x your output, buy your team, work smarter and not harder, all of that. And they’re not bad tools, don’t get me wrong. Like I showed you this list, right? These are not bad tools. They are great at what they do. They are exceptional at what they do. The promise wasn’t the lies, but somewhere along the way, something went wrong. So, what happened? Even if we can both agree, right? Neil says, “These tools are great.” You agree with me as well. All this is really good. Sam says, “Yeah, I love these tools.” Yeah, me too. I love them. I absolutely love them. So they are great. What went wrong along the way?

    Because you’re still figuring out manually what to create. You know, you’re still guessing what will actually work. You’re still like, you know, taking what do they say? Like you’re stabbing in the dark to see what works. You’re still watching traffic numbers that barely move. Your traffic hasn’t actually like there haven’t even been spikes, let alone growth. I’m not even trying to think of like a video going viral. Like nothing has happened. Nothing has literally changed and you spill sudden spins. You’re still spending hours for results that may or may not come, right? You’re putting all this time, all this effort into something that may not materialize into something for you. It is a problem because 4 years in, how much has actually changed for you since you started using AI? And I say four. I mean, it’s kind of like three because November 2023 is when Chad GPT became big.

    Honestly, I feel this and I think you feel this too. This was not what we expected. This was not what was promised to us.

    And here’s the uncomfortable truth about why. Because the tools work. The problem isn’t the tools. The problem was never the tools. The problem is that the tools without a system just give you faster way to fail. They just give you a faster way to stay stuck. Right? So, let’s I mean hypothetical example, let’s let’s do like this. Imagine you have never driven a vehicle before, right? You’ve never driven a vehicle before and you want to get from London to New York. I say, “Go drive a plane. Go fly a plane.” And you’re like, “Okay, cool. Plane’s the fastest. Like, I can do it. I can do it.” There’s a tool. Plane is amazing tool to get from London to New York. On the other hand, a car is a horrible tool for that same thing, right? But you take the plane thinking, “I’ll get there in no time.” But you don’t know how to fly a plane. You’ve never flown a plane before. So what do you do? That is the problem. The problem isn’t that the tools are bad. Tools are great. They are very, very good. But the problem is the tools are just give you a faster way to get stuck. The gap is in how they’re being used. And that’s not your fault. Nobody has shown you the system until today. That’s what we’re going to do. All right? That’s what we’re going to do today. With every tool that you brought with bought and every hour that you spend, your income should have changed significantly by now. Your traffic should be growing on its own. And your business should need less of you, not more. And that’s h that hasn’t happened. So, let me ask you this directly. Let me ask you this candidly

    again. Has your income doubled since I arrived? Are you working half the hours I am? I know. I am. And is your business growing automatically? I know. Mine is. For most people, the answer is a resounding no, right? And that’s okay. It’s not your fault. Let me actually show you why. Ju just tell me this, okay? How much money were you making in 2022? Again, just type it for me. You answered the UDS earlier, which is fine, but how much money were you making in 2022? I’m not going to call out your names now. Don’t worry. Like, I’m just going to read your responses, and I’m very, very curious. Give me like a monthly number.

    This is again prei. How much were you money were you making in 2022? And then how much money are you making now in 2026?

    You can also put in like the hours work, right? Cuz for some of you that might be the thing. For me, that’s definitely the thing. My kids are still young. They’re seven and four. I make good money, but I don’t want to go crazy and miss out the time with them. They still at that age where they love being with their dad. You know, when you went to London, for example, for two weeks, it was just all about them. I didn’t work. I have a community. I just let my team handle the community. I didn’t want to work. I just wanted to be with them. My team handled everything without me. And again, like we had AI working to grow our business, but team was just like managing it while AI was growing it, right? So that’s what I did. So to me, that’s the main thing. I don’t want to work 20 hours a day just so I can make a million a month. That’s not my goal. Because that million a month would actually leave me poorer in terms of what I actually want, which is more time with my family, right? So that’s not for me. But you tell me whether you stand with that. And I’ll say this, if the gap between the money that you’re making in 2022 and now or the time you were spending then and now is not substantial, then you’re using AI wrong. And again, don’t take this as an acquis accusation. Don’t think that I’m berating you in this. You’re using AI wrong because you were again told buy this tool, press this button, and voila, everything will be sorted. But that’s really not the case. That is really absolutely not the case because I know what’s missing. I know what that system is that once you implement is going to dramatically change how you make money online, how you sell your products, how you sell your services.

    Look, I’m sure that like most business owners, you have dozens of AI tool subscriptions, hundreds of AI generated outputs, dozen prompt attempts that you’ve done, zero significant changes in income, and zero meaningful in time freedom. I know cuz again, I’ve seen a lot of people go through that as well. But the real reason why I feel most people are stuck at the very basic barebone implementation of AI in their business is this. When it comes to AI, most people ask Chad GPT simple questions, right? Write me a sales email. Something as simple as that. Do this for me. I mean, I actually use Gemini to create recipes, which is fine. Like, it’s a very specific use case that works for me because I love to cook in all the free time I have. them not with kids. I’m not working. I’m cooking cuz I enjoy that. Right? But when people do these kind of things, they ask simple questions. They get generic and mediocre results. They spend hours tweaking outputs and they use the same prompts as everyone else. I mean, I’m sure you even downloaded like 5,000 prompts that are going to magically make you more money. I’m sure you’ve downloaded products like those, right? Have you? Yes. Yes. Yeah, you have, right? I’ve seen those, too. Nothing wrong with them. But if that’s all you’re doing, then you’re getting the same results as everyone else, and it’s not moving you forward. It’s not actually taking you where you need to be.

    Okay? So, this is a problem and you want to fix that because right now you’re stuck in an endless loop. Right? Right now, you’re stuck in an endless loop

    because when you just copy and paste these prompts, you’re not actually getting very good results. You’re getting mediocre results and they’re not helping you because 3 hours later you end up redoing the work anyway. 3 hours later, you end up like, “H, don’t like this. I’m just going to like do it myself.” So, what’s the point? What’s the point in all of this? The fundamental mistake that most people make

    is this. They use AI as a tool instead of a system. They ask AI to do one thing for them instead of realizing that AI can actually do everything for them. In a sequence, right? Very, very important. In a sequence, step by step by step by step. As long as you set it up right, you don’t even need to ask AI to write a sales email for you. write a blog post for you. You can ask it to do everything in one workflow in one go. Type system for me if you if you agree that that would be far better than one of the copypasted 5,000 prompts that just did one thing. Type in system system. Yeah, type in system. I’m seeing a lot of systems coming in. I see a question as well. But would it take a lot of time to set up? No. Like I said in the beginning of the presentation, just one hour a day to kickstart this. Then just you maintain it, you grow it as you want. But just one hour a day commitment to get crazy amount of traffic back to your product pages, your lead pages, whatever it is you want. That’s all you need to do. And look, even if that that makes you feel like, oh, it’s too much work. I’ll tell you this, if your process hasn’t changed, your income will not change either, right? You’re not going to make more money if you choose to continue down the path that you are on now. Do you remember we talked about Stacy earlier, right? We were discussing Stacy basically how what she had worked for her. She started from zero and she had 123,000 targeted views and 90 days. Let me show you exactly what she did. Okay, I’m going to show you step by step exactly what she did and that will maybe explain to you a bit more like what you will end up doing as well when it comes to this. Now do understand that I can’t reveal the full source on this session. I’ll explain why at the end of the session. But I am going to give you enough insights. So it puts you on the path so that you can do this for yourself. Now in case of Stacy, she created content that answered the exact questions her buyers were already asking. Right? So this is very very important thing and then I want to I’m just going to load up the entire slide. I’m going to explain this to you as well. I know my business well enough that I can talk about anything. Throw any word at me. I could literally mad lib and connect that word with what I do. Like literally any word. I I’ll find stories. I’ll find segways and I’ll find ways to just go from one part of point to another because I’m just so good at talking. I’m just so good at presenting. But the problem is when you do that in your business, you already have a lot of assumptions baked in, right? So you already think, oh, I know what I want to teach. Like this is the best and this is the most current topic and this is what’s most relevant and blah blah blah. But the problem is when you do that, when you approach content creation from the perspective of I know what’s best, you fail. And the reason you fail is because just because you know everything, your customers are probably not looking for that thing that you think they want. They already have specific questions. they already have thoughts in their head. All you have to do as a content creator is answer those thoughts, answer those questions. So, not generic content, not promotional content, not viral content, not content that you know is trending right now. It’s like I know what works. No, you want to focus on buyer intent content which is written to reach people who were already ready to buy. We’re going for the lowest hanging fruits. That’s what Stacy did. Stacy didn’t try to re-educate, re-engineer, rework her entire business by teaching people something. She simply went out there and answered people’s questions. Questions that they were already asking just before purchase. Not like, you know, basic question about how are clouds made. Not not something simple, stupid like that. Like she was saying, okay, let’s go for preschool uh thing, right? So, if she’s selling in the preschool niche, if she was selling toys for preschool, she’s not creating content on how does a preschool system work. No, cuz that’s very generic, broad content. That’s not going to bring in the buyers. Her questions answer more about buyer intent. What kind of plastic is safe for my kids toys? What kind of uh toys are ideal for my kids to learn and grow?

    Right? So, that’s what she focused on. She followed a system that worked for her. And look, this single distinction is why some content generates sales and other content just generates bounce rates where people just come and leave in 8 seconds. I’m sure you’ve seen that too, right? You publish a blog post and you’re like, “Hey, I’m getting a lot of views, but people leaving in like 5 seconds, 8 seconds. What’s happening?” And again, what she did differently was the way she published it. Not just like a blog post on a blog, but she did something different. She followed a system which is what I’m talking about today by which she appeared simultaneously across news sites. So she was now published on across major publishers Google news, Yahoo News, on YouTube, she was on podcast, she was on image platforms such as Pinterest, Instagram, she was doing blogs and editorial sites. And again, people when they research, they’re looking for multiple sources of truth. They’re not looking for one source of truth, right? I mean, when was the last time you just you had a question, you went and you were like, “Okay, yeah, I believe that like that. That’s it. I’m going to buy.” You never do that. You research. These people are also clever. All our customers are clever, right? The research across news sites, YouTube, multiple places. And she was able to place herself on multiple places. Like, think about this, right? A daycare owner on Google finds a news article. The same person on YouTube finds a video. On a podcast app, they find her episode. All from the same content. That’s not Stacy being everywhere, right? She’s not trying to be everywhere all the time. That’s just her content doing the heavy lifting of being everywhere. And once she does that, once she releases it, right? Once she simultaneously releases it, she just steps back and the content keeps working without her. So again, even for me, for the two weeks that I was away in England, I was traveling. I wasn’t publishing any new content. my content was just doing the work for me by automatically being published across multiple different places without me having to lift a finger. And again, once that happens, the system keeps finding new buyers all the time. It compounds. Every day that content is live, it find more buyers. Not fewer, more buyers. That’s the opposite of how ads work. So, you were like, Neil, I’m really interested in ads. Great. Fantastic. Go out and do it. But the problem is, as soon as you turn off the tab, Facebook stops being favorable to you. You stop getting leads, you stop getting sales. The money absolutely stops. With content, it’s different. You open the tap, you close the tap, but the content still keeps giving you traffic, leads, and sales without you touching it again week after week, month after month, and dare I say even year after year. That’s what compounding actually means. Just say yes to me. Just type in a yes if you would also like to compound your results just like Stacy did because it is boring. It is inefficient. It is lossy to just do the work once, get paid once, and be done with it. You’re already doing that. You’re already exchanging time for money. And it sucks. It is horrible to just exchange time for money. I know you’ve been there. I know I’ve been there. And it’s absolutely horrible. We don’t want to do that again. Would you agree? Yes, if you agree. No. If you still want to just exchange time for money, and nothing wrong with that. Maybe you work for SpaceX or something where you’re getting paid like, you know, $1,000 an hour. Fantastic. Go do that. But if you’re not, if you’re still stuck exchanging time for money, if you’re still stuck trying to make things work, type in a yes so I know that you’re in the right place. And look, here’s the exact system that Stacy used. I’m going to give you a high level overview. I’m going to explain to you what she did. Level zero and this is how it works for everyone right I’m going to walk you through four levels so let’s start at the beginning at level zero you create content manually you post and hope right so you post on social media you post a blog post you publish on YouTube Tik Tok videos whatever Pinterest you do all these things you post and you wait you know next day you log in you check your stats like did that video work did that piece of content get me traffic all of those things now level one this is where you use AI to write faster or create images faster, create videos faster. Maybe you’ve got a software that can suddenly create more videos for you. Congratulations. It’s a good thing. But you’re still publishing only to one place at a time. And some of you have made this here, by the way. You’ve made it to this point, but you’re publishing only to YouTube, only to Tik Tok, only to Instagram, to Pinterest, all these places, one by one. And it’s okay. Like, that is good. I’m not saying that’s bad. That’s good. But it can be better because once you solve distribution, once you create content using AI, you solve distribution using AI, you get into level two where you’re automating parts of the process, right? So, publish new piece of content. Great. Now, let’s go push this here. Go push this one to this place and this one to that place. Done. I’ll come back tomorrow for a new content post. You do that again. Really good place to be. You start to compound. But to me, level three is different. And this is where Stacy was finally operating at the end of those 90 days where she started seeing massive changes. At level three, you have one input. The AI creates and then you have a platform that amplifies everything. It compounds without you up to 1, 5, 10, more places at once. So at peak, Stacy was operating at level three. And remember earlier I asked you about the income gap level like where you were in 2022 2026 some of you said up same Darren. So if you actually get real hard numbers congratulations if you did which is great. The gap between level zero and level three is exactly what creates that gap. Right? So again level zero is where you were in 2022. Maybe some of you made it to level one. Some of you have really tried hard to make it to level two. But to really get to the next level, which is level number three, you have to do what the system tells you to do. And look, the system works not just for Stacy. Stacy was just one of our case studies, but the system works for everyone across industries, across niches. We’ve got lots of examples. I’m going to show you some of those as well. And all of these proof, all of these results I’m showing you are documented. They’re real businesses. They’re real numbers. Okay, let me show you. This is a fitness equipment brand where they had 61.5 return on content spend. They were spending $5,000 a month on content, right? So, they were going all in cuz they were big. They wanted to make big money and they were making $37,000 500 a month in sales. Total sales generated over the year were over 3,000 3.6 6 million ad budget zero nothing spent and they were competing against Pedone and Nordic Track which had $100 million plus ad budgets. Now had they paid actually PPC like had they spent money on ads they’d be spending $10,000 a day in traffic $10,000 a day that’s $300,000 a month but they were getting the same mileage for $5,000 a month once they had the dialed in system. Then we have a medical device business. They had millions in sales from 113 content pieces. Only 113 content pieces. Millions in sales makes sense because you know medical devices are expensive. So within 8 weeks of implementing the system, they went from 1500 to 10,000 visitors a month. They were ranking above Amazon and Google for competitive keyword buyers. So Amazon was advertising their product, but they were ranking even higher. The own website was ranking even higher. took them eight weeks to get there. Again, $0 in ad spend, but exceptional results all from content alone. Then there was a bedroom furniture brand which had 417 piston organic traffic growth. Someone’s asking, can you give their names? I can’t because we have NDA, but we will show you those names a bit later. Again, we have a 3-day training that I’m going to invite you to. So, we’ll reveal the exact names in there. I can’t show that right now because we’ve had to gatekeep them behind uh a paid group basically like today in a free session. But if you do join a 3-day training, I’ll talk about that. You can come and see in a lot more detail what they did. But again, we’ll actually give you the exact system then in a lot more depth. But I’ll circle back to that in a minute. So this bedroom furniture brand had 417% organic traffic growth. They had 35 content campaigns in 14 months. 14 months traffic went from 1470 to 7,600 visitors a month and they keyword rankings for page one went from 75 keywords to 1,732 keywords which will explain of course the increase in traffic as well and revenue because of that too right so again 47 to $75 per day in PPC spend equates to what they were getting with this organic traffic and it’s still compounding home robotics brand 195% buyer traffic growth. They outrank Amazon for competitive buy keywords. This happens a lot, by the way, in e-commerce, right, with us. This happens a lot in e-commerce because we have businesses that are outranking Amazon for those specific keywords, which is incredible because Amazon is big. Amazon is a giant. So to outrank Amazon for specific keywords that relate to your niche, people love it. Like absolutely fall in love with that. So they had a slow pace campaign, right? Answering questions that Amazon wasn’t answering. This is a very very secret technique like if you go to Amazon you’ll see there are questions people asking but Amazon isn’t answering them or the the customer the vendors are not answering them. So this client uh did and uh they had 195% increase in buyer traffic growth which was incredible. Uh, find mine brand 1,1 100% traffic growth with no ad spent by 38 content campaigns over 21 months, 70 $70,000 in new sales added attributed to this content. And then we also have tech accessories brand where they had 76% sales growth in just 90 days, right? So 58% traffic growth, 60 1% more add to cardarts cuz they optimized a few things and 76% yearover-year sales increase which is really really incredible especially uh on non-h holiday period because people you know often wait to buy electronic stuff during holiday period but they have people buying even like otherwise right and then premium watch seller as well where they had 10 times more lead in 90 days uh and they outranked Apple like think about that they outranked Apple for certain keywords. So they went from 180 to 2,000 visitors per month in 90 days and their monthly traffic value was equivalent to about $20,000 approximately which again is very very incredible. Would you agree? Like all these results that you’ve seen, there’ve been multiple niches. Would you agree that this is incredible? Type in a yes if you do. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yeah. And again like just to repeat this, it works for any niche. It works for any experience level. You don’t have to be a content creation expert. Thanks to AI, you can get good content created very quickly. But again, we’re talking about a system that distributes this content to multiple places at once. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Yes. Good. Good. Now, to me, these are the kind of results that you should be getting. Would you agree? Would you agree that this is what would be ideal outcome for your business? What you just saw is not even 10% of what’s possible when you implement this system properly. Let me show you uh individual people, your fellow entrepreneurs doing the same thing with this system, right? And this is the crazy part. This is how it’s working for individuals as well. Not just businesses that can spend 5,000 a month, but individuals that are just starting out, people that are just dipping their feet into content marketing. So, this is Erin. Um, Erin said this, “I have 300 new people on my list from a free download because of the content that she had created, 300 people on her email list.” Connie and Connie said that I put my seal of approval in amplifier. This is, you know, the the parent company campaign she was working for, the system that she watched. It works really well. It was responsible for my first business launch in 2016. Until now, I still have benefits from it. 2016. Nine years later, she’s still getting results. And she only did two campaigns the way we showed Aaron and everyone else to do. Robert um said, “Robert said, I would not be here without Chris. You know, Chris, my business partner, there’s Chris Munch. Now it’s over with me because I’ve never been in the 1% income bracket before. Now he is.” Danker did this $21,000 up front. He closed the sale for $21,000 up front and 10,500 monthly just by delivering this as a service. Right? Then again, Jamie, which was a UK local business, increased inquiries and bookings uh resulted for the SA based company because Jamie was able to get on one page for number of keywords. Their article featured on US platform published into Google magic box page one rankings for multiple keywords basically got them more sales. Yogesh who own basically launched an agency. I did this this morning. It’s out there. Looks wonderful. Right? So again, they were launched and running within 24 hours. Now there’s something that is common in all these success stories. They’ve all moved beyond level zero AI implementation. Right? This is very very important. I went through the levels before. We went from 0 1 2 3 not four. I don’t know why four was there. Went from 0 1 2 3. And they’ve all moved away from level zero. And that’s exactly what we are going to do together. That’s exactly what I want to do with you. So look, you’ve got three options after this, right? You got three options and they look like this. You can stay at level zero where you are. Nothing changes basically. You know, you’ve been doing this for a while. You can continue doing this at your own pace. Perfectly fine. Nothing wrong with that. But the results will not change. Like I can promise you results will not change. If anything, your morale will only get lower. you’ll only feel worse about it compared to how you feel now. Or you can try and pick out levels one to three on your own. You can spend months and months testing, working things out. You can try whatever new tool comes out. You can pay monthly. I mean, I know some people that even spend hundreds of dollars paying a lifetime payment. Turns out that, you know, the tool got discontinued. So, there’s that as well. And then option three is you follow a proven path with expert guiding guidance starting this week. Now look,

    option one I think we have to rule out, right? That’s not really where you want to be. So option one is just completely gone. So you got option two and three. And you can choose to if you want. Nothing wrong with that. But I think option three is where it’s at. And look, that’s not a sales pitch. It’s the logical outcome of everything I’ve shown you today. If you’ve been watching this for the last 40 minutes or so, and you’re like, Neil, that makes a lot of sense. I would love to be one of those people with a testimonial up on that wall. I would love to be one of those businesses that could afford $7,000 a month, $10,000 a month in paid ad traffic just done with content marketing that is fully automated following a system, not a tool, but following a system. Like Neil, I want to be that. If that’s you, I’ve got an invitation for you. Right? If option three makes sense to you, I want to show you exactly what we built. I want to show you exactly what you can get and how you can get results with a 1hour AI traffic machine. Now, this is a 3-day live training on June 19, 20, and 21st. Right? So, it’s a 3-day live training happening on June 19th, 20, and 21st, 11:00 a.m. Eastern every single day. And this is the most comprehensive training that you need to go from level zero to level three and build your AI powered organic traffic machine from scratch. And again, I want to repeat this. It takes an hour a day to do. You don’t need to wait 90 days like Stacy did to start seeing results. You’re probably going to see results within 7 to 14 days. But as you gradually keep on doing this, it’s going to help you compound. is going to help you go from level zero to one to two to three. And when you sit in level three for a long time, like Stacy did, your results are going to be unbeatable. You’re not going to recognize a person in 90 days time, and 180 days time, because it’s going to be dramatically different from the person you are today. And look, you’ve earned this moment, right? You’ve earned being here for this last 40 minutes. Let me show you step by step what it actually includes. So, for starters, this is a three-day live training and we’re also giving you three three AI traffic tools. Now, don’t get me wrong, they’re not chat GP or cloud competitors. They’re fairly basic tools that do specific things and I’m going to show you what those are, right? But together, this makes a complete system. The training and the tools work together. They’re not separate things. It’s one full system. So, let me walk you through what those three days include. Day one gives you the framework. Without it, days two and three are just basically tactics, right? So, June 19, 2026, we’re going to talk about how to escape the AI overwhelm holding most entrepreneurs back and the crucial difference between each levels, which tools are worth your time, and which tools to avoid entirely, and the three best ways to make money with AI powered traffic. We’re going to help you start building a level one traffic foundation with Chris. The outcome is that you will leave day one with mental model that makes days two and three click immediately. Day two is the strategic AI implementation. This time we give you the three-step content formula that’s generating millions of visitors over 15 plus years for us and is still working in 2026. We talk about my content volume compounds and how to produce thousand pieces per year in under two hours a day. We give you the purchase funnel framework on how you can choose topics that attract buyers not browsers. And we talk about where Claude, which we personally like, outperforms chat GPD for this strategy and how to set it all up with a simple implementation. This is going to help you generate hundreds of low competition buy intent topics using AI powered deep research. Honestly, that last part alone is worth this entire thing. If you only just get that from it, you would have easily 100xed your investment today, right? So the outcome from this is that you create your first content piece during there two and submit it through our platform live. So we kind of like I say platform which you know you can get feedback from our community which I’ll share in a minute. Uh then June 21 day 3 is the advanced AI concepts and possibilities. Now look, I say advanced and you might think like Neil, that’s too much for me. But by advance, I don’t mean out of your reach. By advance, what I mean is only people that have done day two should be doing this. So you’re going to get a lot of insights into how to execute this. And day three makes this permanent. You’re not setting up something you’ll abandon in a week, but you are genuinely setting up something that’s going to give you positive results months and years down the line. So hey, we give you a curated directory of AI tools and resources. Many of them are completely free. We talk about how to create AI advisor for marketing, productivity and business organization. The exact daily and weekly planning system our team uses to stay focused and the a better U AI framework that is science pack system for building the habits that drive growth. And finally, we help you understand how to connect AI tools into automative workflows so your repetitive task can run without you. Now, one thing I haven’t mentioned here is that we also cover how to basically offer all this as a service to clients if that’s a direction you want to take. We cover that on day three as well because I think that’s going to be quite useful for those of you that want to make, you know, money still by doing the service business. If you don’t have your own product sorted yet, then I think that’d be a good thing to consider as well. Now, by the end of day three, your traffic system will run on one hour a day, not eight. You can take the vacations that you want. You can take days off when you don’t want to work. You can literally make life choices that make you happy. Simple as that. Happy. Cuz I think happiness is what it’s all about. Now, the three AI tools that work alongside this uh this training as well are built specifically to support the system that you’re learning. This is not offthe-shelf AI. This is built for buyer intent traffic content, right? This is something we do differently than everyone else. We’re not just looking to get you on page one for crappy keywords that don’t convert, but we’re going to focus on buyer intent keywords. And these tools are not bonuses, right? I’m not giving the these as an extra add-ons. They’re an integral part of the system. You need them for the system to work.

    So you get the buyer machine headline, you get the vital triggers, you get the niche gold mine AI, you get access to all of those and each of these tools removes the most time consuming part of a specific step in the process. Okay, so for example, we’ve got niche gold mine AI. The single biggest mistake that I think most people make in content marketing is choosing the wrong niche. Like absolutely the wrong niche. And again, I’m not saying you to abandon whatever you’re doing, but if you feel like, you know, the niche is wrong, you can drill down and go into a subniche. You can always do that. So, most people spend 3 months on this decision, but niche gold mine AI gives you databacked answers in a single session. And when you have your niche, it determines your topic, your monetization. So, getting it right is very, very critical. So, this is going to help you analyze real market data to surface the highest ROI subniches. It’s going to help identify the underserved buyer segments your competitors are missing. And it’s going to eliminate months and months of manual niche research in one session. So, I think this is like an incredible piece of kit that goes along with the three day trading. Then, the traffic tool too is a vital trigger AI. Now, with this one, you’ll be able to uncover the specific angles that people actually share in your niche. Because content fails not because of the writing, but because the angle was wrong, right? You focus on the wrong thing. This solves the angle problem. Because to me, the content that works isn’t luck. It triggers a specific emotion. So, this tool shows you what that trigger is in your niche. Right? So, with this, you can analyze your niche with proven content patterns. You can identify the emotional hooks that drive real clicks, shares and engagement. It surfaces viral angles as well before you create a single piece of content and it turns guesswork into datadriven content strategy. So this is again part of the 3D training and you get immediate access to this. Then tool number three which you also get immediate access to is the buyer magnet headlines. Now these this tool will help you generate headlines that attract buyers not browsers. Very very important. Yes, you want to have a headline that captures attention, all those things, but you also want the headline to build interest and desire because headline is one of the biggest factors in whether someone clicks or not. This tool gives you the strongest possible starting point. And to me, when I think about a buy intent headline, it’s like a filter. It attracts people that are ready to spend and repels browsers. Very, very important. Every high converting case study I showed you today, use buyer focus headlines, not generic titles. Okay. Now, look, alongside the three tools, alongside the three-day training that I’ve already talked about, there’s more. Uh, let me show you what that is. There’s additional stuff that we put in, five bonuses specifically to take you further. So, for starters, you get access to your private Facebook community. Now, this is where you get to hang out with us with other AI traffic implementers doing exactly what you are striving to do. You get daily implementation support, accountability, and real-time feedback. You can share results, ask questions, get answers from people ahead of you, people at the same level of you. You can see what’s working for them, what’s not working for them, and that will help you make the right decisions. So again this is much better than any course because courses get recorded once and you know maybe you use them again maybe you don’t but a community is a living breathing thing you get access to that you get full session transcripts right so during live training you you going to be learning you’re not going to be taking detailed notes we don’t want you to take detailed notes so we give you the transcripts every air prompt we use on the screen is captured verbatim copy paste and implement ready to go okay so This will give permanent access to the transcripts and you can go through them and research anything when you get stuck in the future. Postry is cliffnotee summary. So beyond the transcript, we also summarize everything for you. Right? So this way you can lock in the key lesson. So before you sit down to implement, just spend 10 minutes to review the session cliff notes and you’re good to go. You can keep moving. Number four, bonus number four, you get additional partner and spouse seat as well. What that means is is that if you have a business partner or a spouse that would also like to learn this, they’re like, “Hey, you know, I want to help you in your business, hubby. What can I do?” Bring them on. Let them learn the system as well. They’re more than welcome to be there alongside you. Okay? So, they get that doesn’t cost you anything. You can learn and implement together. You can double the output from day one. Two people applying the same system is twice the speed, twice the content. You can share the workload and hold each other accountable. Bonus number five, and again this is important, you get 24-hour replay access. If you miss a session, no worries. It’s a section by session. No worries. You can come back and watch the full replay within 24 hours. Now, typically, just so you know, we keep all three sessions available for like 24 hours after the third session’s ended. So, that means the 24 session 24-hour replay thing applies to after day three. Okay, just so you know. Um, you can review complex strategies at your own pace. You can pause, rewind, implement, and there’s no pressure again to take notes live. The replay captures everything. It’s perfect for those that can’t be there at 11:00 a.m. Eastern. You know, something comes up. I know like for my kids, that’s uh usually bedtime, like I’m getting them ready for bedtime, so I want to be with them at that time. So, Chris and Jay basically present that session and I catch up on that afterwards. So, you get that as well. Okay. Now, let’s calculate the true value of what I’m offering to you today. So, I’m offering you the three-day training. I’m offering you niche gold mine AI, vile triggered AI, buy magnet headlines, private Facebook community, full session transcripts, cliff note summaries, additional partner or Spanish seat, 24-hour replay access, I’m giving you literally all these things. So if I added the value 997 1 97 1 97 97 297 1 97 1 97 9997 297 altogether that comes out to $3,473. Now again you might say O’Neal that’s not you know quite realistic and that’s fine. We can we can discuss that. We can argue about it all day long but that value you can unlock for a much much lower price. Now, how much do you think should this should cost? Complete three-day training, three AI tools, and five bonuses. How much do you think this should cost? Let me know. If it’s valued, again, I’m going to go back here. If it’s valued at $3,473, how much should this cost?

    I’m going to link I’m going to drop a link for this uh in the chat box. So, just say link and I’m going to drop my team’s going to drop the link for you. Okay, now look, I could easily charge $9.97 for this. I think for $9.97, this 3-day training with three software tools with five add-on bonuses that dramatically amplify the value is completely fair price. But for you who have stayed until the end, I’m offering a very very special price for the webinar attendees. I’m going to give you this entire package instead of 997 for a much much lower price. Right? a much much lower price. It’s not going to be 497. It’s not even going to be 247, which is what we typically charge for bundle deals. It’s going to be very very low price, which you can get from the link that we’re now going to drop for everyone for just a onetime payment of $27. That’s all it’s going to cost you, just $27.

    How incredible is that? And type in in if you’re jumping in. Type in in right now. If you’re like, Neil, this is crazy. I’m all the way in. Type in in for me if you’re jumping in to this deal. Just for $27, you get the 3-day training. You get the three software tools. You get the five bonuses which include additional spouse seat, which includes cliff nurse, which includes summary, everything. Transcripts, replay access for 24 hours. You’re getting all of that. Right. Let me know. Yes. Yes. Yes. In and in. in in in. Now again, you’re probably thinking, Neil, 27 is low. Like, why? Why? Why this low price? Let me tell you exactly why before you click that link. Like, if you’ve clicked it, it’s okay. Don’t worry about it. That’s perfectly fine. Just think about this, right? How much money have you spent on AI tools and subscriptions in the last two years alone? I can promise you, you’re spending about at least $100 a month. So, I’d say about $2,400 a month. easily, easily, probably even more if you’re big spender, probably even 5,000. Now, imagine getting actual results with those tools with the right system behind them. Okay? Again, you can use those tools as well. I’m not going to ask you to stop paying for those. Like, it’s up to you if you want them. Like, we will show you options, free and paid, like all of those. But I want you to use the right system powering those tools so you can get the results that you want because price isn’t the problem. $27 for a system that changes how you use everything you already own earned. That’s nothing. That’s absolutely nothing, right? It’s incredible deal. Yes. Would you agree? Yes. Yes. In and I’m still seeing ins. Fantastic. Now, look, I’m going to talk about the upgrades as well, what they are, because, you know, $27 does get you through the door, but I’m not doing a bundle deal this time. So, I’m going to show you separately those two upgrades, and I’ll show you what those two upgrades are. Upgrade number one is a VIP implementation support. And this is if you want faster results with expert guidance. So, if you want to compress that 90-day time frame into say 45 days or 30 days, then this would be for you. This is what comes with this expert guidance. For starters, we give you an exclusive VIP Q&A session. So, if you have specific questions that you don’t want to share in the community, you don’t want to share with everyone on those three days, that’s okay. We bring you into a VIP group with a limited number of people, it might restrict that to 50, but we bring you into that group so you can have your questions answered by experts in a more private setting. You get extended the 30-day replay access as well. So, not just the 24 hours that we talked about, but now you can enjoy access to the replay for 30 days. You can review the training materials at your own pace for a full month. You’ve got a longer time. And you also unlock an elite AI implementation workbook where you get advanced frameworks and guides for each level of implementation. So, we basically take the 3-day training that we do and we use it to create advanced frameworks, advanced workbook that you get access to as well. This is again, by the way, after those three days are done. So, you’re just going to have to wait for that, right? Plus, you can also unlock a one-on-one on boarding call, which means that if you want personal guidance, again, if you’re like, “Hey, Neil, my stuff is so private. I don’t even want to bring it up an exclusive VIP Q&A session.” That’s fine. You can use our one-on-one on boarding call and you can ask specific questions about your business and how this would relate to what you are doing and how you could implement it. And on top of that, you’re getting our in-house trained bots worth $997. We give you two expert advice chat bots. We give you sales page writer, email campaign generator, SEO optimization system, and a Facebook ad writer as well. So, you’re unlocking those additional bots as well. We have previously sold them for a collected $997 plus some training, but again, you’re unlocking all of that for a onetime payment as well. Now, just so you know, the VM implementation package is valued at $2,585 by if I combine all these aspects separately, but the regular price price is 297. And for those of you on the webinar, when you get the main offer for 27, you can go and buy this one for a onetime payment of $97 only, right? $97 unlocks this for you. So, this is what the the workflow is going to look like for you. Let me show you. So, when you go through this, you’re going to go through this and you’re going to pay $27 for this. Okay? It is a very, very low onetime fee. You’re going to pay $27 for this, which is great. When you get this, this will bring you to this page. This will get bring you to the VIP page where you can watch, you can read everything here basically about what you can unlock. You can check this out all all one more time. And when you go to buy this, uh you can see again like a table of everything that’s available. And this is a one-time payment of $97 only. Right? So, Korea 27 is complete and standalone VIPs for those who want more concier support. So let’s say when you go into a nice hotel uh you know this kind of gets your room basically but then with this upgrade with the VIP upgrade you can go to the concage desk and say hey look I want you to help you know create a plan for me uh for my specific needs like I have these like crazy crazy things that I want to entertain and you got to help me and we’ll be there to help you. That’s what the VIP upgrade is for. Now, I can tell you based on the past sessions that we’ve done, based on the past clients that we have, about 90% of the people, believe it or not, 90% of people end up taking this upgrade as well, right? Because who doesn’t know one-on-one help? Who doesn’t want to be a part of a community where they get a special call where they extended replay and all the other things that I’ve talked about here as well. And look, for those of you that are building a real real business, for those of you that, you know, want to make money with services, well, we’ve got the 1hour AI traffic machine inner club. Now, this is a real inner club. So, let me talk about what this includes. Here’s what you get when you join the inner club and you’re going to see that after you see the VIP upgrade, right? Let me show you this. So this is the VIP upgrade and when you go through this uh you go to inner circle and you will see this as well. Let me walk you through what this actually includes with this one. You get lifetime access to all training materials, right? You get to enjoy lifetime training access to the entire training material. You never lose access to any training resources including future updates. You get elite community status. So, you know, we’re the Facebook community. Within that, we specifically tag you. We give you priority support and you get exclusive network opportunities with people like you as well. And then we also give you a done for you service kit which we call AI traffic as a service which is a complete framework for client work. So, I think we have a full list here somewhere. That includes done for you sales proposals, done for your email swipes, done for your telemarketing scripts, done for your business cards, done for your rate cards, done for your letterheads, done for your invoices, done for your client contracts, all of these things. So basically, if you wanted to go out there, turn around and sell this as a service to other people cuz hey, it works really well for me. I want to go charge 23 $5,000 from other people. We had one result from one of the guys which had I think $20,000 up front, 20,00,500 per month, right? that kind of thing. If that’s what you want to do, this is the kit that you need. This is what’s going to help you get there. Plus, besides all of this, in the past, I’ve created AI Domination Suite, which is a training on how to create amazing copy using AI, how to dominate social media using AI, how to repurpose content using AI, how to dominate local services using AI, how to create courses using AI, webinars, as well as how to create perfect offers using AI. So, I’ve created these trainings before in the past and I’ve sold them collectively for 97 a month. Right? So, I’m going to give you all these seven trainings to use. Now, these are not basic tradings. Each of them is about 1 to 3 hours long depending on which one you go after. They come with prompts. They come with guidelines and basically guidance on what to do. Okay? So, you unlock all of that as well. So the inner club business system total value 5,992 includes lifetime access to the entire material elite community status done for you service kit and AI domination suite total value $5,992 but again we’re going to price it really low for you on this webinar for a onetime payment of $197. Look, this is for people who want to do this for clients. Simple as that. Not just for their own business, right? So, I want to make it very, very clear. If you’re thinking like, is it for me? Is it not for me? We’ve had 40% of people who buy the main offer also purchase this. But again, those 40% of those are people that are like, hey, we already have clients, you know, who can and want to do this. So, want to do it for them. So, that’s for them. Businesses in every city, every niche desperately need this service. They’re absolutely looking for this service. And inner club gives you the complete done for you kit to walk into a client meeting and sign them and then confidently deliver this as a service over and over and over again. Okay, it gives you the complete package. Now your investment options tonight look like this. You can go for 1 hour AI traffic machine which is 3day live training niche gold mine AI viral trigger AI buy magnet headlines pirate Facebook community session transcript cliff notes partner spir and 24-hour replay access right if you’re getting that type in one so I know you’re getting that then you also get 1 hour AI uh traffic machine VIP which is for $97 right and this gives you VIP Q&A 30-day replay elite workbook oneonone on boarding 30-day AI traffic reviews two AI chatbot, sales page writer, email campaign writer, SEO AI process, Facebook ad writers. Type in a two if you’re getting this as well. This is for $97. And just type in a two if you’re getting access to this as well. Then for me, type in a three if you’re getting access to the 1 hour AI traffic machine in a club which gives you lifetime access, elite community status, AI traffic as a service, all done for you business kit and AI domination suite which altogether is I think about 7 or 10 hours worth of training along with all the prompts. You’re getting access to all of these things, right? Core at $27 on the left that you see is a full standalone system. nothing missing. It’s all there as it should be. But when you unlock the upgrades, the VIP circle, they’re optional, but they allow you to propel much further. So with this upgrade, with the VIP, you go faster, right? You get more handle support. With the inner club, you basically make a lot more because now you can go ahead and uh essentially sell this as a service. You can enjoy the content for much longer. Right? So two or three divide decide you can get both of them. Of course, get both of them. If you’re like Neil, I want to compress the time frame and I want to work with clients. You can get both of them. And this is still much more affordable compared to a lot of the tools that you’re paying for every single month. But again, all this is going to give you the direction that you need to be able to get great results from the tools that you are already using.

    Okay, good. The link is in the chat. Again, my team is dropping the link in the chat all the time. Uh let me know if you don’t see it. Say link and we’ll privately send you a link as well. That is perfectly fine. But let me give you a foolproof guarantee as well so you know that you’re in good hands. Let me just uh move the screen over. Okay, so we’ve got 100% satisfaction guarantee, right? I want you to try the 1 hour AI traffic machine completely risk-f free for 14 full days. Attend all three training sessions, implement your first content piece, use all three AI tools, test the complete system. Like I want you to go in, get your hands dirty, use the whole thing, right? If you don’t see a clear path to compounding organic traffic, every penny comes back to you, no questions asked. Like, literally attend the 3-day session. And if for some reason you don’t like it, that’s okay. Just reach out. We’ll give you your money back if you feel it’s not worth 10x of what you paid. And I insist that you ask for a refund. I insist that you say, “Neil, I tried. I really, really tried. Didn’t work for me.” I’ll say, “No problem. I’ll give you money back cuz I’m actually asking you to implement.” And look, when you come to those three days, I know what’s going to happen cuz we’ve done this a few times before. We know what happens after those three days. You will be inspired like crazy. You will be there and you’ll be like, “Wow, I going to do this. I have to implement this. I can do this. I will do this. That’s what’s going to happen. But again, if for some reason we fail you, you know how to reach out to us to get your money back. Is that okay? Is that a fair deal? Type in 1 2 3 depending on what level you’re getting. If it’s just one, it’s okay. Just type in 1 2 1 2 3 1 3. Whatever that case may be, type it in. You do have to get one first before you go any further. So yeah, again, check out for $27 and then you can see those upgrades I talked about. All right, now I’ll answer some quick questions that I know in the past have come up. Like I see some questions as well in chat that I know my team has been answering too, but I’m going to just go ahead and answer some questions that have come up in the past as well. By the way, yes, again, recording is available for these three sessions for 24 hours if you just get the main license, if you get the VIP, 30 days if you get the inner circle lifetime. Okay, so I’m already using AI for content. What’s different with this one? Well, look, most AI content is written once, posted once, and forgotten. That’s a fact. Like, that is an absolute fact. This system creates content targeted to buyer intent, then amplifies it across 300 plus platforms simultaneously. So your content compounds monthly instead of just being posted once and getting lost in millions of pieces of content posted every day. This one compounds monthly. Most people end up using AI as a writer. This one is a system. So it’s entirely different in how we look at it. Now if you say any I don’t have time for this. I don’t even have an hour. What do I do? The total commitment that I’m asking when you come to those sessions is about like two hours per session. Maybe longer if there’s like enough questions. So yeah, it’s going to take about like let’s say 6 hours across three days. After that it’s about 30 minutes a day, maybe an hour if you are curious and if you’re learning alongside as well, right? But 30 minutes a day is enough. I always advise you to give an hour because I think uh it’s it really gets you results faster. You can run this before work, you can run it on the way to work, uh you can run after the kids are in bed, you can run from a laptop, you can run it from a phone. It’s entirely up to you. How you manage it, how you process it is entirely up to you. This is not built for, you know, the business owners that have $5,000 a month to spend because we already served those at a higher level. This is built for you who has limited time, limited knowledge, limited expertise, but big goals. Not goals to become a millionaire. I mean, if that’s you, that’s great. But goals to free up your time, goals to save up your retirement money, goals to feel financially secure, then this is for you. What if I miss a live session? Again, no problem. You get 24-hour replay access to every session. Uh, with the VIP members, you get 30-day replay access. Inner Club members have lifetime access. Many of our best implementers prefer the replays because they can pause and implement simultaneously. Right. So, again, I would encourage you to get either of the upgrades, maybe both of them depending on what you’re after. But yeah, that’s going to help. Um, this sounds too good to be true, Neil. Like, I’ve heard this so many times before. This sounds too good to be true. Like, look, for starters, I’m not offering you money. I’m offering you a system which you have to implement which is going to put you on the right path to get results. But we have documented proof over and over again. I’m just going to read out some of the documented proof cuz I had them in front of me. $3.6 million in 6 months from an exercise niche, right? Um outranked Amazon and Apple with content alone. 9 years of compelling results from two campaigns. 300 email leads from a site that this user Aaron ignored for months. 123,000 YouTube views for a brand new channel. Your screenshots. All of these are documented results. Again, I’m not saying that if it works for others, it will work for you too. But it what’s common in all these people that have results is that they implemented the system that we shared with them. You can do the math. They followed a system. They got results. We’re teaching you the same system.

    What if I’m not techsavvy? Neil, that is exactly who we’re targeting with this. If you have used chat GP3, if you’ve used claude, if you’re watching this webinar, you’re technical enough because in this case, AI does the heavy lifting in terms of technical work. You identify topics with the tools that we give you and you give it direction. the system executes for you. If you can use a search engine, if you can type a sentence, if you can be on this webinar, you have the technical skills that are required. And again, Connie ran two campaigns in 2016 and she’s still benefiting from it. Lynn actually got her first lead the day her first campaign went live. That was incredible. Now, if you’re still thinking, Neil, kind of interested, but I don’t have a niche. Day one solves this completely. Niche gold mine AI was built specifically for this problem in one session in day one alone. And we’re going to show you how to analyze data, how to sur surface the most profitable subniches based on real demand, real competition, real commitment and real buyer behavior. So again, by the end of day one, if you don’t have a niche yet, you’ll have a clear one to go after moving into day two. So that’s going to safeguard you moving into day two. I’ve tried things before, nothing worked. I feel you. Like, hand on my heart, I genuinely do. But as I said earlier, when you say you’ve tried everything, I’ll be honest. What you’ve tried is buying a tool that’s going to automatically create video content, automatically create podcast content, automatically create content, and then you’re still stuck twiddling your thumb like, “Okay, what do I do with this?” Your frustration is valid. We are not offering the same thing. I can promise you, you’ve never tried a compounding content system before. You’ve never had AI research, write, and distribute simultaneously. You never had proof at this scale across this many indices. You’ve never had a guarantee that removes every dollar of risk from your shoulders. The guarantee that I have ensures that you can try the full system with no financial risk. So again, I’m quite confident that this is not one of those system that you’ve seen before. But just in case you come to the session and it doesn’t impress you, you can ask for your money back. No problem. Can I really do this in 1 hour a day? This is how it’s going to go. Just for the training alone, like after, you know, when you’ve been setting things up, you’re going to spend about 20 minutes in a deep research, you’re going to find five buyer intent uh topics. Then in 30 minutes, you’re going to use AI to create one expert level content piece in your voice. Again, we show you like how to use your voice in those three days. And then in 10 minutes, you’re going to publish through the platforms. You know, we’re going to guide you through that. And then that basically gets you visible everywhere. That’s your hour. Repeat it daily. And then month six, you’re looking at hundreds of pieces of live content and compounding. Just imagine 90 days from now what your life’s going to look like. your first 90 pieces of life. If you’re doing one a day, that’s okay. If you don’t want to do some days, you can skip it. That’s perfectly fine. You can do two a week. We had some people like I mean, you saw Erin’s example who did some work like you know, was it Erin who did in 2016 or Connie? Connor did in 2016. One of them anyway. And she’s still getting results because when you do this, there’s no algorithm anxiety. There’s no like what’s Google going to do? What new changes Google is making? None of them matters. There’s no algorithm anxiety. There’s no more ad spend dread. There’s no more traffic guesswork. You don’t chase traffic anymore. You own it. And that’s what makes all the difference, right? And you’ll see this. Like the funniest thing for me, by the way, when I do this is noticing that I’m magically showing up in Google. Like I’m getting traffic from places from keywords that I never gotten before. And that’s the most funnest part of this is uncovering new ways in which you are making money, getting traffic all from 1 hour a day starting this week. So ask yourself this, right? Ask yourself this simple question. Do you want the next 6 months to look exactly like the last 6 months or do you want it to be different? Do you want things to change for you? Do you want things to move forward? Because you’ll be one of these two people in 6 months now from now, right? You’ll be the person on the right still kind of thinking, struggling, flatline traffic graph, thinking, “Okay, you know what? If I had taken Neil up on that, what if I just put down $27, trusted him to show me the path with Chris and Jay and made it work?

    Or you could be the guy like so glad I did it, learned so much, implemented so much, and I still have campaigns that are getting me results. And even though I haven’t touched the system in like weeks to think about where you want to be with that person Acts tonight, person B waits. Person B keeps paying for these tools every single month. They watch competitors claim organic territory in the niche. They spend a lot more time, trial and error, doing everything the hard way. Person A puts in $27 a night, shows it for the three days, submits their first content piece on June 22nd, significantly reducing paid traffic cost within 90 days, has the system, the tools, and the done for you material to pursue client opportunities. That’s what they want. And they end up building a compounding organic traffic system that grows without ongoing ad spend. So which one will you be? This moment right now determines which person you will become. It is entirely your choice. Whatever action you take from here on out is completely optional. The cost of taking action is $27. The cost of not taking action, you’ll never know. Yeah, you’ll save 27 bucks. You’ll save like, I don’t know what, three cups of coffee, one pizza cost, but the opportunity cost is dramatically higher. Right? It is much much higher. So just go ahead. If you’re watching this later, you can click the button below the video if you’re watching this right now. Right? So again, I’m talking to you cuz you’re watching it right now. The link is in the chat box. Go check out that link. Complete your secure checkout on this link. Choose credit card or PayPal option. Put your email address. Put your details over here. Submit. Pay $27. Go get the VIP. Go get the inner circle. Pick at least one of those two. Pick both if you want both, but at least one of those two and mark your calendars for the 3-day training. It’s three simple steps, less than 3 minutes total, and it’s going to, I feel, dramatically change your life. Actually, let me go back and walk you through the funnel again from the very beginning and then we’ll continue from this point onward. All right. Now, this is a 3-day live training on June 19, 20, and 21st, right? So, it’s a 3-day live training happening on June 19th, 20, and 21st, 11:00 a.m. Eastern every single day. And this is the most comprehensive training that you need to go from level zero to level three and build your AI powered organic traffic machine from scratch. And again, I want to repeat this. It takes an hour a day to do. You don’t need to wait 90 days like Stacy did to start seeing results. You’re probably going to see results within 7 to 14 days. But as you gradually keep on doing this, it’s going to help you compound. It’s going to help you go from level zero to one to two to three. And when you stay in level three for a long time, like Stacy did, your results are going to be unbeatable. You’re not going to recognize a person in 90 days time, in 180 days time, because it’s going to be dramatically different from the person you are today. And look, you’ve earned this moment, right? You’ve earned being here for this last 40 minutes. Let me show you step by step what it actually includes. So, for starters, this is a 3-day live training, and we’re also giving you three A3 air traffic tools. Now, don’t get me wrong, they’re not Chad GPD or Cloud competitors. They’re fairly basic tools that do specific things, and I’m going to show you what those are, right? But together, this makes a complete system. The training and the tools work together. They’re not separate things. It’s one full system. So, let me walk you through what those three days include. Day one gives you the framework. Without it, days two and three are just basically tactics, right? So June 19, 2026, we’re going to talk about how to escape the AI overwhelm holding most entrepreneurs back and the crucial difference between each levels, which tools are worth your time, and which tools to avoid entirely, and the three best ways to make money with AI powered traffic. We’re going to help you start building a level one traffic foundation with Chris. The outcome is that you will leave day one with mental model that makes days two and three click immediately. Day two is the strategic AI implementation. This time we give you the three-step content formula that’s generating millions of visitors over 15 plus years for us and is still working in 2026. We talk about why content volume compounds and how to produce thousand pieces per year in under two hours a day. We give you the purchase funnel framework on how you can choose topics that attract buyers not browsers. And we talk about where claude which we personally like outperforms chat GPD for this strategy and how to set it all up with a simple implementation. This is going to help you generate hundreds of low competition buyin topics using AI powered deep research. Honestly, that last part alone is worth this entire thing. If you only just get that from it, you would have easily 100x your investment today. Right? So the outcome from this is that you create your first content piece during day two and submit it through our platform live to recount like I say platform which you know you can get feedback from our community which I’ll share in a minute. Uh then June 21 day three is the advanced AI concepts and possibilities. Now look I say advanced and you might think like Neil that’s too much for me but by advance I don’t mean out of your reach. By advance what I mean is only people that have done day two should be doing this. So, you’re going to get a lot of insights into how to execute this. And day three makes this permanent. You’re not setting up something you’ll abandon in a week, but you are genuinely setting up something that’s going to give you positive results months and years down the line. So, hey, we give you curated group AI tools and resources. Many of them are completely free. We talk about how to create AI advisor for marketing, productivity, and business organization. The exact daily and weekly planning system our team uses to stay focused. and the a better U AI framework that is sciencepack system for building the habits that drive growth and finally we help you understand how to connect AI tools into automated workflows so your repetitive task can run without you now one thing I haven’t mentioned here is that we also cover how to basically offer all this as a service to clients if that’s a direction you want to take we cover that on day three as well because I think that’s going to be quite useful for those of you that want to make you know money still by doing the service business. If you don’t have your own product or product sorted yet, then I think that would be a good thing to consider as well. Now, by the end of day three, your traffic system will run on one hour a day, not eight. You can take the vacations that you want. You can take days off when you don’t want to work. You can literally make life choices that make you happy. Simple as that. Happy. Cuz I think happiness is what it’s all about. Now, the three AI tools that work alongside these uh this training as well are built specifically to support the system that you’re learning. This is not offtheshelf AI. This is built for buyer intent traffic content. Right? This is something we do differently than everyone else. We’re not just looking to get you on page one for crappy keywords that don’t convert. But we’re going to focus on buyer intent keywords. And these tools are not bonuses, right? I’m not giving the these as an extra add-ons. They’re an integral part of the system. You need them for the system to work.

    So you get the buyer machine headline, you get the viral triggers, you get the niche gold mine AI, you get access to all of those and each of these tools removes the most time consuming part of a specific step in the process. Okay. So for example, we’ve got niche gold mine AI. The single biggest mistake that I think most people make in content marketing is choosing the wrong niche. Like absolutely the wrong niche. And again, I’m not saying you to abandon whatever you’re doing. But if you feel like, you know, the niche is wrong, you can drill down and go into a subniche. You can always do that. So most people spend 3 months on this decision. But niche gold mine AI gives you databacked answers in a single session. And when you have your niche, it determines your topic, your monetization. So getting it right is very very critical. So this is going to help you analyze real market data to surface the highest ROI subniches. It’s going to help identify the underserved buyer segments your competitors are missing. And it’s going to eliminate months and months of manual niche research in one session. So I think this is like an incredible piece of kit that goes along with the three day trading. Then the traffic tool too is a vital trigger AI. Now, with this one, you’ll be able to uncover the specific angles that people actually share in your niche. Because content fails not because of the writing, but because the angle was wrong, right? You focus on the wrong thing. This solves the angle problem. Because to me, the content that works isn’t luck. It triggers a specific emotion. So, this tool shows you what that trigger is in your niche. Right? So, with this, you can analyze your niche for proven content patterns. You can identify the emotional hooks that drive real click shares and engagement. It surfaces viral angles as well before you create a single piece of content and it turns guesswork into datadriven content strategy. So this is again part of the 3D training and you get immediate access to this. Then tool number three which you also get immediate access to is the buyer magnet headlines. Now these this tool will help you generate headlines that attract buyers no browsers. Very very important. Yes, you want to have a headline that captures attention, all those things, but you also want the headline to build interest and desire because headline is one of the biggest factors in whether someone clicks or not. This tool gives you the strongest possible starting point. And to me, when I think about a buy intent headline, it’s like a filter. It attracts people that are ready to spend and repels browsers. Very, very important. Every hike and learning case study I showed you today, use buyer focus headlines, not generic titles. Okay. Now, look, alongside the three tools, alongside the three-day training that I’ve already talked about, there’s more. Uh, let me show you what that is. There’s additional stuff that we put in, five bonuses specifically to take you further. So, for starters, you get access to private Facebook community. Now, this is where you get to hang out with us with other AI traffic implementers doing exactly what you are striving to do. You get daily implementation support, accountability, and real-time feedback. You can share results, ask questions, get answers from people ahead of you, people at the same level of you. You can see what’s working for them, what’s not working for them, and that will help you make the right decisions. So again this is much better than any course because courses get recorded once and you know maybe you use them again maybe you don’t but a community is a living breathing thing you get access to that you get full session transcripts right so during live training you you’re going to be learning you’re not going to be taking detailed notes we don’t want you to take detailed notes so we give you the transcripts every AI prompt we use on the screen is captured veritim copy paste and implement ready to go okay so This way you have permanent access to the transcripts and you can go through them and research anything when you get stuck in the future. Post three is cliff note summary. So beyond the transcript we also summarize everything for you. Right? So this way you can lock in the key lesson. So before you sit down to implement just spend 10 minutes to review the session cliff notes and you’re good to go. You can keep moving. Number four bonus number four you get additional partner and spouse seat as well. What that means is is that if you have a business partner or a spouse that would also like to learn this, they’re like, “Hey, you know, I want to help you in your business, hubby. What can I do?” Bring them on. Let them learn the system as well. They’re more than welcome to be there alongside you. Okay? So, they get that doesn’t cost you anything. You can learn and implement together. You can double the output from day one. Two people applying the same system is twice the speed, twice the content. You can share the workload and hold each other accountable. Bonus number five, and again this is important, you get 24-hour replay access. If you miss a session, no worries. It’s a section by session. No worries. You can come back and watch the full replay within 24 hours. Now, typically, just so you know, we keep all three sessions available for like 24 hours after the third session’s ended. So, that means the 24 session 24-hour replaying applies to after day three. Okay, just so you know. Um, you can review complex strategies at your own pace. You can pause, rewind, implement it. There’s no pressure again to take notes live. The replay captures everything. It’s perfect for those that can’t be there at 11:00 a.m. Eastern. You know, something comes up. I know like for my kids, that’s uh usually bedtime, like I’m getting them ready for bedtime, so I want to be with them at that time. So, Chris and Jay basically present that session and I catch up on that afterwards. So, you get that as well. Okay. Now, let’s calculate the true value of what I’m offering to you today. So, I’m offering you the 3-day training. I’m offering you niche gold mine AI, viral triggered AI, biomagnet headlines, private Facebook community, full session transcripts, cliff note summaries, additional partner Aspire seat, 24-hour replay access, I’m giving you literally all these things. So if I added the value 997 1 97 1 97 97 297 1 97 1 97997 297 altogether that comes out to $3,473. Now again you might say O’Neal that’s not you know quite realistic and that’s fine. We can we can discuss that. We can argue about it all day long but that value you can unlock for a much much lower price. Now, how much do you think should this should cost? Complete three-day training, three AI tools, and five bonuses. How much do you think this should cost? Let me know. If it’s valued, again, I’m going to go back here. If it’s valued at $3,473, how much should this cost?

    I’m going to link I’m going to drop a link for this uh in the chat box. So, just say link and I’m going to drop my team’s going to drop the link for you. Okay, now look, I could easily charge $9.97 for this. I think for $9.97, this 3-day training with three software tools with five add-on bonuses that dramatically amplify the value is completely fair price. But for you who have stayed until the end, I’m offering a very very special price for the webinar attendees. I’m going to give you this entire package instead of 997 for a much much lower price. right? A much much lower price. It’s not going to be 497. It’s not even going to be 247, which is what we typically charge for bundle deals. It’s going to be very very low price, which you can get from the link that we’re now going to drop for everyone for just a onetime payment of $27. That’s all it’s going to cost you, just $27.

    How incredible is that? And type in in if you’re jumping in. Type in in right now. If you’re like, Neil, this is crazy. I’m all the way in. Type in in for me if you’re jumping in to this deal just for $27. You get the three-day training. You get the three software tools. You get the five bonuses which include additional Spanish seek which includes cliff nurse which includes summary everything. Transcripts, replay access for 24 hours. cuz you’re getting all of that, right? Let me know. Yes. Yes. Yes. In in in in in. Now, again, you’re probably thinking, Neil, 27 is low. Like, why? Why? Why this low price? Let me tell you exactly why before you click that link. Like, if you’ve clicked it, it’s okay. Don’t worry about it. That’s perfectly fine. Just think about this, right? How much money have you spent on AI tools and subscriptions in the last two years alone? I can promise you, you’re spending about at least $100 a month. So, I’d say about 2,400 a month easily. Easily. Probably even more if you’re big spender. Probably even 5,000. But imagine getting actual results with those tools with the right system behind them. Okay? Again, you can use those tools as well. I’m not going to ask you to stop paying for those. Like, it’s up to you if you want to like we will show you options free and paid like all of those. But I want you to use the right system powering those tools so you can get the results that you want because price isn’t the problem. $27 for a system that changes how you use everything you already own earned. That’s nothing. That’s absolutely nothing, right? It’s incredible deal. Yes. Would you agree? Yes. Yes. In in I’m still saying in fantastic. Now, look, I’m going to talk about the upgrades as well, what they are, because, you know, $27 does get you through the door, but I’m not doing a bundle deal this time. So, I’m going to show you separately. There’s two upgrades, and I’ll show you what those two upgrades are. Upgrade number one is a VIP implementation support. And this is if you want faster results with expert guidance. So, if you want to compress that 90-day time frame into say 45 days or 30 days, then this would be for you. This is what comes with this expert guidance. For starters, we give you an exclusive VIP Q&A session. So, if you have specific questions that you don’t want to share in the community, you don’t want to share with everyone on those three days, that’s okay. We bring you into a VIP group with a limited number of people who might restrict that to 50. We bring you into that group so you can have your questions answered by experts in a more private setting. You get extended 30-day replay access as well. So, not just the 24 hours that we talked about, but now you can enjoy access to the replay for 30 days. You can review the training materials at your own pace for a full month. You’ve got longer time and you also unlock an elite AI implementation workbook where you get advanced frameworks and guides for each level of implementation. So, we basically take the 3-day training that we do and we use it to create advanced frameworks, advanced workbook that you get access to as well. This is again, by the way, after those three days are done. So, you’re just going to have to wait for that, right? Plus, you can also unlock a one-on-one on boarding call, which means that if you want personal guidance, again, if you’re like, “Hey, Neil, my stuff is so private. I don’t even want to bring it up an exclusive VIP Q&A session.” That’s fine. You can use a one-on-one on boarding call and you can ask specific questions about your business and how this would relate to what you are doing and how you could implement it. And on top of that, you’re getting our in-house trained bots worth $997. We give you two expert advice chat bots. We give you sales page writer, email campaign generator, SEO optimization system, and a Facebook ad writer as well. So, you’re unlocking those additional bots as well. We have previously sold them for a collected $997 plus some training, but again, you’re unlocking all of that for a onetime payment as well. Now, just so you know, the VMP implementation package is valued at $2,585. By default separately, but the regular price price is 297. And for those of you on the webinar, when you get the main offer for 27, you can go and buy this one for a onetime payment of $97 only, right? $97 unlocks this for you. So, this is what the the workflow is going to look like for you. Let me show you. So, when you go through this, you’re going to go through this and you’re going to pay $27 for this. Okay? It is a very, very low onetime fee. You’re going to pay $27 for this, which is great. When you get this, this will bring you to this page. This will get bring you to the VIP page where you can watch, you can read everything here basically about what you can unlock. You can check this out all all one more time. And when you go to buy this, uh you can see again like a table of everything that’s available. And this is a onetime payment of $97 only. Right? So Korea 27 is complete and standalone VIPs for those who want more concier support. So let’s say when you go into a nice hotel uh you know this kind of gets your room basically but then with this upgrade with the VIP upgrade you can go to the concage desk and say hey look I want you to help you know create a plan for me uh for my specific needs like I have these like crazy crazy things that I want to entertain and you got to help me and we’ll be there to help you. That’s what the VIP upgrade is for. Now, I can tell you based on the past sessions that we’ve done, based on the past clients that we have, about 90% of the people, believe it or not, 90% of people end up taking this upgrade as well, right? Because who doesn’t love one-on-one help? Who doesn’t want to be a part of a community where they get a special call where they extended replay and all the other things that I’ve talked about here as well? And look, for those of you that are building a real real business, for those of you that, you know, want to make money with services, well, we’ve got the 1 hour AI traffic machine inner club. Now, this is a real inner club. So, let me talk about what this includes. Here’s what you get when you join the inner club, and you’re going to see that after you see the VIP upgrade, right? Let me show you this. So, this is the VIP upgrade. And when you go through this uh you go to inner circle and you will see this as well. Let me walk you through what this actually includes. With this one, you get lifetime access to all training materials, right? You get to enjoy lifetime training access to the entire training material. You never lose access to any training resources, including future updates. You get elite community status. So you know we have the Facebook community within that we specifically tag you. We give you priority support and you get exclusive network opportunities with people like you as well. And then we also give you a done for you service kit which we call AI traffic as a service which is a complete framework for client work. So I think we have a full list here somewhere. Yeah, that includes done for you sales proposals, done for your email swipes, done for your telemarketing scripts, done for your business cards, done for your red cards, done for your letterheads, done for your invoices, done for your client contracts, all of these things. So, basically, if you wanted to go out there, turn around and sell this as a service to other people cuz hey, it works really well for me. I want to go charge 23 $5,000 from other people. We had one result from one of the guys which had I think $20,000 up front, 20,000 10,500 per month, right? that kind of thing. If that’s what you want to do, this is the kit that you need. This is what’s going to help you get there. Plus, besides all of this, in the past, I’ve created AI Domination Suite, which is a training on how to create amazing copy using AI, how to dominate social media using AI, how to repurpose content using AI, how to dominate local services using AI, how to create courses using AI, webinars, as well as how to create perfect offers using AI. So, I’ve created these trainings before in the past and I’ve sold them collectively for 97 a month, right? So, I’m going to give you all these seven trainings to use. Now, these are not basic trainings. Each of them is about 1 to 3 hours long depending on which one you go after. They come with prompts. They come with guidelines and basically guidance on what to do. Okay? So, you unlock all of that as well. So the inner club business system total value 5992 includes lifetime access to the entire material elite community status done for you service kit and AI domination suite total value $5,992 but again we’re going to price it really low for you on this webinar for a onetime payment of $197. Look, this is for people who want to do this for clients. Simple as that. Not just for their own business, right? So, I want to make it very, very clear if you’re thinking like, is it for me? Is it not for me? We’ve had 40% of people who buy the main offer also purchase this. But again, those 40% of those are people that are like, hey, we already have clients, you know, who can and want to do this. So, want to do it for them. So, that’s for them. Businesses in every city, every niche desperately need this service. They’re absolutely looking for this service. And in a club gives you the complete done for you kit to walk into a client meeting and sign them and then confidently deliver this as a service over and over and over again. Okay, it gives you the complete package. Now your investment options tonight look like this. You can go for 1 hour AI traffic machine which is 3-day live training niche gold mine AI viral trigger AI buy magnet headlines private Facebook community session transcript cliff notes partner spirit and 24-hour replay access right if you’re getting that type in one so I know you’re getting that then you also get 1 hour AI uh traffic machine VIP which is for $97 right and this gives you VIP Q&A 30-day replay elite breakbook oneonone on boarding 30-day AI traffic reviews two AI chatbot, sales page writer, email campaign writer, SEO AI process, Facebook ad writers. Type in a two if you’re getting this as well. This is for $97. And just type in a two if you’re getting access to this as well. Then for me, type in a three if you’re getting access to the 1 hour AI traffic machine inner club which gives you lifetime access, elite community status, AI traffic as a service, all done for you business kit and AI domination suite which altogether is I think about 7 or 10 hours worth of training along with all the prompts. You’re getting access to all of these things, right? Core at $27 on the left that you see is a full standalone system. nothing missing. It’s all there as it should be. But when you unlock the upgrades, the VIP and inner circle, they’re optional, but they allow you to propel much further. So, with this upgrade, with the VIP, you go faster, right? You get more handle support. With the inner club, you basically make a lot more because now you can go ahead and uh essentially sell this as a service. You can enjoy the cogent for much longer, right? So, two or three divide decide you can get both of them. Of course, get both of them. If you’re like, Neil, I want to compress the time frame and I want to work with clients. You can get both of them. And this is still much more affordable compared to a lot of the tools that you’re paying for every single month. But again, all this is going to give you the direction that you need to be able to get great results from the tools that you are already using.

    Okay, good. The link is in the chat. Again, my team is dropping the link in the chat all the time. Uh let me know if you don’t see it. Say link and we’ll privately send you a link as well. That is perfectly fine. But let me give you a a foolproof guarantee as well so you know that you’re in good hands. Let me just uh move this screen over. Okay, so we’ve got 100% satisfaction guarantee, right? I want you to try the 1hour AI traffic machine completely risk-f free for 14 full days. Attend all three training sessions. Implement your first content piece. Use all three AI tools. Test the complete system. Like I want you to go in, get your hands dirty, use the whole thing, right? If you don’t see a clear path to compounding organic traffic, every penny comes back to you, no questions asked. Like, literally attend the 3day session. And if for some reason you don’t like it, that’s okay. Just reach out. We’ll give you your money back if you feel it’s not worth 10x of what you paid. And I insist that you ask for a refund. I insist that you say, “Neil, I tried. I really, really tried. Didn’t work for me.” I’ll say, “No problem. I’ll give you money back cuz I’m actually asking you to implement.” And look, when you come to those three days, I know what’s going to happen cuz we’ve done this a few times before. We know what happens after those three days. You will be inspired like crazy. You will be there and you’ll be like, “Wow, I going to do this. I have to implement this. I can do this. I will do this.

    That’s what’s going to happen. But again, if for some reason we fail you, you know how to reach out to us to get your money back. Is that okay? Is that a fair deal? Type in 1 2 3 depending on what level you’re getting. If it’s just one, it’s okay. Just type in 1 2 1 2 3 1 3. Whatever that case may be, type it in. You do have to get one first before you go any further. So yeah, again, check out for $27 and then you can see those upgrades I talked about. If you don’t see a clear path to increase traffic by the end of day one, every penny back, no questions asked. Absolutely no questions asked. Okay, good.

    The only real risk right now is not trying. Simple as that. Because every moment you hesitate, your competitors are publishing buy intent content in your niche. You’re paying for traffic that stops the moment your budget does. And the compounding window you could be building isn’t actually building. So this is the problem. Stop thinking. Start building. I promise you your life will look completely different. It’s 6 months from now if you follow the system that we ask you to follow. If you show up, if you do this for yourself, if you do this for your family, if you do this for your future, your traffic machine starts now. So, make sure you are there with us. Having said that, I’ll see you on the inside.